Radio Parameter Manual

ZXG10 BSS Base Station Subsystem
Radio Parameters Manual (Volume III)

Version 6.20
ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057 Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830 Fax: (86) 755 26772236 URL: http://support.zte.com.cn E-mail: doc@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION Copyright 2006 ZTE CORPORATION. The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality obligations. All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE CORPORATION or of their respective owners. This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on the information contained herein. ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein. ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice. Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information. The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History Date Apr 24, 2009 Revision No. R1.0 Serial No. sjzl20092067 Reason for Issue First edition
ZTE CORPORATION Values Your Comments & Suggestions!

Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product documentation and offer better services to our customers. Please fax to (86) 755-26772236 or mail to Technical Delivery Department, ZTE University, Dameisha, Yantian District, Shenzhen, Guangdong, P. R. China 518083. Thank you for your cooperation!
Document Name Product Version Serial No.
ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Radio Parameters Manual (Volume III)
V6.20 sjzl20092067 Presentation: (Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization, Appearance) Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A Document Revision Number Equipment Installation Date R1.0
Your evaluation of this documentation
Accessibility: (Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary) Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Intelligibility: (Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content) Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation: Improve the overview/introduction Improve the Contents Improve the organization Include more figures Your suggestions for improvement of this documentation Add more examples Add more detail Other suggestions __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ # Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet. If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following: Name Postcode Telephone Company Address E-mail Make it more concise/brief Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials Add more troubleshooting information Make it less technical Add more/better quick reference aids Improve the index
This page is intentionally blank.
Contents
About This Manual ............................................................ i
Purpose ................................................................................ i Intended Audience ................................................................. i Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge .............................................. i What Is in This Manual ........................................................... i Related Documentation.......................................................... ii Conventions ......................................................................... ii How to Get in Touch............................................................. iv
Chapter1........................................................................... 1 Cell Object Parameters .................................................... 1

TRX Parameters ..............................................................1
TRX Parameters.................................................................... 1 Channel Information Parameters ............................................. 9 IP INFORMATION PARAMETERS............................................. 16 Carrier Panel Parameters ..................................................... 19 Power Control Parameters .................................................... 23 Power Survey ..................................................................... 26 Power Adjust Threshold ....................................................... 34 GPRS Power Control ............................................................ 49
Handover Control Parameters ......................................... 53

Handover Pretreatment........................................................ 54 Handover Threshold ............................................................ 65 Handover Condition............................................................. 77 Handover Control................................................................ 83 Others............................................................................... 93 Handover Algorithm .......................................................... 101 Subcell Parameters ........................................................... 116
UTRAN Handover Control Parameters ............................. 121

Basic properties 1 ............................................................. 121 Basic properties 2 ............................................................. 127
UTRAN Cell Control Parameters ..................................... 136

Basic properties 1.............................................................. 136 Basic properties 2.............................................................. 144 GPRS Parameters 1 ........................................................... 160 GPRS Parameters 2 ........................................................... 173 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters.................................. 184 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters ............... 185 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters ..................................... 200 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters ................................... 212 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters .... 215 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters ........................... 222 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters......................... 226 Frequency Hopping System Parameters ................................ 230
Chapter 2......................................................................235 Module Parameters......................................................235

Operation Control Parameters ............................................. 235 FUC Parameters ................................................................ 236 Handover parameters of BCCH and SD ................................. 241 Other Parameters .............................................................. 249 IBS Parameters................................................................. 258
Appendix A ...................................................................263 Abbreviations ...............................................................263 Appendix B ...................................................................267 Value of Flow control Policy ........................................267 Appendix C ...................................................................269 Value of Power.............................................................269 Appendix D...................................................................271 Value of Cell Layer Num...............................................271 Appendix E ...................................................................273 Correlation between Parameter Interface Display and Database Value ............................................................273
BSC Global Resource Parameters Interface ..................... 273
Basic Property Parameters .................................................. 273
Radio Basic Property Parameters ......................................... 276 Subcell Parameters ........................................................... 281 Subcell Object Parameters ................................................. 292
Appendix F ................................................................... 299 Figures.......................................................................... 299 Tables ........................................................................... 301 Index ............................................................................ 313
About This Manual

In this manual, ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) is mentioned as ZXG10 BSS for short.
Purpose
Purpose of this manual is to provide complete information about ZXG10 BSS, including: Working Principles Structures Networking Modes and System Configuration
Intended Audience
This document is intended for network maintenance technicians and engineers.
Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge

To use this document effectively, users should have a general understanding of networking and network interfaces. Familiarity with the following is helpful: ZXG10 system and its various components Interfaces on the network Operating procedures
What Is in This Manual

This manual contains the following sections:
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TABLE 1 - M ANUAL SUMMARY
Section Chapter 1, Cell Object Parameters Chapter 2, Module Parameters Appendix A, Abbreviations Appendix B, Value of Flow control Policy Appendix C, Value of Power Appendix D, Value of Cell Layer Num Appendix E Correlation between Parameter Interface Display and Database Value Appendix F Figures and Tables Index
Summary Describes cell object parameters. Describes module parameters. Lists all the abbreviations used in this manual. The table of flow control policy. The table of power value. The table of cell layer num value. Describes Correlation between Parameter Interface Display and Database Value.
Lists all the figures and tables appeared in this manual. Lists all the index appeared in this manual.
Related Documentation
The following documents are related to this manual: ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Documentation Guide ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Alarm Handling Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Notification Handling Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem OMM Software Installation Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Configuration Manual (Initial Configuration Guide) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Configuration Manual (Function Configuration Guide) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem MML Command Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Parameters Manual (Volume I) Station Subsystem Radio
ii
About This Manual
ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Parameters Manual (Volume II)
Subsystem
Radio
ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Diagnostic Test) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Signaling Tracing) ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume I ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume II ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume III
Conventions
Typographical Conventions ZTE documents employ the following typographical conventions.
TABLE 2 - TYPOGRAPHIC AL CONVENTIONS
Typeface Italics Quotes Bold
Meaning References to other Manuals and documents. Links on screens. Menus, menu options, function names, input fields, radio button names, check boxes, dropdown lists, dialog box names, window names. Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and company name. Text that you type, program code, files and directory names, and function names. Optional parameters. Mandatory parameters. Select one of the parameters that are delimited by it. Note: Provides additional information about a certain topic. Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs to be checked before proceeding further. Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things easier or more productive for the reader.
CAPS Constant width [] {} |
iii
Mouse Operation Conventions
TABLE 3 - MOUSE OPERATION CONVENTIONS
Typeface Click Double-click Right-click Drag
Meaning Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once. Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice. Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once. Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and moving the mouse.
How to Get in Touch

The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for the documentation and the software. Customer Support If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions regarding your product, contact us by e-mail at support@zte.com.cn. You can also call our customer support center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-9830-9830. ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document. For further questions, comments, or suggestions on the documentation, you can contact us by e-mail at doc@zte.com.cn; or you can fax your comments and suggestions to (86) 755 26772236. You can also browse our website at http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains various interesting subjects like documentation, knowledge base, forum and service request.
Documentation Support
iv
Chapter
Cell Object Parameters

This chapter describes cell object parameters, including power control, handover, and reselection parameters.
TRX Parameters
TRX parameters are divided into two sub-interfaces. If the site is IP access point, TRX information interface will add [IP information] sub-interface.
TRX Parameters
The interface of TRX Parameters is as shown in Figure 1.
FIGURE 1 - TRX P AR AMETERS
TRX ID (TrxId)
TABLE 4 - TRX ID
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
TRX ID TrxId --TRX number in the cell. According to GSM specifications, one cell can have 64 carriers at most. TRX 1 ~ 60 None Sort in order. ----
Chapter 1 - Cell Object Parameters
SubCell ID (SubCellId)
TABLE 5 - SUBCELL ID
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference
SubCell ID SubCellId --If it is cell with dual frequencies, this parameter describes the subCell of the dual-frequency cell in which the TRX is; if it is not dual-frequency cell, this parameter is First Subcell. It is unmodifiable after being created. TRX
Description
Management Object
When "Subcell Used (SubCellUsed)" is No, value range is the first subcell;
Value Range
When "Subcell Used (SubCellUsed)" is Yes, value range is the first and the second subcell.
None First Subcell ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
TRX Type (TrxType)

TABLE 6 - TRX TYPE
TRX Type TrxType ---
Common TRX is suitable for common cell. After adding the function of supporting extended cell, a third type of TRX is added -- Expand TRX, realizing large coverage range.
Description
In common cell, TRX Type configured as Normal TRX;
shall
be
When subcell is not supported under extended cell, TRX Type shall be configured as Extended TRX; when subcell is supported under extended cell, subcell 1 shall be configured as Extended TRX, and no special requirements for subcell 2.
TRX Common TRX, Expand TRX None Common TRX ZGF05-13-001 Extended Cell Coverage Ts No. --
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
Priority (TrxPriority)
TABLE 7 - PRIORITY
Assign Priority of the Trx TrxPriority --This parameter describes priorities for allocating carriers of the same type. 1 represents the highest priority. Select channels on carriers with high priority when allocating channels. TRX 1~5 None When "BCCH Carrier (IsBcchMark)" is No, default value is 3; When "BCCH Carrier (IsBcchMark)" is Yes, default value is 1;
Description
Management Object Value Range Unit
Default
Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
ZGF05-09-009 Enhancement on Channel Allocation ---
BCCH carrier frequency (IsBcchMark)

TABLE 8 - CARRIER FREQUENCY
BCCH carrier frequency IsBcchMark --One and only one BCCH carrier frequency must be configured in a cell. TRX Yes/No None No -Priority (TrxPriority) Support Fhs --
Static power level (PwRreduction)

TABLE 9 - STATIC POWER LEVEL
Static power level PwRreduction static RF power step 3GPP TS 45.005 V5.14.0
Description
This parameter represents the static power level of transceiver. Usually a static power control is added on the basis of TRX transmission power specified by Static power level. Namely, a restriction is added based on the maximum transmission power, thus to get the actual maximum transmission power Pn of the TRX. The dynamic power control is implemented based on the maximum transmission power Pn. TRX Max output power, Max output power - 2 dB, Max output power - 4 dB, Max output power - 6 dB, Max output power - 8 dB, Max output power - 10 dB, Max output power - 12 dB, Max output power + 1.5 dB, Max output power + 1 dB, Max output power + 0.5 dB None Max output power ZGF05-06-001 Static BTS Power Control ---
Management Object
Value Range
Power level (PowerClass)

TABLE 10 - POWER LEVEL
Power level PowerClass --This parameter can configure power level of carrier, which can convert this value to actual power value, used to calculate path loss and CI value in measurement report. TRX 1~8 None 3 --
Description
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions
Relevant parameters Related interfaces
---
Support Fhs
TABLE 11 - SUPPORT FHS
Support Fhs -hopping 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 This parameter indicates if frequency-hopping is supported. When this parameter is configured as Yes, "Frequency" parameter is blocked, and "frequency-hopping" parameter is added. Note: S8001 only has a frequency, and doesn't support frequency-hopping.
Description
Management Object
TRX
Value Range
When "BCCH Carrier (IsBcchMark)" is No, default value is Yes/No; When "BCCH Carrier (IsBcchMark)" is Yes, default value is No;
None No ZGF05-12-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-005 Baseband Frequency Hopping ---
Frequency
TABLE 12 - FREQUENCY
Frequency ----
Description Management Object
Select the frequency point of this transceiver. TRX
Frequency band is GSM900: 1~124; Frequency 975~1023

Value Range
band
is
EXT900:
0~124,
Frequency band is DCS1800: 512~885; Frequency band is PCS1800: 512~810; Frequency band is GSM850: 128~251;
None Based on the set frequency ZGF05-12-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-005 Baseband Frequency Hopping ARFCN list (CaArfcnList) --
ARFCN List
TABLE 13 - ARFCN LIST
ARFCN List ---Selectable ARFCN list. TRX Configured "Frequency hopping No. (FhsId)" None Configured "Frequency hopping No. (FhsId)" ----
Channel Information Parameters

Channel information interface is shown in Figure 2.
FIGURE 2 - CHANNEL INFORM ATION P ARAMETERS
Ts No.
TABLE 14 - TS NO.
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object
Ts No. ---Number to identify timeslot. TRX
Value Range
When "TRX Type (TrxType)" is "Normal TRX", eight timeslot numbers are displayed on the interface, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7; When "TRX Type (TrxType)" is "Extended TRX", four timeslot numbers are displayed on the interface, such as 0, 2, 4, and 6;
Unit
None
Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
Same as value range ----
TsChannelComb
TABLE 15 - TSCHANNELCOMB
TsChannelComb ---This parameter defines combined types of timeslot channel. Correlation with the following several parameters is as follows:
CBC supported (SmsCbUsed). If "CBC Supported (SmsCbUsed)" is No, that is, CBC is not supported, the system automatically final all timeslot channel combinations in the cell.If CBC channel exists, it is changed to SDCCH. If "CBC Supported (SmsCbUsed)" is Yes, that is, CBC is supported, the system automatically find all timeslot channel combinations in the cell.If a non-BCCH channel is found for a carrier, it is changed to SDCCH+CBCH. GPRS service supported (PsSupport) If "GPRS Supported (PsSupport)" is No, that is, GPRS is not supported, the system automatically change all timeslot channels whose type is PS in the cell to TCH. Common control (CcchConf) channel configuration
Description
When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "a basic physical channel used by CCCH, along with SDCCH". In channel information parameters, timeslot 0 channel combination shall be one of these two combined channels: BCCH+SDCCH/4 and BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH.
10
When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "a basic physical channel used by CCCH, regardless of SDCCH". In channel information parameters, timeslot 0 channel combination shall be one of these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and BCCH+CCCH. When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "two basic physical channels used by CCCH, regardless of SDCCH". In channel information parameters, timeslot 0 and 2 channel combination shall be these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and BCCH+CCCH. When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "three basic physical channels used by CCCH, regardless of SDCCH". In channel information parameters, timeslot 0, 2, and 4 channel combination shall be these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and BCCH+CCCH. When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "four basic physical channels used by CCCH, regardless of SDCCH". In channel information parameters, timeslot 0, 2, and 4 channel combination shall be these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and BCCH+CCCH.
Management Object TRX
TCH/F; TCH/H (01)+FACCH/H (01)+SACCH/TH (01); TCH/H ( 0, 0)+FACCH/H (0, 1)+SACCH/TH (0, 1)+TCH/H (0, 1); SDCCH/8+SACCH/C8;
Value Range
FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH; BCCH+SDCCH/4; BCCH+CCCH; BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH; SDCCH+CBCH; PBCCH+ PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH; PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH;
11
PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH;
Unit Default None TCH/F ZGF06-06-006 EDGE on BCCH-TRX Configurable Relevant Functions ZGF06-06-003 GPRS-only (without voice) Timeslots Configurable ZGF06-06-005 Voice-only Timeslots Configurable ZGF06-04-001 PBCCH, PPCH, PAGCH, PRACH Relevant parameters Related interfaces ---
TSC
TABLE 16 - TSC
TSC TSC TSC 3GPP TS 45.002 V5.13.0 This parameter represents Training Serial Code (TSC) of the timeslot. There are eight types of TSC, with low mutual dependency. It is used for reference of delay compensation for adaptive balance circuit at receiving side. For the timeslot where BCCH is, this parameter must be equal to BCC of the cell. TRX 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 None 0 ----
Description
12
MAIO
TABLE 17 - MAIO
MAIO MAIO Mobile Allocation Index Offset 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 During communication, the carrier number adopted on air interface is an element of the MA set. Mobile Allocation Index (MAI) (0 MAI n-1) is a variable for determining a definite element in the MA set. According to the FH algorithm in GSM 05.02 specification, MAI is function of the following aspects: TDMA Frame Number (FN) or Reduced TDMA Frame Number (RFN), frequency Hopping Serial Number (HSN), and Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). MAIO is an initial offset of MAI and is used for preventing several channels to contend for the same carrier at the same moment. Generally, several basic FH units (timeslot or TDMA frame) constitute an FH group. They have the same MA and HSN and the only difference among them is MAIO. Thus the same MA and HSN are put in FHS/MA table. When the FH group corresponding to the timeslot has no frequency hopping, MAIO of the timeslot is invalid. TRX 0 ~ 63 None 0 ZGF05-12-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-005 Baseband Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-003 Flexible MAIO Management ---
Description
Dynamic ts
TABLE 18 - DYNAMIC TS
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name
Dynamic ts ---
13
3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
-YES: Representing dynamic timeslot; NO: Representing fixedly configured timeslot. TS1 number Yes/No None Yes ----
Ps Service Preference property

TABLE 19 - PS SERVICE PREFERENCE PROPERTY
Ps Service Preference property ---Indicate whether to do channel packet service preference or the type to do service preference TRX No preference, GPRS preference, EDGE preference, EDGE specialty None No preference ZGF06-10-001 Flexible Priority Handling of Packet Data Channel ---
14
PDCH Priority
TABLE 20 - PDCH PRIORITY
PDCH Priority PDCHPrecedence --This timeslot is used as PDTCH firstly. It only dynamically configure timeslot. TRX Yes/No None No ----
TSC
TABLE 21 - TSC
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters
TSC TSC training sequence Code 3GPP TS 45.002 V5.13.0 It is training serial code. TSC value in BCCH channel shall be same as BSS value. TRX 0~7 None 0 ---
15
Related interfaces
--
PDCH
TABLE 22 - PDCH
PDCH ---It is same as the property of "PDCH Priority" parameter. It is only shortcut method, uniformly configuring 8 timeslots for carrier. TRX Yes/No None No ----
IP INFORMATION PARAMETERS
IP information interface is as shown in Figure 3.
16
FIGURE 3 - IP INFORM ATION P AR AMETERS
Bipb Unit
TABLE 23 - BIPB UNIT
Bipb Unit ---It is corresponding with the board position in physical configuration TRX Depends on the actual configuration of BIPB unit. None Depends on the actual configuration. ----
17
DspSunit
TABLE 24 - DSPSUNIT
DspSunit ---It corresponds to the DSP supporting IP in BIPB board configured by physical mode. TRX Determined by user configured DSP quantity None Minimum DSP number configured by user ----
DspMarkSeq
TABLE 25 - DSPM ARKSEQ
DspMarkSeq ---Mark sequence of carrier on DSP, DSP channel number will be calculated based on this mark by service. If VTCD board, each DSP can mark (configure) up to 16 carriers; If VTCD/2 board, it can configure 28 carriers. -0 ~ 15 0 ~ 27 None 0 --
Description
18
---
PortNo
TABLE 26 - PORTNO
PortNo --
IP access. Port number shall be allocated for each carrier, and the number will be determined by the port actually configured. TRX 1 ~ 3072 None 1
--
Carrier Panel Parameters

Carrier panel parameters are as shown in Figure 4.
19
FIGURE 4 - CARRIER P ANEL P AR AMETERS
Working Modes
TABLE 27 - WORKING MODES
Working modes ---It describes working modes of carrier, including single or double carriers, which determines 4 lines of multiplexer is used or DPCT/DDT is used. BTS rack
20
Under double carrier mode, no 4 lines of multiplexer, no DPCT or DDT configured; Under single carrier mode, only 4 lines of multiplexer is configured;
Value Range
Under single carrier mode, 4 lines of multiplexer + DPCT; Under single carrier mode, 4 lines of multiplexer + DDT; Under single carrier mode, no 4 lines of multiplexer, no DPCT or DDT configured;
None Under double carrier mode, no 4 lines of multiplexer, no DPCT or DDT configured; ----
Delayed transmitting number

TABLE 28 - DELAYED TRANSMITTING NUMBER
Delayed transmitting number ---It defines the symbol used on delayed transmitting.
Description
When parameter working mode is "under single carrier mode, 4 lines of multiplexer + DDT", this parameter is valid. BTS rack 1 ~ 15 None 0 -Working Modes --
21
Use IRC
TABLE 29 - USE IRC
Use IRC ---It determines whether to use IRC.
Description
Not checked: don't use IRC Checked: use IRC
BTS rack Not checked, checked None Not checked ----
Carrier support antenna jumping

TABLE 30 - CARRIER SUPPORT ANTENN A JUMPING
Carrier support antenna jumping ---It describes whether the carrier supports antenna jumping. Only when working mode is double carrier mode, this parameter is valid.
Description
No: indicates antenna jumping is not supported; Yes: indicates supported; antenna jumping is
Management Object Value Range
Cell Yes/No
22
None No -Working Modes --
Power Control Parameters

There are four sub-interfaces for basic power control. If the cell supports GPRS, there is another sub-interface GPRS Power Control.
Power control
The interface of power control parameters is shown in Figure 5.
FIGURE 5 - POWER CONTROL P AR AMETERS
23
Uplink rapid power control indication (UlRapidPcInd)

TABLE 31 - UPLINK RAPID POWER CONTROL INDICATION
Uplink rapid power control indication UIRapidPcInd --This parameter determines the availability of the rapid power control process. Rapid power control process is an optional process of BSC. It reduces the interference of the whole BSS radio system and satisfies the dynamic power control requirement for rapid moving MS. The power control range in each rapid power control process is not a fixed value but an integral multiple of the power control step size (increment or decrement). This parameter determines the availability of the rapid power control process.
Description
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ---
Downlink rapid power control indication (DlRapidPcInd)

TABLE 32 - DOWNLINK RAPID POWER CONTROL INDICATION
Downlink rapid power control indication DIRapidPcInd ---
24
Description
This parameter determines the availability of the rapid power control process. Rapid power control process is an optional process of BSC. It reduces the interference of the whole BSS radio system and satisfies the dynamic power control requirement for rapid moving MS. The power control range in each rapid power control process is not a fixed value but an integral multiple of the power control step size (increment or decrement). This parameter determines the availability of the rapid power control process.
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ---
Power control PwrDecrLimit

TABLE 33 - POWER CONTROL PWRDECRLIMIT
Power control PwrDecrLimit ---This parameter is set for preventing MS from call drop due to fast power control. It corresponds to different quality level. For example, PwrDecrLimit [0] determines the maximum power decrease limit for calls with receiving quality level 0 (Bit Error rate (BER) <0.2%). This parameter is valid for both uplink and downlink. This parameter is an array of eight elements, with element length of one byte. PwrDecrLimit [n] determines the maximum power decrease limit available for calls with quality level n. The value range of each element is 0 ~ 38 dB.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 38 None
25
[24, 22, 20, 18, 16, 14, 12, 10] ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ---
Power Survey
The interface of power measurement parameters is shown in Figure 6.
FIGURE 6 - POWER MEASUREMENT P AR AMETERS
Report period of measurement for power control (PwrCtrlReportPrd, SACCH double frame)
TABLE 34 - REPORT PERIOD OF MEASUREMENT FOR POWER CONTROL
Report period of measurement for power control PwrCtrlReportPrd --Power control is performed at BTS side and BSC implements relevant performance statistics. BTS uses this parameter to decide the periodicity to send the preprocessed power measurement to BSC as an input for power control analysis. This parameter is in the unit of SACCH double frame. Cell 1 ~ 254
Description
26
SACCH multiframe 240 ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ---
Uplink power level Sample count (PcUlLevWindow)

TABLE 35 - UPLINK POWER LEVEL
Uplink power level PcUlLevWindow --In GSM system, BSC determines whether to perform power control according to measurement data. BSC uses the average value of measurement data to avoid adverse influences caused by abrupt changes in measurement data due to complex radio transmission. BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average value of uplink signal strength, i.e. to calculate the average value of the number of used samples.
Description
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 6 ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ---
Uplink level Weight (PcUlLevWeight)

TABLE 36 - UPLINK LEVEL WEIGHT
Full name
Uplink level Weight
27
Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference
PcUlLevWeight --Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods. BTS reports two types of measurement data to BSC when using DTX mode. One is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The other is the average value of measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC selects one type of measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results. This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement data when averaging uplink signal strength for power control. Weight for the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Description
Cell 1~3 None 2 ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ---
Downlink power level Sample count (PcdlLevWindow)

TABLE 37 - DOWNLINK POWER LEVEL
Full name Abbreviation
Downlink power level PcdlLevWindow
28
3GPP Name 3GPP reference
--In GSM system, BSC determines whether to perform power control according to measurement data. BSC uses the average value of measurement data to avoid adverse influences caused by abrupt changes in measurement data due to complex radio transmission. BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average value of downlink signal strength, i.e. to calculate the average value of the number of used samples.
Description
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 6 ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ---
Downlink level Weight (PcdlLevWeight)

TABLE 38 - DOWNLINK LEVEL WEIGHT
Downlink level Weight PcdlLevWeight ---
29
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods. BTS reports two types of measurement data to BSC when using DTX mode. One is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The other is the average value of measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC selects one type of measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results. This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement data when averaging downlink signal strength for power control. Weight for the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 1~3 None 2 ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ---
Description
Uplink quality level (PcUlIQualWindow)

TABLE 39 - UPLINK QUALITY LEVEL
Uplink quality level PcUlIQualWindow ---
30
Description
In GSM system, BSC determines whether to perform power control according to measurement data. BSC uses the average value of measurement data to avoid adverse influences caused by abrupt changes in measurement data due to complex radio transmission. BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average value of uplink signal quality, i.e. to calculate the average value of the number of used samples.
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 6 ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ---
Uplink quality Weight (PcUlIQualWeight)

TABLE 40 - UPLINK QUALITY WEIGHT
Uplink quality Weight PcUlIQualWeight ---
31
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods. BTS reports two types of measurement data to BSC when using DTX mode. One is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The other is the average value of measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC selects one type of measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results. This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement data when averaging uplink signal quality for power control. Weight for the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 1~3 None 2 ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ---
Description
Downlink quality level (PcDlIQualWindow)

TABLE 41 - DOWNLINK QUALITY LEVEL
Downlink quality level PcDlIQualWindow ---
32
Description
In GSM system, BSC determines whether to perform power control according to measurement data. BSC uses the average value of measurement data to avoid adverse influences caused by abrupt changes in measurement data due to complex radio transmission. BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average value of downlink signal quality, i.e. to calculate the average value of the number of used samples.
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 6 ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ---
Downlink quality Weight (PcDlIQualWeight)

TABLE 42 - DOWNLINK QUALITY WEIGHT
Downlink quality Weight PcDlIQualWeight ---
33
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods. BTS reports two types of measurement data to BSC when using DTX mode. One is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The other is the average value of measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC selects one type of measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results. This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement data when averaging downlink signal quality for power control. Weight for the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 1~3 None 2 ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ---
Description
Power Adjust Threshold

The interface of power adjust threshold parameters is shown in Figure 7.
34
FIGURE 7- POWER ADJUST THRESHOLD PAR AMETERS
Increase uplink level Threshold (PCULINCLLEVTHSThs), Value P (PCULINCLLEVTHSP), and Value N (PCULINCLLEVTHSN)
TABLE 43 - INCREASE UPLINK LEVEL THRESHOLD, VALUE P, AND V ALUE N
Increase uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N PCULINCLLEVTHSThs / PCULINCLLEVTHSP / PCULINCLLEVTHSN
35
Full name 3GPP Name 3GPP reference
Increase uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon received average value series of uplink signal strength. Uplink receiving intensity is one of the factors which may lead to MS (uplink) power increase. The decision process is as follows: If P out of N recent uplink signal strength averages are less than the related threshold, transmission power of MS (uplink) should be increased, because the uplink signals are too weak. Cell Increase uplink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Threshold: 0 ~ 63; Value P: 1 ~ 31; Value N: 1 ~ 31 None [22, 3, 4] ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Description
Management Object
Value Range
Increase downlink level Threshold (PCDLINCLLEVTHSThs), Value P (PCDLINCLLEVTHSP), and Value N (PCDLINCLLEVTHSN)
TABLE 44 - INCREASE DOWNLINK LEVEL THRESHOLD, VALUE P, AND V ALUE N
Increase downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N PCDLINCLLEVTHSThs / PCDLINCLLEVTHSP / PCDLINCLLEVTHSN -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
36
Full name
Increase downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon received average value series of uplink signal strength.
Description
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value, increase BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink signal quality. Cell Increase downlink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Threshold: 0 ~ 63; Value P: 1 ~ 31; Value N: 1 ~ 31 None [26, 3, 4] ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Management Object
Value Range
Decrease uplink level Threshold (PCULREDLEVTHSThs), Value P (PCULREDLEVTHSP), and Value N (PCULREDLEVTHSN)
TABLE 45 - DECREASE UPLINK LEVEL THRESHOLD, V ALUE P, AND V ALUE N
Decrease uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N PCULREDLEVTHSThs / PCULREDLEVTHSP / PCULREDLEVTHSN -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon received average value series of uplink signal strength.
Description
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, reduce MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal strength.
37
Management Object
Cell Decrease uplink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Threshold: 0 ~ 63; Value P: 1 ~ 31; Value N: 1 ~ 31 None [30, 3, 4] ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Value Range
Decrease downlink level Threshold (PCDLREDLEVTHSThs), Value P (PCDLREDLEVTHSP), and Value N (PCDLREDLEVTHSN)
TABLE 46 - DECREASE DOWNLINK LEVEL THRESHOLD, V ALUE P, AND V ALUE N
Decrease downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N PCDLREDLEVTHSThs / PCDLREDLEVTHSP / PCDLREDLEVTHSN -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon received average value series of uplink signal strength.
Description
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, reduce BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink signal strength. Cell Decrease downlink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Threshold: 0 ~ 63; Value P: 1 ~ 31; Value N: 1 ~ 31 None [34, 3, 4]
Management Object
Value Range
Unit Default
38
ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Increase uplink quality Threshold (PCULINCLQUALTHSThs), Value P (PCULINCLQUALTHSP), and Value N (PCULINCLQUALTHSN)
TABLE 47 - INCREASE UPLINK QUALITY THRESHOLD, V ALUE P, AND V ALUE N
Increase uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N PCULINCLQUALTHSThs / PCULINCLQUALTHSP / PCULINCLQUALTHSN -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon received average value series of uplink signal strength.
Description
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, increase MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal quality. Cell Increase uplink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Threshold: 0 ~ 7; Value P: 1 ~ 31; Value N: 1 ~ 31 None [2, 3, 4] ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Increase downlink quality Threshold (PCDLINCLQUALTHSThs), Value P

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 39
(PCDLINCLQUALTHSP), and Value N (PCDLINCLQUALTHSN)

TABLE 48 - INCREASE DOWNLINK QUALITY THRESHOLD, V ALUE P, AND V ALUE N
Increase downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N PCDLINCLQUALTHSThs / PCDLINCLQUALTHSP / PCDLINCLQUALTHSN -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon received average value series of uplink signal strength.
Description
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, increase BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink signal quality. Cell Increase downlink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Threshold: 0 ~ 7; Value P: 1 ~ 31; Value N: 1 ~ 31 None [2, 3, 4] ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Decrease uplink quality Threshold (PCULREDQUALTHSThs), Value P (PCULREDQUALTHSP), and Value N (PCULREDQUALTHSN)
TABLE 49 - DECREASE UPLINK QUALITY THRESHOLD, VALUE P, AND V ALUE N
Decrease uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N PCULREDQUALTHSThs / PCULREDQUALTHSP / PCULREDQUALTHSN
40
Full name 3GPP Name 3GPP reference
Decrease uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon received average value series of uplink signal strength.
Description
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal quality, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value, reduce MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal quality. Cell Decrease uplink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Threshold: 0 ~ 7; Value P: 1 ~ 31; Value N: 1 ~ 31 None [0, 3, 4] ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Decrease downlink quality Threshold (PCDLREDQUALTHSThs), Value P (PCDLREDQUALTHSP), and Value N (PCDLREDQUALTHSN)
TABLE 50 - DECREASE DOWNLINK QUALITY THRESHOLD, V ALUE P, AND V ALUE N
Decrease downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N PCDLREDQUALTHSThs / PCDLREDQUALTHSP / PCDLREDQUALTHSN -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
41
Full name
Decrease downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon received average value series of uplink signal strength.
Description
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal quality, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value, reduce BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink signal quality. Cell Decrease downlink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Threshold: 0 ~ 7; Value P: 1 ~ 31; Value N: 1 ~ 31 None [0, 3, 4] ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Others
The interface of the other parameters is shown in Figure 8 .
42
FIGURE 8
OTHER P AR AMETERS
FR Power increasing step (db) (PWRINCSTEP_0)

TABLE 51 - FR POWER INCREASING STEP (DB)
This parameter defines FR Power increasing step. PWRINCSTEP Pow_Incr_Step 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 It describes increase step, the value of each power control variation. It applies to both uplink and downlink directions. Cell Power increase step can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Value range is 2, 4, and 6. dB It can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. 2 by default. ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
43
FR Power decreasing step (db) (PWRREDSTEP_0)

TABLE 52 - FR POWER DECREASING STEP
FR Power decreasing step. PWRREDSTEP Pow_Red_Step 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 It describes decrease step, the value of each power control variation. It applies to both uplink and downlink directions. Cell Power decrease step can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Value range is 2 and 4. dB It can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. 2 by default. ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Uplink power control allowed (PwrControlUl)

TABLE 53 - UPLINK POWER CONTROL ALLOWED
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit
Uplink power control PwrControlUl --This parameter determines to enable or disable MS uplink power control in the cell. This power control is only effective to TCH/F. Cell Yes/No None
44
Yes ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Downlink power control allowed (PwrControlDl)

TABLE 54 - DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL ALLOWED
Downlink power control PwrControlDl --This parameter determines whether to enable or disable BTS downlink power control in the cell. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
MAX power level of MS (MSTXPWRMAX)

TABLE 55 - MAX POWER LEVEL OF MS
MS Max. TxPwr MSTXPWRMAX MS_TXPWR_MAX 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
45
In the communication between MS and BTS, the transmission power is controlled by the network. The network sets the power of MS by power command, which is transmitted on SACCH (SACCH carries the power command with 2-header bytes information, one is power control byte and the other one is timing advance byte). Description MS sets the specified output transmission power according to the power control header extracted from the SACCH. MS uses the nearest possible output power even if the power command sends maximum output power. During BSC power control, this parameter determines the maximum transmission power available for MS in the cell. BSC also uses it to calculate PBGT value. Cell MAX power level of MS can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Value range is 0 ~ 31. Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces None It can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Default value is 0, 5, 0, 0. ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
MIN power level of MS (MSTXPWRMIN)

TABLE 56 - MIN POWER LEVEL OF MS
MS Min. TxPwr MSTXPWRMIN -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
46
MS Min. TxPwr MSTXPWRMIN In the communication between MS and BTS, the transmission power is controlled by the network. The network sets the power of MS by power command, which is transmitted on SACCH (SACCH carries the power command with 2-header bytes information, one is power control byte and the other one is timing advance byte).
Description
MS sets the specified output transmission power according to the power control header extracted from the SACCH. MS uses the nearest possible output power even if the power command sends maximum output power. During BSC power control, this parameter determines the minimum transmission power (that is, lower limit of power control) available for MS in the cell. Cell MIN power level of MS can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Value range is 0 ~ 31. None It can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Default value is 0, 16, 0, 11. ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
MIN power level of BS (BSTXPWRMIN)

TABLE 57 - MIN POWER LEVEL OF BS
BS Min. TxPwr BSTXPWRMIN ---
47
Description
This parameter controls the transmission power during communication between MS and BTS. SACCH carries the command with 2 header bytes information (power control byte and timing advance byte) from BSC to BTS. During BSC control, this parameter determines the minimum transmission power (that is, lower limit of power control) available for BTS in the cell. Cell MIN power level of BS can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Value range is 0 ~ 15. The maximum power level of BTS is Pn.
Management Object
Value Range
0: Pn; 1: Pn-2 dB;
15: Pn-30 dB
Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces None It can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. 10 by default. ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
MIN interval of power control (PCMININTERVAL)

TABLE 58 - MIN INTERVAL OF POWER CONTROL
MIN interval of power control PCMININTERVAL --This parameter specifies the minimum interval of power control. Usually, MS still sends two measurement reports with the original power to BSC after enabling the power control. Signal level information contained in the reports is inaccurate and can be ignored (information such as adjacent cell information is still valid). Thus a minimum interval of power control is needed and signal level information during the interval can be ignored.
Description
48
Cell MIN interval of power control can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Value range is 1 ~ 32. SACCH multiframe It can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. 2 by default. ZGF05-07-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ZGF05-07-002 Dynamic MS Power Control ---
GPRS Power Control

The interface of GPRS power control parameters is shown in Figure 9.
FIGURE 9 - GPRS POWER CONTROL P ARAMETERS
49
Expected signal intensity of MS (SS_BTS)

TABLE 59 RECEIVE POWER STRENGTH FROM MS NEEDED
Receive Power Strength from MS Needed SS_BTS SSb 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used to control open loop uplink power control. MS uses CH parameter for calculating uplink transmission power, based on the following formula: CH = 0 PBTS -SSb 48 This parameter decides the SSb parameter.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0 ~ 63
0: -110 dBm;
Value Range
1: -109 dBm; 63: -47 dBm
None 1 ----
Uplink power control strategy (UlPwCtrl)

TABLE 60 - UPLINK POWER CONTROL STRATEGY
Uplink Power Control Policy UlPwCtrl --This parameter determines GPRS uplink power control strategy, including the following four modes: uncontrolled, open-loop control, close-loop control, based on quality control.
Description
50
Cell No control, Open-loop control, Close-loop control, Control based on quality None No control ----
Downlink power control strategy (DiPwCtrl)

TABLE 61 - DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL STRATEGY
Downlink Power Control policy DlPwCtrl --This parameter determines GPRS downlink power control strategy, including the following four modes: uncontrolled, open-loop control, close-loop control, based on quality control. Cell No control, Open-loop control, Close-loop control, Control based on quality None No control ----
Description
Downlink power control mode (PwCtrlMode)

TABLE 62 - DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL MODE
Downlink Power Control Mode PwCtrlMode
51
BTS_PWR_CTRL_MODE 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter determines the BTS downlink power control mode. BTS has two power control modes: A and B. Mode A can be used for any assignment mode and mode B can only be used for fixed assignment mode. Cell A, B None A ----
Description
Power control level (PwCtrlLev)

TABLE 63 - POWER CONTROL LEVEL
Power Control Level PwCtrlLev Power control level 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter determines GPRS power control precision, which describes nominal output power and power control precision (dB) sent by MS under each power control level. Cell 0 ~ 31 None 0 ----
Description
52
Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in A mode (P0)

TABLE 64 - POWER DESCENDING OF PDCH TO BCCH IN A MODE
Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in A mode P0 P0 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is an optional downlink power control parameter contained in assignment message. MS uses power control if this parameter exists. During the packet transmission mode, P0 value shall not be changed unless re-assignment or new assignment is established and the assignment does not contain the PDCH(s) of any previous assignment. Cell 0 ~ 15
Description
Management Object
0: P0=0 dB;
Value Range
1: P0=2 dB; 15: P0=30 dB
None 0 ----
Handover Control Parameters

There are seven sub-interfaces for handover control.
53
Handover Pretreatment
The interface of handover protreatment parameters is shown in Figure 10.
FIGURE 10 - HANDOVER PRETREATMENT PAR AMETERS
Number of zero allowed in AV (ZeroAllowed)

T A B L E 6 5 - N U M B E R O F Z E R O A L L O W E D I N AV
Number of zero allowed in AV ZeroAllowed ---
54
According to GSM specifications, MS can report to BSS the measurement data of at most six adjacent cells with strongest signal strength. Thus the measurement results might not be consecutive. For cells whose signal strength is less than -110 dBm, the measurement data are not reported. BSC marks measurement data of such adjacent cells as zero. This parameter gives flexibility in measurement data averaging. However, excessive occurrences of zero indicate that the adjacent cells are of poor signal strength. If the number of zeroes in used for average calculation exceeds Number of zero allowed in AV, then measurement average equals to sum of reported values divided by Neighboring cell . If the number of zeroes in used for average calculation does not exceed Number of zero allowed in AV, then the measurement average equals to sum of reported values divided by (Neighboring cell - number of zeroes) Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0 ~ 31 None 1 ----
Description
Uplink power level (HoUlLevWindow)

TABLE 66 - UPLINK POWER LEVEL
Uplink power level HoUlLevWindow N1..N8,P1..P8 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
55
Description
In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt changes in measurement data. This parameter is the window size (number of sample values) used to calculate average value of uplink signal intensity.
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 4 ----
Uplink level Weight (HoUlLevWeight)

TABLE 67 - UPLINK LEVEL WEIGHT
Uplink level Weight HoUlLevWeight ---
56
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods. BTS reports two types of measurement data to BSC when using DTX mode. One is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The other is the average value of measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC selects one type of measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results. This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement data when averaging uplink signal strength for handover. Weight for the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 1~3 None 2 ----
Description
Downlink power level (HoDlLevWindow)

TABLE 68 - DOWNLINK POWER LEVEL
Downlink power level HoDlLevWindow N1..N8,P1..P8 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
57
Description
In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt changes in measurement data. This parameter represents the window size (number of sample values) used to calculate average value of downlink signal intensity.
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 4 ----
Downlink level Weight (HoDlLevWeight)

TABLE 69 - DOWNLINK LEVEL WEIGHT
Downlink level Weight HoDlLevWeight ---
58
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods. BTS reports two types of measurement data to BSC when using DTX mode. One is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The other is the average value of measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC selects one type of measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results. This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement data when averaging downlink signal strength for handover. Weight for the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 1~3 None 2 ----
Description
Uplink quality level (HoUlQualWindow)

TABLE 70 - UPLINK QUALITY LEVEL
Uplink quality level HoUlQualWindow N1..N8,P1..P8 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
59
Description
In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt changes in measurement data. This parameter represents the window size (number of sample values) used to calculate average value of uplink signal quality.
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 4 ----
Uplink quality Weight (HoUlQualWeight)

TABLE 71 - UPLINK QUALITY WEIGHT
Uplink quality Weight HoUlQualWeight ---
60
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods. BTS reports two types of measurement data to BSC when using DTX mode. One is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The other is the average value of measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC selects one type of measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results. This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement data when averaging uplink signal quality for handover. Weight for the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 1~3 None 2 ----
Description
Downlink quality level (HoDlQualWindow)

TABLE 72 - DOWNLINK QUALITY LEVEL
Downlink quality level HoDlQualWindow N1..N8,P1..P8 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
61
Description
In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt changes in measurement data. This parameter represents the window size (number of sample values) used to calculate average value of downlink signal quality..
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 4 ----
Downlink quality Weight (HoDlQualWeight)

TABLE 73 - DOWNLINK QUALITY WEIGHT
Downlink quality Weight HoDlQualWeight ---
62
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods. BTS reports two types of measurement data to BSC when using DTX mode. One is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The other is the average value of measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC selects one type of measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results. This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement data when averaging downlink signal quality for handover. Weight for the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 1~3 None 2 ----
Description
Distance (Distance)
TABLE 74 - DISTANCE
Distance Distance -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
63
Description
In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt changes in measurement data. This parameter represents the window size (number of sample values) used to calculate average value of distance (timing advance) between MS and BTS.
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 4 ----
Neighboring cell (NCell)

TABLE 75 - NEIGHBORING CELL
Neighboring cell NCell -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt changes in measurement data. This parameter represents the window size (number of sample values) used to calculate average value of signal intensity for adjacent cells.
Description
Management Object Value Range Unit Default
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 4
64
----
Handover Threshold
The interface of handover threshold parameters is shown in Figure 11.
FIGURE 11- HANDOVER THRESHOLD P ARAMETERS
Uplink receive level Threshold (HoUlLevThs), Value N (HoUlLevN), Value P (HoUlLevP)

TABLE 76 - UPLINK RECEIVE LEVEL THRESHOLD, VALUE N, V ALUE P
Uplink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P HoUlLevThs / HoUlLevN / HoUlLevP -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
65
According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value, perform handover to improve the uplink signal strength. Description Parameter "HoUlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter "HoUlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter HoUlLevP defines the related P value. If this handover condition is met, an internal handover is usually performed in the cell. Usually the value of HoUlLevThs should be less than the threshold for uplink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If power control does not work, perform handover. Management Object Cell Threshold: 0 ~ 63;
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm

Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31
None [15, 3, 2] ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
Downlink receive level Threshold (HoDlLevThs), Value N (HoDlLevN), Value P (HoDlLevP)

TABLE 77 - DOWNLINK RECEIVE LEVEL THRESHOLD, VALUE N, V ALUE P
Downlink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P HoDlLevThs / HoDlLevN / HoDlLevP --
66
3GPP reference
3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value, perform handover to improve the downlink signal strength. Parameter HoDlLevThs defines the related threshold, parameter HoDlLevN defines the related N value, and parameter HoDlLevP defines the related P value. Usually the value of HoDlLevThs should be less than the threshold for downlink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If power control does not work, perform handover. This parameter can be set to 15 by default (i.e. -96 dBm ~ -95 dBm), which is 3 dB larger than the minimum access level value (RxLevAccessMin) of the cell.
Description
Management Object
Cell Threshold: 0 ~ 63;
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm

Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31
Uplink receive quality Threshold (HoUlQualThs), Value N (HoUlQualN), Value P (HoUlQualP)

TABLE 78 - UPLINK RECEIVE QUALITY THRESHOLD, V ALUE N, V ALUE P
Uplink receive quality Threshold, Value N, Value P HoUlQualThs / HoUlQualN / HoUlQualP
67
-3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, perform handover to improve the uplink signal quality.
Description
Parameter HoUlQualThs defines the related threshold, parameter HoUlQualN defines the related N value, and parameter HoUlQualP defines the related P value. Usually the value of HoUlQualThs should be greater than the threshold for uplink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If power control does not work, perform handover.
Management Object
0: BER<0.2%; 1: 0.2%<BER<0.4%;
Value Range
6: 6.4%<BER<12.8%; 7: 12.8%<BER
Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31
Downlink receive quality Threshold (HoDlQualThs), Value N (HoDlQualN), Value P (HoDlQualP)

TABLE 79 - DOWNLINK RECEIVE QUALITY THRESHOLD, V ALUE N, V ALUE P
Full name
Downlink receive quality Threshold, Value N, Value P
68
HoDlQualThs / HoDlQualN / HoDlQualP -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, perform handover to improve the downlink signal quality.
Description
Parameter HoDlQualThs defines the related threshold, parameter HoDlQualN defines the related N value, and parameter HoDlQualP defines the related P value. In general, the Downlink receive quality Threshold should be larger than downlink power control (increase) threshold, i.e. perform power control first, then perform handover if power control fails.
Management Object
0: BER<0.2%; 1: 0.2%<BER<0.4%;
Value Range
6: 6.4%<BER<12.8%; 7: 12.8%<BER
Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31
69
Intra-handover Uplink receive level Threshold (IntraHoUlLevThs), Value N (IntraHoUlLevN), Value P (IntraHoUlLevP)
TABLE 80 - INTRA-HANDOVER UPLINK RECEIVE LEVEL THRESHOLD, VALUE N, V ALUE P
Intra-handover uplink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P IntraHoUlLevThs / IntraHoUlLevN / IntraHoUlLevP -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, then perform handover. The handover is due to strong uplink cofrequency interference.
Description
Parameter "IntraHoUlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter "IntraHoUlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter "IntraHoUlLevP" defines the related P value. If this handover condition is met, an internal handover is usually performed in the cell. Usually the value of "IntraHoUlLevThs" should be more than the threshold for uplink power control (decrease).
Management Object
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm

Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31
Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters
None [35, 3, 2] ---
70
Related interfaces
--
Intra-handover downlink receive level Threshold (IntraHoDlLevThs), Value N (IntraHoDlLevN), Value P (IntraHoDlLevP)
TABLE 81 - INTRA-HANDOVER DOWNLINK RECEIVE LEVEL THRESHOLD, V ALUE N, V ALUE P
Intra-handover downlink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P IntraHoDlLevThs / IntraHoDlLevN / IntraHoDlLevP -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, then perform handover. The handover is due to strong downlink co-frequency interference.
Description
Parameter "IntraHoDlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter "IntraHoDlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter "IntraHoDlLevP" defines the related P value. If this handover condition is met, an internal handover is usually performed in the cell. Usually the value of "IntraHoDlLevThs" should be less than (or equal to) the threshold for uplink power control (decrease).
Management Object
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm

Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31
Unit Default
None [40, 3, 2]
71
----
Good C/I Threshold (GoodCiThs), Value N (GoodCiN), Value P (GoodCiP)

TABLE 82- GOOD C/I THRESHOLD, V ALUE N, V ALUE P
Good C/I Threshold, Value N, Value P GoodCiThs / GoodCiN / GoodCiP --If system adopts concentric technology, then handover decisions also depend upon good Carrier to Interference ratio (C/I) of special layer TRX frequency. The decision process is as follows: If the paging is on common layer TRX frequency and P of the latest N C/I values raise above the good C/I threshold, then perform handover from common layer TRX frequency to special layer TRX frequency. Parameter "GoodCiThs" defines the related threshold, parameter "GoodCiN" defines the related N value, and parameter GoodCiP defines the related P value.
Description
Management Object
0: -127 dB; 1: -126 dB;

Value Range
255: 128 dB
Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31
None [133, 3, 2] ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH --
72
Related interfaces
--
Bad C/I Threshold (BadCiThs), Value N (BadCiN), Value P (BadCiP)

TABLE 83 - BAD C/I THRESHOLD, V ALUE N, V ALUE P
Bad C/I Threshold, Value N, Value P BadCiThs / BadCiN / BadCiP --If system adopts concentric technology, then handover decisions also depend upon good Carrier to Interference ratio (C/I) of special layer TRX frequency. The decision process is as follows: If the paging is on special layer TRX frequency and P of the latest N C/I values fall below the bad C/I threshold, then perform handover from special layer TRX frequency to common layer TRX frequency. Parameter "BadCiThs" defines the related threshold, parameter "BadCiN" defines the related N value, and parameter "BadCiP" defines the related P value.
Description
Management Object
0: -127 dB; 1: -126 dB;

Value Range
255: 128 dB
Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31
None [130, 3, 2] ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
73
Rapid handover Threshold (RapidHoThs) / Value N (RapidHoN)

TABLE 84 - RAPID HANDOVER THRESHOLD / V ALUE N
Rapid handover Threshold / Value N RapidHoThs / RapidHoN --During fast fading handover, some parameters shall be used. If the measured signal intensity of a call is less than rapid handover threshold, then it triggers handover of existing cell to most probable candidate cell.
Description
RapidHoN counter defines the minimum times for which the measured signal intensity of a call is less than the threshold. "RapidHoThs" may be set as 15 (that is, -96dBm ~ -95dBm) by default, the same as the level threshold of ordinary handover. Parameter "RapidHoN" should be set to ensure that rapid handover is faster than the ordinary signal level handover.
Management Object
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm

Value_N: 1 ~ 31
None [10, 2] ZGF05-02-007 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells ---
74
Macro-micro handover Threshold (MacroMicroHoThs) / Value N (MacroMicroHoN)

TABLE 85 - MACRO-MICRO HANDOVER THRESHOLD / VALUE N
Macro-micro handover Threshold / Value N MacroMicroHoThs / MacroMicroHoN --During macro-micro handover, some parameters shall be used. Tha is, a signal strength threshold and a counter value. Macro-micro handover threshold is a value of signal intensity threshold. If the measured signal intensity of an adjacent micro cell is higher than MacroMicroHoThs (threshold value) for certain times, then it triggers handover to the adjacent micro-cell. In this way, it could move slow moving MS into micro cell layer. The times can be determined by MacroMicroHoN parameter in each adjacent cell.
Description
Macro-micro handover threshold value N (MacroMicroHoN) is a counter value that is related to a given adjacent micro cell. When the measured values of the signal strength of this adjacent micro cell are consecutively more than the "MacroMicroHoThs" value for "MacroMicroHoN" times, the call can be handed over to this adjacent micro cell. In this way, it could move slow moving MS into micro cell layer. This parameter describes the counter value that shall be used while this cell is used as micro-cell. The setting of parameter "MacroMicroHoN" in the local micro cell is related to the local cell size and the standard used in measuring the MS moving speed.
Management Object
0: < -110 dBm;

Value Range
1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm; 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;

Value_N: 1 ~ 255
Unit Default Relevant Functions
None [20, 2] ZGF05-02-007 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells
75
---
Distance handover value N (DistanceN) / Value P (DistanceP)

TABLE 86 - DISTANCE HANDOVER VALUE N / V ALUE P
Distance handover value N/value P DistanceN / DistanceP N1..N8,P1..P8 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of TA (distance), if P of the N values rises above relevant threshold value, then perform handover. The handover is due to MS being out of the cell service range. Parameter "DistanceN" defines the relevant N value, and parameter "DistanceP" defines the relevant P value.
Description
Cell Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31 None [3, 2] ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
PBGT handover Value N (PBGTHoN) / Value P (PBGTHoP)

TABLE 87 - PBGT HANDOVER V ALUE N/VALUE P
PBGT handover Value N/Value P PBGTHoN / PBGTHoP
76
N1..N8,P1..P8 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 Value_N and Value_P in PBGT handover. In PBGT handover, if there are P values of PBGT in N PBGT satisfying the handover determination condition, the PBGT handover conditions are satisfied. Cell Value N: 1 ~ 31; Value P: 1 ~31 None [3, 2] ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
Description
Handover Condition
The interface of handover condition parameters is shown in Figure 12.
FIGURE 12- HANDOVER CONDITION P AR AM ETERS
Max Time Advance Threshold between MS and BTS (DistanceThs)

TABLE 88 - MAX TIME ADV ANCE THRESHOLD BETWEEN MS AND BTS
Full name
Max Time Advance Threshold between MS and BTS
77
DistanceThs -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength.
Description
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of TA (distance), if P of the N values rises above relevant threshold value, then perform handover. The handover is due to MS being out of the cell service range. Cell Common cell: 0 ~ 63; Extended cell: 0 ~ 219 None 63 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
MIN interval between inter-cell handover (HoMinInterval, s)

TABLE 89 - MIN INTERVAL BETWEEN INTER-CELL HANDOVER
MIN interval between inter-cell handover HoMinInterval ---
78
This parameter specifies the interval value for which MS waits before the actual inter-cell handover occurs. Such a timer is more predominant for MS at the boundary regions between two cells, where inter-cell handovers occur frequently. This parameter helps restrict frequent inter-cell handover and guarantees call quality. Description Inter-cell handover takes place when the timer exceeds the defined interval value from the last inter-cell handover of MS. This parameter affects only the inter-cell handover, but not common intracell or inter-cell concentric handover. In addition, micro-cell has its own handover policy, so this parameter is only effective for macro-cell layer and its above layer. For macro-cell, the default value can be 5; for micro-cell, the default value can only be 0. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0 ~31 s 5 ----
Prior layer selecting parameter on signal level/quality (LayerPriority)

TABLE 90 - PRIOR LAYER SELECTING PARAMETER ON SIGNAL LEVEL/QUALITY
Prior layer selecting parameter on signal level/quality LayerPripority ---
79
This parameter decides the priority to select and sequence the candidate cells for handover. Received signal level and signal quality decides the candidate cells for handover. Three options are available:
First hand over to adjacent cells at the upper layer of the local cell, then to those at the same layer, and finally to other adjacent cells; First hand over to adjacent cells at the same layer of the local cell, then to those at the upper layer, and finally to other adjacent cells; All adjacent cells are treated in the same way.
Description This parameter determines to select one of above three methods. During handover control process, this parameter has higher priority than normal adjacent cells. Value range:
1 (UPPER_LAYER): adjacent cell at above layer first, same layer next,other adjacent cells finally; 2 (SAME_LAYER): adjacent cell at same layer first, above layer next, other adjacent cells finally; 3 (ALL_LAYER): all adjacent cells are same.
For micro-cell, option 1 is selected. When call in micro-cell is handed over due to signal quality or signal strength, first handover to macro-cell layer. Macro cell adopts option 2. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 1 ~3 None 2 ----
80
Layer adapting to PBGT handover (PbgtHolayer)

TABLE 91 - LAYER AD APTING TO PBGT HANDOVER (PBGTHOLAYER)
Hierarchy that can apply standard PBGT HO PbgtHoLayer --This parameter controls PBGT handover in multilayer and dual-band network applications Cell 0 ~15 None 3 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ZGF05-05-001 Multi-layer Cell Structure ---
Synchronization (HoPatternInd1)
TABLE 92 - SYNCHRONIZATION
Synchronization HoPatternInd1 --TA of the destination cell is same as that of the source cell. Cell Yes/No None Yes ZGF05-02-003 Handover Mode --
81
Related interfaces
--
Asynchronization (HoPatternInd2)
TABLE 93 - ASYNCHRONIZATION
Asynchronization HoPatternInd2 --TA of the destination cell is unknown. Cell Yes/No None Yes ZGF05-02-003 Handover Mode ---
Pseudo-synchronization (HoPatternInd3)
TABLE 94 - PSEUDO-SYNCHRONIZATION
Pseudo-synchronization HoPatternInd3 --MS is able to calculate TA of the destination cell. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-003 Handover Mode --
82
Related interfaces
--
Pre-synchronization (HoPatternInd4)
TABLE 95 - PRE-SYNCHRONIZATION
Pre-synchronization HoPatternInd4 --This parameter determines the TA available for BSC. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-003 Handover Mode ---
Handover Control
The interface of handover control parameters is shown in Figure 13.
83
FIGURE 13- HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS
Allow SDCCH handover (HoControl1)

TABLE 96 - ALLOW SDCCH HANDOVER
Allow SDCCH handover HoControl1 --This parameter determines if allow SDCCH handover. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-010 SDCCH/SDCCH Handover ---
84
Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to uplink interference (HoControl2)

TABLE 97 - ALLOW INTER-CELL HANDOVER ATTEMPT DUE TO UPLINK INTERFERENCE
Allow intra-cell handover due to uplink interference HoControl2 --This parameter determines if allow inter-cell handover attempt due to uplink interference. Cell Yes/No None Yes ----
Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to downlink interference (HoControl3)

TABLE 98 - ALLOW INTER-CELL HANDOVER ATTEMPT DUE TO DOWNLINK INTERFERENCE
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default
Allow intra-cell handover due to downlink interference HoControl3 --This parameter determines whether to allow intercell handover attempt due to downlink interference. Cell Yes/No None Yes
85
----
Allow handover due to distance (HoControl4)

TABLE 99 - ALLOW HANDOVER DUE TO DISTANCE
Allow handover due to distance HoControl4 --This parameter determines whether to allow handover due to distance.. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Allow standard PBGT handover (HoControl5)

TABLE 100 - ALLOW STANDARD PBGT HANDOVER
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range
Allow standard PBGT handover HoControl5 --This parameter determines whether to allow standard PBGT handover. Cell Yes/No
86
None Yes ----
Allow automatic handover based on traffic (HoControl6)

TABLE 101 - ALLOW AUTOM ATIC HANDOVER BASED ON TRAFFIC
Allow automatic handover based on traffic HoControl6 --This parameter determines whether to allow automatic handover based on traffic. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Allow handover based on direction (HoControl7)

TABLE 102 - ALLOW HANDOVER BASED ON DIRECTION
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description
Allow handover based on direction HoControl7 --This parameter determines whether to allow handover based on direction.
87
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters
Cell Yes/No None No ---
Allow handover based on homocentric circularity (HoControl8)

TABLE 103 - ALLOW HANDOVER BASED ON HOMOCENTRIC CIRCULARITY
Allow handover based on homocentric circularity HoControl8 --This parameter determines whether to allow handover based on homocentric circularity. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference (HoControl9)
TABLE 104 - ALLOW INTRA-CELL HANDOVER IN SUPER DOWNLINK INTERFERENCE TRX CHANNEL DUE TO
Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference HoControl9
88
3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
--This parameter determines whether to allow intracell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference (HoControl10)
TABLE 105 - ALLOW INTRA-CELL HANDOVER IN SUPER TRX CHANNEL DUE TO
UPLINK INTERFERENCE
Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference HoControl10 --This parameter determines whether to allow intracell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference. Cell Yes/No None No ----
89
Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT (HoControl11)
TABLE 106 - ALLOW ADJACENT CELLS HANDOVER IN SUPER DUE TO PBGT TRX CHANNEL
Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT HoControl11 --This parameter determines whether to allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT Cell Yes/No None No ----
Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority (HoControl12)

TABLE 107 - ALLOW DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT OF HANDOVER PRIORITY
Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority HoControl12 --This parameter determines whether to allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority. Cell Yes/No None No
90
ZGF05-02-008 Dynamic Handover Priority Algorithm ---
Allow rapid handover (HoControl13)

TABLE 108 - ALLOW RAPID HANDOVER
Allow rapid handover HoControl13 --This parameter determines whether to allow rapid handover. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-007 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells ---
Allow Macro-Micro delay handover (HoControl14)

TABLE 109 - ALLOW MACRO-MICRO DELAY HANDOVER
Allow macro-micro delay handover HoControl14 --This parameter determines whether to allow MacroMicro delay handover. Cell Yes/No
91
None No ZGF05-02-007 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells ---
Allow Micro-Macro delay handover (HoControl15)

TABLE 110 - ALLOW MICRO-M ACRO DELAY HANDOVER
Allow Micro-Macro delay handover HoControl15 --This parameter determines whether to allow MicroMacro delay handover. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Allow internal handover based on TA (HoControl16)

TABLE 111 - ALLOW INTERNAL HANDOVER BASED ON TA
Allow internal handover based on TA HoControl16 --This parameter determines whether to allow internal handover based on TA.
92
Cell Yes/No None No ----
Allow force transfer handover (HoControl17)

TABLE 112 - ALLOW FORCE TRANSFER HANDOVER
Allow force transfer handover HoControl17 --This parameter determines whether to allow forced transfer handover. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-009 Directed-Shift Handover ---
Others
The interface of others parameters is shown in Figure 14.
93
FIGURE 14- OTHER P AR AMETERS
Penalty time for handover failure (HoFailPenaltyTime)

TABLE 113 - PENALTY TIME FOR HANDOVER FAILURE
Penalty time for handover failure HoFailPenaltyTime --This parameter defines the penalty time for destination cell if MS fails to handover to the destination cell. During the penalty time, inter-cell handover within BSC will not occur. This parameter determines penality duration. Cell 1 ~ 255 None 7 ZGF05-02-006 Enhanced Handover Algorithm ---
Description
94
Difference of dynamic priority (DynPrioOffset)

TABLE 114 - DIFFERENCE OF DYNAMIC PRIORITY
Difference of dynamic priority DynPrioOffset --This parameter defines a tolerable dynamic priority difference between the destination cell and local cell during a handover when using direction-based handover algorithm. During handover, if the first cells dynamic handover priority is higher than that of the second cell but the second cell is in MS moving direction, then the direction-based handover algorithm works if the difference between the two cells handover priorities is within the tolerable difference. MS is handover to the second cell. Cell 1~7 None 1 ZGF05-02-008 Dynamic Handover Priority Algorithm ---
Description
PBGT difference (PbgtOffset)

TABLE 115 - PBGT DIFFERENCE
PBGT difference PbgtOffset ---
95
Description
This parameter defines a tolerable power budget difference between destination cell and the local cell during a handover. During handover, if the first cells PBGT is higher than that of the second cell but the second cell is in MS moving direction, then the direction-based handover algorithm works if the difference between the two cells PBGTs is within the tolerable difference. MS is handover to the second cell. This parameter indicates this allowable difference. Cell 0 ~ 20 dB 3 ----
Layer control value for handover on traffic (TrafficHoLayrCtl)

TABLE 116 - LAYER CONTROL VALUE FOR HANDOVER ON TRAFFIC
Layer control value for handover on traffic TrafficHoLayrCtl ---
96
Layer selecting parameter on service quality handover. This parameter, together with Frequency control value for handover on traffic, decides the adjacent cells frequency band and layer selected during traffic handover. When traffic handover condition is satisfied, as for the layer relation, four choices are available for call selection and candidate cell arrangement. This parameter decides which choice should be selected. When implementing traffic-based handover control in traffic process, this parameter has higher priority than that of adjacent cells. The values are as follows:
Description
0: N, Not defined; 1: SAME, Adjacent cell and this cell are in the same layer (PBGT handover is possible); 2: UPPER, Adjacent cell is upper layer of this cell (when this cell is micro-cell); 3: LOWER, Adjacent cell is lower layer of this cell (when this cell is macro-cell)
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0~3 None 1 ----
Frequency control value for handover on traffic (TrafficHoFreqrCtl)

TABLE 117 - FREQUENCY CONTROL VALUE FOR HANDOVER ON TRAFFIC
Frequency control value for handover on traffic TrafficHoFreqrCtl ---
97
This parameter defines the control value of layer for traffic handover, i.e. which frequency band should be handover to.
0: GSM900 frequency band P-GSM (ARFCN = 1 ~ 124) 1: EXT900 frequency band E-GSM (ARFCN = 0 ~ 124, 975 ~ 1023) 2: DCS1800 frequency band DCS1800 (ARFCN = 512 ~ 885) PCS1900 frequency band PCS1900 (ARFCN = 512 ~ 810) GSM850 frequency band (ARFCN = 128 ~ 251)
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell GSM900, EXT900, DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850 None GSM900 ----
Description
Threshold of traffic for handover (TrafficThs, %)

TABLE 118 - THRESHOLD OF TRAFFIC FOR HANDOVER
Threshold of traffic for handover TrafficThs --If TCH occupation rate of a cell is greater than this parameter value (number of occupied TCH channels / number of total TCH channels, not including blocked idle channels), then it indicates the cell is too busy, and traffic handover is triggered for the cell. Cell 0 ~ 100 %
Description
98
70 ----
Lag time for PBGT between different layers (PbgtHoParam_0)

TABLE 119 - LAG TIME FOR PBGT BETWEEN DIFFERENT LAYERS
Lag time for PBGT between different layers PbgtHoParam_0 --To more effectively control traffic distribution in the cell at different layers, while doing PBGT decision, add PBGT decision offset level in the cell at different layers within certain duration, which is lag time for PBGT between different layers. Cell 0 ~ 300 Seconds 50 ----
Description
Level offset for PBGT to up layer (PbgtHoParam_1)

TABLE 120 - LEVEL OFFSET FOR PBGT TO UP LAYER
Level offset for PBGT to up layer PbgtHoParam_1 --
99
3GPP reference
-To more effectively control traffic distribution in the cell at different layers, while doing PBGT decision, add PBGT decision offset level in the cell at upper layer within certain duration. Cell 0 ~ 48 -24 ----
Description
Level offset for PBGT to low layer (PbgtHoParam_2)

TABLE 121- LEVEL OFFSET FOR PBGT TO LOW LAYER
Level offset for PBGT to low layer PbgtHoParam_2 --To more effectively control traffic distribution in the cell at different layers, while doing PBGT decision, add PBGT decision offset level in the cell at lower layer within certain duration. Cell 0 ~48 -24 ----
Description
100
Handover Algorithm
The interface of handover algorithm parameters is shown in Figure 15.
FIGURE 15- HANDOVER ALGORITHM PAR AMETERS
Traffic handover threshold (TrafficLevThs)

TABLE 122 - TRAFFIC HANDOVER THRESHOLD
Traffic handover threshold TrafficLevThs --This parameter is used for traffic handover. For the original handover condition that adjacent cells level must be higher than that of this cell, modify it so that adjacent cells level must be higher than this threshold. In this way, traffic handover can be improved greatly. This threshold must be less than the PBGT threshold in reverse direction. Otherwise, it may result in toggle handover. Cell 0 ~ 48 None 24
Description
101
----
Level offset during penalty (PenaltyLevOffset)

TABLE 123 - LEVEL OFFSET DURING PENALTY
Level offset during penalty PenaltyLevOffset --This parameter is used to perform an offset on the downlink level of this cell in the penalty period. Cell 0 ~ 63 None 15 ZGF05-02-006 Enhanced Handover Algorithm ---
Uplink interference quality offset (QOffSetUl)

TABLE 124 - UPLINK INTERFERENCE QUALITY OFFSET
Uplink interference quality offset QOffSetUl ---
102
Check the relation between level and quality to judge whether there is any interference in service judgment channel when handover occurs in the cell. Restriction condition: RXQUAL ul QoffSetUl + FQSS (RXLEV_UL+ SOffSetUl), or, RXQUAL - dl QoffSetDl + FQSS (RXLEV_DL+ SOffSetDl), RXQUAL - xx is uplink/downlink quality, QoffSetxx is uplink/downlink quality offset, RXLEV_XX is uplink/downlink level, SoffSetxx is uplink/downlink level offset. After interference is confirmed, when service party requests channel from database, which shall tell original occupation condition of database, then the database select proper channels based on this information. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0~2 None 1 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
Description
Uplink interference level offset (SOffSetUl)

TABLE 125 - UPLINK INTERFERENCE LEVEL OFFSET
Uplink interference level offset SOffSetUl ---
103
Check the relation between level and quality to judge whether there is any interference in service judgment channel when handover occurs in the cell. Restriction condition: RXQUAL ul QoffSetUl + FQSS (RXLEV_UL+ SOffSetUl), or, RXQUAL - dl QoffSetDl + FQSS (RXLEV_DL+ SOffSetDl), RXQUAL - xx is uplink/downlink quality, QoffSetxx is uplink/downlink quality offset, RXLEV_XX is uplink/downlink level, SoffSetxx is uplink/downlink level offset. After interference is confirmed, when service party requests channel from database, which shall tell original occupation condition of database, then the database select proper channels based on this information. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0 ~ 20 None 15 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
Description
Downlink interference quality offset (QOffsetDl)

TABLE 126 - DOWNLINK INTERFERENCE QUALITY OFFSET
Downlink interference quality offset QOffSetDl ---
104
Check the relation between level and quality to judge whether there is any interference in service judgment channel when handover occurs in the cell. Restriction condition: RXQUAL ul QoffSetUl + FQSS (RXLEV_UL+ SOffSetUl), or, RXQUAL - dl QoffSetDl + FQSS (RXLEV_DL+ SOffSetDl), RXQUAL - xx is uplink/downlink quality, QoffSetxx is uplink/downlink quality offset, RXLEV_XX is uplink/downlink level, SoffSetxx is uplink/downlink level offset. After interference is confirmed, when service party requests channel from database, which shall tell original occupation condition of database, then the database select proper channels based on this information. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0~2 None 1 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
Description
Downlink interference level offset (SOffSetDl)

TABLE 127 - DOWNLINK INTERFERENCE LEVEL OFFSET
Downlink interference level offset SOffSetDl ---
105
Check the relation between level and quality to judge whether there is any interference in service judgment channel when handover occurs in the cell. Restriction condition: RXQUAL ul QoffSetUl + FQSS (RXLEV_UL+ SOffSetUl), or, RXQUAL - dl QoffSetDl + FQSS (RXLEV_DL+ SOffSetDl), RXQUAL - xx is uplink/downlink quality, QoffSetxx is uplink/downlink quality offset, RXLEV_XX is uplink/downlink level, SoffSetxx is uplink/downlink level offset. After interference is confirmed, when service party requests channel from database, which shall tell original occupation condition of database, then the database select proper channels based on this information. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0 ~ 20 None 10 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
Description
Invalid intra-handover time (TMaxIHo)

TABLE 128 - INVALID INTRA-HANDOVER TIME
Invalid intra-handover time TMaxIHo ---
106
If MS performs handover continuously in the cell, it indicates great interference in this position and no appropriate channel is available. In such a case, MS should be forbidden to perform handover within a certain time. The judgment method is as follows: If handover occurs within the invalid intra-handover time, then the previous handover is considered to have no influence on interference, the counter HoCount increases by 1 and restart TMaxIHo. If handover occurs after the invalid intra-handover time, the previous handover is considered valid and clear the counter to 0. If the counter value reaches the value of MAX count of invalid intra-handover parameter, then it indicates not to attempt handover within a certain period. Perform penalty in intra-cell penalty mode. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0 ~ 255 None 16 ZGF05-02-006 Enhanced Handover Algorithm ---
Description
MAX count of invalid intra-handover (MaxIHo)

T A B L E 1 2 9 - M AX C O U N T O F I N V A L I D I N T R A - H A N D O V E R
MAX count of invalid intra-handover MaxIHo ---
107
If MS performs handover continuously in the cell, it indicates great interference in this position and no appropriate channel is available. In such a case, MS should be forbidden to perform handover within a certain time. The judgment method is as follows: If handover occurs within the invalid intra-handover time, then the previous handover is considered to have no influence on interference, the counter HoCount increases by 1 and restart TMaxIHo. If handover occurs after the invalid intra-handover time, the previous handover is considered valid and clear the counter to 0. If the counter value reaches the value of MAX count of invalid intra-handover parameter, then it indicates not to attempt handover within a certain period. Perform penalty in intra-cell penalty mode. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0 ~ 10 None 3 ZGF05-02-006 Enhanced Handover Algorithm ---
Description
MAX path loss threshold on force handover (MaxLossThs)

TABLE 130- MAX PATH LOSS THRESHOLD ON FORCE HANDOVER
MAX path loss threshold on force handover MaxLossThs ---
108
Directed transfer is only for one designated cell and it is restricted by a tolerable level difference. This level difference is lower than PBGT handover threshold in reverse direction, thus to avoid oscillating handover. Directed transfer does not result in destination cell congestion. Therefore, transfer reserved resource threshold is set. Perform forced transfer when the destination cell resource is less than the threshold. Select users with small path loss and small TA as transferred users. Users are transferred when their path loss is less than this parameter and TA is less than the MAX time advance threshold on force handover parameter. This algorithm applies to cases such as dual-frequency networking, 900M cell and 1800M cell share the same site address. Users decide only by path loss when MAX time advance threshold on force handover is 63 and only by TA when MAX path loss threshold on force handover is 150. The N value of force handover parameter and P value of force handover parameter are used for decision in actual situations. In other words, handover conditions are met if P of N measurement reports satisfy requirement. Path loss L = BS_TXPWR - AV_RXLEV_DL BS_TXPWR is transmission power of the carrier where occupied timeslot locates. It depends on the carriers maximum transmission power, static attenuation power, and power control. AV_RXLEV_DL is the downlink-receiving level. Therefore, forced handover should meet the following requirements:
Description
Level of destination cell must be higher than local cell by maximum level difference; Available resource of destination cell must be higher than transfer reserved resource threshold; Path loss L must be less than MAX path loss threshold on force handover and TA must be less than MAX time advance threshold on force handover; Destination cell is forced transfer cell.
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Cell 0 ~ 150 None 110 ZGF05-02-009 Directed-Shift Handover
109
---
MAX time advance threshold on force handover (MaxTaThs)

T A B L E 1 3 1 - M AX T I M E A D V A N C E T H R E S H O L D O N F O R C E H A N D O V E R
MAX time advance threshold on force handover MaxTAThs ---
110
Description
111
---
N value of force handover (HoForceN)

TABLE 132 - N VALUE OF FORCE HANDOVER
N value of force handover HoForceN ---
112
Description
113
---
P value of force handover (HoForceP)

TABLE 133 -P VALUE OF FORCE HANDOVER
P value of force handover HoForceP ---
114
Description
115
---
Subcell Parameters
The interface of subcell parameters is shown in Figure 16.
FIGURE 16- SUBCELL P ARAMETERS
Dual band power offset (DuleBandOffset)

TABLE 134 - DUAL BAND POWER OFFSET
Power compensation between frequencies. DuleBandOffset --It indicates the value to compensate power in the second cell in dual band cell. Cell 0 ~ 50 dB 0 ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
116
The MAX of path loss (PathLossMax)

TABLE 135 - THE M AX OF PATH LOSS
The MAX of path loss PathLossMax --It is one of sucell handover parameters, indicating threshold parameters while subcell 2 do path loss handover decision for subcell 1. Cell 0 ~ 150 dB 126 ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
The MIN of path loss (PathLossMin)

TABLE 136 - THE MIN OF PATH LOSS
The MIN of path loss PathLossMin --One of the subcell handover parameters, the minimum path loss. If byPathLossPathLossMin and TASubCellTAMin, the second subcell channel will be selected first, use RR_GETRADIOCHANNEL interface of DBS to apply channel; if byPathLoss PathLossMin or TASubCellTAMin, only the channel of the first subcell is available, use RR_GETRADIOCHANNEL interface of DBS to apply channel. Cell 0 ~ 150 dB
Description
117
120 ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
The MAX of time advance (SubCellTAMax)

TABLE 137 - THE M AX OF TIME ADV ANCE
The MAX of time advance SubCellTAMax --It is one of sucell handover parameters, indicating threshold parameters while subcell 2 does TA handover decision for subcell 1. Cell 0 ~ 63 None 1 ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
The MIN of time advance (SubCellTAMin)

TABLE 138 - THE MIN OF TIME ADV ANCE
The MIN of time advance SubCellTAMin --It is one of sucell handover parameters, indicating threshold parameters while subcell 1 does TA handover decision for subcell 2.
118
Cell 0 ~ 63 None 0 ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
N value of subcell handover (SubCellN)

TABLE 139 -1 N VALUE OF SUBCELL HANDOVER
N value of subcell handover SubCellN --This parameter is one of the conditions used to decide inter-subcell handover. The judgment process is as follows: For the latest N value of subcell handover sample average values, if SubcellP (P value of subcell handover parameter) of the SubcellN values satisfy the condition, then perform handover. Cell 1 ~ 10 None 4 ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
Description
P value of subcell handover (SubcellP)

TABLE 140 - P VALUE OF SUBCELL HANDOVER
Full name
P value of subcell handover
119
SubCellP --This parameter is one of the conditions used to decide inter-subcell handover. The judgment process is as follows: For the latest N value of subcell handover sample average values, if SubcellP (P value of subcell handover parameter) of the SubcellN values satisfy the condition, then perform handover. Cell 1 ~ 10 None 3 ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
Description
Subcell handover algorithm (HoControl18)

TABLE 141 - SUBCELL HANDOVER ALGORITHM
Subcell handover algorithm HoControl18 --This parameter defines two handover modes of subcell handover algorithm: Concentric Handover; Handover based on path loss and TA. Cell Concentric handover, Handover based on path loss and TA None Concentric handover ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH --
120
Related interfaces
--
UTRAN Handover Control Parameters

Basic properties 1
The interface of basic property 1 parameters is as shown in Figure 17.
F I G U R E 1 7 - B A S I C P R O P E R T Y 1 P AR A M E T E R S
Punishment period of UTRAN cell when handover failure (HoFailPenalTmUTRAN)

TABLE 142 - PUNISHM ENT PERIOD OF UTR AN CELL WHEN HANDOVER
FAILURE
Punishment period of UTRAN cell when handover failure HoFailPenalTmUTRAN --This parameter defines a protection period to prevent immediate handover after handover failure. Its unit time is the period of measurement or pretreatment measurement report. Cell
Description
Management Object
121
Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
1 ~ 255 None 7 ----
Slide window size for calculating Ec/No or RSCP average value to be zero (HoWindowUTRAN)
TABLE 143 - SLIDE WINDOW SIZE FOR CALCULATING EC/NO OR RSCP
AVER AGE V ALUE TO BE ZERO
Slide window size for calculating Ec/No or RSCP average value to be zero HoWindowUTRAN --In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt changes in measurement data. Average on measurement value in UTRAN adjacent cell also shall be required. HoWindowUTRAN of Ec/No or RSCP average is the window size to calculate Ec/No or RSCP average in adjacent UTRAN cell, that is, sample count used through average calculation.
Description
Cell 1 ~ 31 None 6 ----
122
Number that measurement value allowed to be zero (ZeroAllowedUTRAN)

TABLE 144- NUMBER THAT MEASUREMENT VALUE ALLOWED TO BE ZERO
Number that measurement value allowed to be zero ZeroAllowedUTRAN --According to GSM specifications, MS can report to BSS the measurement data of at most six adjacent cells with strongest signal strength. Thus the measurement results might not be consecutive. For cells whose signal strength is less than -110 dBm, the measurement data are not reported. This parameter gives flexibility in measurement data averaging. However, excessive occurrences of zero indicate that the adjacent cells are of poor signal strength. If the number of zeroes in used for average calculation exceeds Number of zero allowed in AV, then measurement average equals to sum of reported values divided by Neighboring cell . If the number of zeroes in used for average calculation does not exceed Number of zero allowed in AV, then the measurement average equals to sum of reported values divided by (Neighboring cell - number of zeroes)
Description
Cell 0 ~ 31 None 1 ----
UTRAN handover (ServiceHo)

TABLE 145 - UTR AN HANDOVER
UTRAN handover ServiceHo
123
-Section 48.008 This parameter indicates UTRAN handover priority control. MSC sends Service Handover parameter to BSC through ASSIGNMENT REQUEST and HANDOVER REQUEST messages. Service Handover parameter has three values, including prefer to UTRAN handover, not prefer to UTRAN handover, disallow to UTRAN handover, taking actions on handover decision on subsequent BSC. ServiceHo can be configured as the default value used while MSC doesn't deliver Service Handover parameter, or configured as BSC forcedly using the mode set by ServiceHo, but don't use Service Handover parameter delivered by MSC. Cell Handover to UTRAN first; Not Handover to UTRAN first; Not allow to Handover to UTRAN; According to MSC, default handover to UTRAN first; According to MSC, default not handover to UTRAN first; According to MSC, default not allowed to handover to UTRAN. None According to MSC, default handover to UTRAN first ----
Description
Management Object
Value Range
FDD/TDD handover (FDD/TDDPrio)

TABLE 146 - FDD/TDD HANDOVER
FDD/TDD handover FDDTDDPrio --This parameter indicates the priority control of FDD/TDD handover. When FDD adjacent cell and TDD adjacent cell exist together, to control selection sequence of target cell, we use FDDTDDPrio parameter to show whether to prefer to FDD cell handover or TDD cell handover.
Description
124
Cell Handover to FDD cell should be preferred; Handover to TDD cell should be preferred. None Handover to FDD cell should be preferred. ----
Threshold for load sharing (LoadHoRSCPThsFDD)

TABLE 147 - THRESHOLD FOR LOAD SH ARING
Threshold for load sharing LoadHoRSCPThsFDD --This parameter is used to traffic handover. Firstly you shall configure a traffic handover threshold and inter-system handover switch. This parameter is used to handover decision in 3G cell after traffic is overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_FDD RSCP average values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of LoadHoRSCPThsFDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, it can be used as traffic handover from GSM to UTRAN. This parameter value shall be lower than HoRSCPThsFDD.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 63 None 35 ----
125
Ec/No threshold when handover from GSM to 3G for load sharing (LoadHoEcNoThsFDD)
TABLE 148 - EC/NO THRESHOLD WHEN HANDOVER FROM GSM TO 3G FOR
LOAD SHARING
Ec/No threshold when handover from GSM to 3G for load sharing LoadHoEcNoThsFDD --This parameter is used to traffic handover. Firstly you shall configure a traffic handover threshold and inter-system handover switch. This parameter is used to handover decision in 3G cell after traffic is overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoEcNo_N_FDD RSCP average values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of the latest HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of LoadHoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN, it can be used as traffic handover from GSM to UTRAN. This parameter value shall be lower than HoEcNoThsFDD.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 49 None 25 ----
RSCP threshold when handover from GSM to TDD for load sharing (LoadHoRSCPThsTDD)
TABLE 149 - RSCP THRESHOLD WHEN HANDOVER FROM LOAD SHARING GSM TO TDD FOR
RSCP threshold when handover from GSM to TDD for load sharing LoadHoRSCPThsTDD --
126
3GPP reference
-This parameter is used to traffic handover. Firstly you shall configure a traffic handover threshold and inter-system handover switch. This parameter is used to handover decision in 3G cell after traffic is overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_TDD RSCP average values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_TDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of LoadHoRSCPThsFDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, it can be used as traffic handover from GSM to UTRAN. This parameter value shall be lower than HoRSCPThsFDD.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 63 None 35 ----
Basic properties 2
The interface of basic property 2 parameters is as shown in Figure 18 .
127
Inter system handover supported (InterSysRdCtrl)

TABLE 150 - INTER SYSTEM HANDOVER SUPPORTED
Inter system handover supported InterSysHoCtrl --This parameter indicates whether intersystem handover within BSC is allowed. This parameters determines whether BSC can issue handover of 3G system. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
128
Directed retry to UTRAN cell allowed (InterSysHoCtrl)

TABLE 151 - DIRECTED RETRY TO UTRAN CELL ALLOWED
Directed retry to UTRAN cell allowed InterSysRdCtrl --This parameter determines if allow directed retry to UTRAN cell. When no service channel is allocated in this cell, you can try redirected to adjacent cell under allowed case by corresponding function switch. If this parameter is configured as Yes, it can be redirected to 3G adjacent cell. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-005 Directed Retry ---
Description
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Threshold (HoRSCPThsFDD)

TABLE 152 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN FDD RSCP THRESHOLD
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Threshold HoRSCPThsFDD ---
129
Description
This parameter defines a threshold value for handover from GSM to UTRAN cell. BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_FDD average values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoRSCPThsFDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place and the adjacent cell is taken as candidate destination cell for handover. Cell 0 ~ 63 None 35 ----
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value N (HoRSCP_N_FDD)

TABLE 153 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN FDD RSCP V ALUE N
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value N HoRSCP_N_FDD --When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoRSCP_THS_FDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place. Cell 1 ~ 20 None 4 ---
Description
130
Related interfaces
--
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value P (HoRSCP_P_FDD)

TABLE 154 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN FDD RSCP V ALUE P
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value P HoRSCP_P_FDD --When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoRSCP_THS_FDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place. Cell 1 ~ 20 None 3 ----
Description
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Threshold (HoEcNoThsFDD)

TABLE 155 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN FDD EC/NO THRESHOLD
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Threshold HoEcNoThsFDD ---
131
Description
This parameter defines a threshold value for handover from GSM to UTRAN cell. BSC reserves at least HoEcNo_N_FDD Ec/No average values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of the latest HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to HoEc/No_THS_FDD, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place and the adjacent cell is taken as candidate destination cell for handover. Cell 0 ~ 49 None 25 ----
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value N (HoEcNo_N_FDD)

TABLE 156 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN FDD EC/NO V ALUE N
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value N HoEcNo_N_FDD --When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place. Cell 1 ~ 20 None 4 ---
Description
132
Related interfaces
--
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value P (HoEcNo_P_FDD)

TABLE 157 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN FDD EC/NO V ALUE P
Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value P HoEcNo_P_FDD --When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place. Cell 1 ~ 20 None 2 ----
Description
Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Threshold (HoRSCPThsTDD)

TABLE 158 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN TDD RSCP THRESHOLD
Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Threshold HoRSCPThsTDD ---
133
Description
This parameter defines a threshold value for handover from GSM to UTRAN cell. BSC at least HoRSCP_N_TDD reserves RSCP average values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_TDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume of HoRSCPThsTDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place and the adjacent cell is taken as candidate destination cell for handover. Cell 0 ~ 63 None 35 ----
Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value N (HoRSCP_N_TDD)

TABLE 159 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN TDD RSCP V ALUE N
Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value N HoRSCP_N_TDD --This parameter defines a threshold value for handover from GSM to UTRAN cell. BSC at least HoRSCP_N_TDD reserves RSCP average values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_TDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume of HoRSCPThsTDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place and the adjacent cell is taken as candidate destination cell for handover. Cell 1 ~ 20 None 4
Description
134
----
Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value P (HoRSCP_P_TDD)

TABLE 160 - HANDOVER FROM GSM TO UTR AN TDD RSCP V ALUE P
Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value P HoRSCP_P_TDD --This parameter defines a threshold value for handover from GSM to UTRAN cell. BSC at least HoRSCP_N_TDD reserves RSCP average values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_TDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume of HoRSCPThsTDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place and the adjacent cell is taken as candidate destination cell for handover. Cell 1 ~ 20 None 3 ----
Description
135
UTRAN Cell Control Parameters

Basic properties 1
Channel location of si2quater broadcast (SI2QuaterPos)

TABLE 161 - CHANNEL LOCATION OF SI2QUATER BROADCAST
Channel location of si2quater broadcast SI2QuaterPos --It indicates channel location of si2quater broadcast. Cell
136
0, 1 Value Range
0: Broadcast on normal BCCH block; 1: Broadcast on extended BCCH block (AGCH_BLOCK reservation value will be 1)
None 0 ----
CS measurement type reported by UE (ReportTypeCS)

TABLE 162 - CS MEASUREMENT TYPE REPORTED BY UE
CS measurement type reported by UE ReportTypeCS REPORT_TYPE 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 It indicates enhanced measurement report for UE or measurement report message. Cell 0, 1
Value Range
0: Adopts enhanced measurement report message, if at least one BSIC is configured for each frequency in BA list; otherwise, adopt enhanced measurement report message, otherwise using normal measurement report. 1: Adopts normal measurement report message
None 1 ---
137
Related interfaces
--
Measurement threshold of UE performing UTRAN cell reselection (Qsearch_I)

TABLE 163 - MEASUREMENT THRESHOLD OF UE PERFORMING UTRAN CELL
RESELECTION
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP reference 3GPP Name
Measurement threshold of UE performing UTRAN cell reselection Qsearch_I Qsearch_I 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter indicates the measurement threshold of UE performing UTRAN cell reselection. UE starts UTRAN reselection cell measurement when average receiving level RLA_C of this cell is lower than (parameter value: 0 ~ 7) or higher than (parameter value: 8 ~ 15) the threshold. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
Description
Management Object
0 ~ 6: Indicates field strength L = -98 + n*4 dBm;

Value Range
7: Indicates always; 8 ~ 14: Indicates field strength L = -78 + 4*(n-8) dBm; 15: Indicates never
None 15 ----
138
Threshold when UE performs search under specialized mode (Qsearch_C)

TABLE MODE 164 - THRESHOLD WHEN UE PERFORMS SEARCH UNDER SPECIALIZED
Threshold when UE performs search under specialized mode Qsearch_C Qsearch_C 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter defines a threshold. When average receiving level RLA_C of the cell falls below (parameter value: 0 ~ 7) or higher than (parameter value: 8 ~ 15) this threshold, UE searches the UTRAN adjacent cell. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
Description
Management Object
0 ~ 6: Indicates field strength L = -98 + n*4 dBm;

Value Range
7: Indicates always; 8 ~ 14: Indicates field strength L = -78 + 4*(n-8) dBm; 15: Indicates never
None 15 ----
Initial parameter instead of qsearch_c before UE receiving qsearch_C (QsearchCInit)

TABLE 165 - INITIAL P AR AM ETER INSTEAD OF QSEARCH_C BEFORE RECEIVING QSEARCH_C UE
Initial parameter instead of qsearch_c before UE receiving qsearch_C QsearchCInit --
139
3GPP reference Description Management Object
-This parameter is used to search and measure the cell data while MS doesn't recieve Qsearch_C on SACCH. Cell 0, 1
Value Range
0: Indicates Qsearch_I parameter; 1: Indicates always measuring
None 0 ----
CS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report (SvrBandRprtCS)

TABLE 166 - CS NUMBER OF SAME FREQUENCY ADJ ACENT CELLS IN REPORT
CS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report SvrBandRprtCS --This parameter defines the number of adjacent cells with the same frequency band as in serving cell, which are included in the measurement report or the strongest cell list. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3 None 2 ---
Description
140
Related interfaces
--
CS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells (FDDrepQntCS)

TABLE CELLS 167 - CS CLASS OF REPORTED QUANTITIES OF UTR AN ADJACENT
CS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells FDDrepQntCS FDD_REP_QUANT 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 It indicates whether MS uses RSCP or Ec/No to report measurement. Cell 0, 1
Value Range
0: RSCP, receiving power of CPICH scramble of UTRAN cell at UE, the unit is dBm; 1: Ec/No, ratio of the receiving power to thermal noise of CPICH scramble of UTRAN cell, the unit is dB.
None 1 ----
MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_Qmin)

TABLE 168 - MIN EC/NO OF UTR AN RESELECTING CELL
MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell FDD_Qmin FDD_Qmin
141
3GPP reference
3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter indicates the minimum value of Ec/No of the UTRAN cell when it reselects adjacent cell. The value of Ec/No of the UTRAN cell should be larger than the value defined by this parameter in order to reselect the adjacent cell. Value range: 0 ~ 7, indicating (20 + n) dBm. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 None 0 ----
Description
CS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report (FDDMulRatarrptCS)

TABLE 169 - CS M AX NUMBER OF UTRAN/FDD ADJ ACENT CELLS IN
MEASUREMENT REPORT
CS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report FDDMulRatarrptCS --This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells included in packet measurement report or strongest cell list. If UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM adjacent cells. (If TDD technology is available, the vacancies are used for TDD cells). Cell 0, 1, 2, 3 None 2 --
Description
142
---
FDD reselection offset (FDD_Qoffset)

TABLE 170 - FDD RESELECTION OFFSET
FDD reselection offset FDD_Qoffset FDD_Qoffset 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used to reselect the UTRAN adjacent cell if the following requirements are satisfied:
Received signal code power (RSCP) of this adjacent cell is higher than average receiving level RLA_C of this cell. RSCP of the adjacent cell is higher than RLA_C of all adjacent GSM cells by at least FDD_Qoffset (FDD reselection offset) for more than 5 seconds. FDD_Qoffset of the cell increases by 5 dB if the cell is reselected 15 seconds earlier. Ec/No (code-noise ratio) of this adjacent cell is larger than or equal to designated FDD_Qmin (minimum value of code-noise ratio of UTRAN reselected cell).
If more than one UTRAN cell meets above conditions, then select the cell which has the largest RSCP. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 None 8 ----
Description
143
Require UE to send UTRAN classmark change message early (ECSC_3G)

TABLE 171 - REQUIRE UE TO SEND UTRAN CLASSM ARK CHANGE
EARLY MESSAGE
Require UE to send UTRAN classmark change message early ECSC_3G --It indicates whether requiring UE to send UTRAN classmark change message early Cell Yes/No
Value Range
NO: Not allowed to send UTRAN class mark change message YES: Require UE to send UTRAN class mark change message early
None No ----
Basic properties 2
144
CS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell (ReportRateCS)

TABLE 172 CS MEASUREMENT REPORTING RATE OF ADJACENT CELL
CS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell ReportRateCS REPORTING_RATE 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 It indicates frequency of measurement reports in adjacent cell, refer to "CS adjacent cell report priority". Cell 0, 1
Value Range
0: Normal; 1: Low
None 0 ----
145
CS multiband report indication (MulBndRprtCS)

TABLE 173 - CS MULTIBAND REPORT INDICATION
CS Multiband report indication MulBndRprtCS MULTIBAND_REPORTING 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is to control the number of reports of different adjacent cells except the serving cell. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3
0: MS reports the survey results of six known and allowed adjacent cells with the strongest NCC according to the signal intensity, regardless of which frequency band adjacent cells are in. 1: MS reports the measurement result of one adjacent cell with strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cell list (excluding frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining locations, MS reports the adjacent cells in the frequency band of local cell. If there are still more locations remaining, MS reports the second strongest adjacent cell, regardless of their frequency bands.
Value Range
2: MS reports the measurement result of two adjacent cells with strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cell list (excluding frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining locations, MS reports the adjacent cells in the frequency band of local cell. If there are still more locations remaining, MS reports the second strongest adjacent cell, regardless of their frequency bands. 3: MS reports the measurement result of three adjacent cells with strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cells list (excluding frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining locations, MS reports the adjacent cells in the frequency band of local cell. If there are still more locations remaining, MS reports the second strongest adjacent cell, regardless of their frequency bands.
146
None 0 ----
CS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value (ScaleOrdCS)

TABLE 174 - CS OFFSET WHICH IS ADDED WHEN UE REPORTS RXLEV VALUE
CS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value ScaleOrdCS --This parameter defines the added offset when UE reports signal field intensity. If the field intensity of a certain GSM adjacent cell is n dBm, then when mapping to RXLEV (0 ~ 63), UE will maps n+ ScaleOrdCS to the original value corresponding to n.It applies only in the case that enhanced measurement report message is used. If the field intensity of adjacent cell exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can be reported by setting this parameter. UE includes the SCALE value when it reports enhance measurement report message. SCALE_ORD = 2, UE uses the value of cell that reports the best signal level.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0, 1, 2
Value Range
0: 0 dB; 1: 10 dB; 2: Automatic, determined by UE
None 0 ---
147
Related interfaces
--
TDD reselection offset (TDD_Qoffset)

TABLE 175 - TDD RESELECTION OFFSET
TDD reselection offset TDD_Qoffset TDD_Qoffset 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When cell is reselected to 3G TDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher than the least offset of RLA_P in all GSM adjacent cells. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 None 8 ----
CS MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells in measurement report (TDDMulRatRrptCS)

TABLE 176 - CS M AX NUMBER OF UTRAN/TDD ADJ ACENT CELLS IN
MEASUREMENT REPORT
CS MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells in measurement report TDDMulRatRrptCS XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells included in measurement report or strongest cell list. If UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM adjacent cells (If FDD technology is supported, remained part is given to FDD cell).
Description
148
Cell 0, 1, 2, 3 None 2 ----
CS UE report invalid cell level allowed (InvldBSICRprtCS)

TABLE 177 - CS UE REPORT INVALID CELL LEVEL ALLOWED
CS UE report invalid cell level allowed InvldBSICRprtCS INVALID_BSIC_REPORTING 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When BCC is not configured, NCC is permitted for BSIC of some GSM cells. This parameter indicates whether the system allows UE to report field intensity of such cells. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
149
CS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication (SearchPrioCSUTRAN)

TABLE 178 - CS UE SEARCH UTR AN ADJACENT CELL IN BSIC DECODING
FRAME INDICATION
CS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication SearchPrioCSUTRAN --This parameter indicates whether to allow UE to search UTRAN adjacent cells in the frame where BSIC decoding is needed. If yes, then UE can use at most 25 frames for search in 13 seconds. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (RprtOffsetCS850)

T AB L E 1 7 9 - G S M 8 5 0 M AD J AC E N T C E L L R E P O R T I N G SIG N AL L E V E L OF F S E T
GSM850 Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset RprtOffsetCS850 --when reporting to GSM850M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to RprtThoCS850, and RepPrioCS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetCS850 value is firstly reported. Cell
Description
Management Object
150
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
GSM 850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoCS850)

TABLE 180 - GSM 850M ADJACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL THRESHOLD
GSM850 Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold RprtThoCS850 --When reporting to GSM850M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS850 (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, MulBndRprtCS and RprtOffsetCS850.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0: always;
Value Range
1 ~ 6: corresponding to 6 ~ 36 dB, 6dB per level 7: never
None 0 ---
151
Related interfaces
--

GSM900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset RprtOffsetCS900 --when reporting to GSM900M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to RprtThoCS900, and RepPrioCS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetCS900 value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
152
GSM 900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoCS900)

T AB L E 1 8 2 - G S M 9 0 0 M AD J AC E N T C E L L R E P O R T I N G SIG N AL L E V E L
GSM900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold RprtThoCS900 --When reporting to GSM900M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS900 (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, MulBndRprtCS and RprtOffsetCS900.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----
153

TABLE 183 - GSM1800M ADJACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL OFFSET
GSM1800 Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset RprtOffsetCS1800 --when reporting to GSM1800M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to RprtThoCS1800, and RepPrioCS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetCS1800 value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
GSM1800M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoCS1800)

TABLE 184 - GSM1800M ADJACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL THRESHOLD
GSM1800M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold RprtThoCS1800 ---
154
Description
When reporting to GSM1800M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS1800 (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, MulBndRprtCS and RprtOffsetCS1800. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Management Object
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----

TABLE 185- GSM1900M ADJACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL OFFSET
GSM1900 Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset RprtOffsetCS1900 --when reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to RprtThoCS1900, and RepPrioCS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetCS1900 value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0
Description
155
----
GSM1900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoCS1900)

GSM1900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold RprtThoCS1900 --When reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS1900 (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, MulBndRprtCS and RprtOffsetCS1900.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----
156
UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (FDDRprtOffsetCS)

TABLE LEVEL 187- TABLE0-1 UTRAN/FDD ADJACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL OFFSET
UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset FDDRprtOffsetCS XXX_REPORTING_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 when reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoCS, and RepPrioCS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and FDDRprtOffsetCS value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (FDDRprtThoCS)

TABLE 188 - UTR AN/FDD ADJ ACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL
THRESHOLD
UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold FDDRprtThoCS XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
157
Description
When reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoCS (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, FDDMulRatRrptCS and FDDRprtOffsetCS. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Management Object
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----
UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (TDDRprtOffsetCS)

TABLE 189 - UTR AN/TDD ADJ ACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL OFFSET
UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset TDDRprtOffsetCS XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 when reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoCS, and RepPrioCS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and TDDRprtOffsetCS value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level.
Description
158
None 0 ----
UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (TDDRprtThoCS)

TABLE 190 - UTR AN/TDD ADJ ACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL
THRESHOLD
UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold TDDRprtThoCS XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoCS (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, TDDMulRatRrptCS and TDDRprtOffsetCS. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Description
Management Object
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----
159
GPRS Parameters 1
The interface of GPRS property 1 parameters is shown in Figure 21 .
FIGURE 21 - GPRS PROPERTY 1 PAR AM ETERS
PS offset which is added when ue reports rxlev value (ScaleOrdPS)

TABLE 191 - PS OFFSET WHICH IS ADDED WHEN UE REPORTS RXLEV VALUE
PS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value ScaleOrdPS ---
160
Description
This parameter defines the added offset when UE reports signal field intensity. If the field intensity of a certain GSM adjacent cell is n dBm, then when mapping to RXLEV (0 ~ 63), UE will map n+ ScaleOrdPS to the original value corresponding to n. It applies only in the case that enhanced measurement report message is used. If the field intensity of adjacent cell exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can be reported by setting this parameter. If the field intensity of adjacent cell exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can be reported by setting this parameter. SCALE_ORD = 2, UE uses the value of cell that reports the best signal level. Cell 0, 1, 2
Management Object
Value Range
0: 0 dB; 1: 10 dB; 2: Automatic, determined by UE
None 0 ----
PS measurement type reported by UE (ReportTypePS)

TABLE 192 - CS MEASUREMENT TYPE REPORTED BY UE
PS measurement type reported by UE ReportTypePS REPORT_TYPE 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter indicates that UE uses PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT or PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT message. Cell
161
0, 1
With PBCCH:
0: Uses PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT message. 1: Uses PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT message. Value Range
Without PBCCH:
0: If each frequency in BA (GPRS) list is configured with at least one BSIC, PACKET ENHANCE MEASUREMENT REPORT is used; otherwise PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT is used. 1: Uses PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT
None 0 ----
PS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report (SvrBandRprtPS)

TABLE 193 - PS NUMBER OF SAME FREQUENCY ADJ ACENT CELLS IN REPORT
PS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report SvrBandRprtPS SERVING_BAND_REPORTING 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter describes the maximum number of adjacent cells in the same frequency band of the serving cell, in packet measurement report or strongest cell list. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3 None 2 ---
Description
162
Related interfaces
--
PS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell (ReportRatePS)

TABLE 194 - PS MEASUREMENT REPORTING RATE OF ADJACENT CELL
PS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell ReportRatePS REPORTING_RATE 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 It indicates frequency of measurement reports in adjacent cell, refer to "PS adjacent cell report priority". Cell 0, 1
Value Range
0: Normal; 1: Low
None 0 ----
Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell (Qsearch_P)

TABLE 195 - MEASUREMENT THRESHOLD OF UE PERFORMING GPRS UTR AN
CELL
Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell Qsearch_P Qsearch_P 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
163
Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell. Description Searching 3G cell when signal level is lower than threshold 0 ~ 7 (corresponding to -98, -94, ..., , 74dBm), threshold 7 indicates always searching; or searching while above threshold 8~15 (-78, 74, ..., -54 dBm), threshold 15 indicates never search. Cell Idle state and packet transmission state. Value range is 0 ~ 15. None Idle state and packet transmission state. 0 by default. ZGF06-01-007 Inter-system NCCR ---
FDD GPRS reselection offset (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

TABLE 196 - FDD GPRS RESELECTION OFFSET
FDD GPRS reselection offset FDD_GPRS_Qoffset FDD_GPRS_Qoffset 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When cell is reselected to 3G FDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher than the least offset of RLA_P in all GSM adjacent cells. Cell Idle state and packet transmission state. Value range is 0 ~ 15.
0 indicates always selecting adjacent cells of this 3G FDD;

Value Range
1 = -28 dB; 2 = -24 dB;
15 = 28 dB
164
None Idle state and packet transmission state. 0 by default. ----
TDD GPRS reselection offset (TDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

TABLE 197 - TDD GPRS RESELECTION OFFSET
TDD GPRS reselection offset TDD_GPRS_Qoffset TDD_GPRS_Qoffset 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When cell is reselected to 3G TDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher than the least offset of RLA_P in all GSM adjacent cells. Cell Idle state and packet transmission state. Value range is 0 ~ 15.
0 indicates always selecting adjacent cells of this 3G TDD;

Value Range
1 = -28 dB; 2 = -24 dB;
15 = 28 dB
Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces None Idle state and packet transmission state. 0 by default. ----
165
PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_QminPS)

TABLE 198 - PS MIN EC/NO OF UTRAN RESELECTING CELL
PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell FDD_QminPS FDD_Qmin 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter indicates the minimum value of Ec/No of the 3G cell when it reselects adjacent cell. The value of Ec/No of the UTRAN cell should be larger than the value defined by this parameter in order to reselect the adjacent cell. Cell Idle state and packet transmission state. Value range is 0 ~ 7.
Description
Management Object
0 = -20 dB; 1 = -6 dB; 2 = -18 dB;

Value Range
3 = -8 dB; 4 = -16 dB; 5 = -10 dB; 6 = -14 dB; 7 = -12 dB
Offset of FDD_QminPS (FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS)

TABLE 199 - OFFSET OF FDD_QMINPS
Offset of FDD_QminPS FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS
166
3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object
FDD_Qmin_Offset 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 Offset of FDD_QminPS Cell Idle state and packet transmission state. Value range is 0 ~ 7.
0 = 0 dB; 1 = 2 dB; 2 = 4 dB;

Value Range
3 = 6 dB; 4 = 8 dB; 5 = 10 dB; 6 = 12 dB; 7 = 14 dB
PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_RSCPminPS)

TABLE 200 - PS MIN RSCP OF UTRAN RESELECTING CELL
PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell FDD_RSCPminPS FDD_RSCPmin 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When the cell is reselected to 3G ajacent cell, its RSCP shall be larger than or equal to this value. Cell
167
Idle state and packet transmission state. Value range is 0 ~ 15.
0 = -114 dBm; 1 = -112 dBm;

Value Range
2 = -110 dBm; 3 = -108 dBm; 14 = -86 dBm; 15 = -84 dBm
Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP (FDDRprtTho2PS)

TABLE 201 - MEASUREMENT REPORT THRESHOLD OF EC/NO OR RSCP
Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP FDDRprtTho2PS FDD_REPORTING_THRESHOLD_2 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP (while not specified in byFDDRepQuant) Cell Idle state and packet transmission state. Value range is 0 ~ 15. None Idle state and packet transmission state. 0 by default. ZGF06-01-007 Inter-system NCCR --
168
Related interfaces
--
PS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells (FDDRepOntPS)

TABLE CELLS 202 - PS CLASS OF REPORTED QUANTITIES OF UTR AN ADJACENT
PS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells FDDRepQntPS FDD_REP_QUANT 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 It indicates whether MS uses RSCP or Ec/No to report measurement. Cell 0, 1
Value Range
0: RSCP, receiving power of CPICH scramble of UTRAN cell at UE, the unit is dBm; 1: Ec/No, ratio of the receiving power to thermal noise of CPICH scramble of UTRAN cell, the unit is dB.
None 0 ZGF06-01-007 Inter-system NCCR ---
PS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report (FDDMulRatRrptPS)

T A B L E 2 0 3 - P S M AX N U M B E R O F U T R A N / F D D A D J A C E N T C E L L S I N
MEASUREMENT REPORT
PS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report FDDMulRatRrptPS --
169
3GPP reference
-This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells included in packet measurement report or strongest cell list. If UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM adjacent cells. (If TDD technology is available, the vacancies are used for TDD cells). Cell 0, 1, 2, 3 None 2 ZGF06-01-007 Inter-system NCCR ---
Description
PS multiband report indication (MulBndRprtPS)

TABLE 204- PS MULTIBAND REPORT INDICATION
PS Multiband report indication MulBndRprtPS MULTIBAND_REPORTING 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
170
MS in single-frequency GSM system needs only to report contents of six adjacent cells with the strongest signals in a frequency band, when reporting the survey result of adjacent cells to the network. In multi-band networking, MS can enter with priority into a specific frequency band during handover. The MS reports the survey result according to the signal intensity and the frequency band of the signals, according to the actual situation. MulBndRprtPS is used to notify MS to report contents of adjacent cells in multiple frequency bands. It is one of the system control parameters. The setting of this parameter is subject to traffic in each frequency band. General principles to set the parameters are as follows: 0: If the traffic of each frequency band is almost equivalent, and the operator has no choice over the frequency band. 3: If the traffic of each frequency band is quite different, and the operator hopes that MS enters a specific frequency band with priority. Management Object Cell
Description
171
0, 1, 2, 3
0: MS reports the survey results of six known and allowed adjacent cells with the strongest NCC according to the signal intensity, regardless of which frequency band adjacent cells are in. 1: MS reports the measurement result of one adjacent cell with strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cell list (excluding frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of which frequency bands they are in.
Value Range
2: MS reports the survey result of two adjacent cells with the strongest signals in the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent cell table. In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of which frequency bands they are in. 3: MS reports the survey result of three adjacent cells with the strongest signals in the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent cell table. In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of which frequency bands they are in.
None 0 ----
TDD multi report PS (TDDMulRatRrptPS)

T A B L E 2 0 5 - P S M AX N U M B E R O F U T R A N / T D D A D J A C E N T C E L L S I N
MEASUREMENT REPORT
Full name
TDD multi report PS
172
TDDMulRatRrptPS XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter indicates the MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell included in measurement report. If UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM adjacent cells (If FDD technology is supported, remained part is given to FDD cell). Cell 0, 1, 2, 3 None 2 ZGF06-01-007 Inter-system NCCR ---
Description
GPRS Parameters 2
The interface of GPRS property 2 parameters is shown in Figure 22.
173
PS UE report invalid cell level allowed (InvldBSICRprtPS)

TABLE 206 - PS UE REPORT INVALID CELL LEVEL ALLOWED
PS UE report invalid cell level allowed InvldBSICRprtPS INVALID_BSIC_REPORTING 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When BCC is not configured, NCC is permitted for BSIC of some GSM cells. This parameter indicates whether the system allows UE to report field intensity of such cell. Cell Yes/No
Description
Management Object
Value Range
YES: Allow UE to report the field intensity of NCC permitted but BCC invalid cells NO: Do not Allow UE to report the field intensity of NCC permitted but BCC invalid cells
None No ----
PS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in basic decoding frame indication (SearchPrioPSUTRAN)

TABLE 207 - PS UE SEARCH FRAME INDICATION UTR AN ADJACENT CELL IN BSIC DECODING
PS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication SearchPrioPSUTRAN --
174
3GPP reference
-This parameter indicates whether to allow UE to search UTRAN adjacent cells in the frame where BSIC decoding is needed. If yes, then UE can use at most 25 frames for search in 13 seconds. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (RprtOffsetPS850)

GSM850 Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset RprtOffsetPS850 --when reporting to GSM850M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to RprtThoPS850, and RepPrioPS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetPS850 value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
175
GSM 850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoPS850)

TABLE 209 - GSM 850M ADJACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL THRESHOLD
GSM850 Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold RprtThoPS850 XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When reporting to GSM850M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoPS850 (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndRprtPS and RprtOffsetPS850. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Description
Management Object
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----

GSM900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset RprtOffsetPS900 --
176
3GPP reference
-when reporting to GSM900M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to RprtThoPS900, and RepPrioPS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetPS850 value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
GSM 900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoPS900)

TABLE 211 GSM900M ADJACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL THRESHOLD
GSM900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold RprtThoPS900 XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When reporting to GSM900M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoPS900 (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndRprtPS and RprtOffsetPS900. Cell
Description
Management Object
177
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----

GSM1800 Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset RprtOffsetPS1800 --when reporting to GSM1800M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to RprtThoPS1800, and RepPrioPS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetPS1800 value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
178
GSM1800M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoPS1800)

GSM1800M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold RprtThoPS1800 XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When reporting to GSM1800M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoPS1800 (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndRprtPS and RprtOffsetPS1800 Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Description
Management Object
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----

GSM1900 Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset RprtOffsetPS1900 --
179
3GPP reference
-when reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to RprtThoPS1900, and RepPrioPS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetPS1900 value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
GSM1900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoPS1900)

GSM1900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold RprtThoPS1900 XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoPS1900 (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndRprtPS and RprtOffsetPS1900
7
Description
Management Object
Cell
180
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----
UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (FDDRprtOffsetPS)

TABLE 216- UTR AN/FDD ADJACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL OFFSET
UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset FDDRprtOffsetPS XXX_REPORTING_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 when reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoPS, and RepPrioPS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and FDDRprtOffsetPS value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
181
UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (FDDRprtThoPS)

TABLE 217 - UTR AN/FDD ADJ ACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL
THRESHOLD
UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold FDDRprtThoPS XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoPS (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, FDDMulRatRrptPS and FDDRprtOffsetPS. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Description
Management Object
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----
UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (TDDRprtOffsetPS)

TABLE 218 - UTR AN/TDD ADJ ACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL OFFSET
UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset TDDRprtOffsetPS XXX_REPORTING_OFFSET
182
3GPP reference
3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 when reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoPS, and RepPrioPS value is same, then the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and TDDRprtOffsetPS value is firstly reported. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level. None 0 ----
Description
UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (TDDRprtThoPS)

TABLE 219 - UTR AN/TDD ADJ ACENT CELL REPORTING SIGNAL LEVEL
THRESHOLD
UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold TDDRprtThoPS XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 When reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the cell is higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoPS (dimensionless, corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, TDDMulRatRrptPS and TDDRprtOffsetPS. Cell
Description
Management Object
183
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0: always;
Value Range
None 0 ----
Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters

The interface of adjacent interference cell parameters is shown in Figure 23.
FIGURE 23- ADJACENT INTERFERENCE CELL P AR AMETERS
Interference cell No. (IntfObjectId)

TABLE 220 - INTERFERENCE CELL NO.
Interference cell No. IntfObjectId ---
184
Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
Interference cell No. Cell 1~6 None 1 ----
Related cell DN (RelationDN)

TABLE 221 - RELATED CELL DN
Related Cell DN RelationDN --This parameter defines BSS external cell DN: EcId or related BSS equipment DN: BscId-SiteId-BtsId. Cell None None None ZGF05-09-001 Double BCCH Allocation List ---
Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

Interface of adjacent cell handover and reselection parameters is as shown in Figure 24.
185
FIGURE 24 - ADJACENT CELL HANDOVER AND RESELECTION P ARAMETERS
User Label
TABLE 222 - USER LABEL
User label ---Name that is easy to be recognized by users Cell Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
186
Adjacent cell reselection and handover ID (HoResObjectId)

TABLE 223 - ADJ ACENT CELL RESELECTION AND H ANDOVER ID
Adjacent cell reselection and handover ID HoResObjectId --This parameter is a unique identification of adjacent cell handover and reselection object. Cell 1 ~ 32 None 1 ----
Priority of handover (Hopriority)

TABLE 224 - PRIORITY OF HANDOVER
Priority of handover Hopriority --According to GSM specifications, cell priority should be considered in sequencing candidate cells. Therefore, there are three decisive factors to sequence the candidate cells: priority, traffic, and radio conditions. Priority and traffic affect the cell sequencing most. If they lead to the same result, sequence the cells according to the radio conditions. The larger the value, the higher level of priority. Cell 0~7 None
Description
187
3 ZGF05-02-008 Dynamic Handover Priority Algorithm ---
MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)

T A B L E 2 2 5 - M AX P O W E R L E V E L O F M S
MS Max. TxPwr MsTxPwrMax MS_TXPWR_MAX 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 In the communication between MS and BTS, the transmission power is controlled by the network. The network sets the power of MS by power command, which is transmitted on SACCH (SACCH carries the power command with 2-header bytes information, one is power control byte and the other one is timing advance byte).
Description
MS sets the specified output transmission power according to the power control header extracted from the SACCH. MS uses the nearest possible output power even if the power command sends maximum output power. When BSC controls the power, the parameter is the maximum transmission power that can be used by MS in the cell. MS max power level is also a parameter used by BSC to calculate PBGT value. Cell 0 ~ 31 None 5 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ZGF05-02-006 Enhanced Handover Algorithm ---
188
MIN power level for handover access (RxLevMin)

TABLE 226 - MIN POWER LEVEL FOR HANDOVER ACCESS
MIN power level for handover access RxLevMin RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter defines the minimum receiving intensity level (on BCCH) required for MS to handover to this cell. It is one of parameters to decide preferred cells during handover control. MS in the serving cell constantly monitors the signal intensity on BCCH of adjacent cells. Adjacent cells with the minimum receiving intensity level higher than this parameter are potential candidates for handover. MS with receiving level larger than minimum receiving level indicates that MS is at the edge of the serving cell. It is advised to set this parameter to approximate MS receiving sensitivity. For some cells with traffic overload, increase the minimum access level to decrease C1 and C2 value of the cell, the cell coverage range decreases at the same time. Setting the minimum access level too large will cause crossover area of cells to become dead area. With this measure for traffic balance, it is suggested that the level value should not exceed 90dB. At the preliminary running stage of the network, this parameter can be usually set as 10 (that is, -101 dBm ~ -100 dBm) or lower, which is higher than the MS receiving sensitivity 102 dBm. However, when the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage in a cell is not a problem, this parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB). Cell 0 ~ 63
Description
Management Object
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm; 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm
None 15 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria
189
---
MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT (HoMarginPbgt)

TABLE 227 - MIN THRESHOLD OF SIGNAL LEVEL FOR HANDOVER ON PBGT
MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT HoMarginPbgt -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The PBGT value of an adjacent cell is also one of the causes for handover. The decision process is as follows: If the PBGT value of an adjacent cell is greater than the relevant threshold of this cell, handover shall be performed to find a more suitable cell. This parameter defines the threshold used to determine PBGT handover from an adjacent cell to local cell.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0 ~ 48
0: -24 dB;
Value Range
1: -23 dB; 48: 24 dB
None 30 ----
190
MIN threshold of signal level for handover on power level (HoMarginRxLev)

TABLE 228 - MIN THRESHOLD OF SIGNAL LEVEL FOR HANDOVER ON POWER
LEVEL
Minimal Threshold of RxLev HO HoMarginRxLev --According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. In handover caused by the level, adjacent cells should be screened and sequenced. This parameter defines the signal strength threshold to determine handover from adjacent cell to local cell. Cell 0 ~ 48
Description
Management Object
0: -24 dB;
Value Range
1: -23 dB; 48: 24 dB
None 30 ----
MIN threshold of signal level for handover on quality (HoMarginRxQual)

TABLE 229 - MIN THRESHOLD OF SIGNAL LEVEL FOR HANDOVER ON QUALITY
Minimal Threshold of Quality Handover HoMarginRxQual ---
191
Description
According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. In handover caused by the quality, adjacent cells should be screened and sequenced. This parameter defines the signal quality threshold to determine handover from adjacent cell to local cell. Cell 0 ~ 48
Management Object
0: -24 dB;
Value Range
1: -23 dB; 48: 24 dB
None 30 ----
MAX level difference of force handover (MaxForceHoDiff)

T A B L E 2 3 0 - M AX L E V E L D I F F E R E N C E O F F O R C E H A N D O V E R
MAX level difference of force handover MaxForceHoDiff --In order to avoid handover oscillations in cells, a tolerable level difference for forced handover is required, which should be lower than PBGT handover threshold in the reverse direction. This level difference is lower than PBGT handover threshold in reverse direction, thus to avoid oscillating handover. Cell 0 ~ 48 None 9
Description
192
ZGF05-02-009 Directed-Shift Handover ---
Handover force resource threshold (HoForceResThs)

TABLE 231 - HANDOVER FORCE RESOURCE THRESHOLD
Handover force resource threshold HoForceResThs --Directed transfer does not result in destination cell congestion. When resource of object cell is lower than the congestion threshold, forced handover can be implemented. Cell 0 ~ 100 None 40 ZGF05-02-009 Directed-Shift Handover ---
Description
Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)

TABLE 232 - NEIGHBORING CELL LAYER
Neighboring cell layer NCellLayer ---
193
This parameter provides the handover policies in multilayer network technology and dual-frequency network technology. Multilayer radio coverage can be formed in the same physical area. The handover policies will not be detailed in this manual. In brief, limiting the PBGT handover defined in the specifications at one layer can reduce the number of handovers during the call, thus improving the system reliability and communication quality. The policy of handover between a macro cell layer and a micro cell layer mainly depends on the moving speed of MS. An MS at higher moving speed will try to stay at the macro cell layer (upper layer of the micro cell layer), and an MS at lower moving speed will try to enter the micro cell layer (lower layer of the macro cell layer). Only in the case of non-PBGT handover and emergency, will the undefined cell of the service area be considered as a candidate cell. Same layer of the home cell: Adjacent cell and local cell are in the same layer (PBGT handover possible); Upper layer of the home cell: Adjacent cell is the upper layer of local cell (local cell is a micro cell); Lower layer of the home cell: Adjacent cell is the lower layer of local cell (local cell is a macro cell); Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell Undefined, Same layer of the home cell, Upper layer of the home cell, Lower layer of the home cell None At same layer as this cell ZGF05-02-007 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells ZGF05-05-001 Multi-layer Cell Structure ---
Description
CS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioCS)

TABLE 233 - CS ADJ ACENT CELL REPORT PRIORITY
CS adjacent cell report priority RepPrioCS REP_PRIORITY 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
194
Priorities of the adjacent cell are as follows:
Adjacent cell in the same frequency band as the serving cell must have have the following features: BSIC of color code is valid; Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents frequency band of serving cell. Adjacent cell in the frequency band different from that of the serving cell must have the following features: BSIC of color code is valid. Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents the frequency band different from that of serving cell. Adjacent cells using other access technologies like UTRAN/FDD must The cells scramble is correct. Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells with the same access technologies and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by XXXRprtThoCS. Here, XXX represents access technologies like UTRAN/FDD.
For above priorities, if the prioritys location has surplus, then leave it to adjacent cell of the next priority. For access technology such as UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with high RepPrioCS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioCS, the cell with greater sum of RprtThoCSXXX (or XXXRprtThoCS) and RprtOffsetCSXXX (or XXXRprtOffsetCS) is preferred. Management Object Cell 0, 1 Value Range
Description
0: Low 1: High
None 0 ---
195
Related interfaces
--
PS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

TABLE 234 - PS ADJ ACENT CELL REPORT PRIORITY
PS adjacent cell report priority RepPrioPS REP_PRIORITY 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
196
This parameter defines the priority of adjacent cells to report the measurement report during PS traffic operation. Priorities of the adjacent cell are as follows:
Adjacent cell in the same frequency band as the serving cell must have have the following features: BSIC of color code is valid; Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoPSXXX. Here, XXX represents frequency band of serving cell. Adjacent cell in the frequency band different from that of the serving cell must have the following features: BSIC of color code is valid. Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoPSXXX. Here, XXX represents the frequency band different from that of serving cell. Adjacent cells using other access technologies like UTRAN/FDD must The cells scramble is correct. Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells with the same access technologies and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by XXXRprtThoPS. Here, XXX represents access technologies like UTRAN/FDD.
For above priorities, if the prioritys location has surplus, then leave it to adjacent cell of the next priority. For access technology such as UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with higher RepPrioPS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioPS, the cell with greater sum of RprtThoPSXXX (or XXXRprtThoPS) and RprtOffsetPSXXX (or XXXRprtOffsetPS) is preferred. Management Object Cell 0, 1 Value Range
Description
0: Low 1: High
None 0 --
197
---
Related Cell DN
Related Cell DN ----
Description
, In user can click <Select> to select cell or external cell in displayed interface, check <mutual configuration>, you can mutually configure it as reselection and handover cell. Cell None None None ----
Is related cell (IsRelatedCell)

TABLE 236 - IS RELATED CELL
Is related cell IsRelatedCell --Only the cell related to the serving cell can be a candidate in rapid fading handover. This is a parameter of adjacent cell and is used to indicate whether adjacent cell is related to the serving cell.
Description
198
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-007 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells ---
Is handover forced neighbor cell (IsHoForceNcell)

TABLE 237 - IS HANDOVER FORCED NEIGHBOR CELL
Is handover forced neighbor cell IsHoForceNcell --In the case of 1800M and 900M network sharing site, it is better to handover subscribers of 900M network to 1800M network. At this time, you can do directional handover traffic.
Description
Forced handover is a method for on-site traffic adjustment. The forced handover direction is definite, i.e. 1800M sector in the same direction. To avoid influence on other cells, the forced handover is performed only for a specific object cell. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-009 Directed-Shift Handover ---
199
Is support CCN mode (CCNSUPPORT)

TABLE 238 - IS SUPPORT CCN MODE
Is support CCN mode CCNSUPPORT CCN-ACTIVE 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 CNN mode refers to cell alternating notification. When BSS supports CCN mode, if MS does cell reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message notification shall be delivered to network in normal case. After network receives this message, it can send specific system message about standby cell to MS. Cell Yes/No None Yes ----
Description
Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

The interface of adjacent cell handover parameters is shown in Figure 25.
200
FIGURE 25 - ADJACENT CELL HANDOVER P AR AMETERS
Adjacent cell handover object ID (HoObjectId)

TABLE 239 - ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER OBJECT ID
Adjacent cell handover object ID HoObjectId --This parameter is a unique identification of adjacent cell handover object. Cell 1 ~ 32 None 1 ----
201
Priority of handover (HoPriority)

TABLE 240 - PRIORITY OF HANDOVER
Priority of handover HoPriority --According to GSM specifications, cell priority should be considered in sequencing candidate cells. Therefore, there are three decisive factors to sequence the candidate cells: priority, traffic, and radio conditions. Priority and traffic affect the cell sequencing most. If they lead to the same result, sequence the cells according to the radio conditions. The larger the value, the higher level of priority. Cell 0~7 None 3 ZGF05-02-008 Dynamic Handover Priority Algorithm ---
Description
MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)

T A B L E 2 4 1 - M AX P O W E R L E V E L O F M S
MS Max. TxPwr MsTxPwrMax MS_TXPWR_MAX 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
202
In the communication between MS and BTS, the transmission power is controlled by the network. The network sets the power of MS by power command, which is transmitted on SACCH (SACCH carries the power command with 2-header bytes information, one is power control byte and the other one is timing advance byte). Description MS sets the specified output transmission power according to the power control header extracted from the SACCH. MS uses the nearest possible output power even if the power command sends maximum output power. When BSC controls the power, the parameter is the maximum transmission power that can be used by MS in the cell. MS max power level is also a parameter used by BSC to calculate PBGT value. Cell 0 ~ 31 None 5 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
MIN power level for handover access (RxLevMin)

TABLE 242 - MIN POWER LEVEL FOR HANDOVER ACCESS
MIN power level for handover access RxLevMin RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
203
This parameter defines the minimum receiving intensity level (on BCCH) required for MS to handover to this cell. It is one of parameters to decide preferred cells during handover control. MS in the serving cell constantly monitors the signal intensity on BCCH of adjacent cells. Adjacent cells with the minimum receiving intensity level higher than this parameter are potential candidates for handover. MS with receiving level larger than minimum receiving level indicates that MS is at the edge of the serving cell. It is advised to set this parameter to approximate MS receiving sensitivity. For some cells with traffic overload, increase the minimum access level to decrease C1 and C2 value of the cell, the cell coverage range decreases at the same time. Setting the minimum access level too large will cause crossover area of cells to become dead area. With this measure for traffic balance, it is suggested that the level value should not exceed 90dB. At the preliminary running stage of the network, this parameter can be usually set as 10 (that is, -101 dBm ~ -100 dBm) or lower, which is higher than the MS receiving sensitivity 102 dBm. However, when the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage in a cell is not a problem, this parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB). Cell 0 ~ 63
Description
Management Object
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
None 15 ZGF05-02-001 Basic Handover ZGF05-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria ---
204
MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT (HoMarginPbgt)

TABLE 243 - MIN THRESHOLD OF SIGNAL LEVEL FOR HANDOVER ON PBGT
MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT HoMarginPbgt -3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The PBGT value of an adjacent cell is also one of the causes for handover. The decision process is as follows: If the PBGT value of an adjacent cell is greater than the relevant threshold of this cell, handover shall be performed to find a more suitable cell. This parameter defines the threshold used to determine PBGT handover from an adjacent cell to local cell.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0 ~ 48
0: -24 dB;
Value Range
1: -23 dB; 48: 24 dB
MIN threshold of signal level for handover on power level (HoMarginRxLev)

TABLE 244 - MIN THRESHOLD OF SIGNAL LEVEL FOR HANDOVER ON POWER
LEVEL
Minimal Threshold of RxLev HO HoMarginRxLev
205
--According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. In handover caused by the level, adjacent cells should be screened and sequenced. This parameter defines the signal strength threshold to determine handover from adjacent cell to local cell. Cell 0 ~ 48
Description
Management Object
0: -24 dB;
Value Range
1: -23 dB; 48: 24 dB
MIN threshold of signal level for handover on quality (HoMarginRxQual)

TABLE 245 - MIN THRESHOLD OF SIGNAL LEVEL FOR HANDOVER ON QUALITY
Minimal Threshold of Quality Handover HoMarginRxQual --According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. In handover caused by the quality, adjacent cells should be screened and sequenced. This parameter defines the signal quality threshold to determine handover from adjacent cell to local cell. Cell
Description
Management Object
206
0 ~ 48
0: -24 dB;
Value Range
1: -23 dB; 48: 24 dB
MAX level difference of force handover (MaxForceHoDiff)

T A B L E 2 4 6 - M AX L E V E L D I F F E R E N C E O F F O R C E H A N D O V E R
MAX level difference of force handover MaxForceHoDiff --In order to avoid handover oscillations in cells, a tolerable level difference for forced handover is required, which should be lower than PBGT handover threshold in the reverse direction. This level difference is lower than PBGT handover threshold in reverse direction, thus to avoid oscillating handover. Cell 0 ~ 48 None 9 ZGF05-02-009 Directed-Shift Handover ---
Description
207
Handover force resource threshold (HoForceResThs)

TABLE 247 - HANDOVER FORCE RESOURCE THRESHOLD
Handover force resource threshold HoForceResThs --Directed transfer does not result in destination cell congestion. When resource of object cell is lower than the congestion threshold, forced handover can be implemented. Cell 0 ~ 100 None 40 ZGF05-02-009 Directed-Shift Handover ---
Description

TABLE 248 - NEIGHBORING CELL LAYER
Neighboring cell layer NCellLayer ---
208
This parameter provides the handover policies in multilayer network technology and dual-frequency network technology. Multilayer radio coverage can be formed in the same physical area. The handover policies will not be detailed in this manual. In brief, limiting the PBGT handover defined in the specifications at one layer can reduce the number of handovers during the call, thus improving the system reliability and communication quality. The policy of handover between a macro cell layer and a micro cell layer mainly depends on the moving speed of MS. An MS at higher moving speed will try to stay at the macro cell layer (upper layer of the micro cell layer), and an MS at lower moving speed will try to enter the micro cell layer (lower layer of the macro cell layer). Only in the case of non-PBGT handover and emergency, will the undefined cell of the service area be considered as a candidate cell. Same layer of the home cell: Adjacent cell and local cell are in the same layer (PBGT handover possible); Upper layer of the home cell: Adjacent cell is the upper layer of local cell (local cell is a micro cell); Lower layer of the home cell: Adjacent cell is the lower layer of local cell (local cell is a macro cell). Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell Undefined, Same layer of the home cell, Upper layer of the home cell, Lower layer of the home cell None At same layer as this cell ZGF05-02-007 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells ZGF05-05-001 Multi-layer Cell Structure ---
Description

CS adjacent cell report priority RepPrioCS REP_PRIORITY 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
209
Priorities of the adjacent cell are as follows:
Adjacent cell in the same frequency band as the serving cell must have have the following features: BSIC of color code is valid; Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents frequency band of serving cell. Adjacent cell in the frequency band different from that of the serving cell must have the following features: BSIC of color code is valid. Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents the frequency band different from that of serving cell. Adjacent cells using other access technologies like UTRAN/FDD must The cells scramble is correct. Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells with the same access technologies and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by XXXRprtThoCS. Here, XXX represents access technologies like UTRAN/FDD.
For above priorities, if the prioritys location has surplus, then leave it to adjacent cell of the next priority. For access technology such as UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with high RepPrioCS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioCS, the cell with greater sum of RprtThoCSXXX (or XXXRprtThoCS) and RprtOffsetCSXXX (or XXXRprtOffsetCS) is preferred. Management Object Cell 0, 1 Value Range
Description
0: Low 1: High
None 0 ---
210
Related interfaces
--
Is related cell (IsRelatedCell)

TABLE 250 - IS RELATED CELL
Is related cell IsRelatedCell --Only the cell related to the serving cell can be a candidate in rapid fading handover. This is a parameter of adjacent cell and is used to indicate whether adjacent cell is related to the serving cell. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-007 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells ---
Description
Is handover forced neighbor cell (IsHoForceNcell)

TABLE 251 - IS HANDOVER FORCED NEIGHBOR CELL
Is handover forced neighbor cell IsHoForceNcell --In the case of 1800M and 900M network sharing site, it is better to handover subscribers of 900M network to 1800M network. At this time, you can do directional handover traffic.
Description
Forced handover is a method for on-site traffic adjustment. The forced handover direction is definite, i.e. 1800M sector in the same direction. To avoid influence on other cells, the forced handover is performed only for a specific object cell.
211
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-009 Directed-Shift Handover ---
Related Cell DN
Related Cell DN ----
Description
In , user can click <select> to select cell or external cell in displayed interface. Cell None None None ----
Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters

The interface of adjacent cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 26.
212
FIGURE 26 - ADJACENT CELL RESELECTION P AR AMETERS
Adjacent cell reselection object ID (ReSelObjectId)

TABLE 253 - ADJACENT CELL RESELECTION OBJECT ID
Adjacent cell reselection object ID ReSelObjectId --This parameter is a unique identification of adjacent cell reselection object. Cell 1 ~ 32 None 1 ----
Adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

TABLE 254- ADJACENT CELL REPORT PRIORITY
Adjacent cell report priority RepPrioPS
213
REP_PRIORITY 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter indicates adjacent cell report priority, broadcasted to MS in SI2quater, PSI3ter and PSI3quater. It corresponds to adjacent cell list, indicating the priority of measurement report in adjacent cell. Cell 0, 1
Description
Management Object
Value Range
0: low priority; 1: high priority;
None 0 ----
Is Support CCN mode (CCNSUPPORT)

Is support CCN mode CCNSUPPORT CCN-ACTIVE 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 CNN mode refers to cell alternating notificaiton. When BSS supports CCN mode, if MS does cell reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message notification shall be delivered to network in normal case. After network receives this message, it can send specific system message about standby cell to MS. Cell Yes/No None No --
Description
214
---
Related Cell DN
Related Cell DN ---This parameter is used to determine DN (BssIdSiteId-BtsId-Hold) of the handover cell or DN (EcId) of the external cell.
Description In , user can click <select> to select cell or external cell in displayed interface. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell None None None ----
UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

Interface of UTRAN adjacent cell handover and reselection parameters is as shown in Figure 27.
215
FIGURE 27 - UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER AND RESELECTION P AR AMETERS
User Label
TABLE 257 -2 USER LABEL
User label ---Name that is easy to be recognized by users Cell Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
216
Adjacent UTRAN cell handover and reselection object ID (HoRSObjectId)

TABLE 258 - ADJ ACENT UTR AN CELL HANDOVER AND RESELECTION OBJECT ID
Adjacent UTRAN cell handover and reselection object ID HoRSObjectId --This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell handover and reselection object. Cell 1 ~ 64 None 1 ----
RSCP offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell (HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN)

TABLE 259- RSCP OFFSET HANDOVER TO UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL
RSCP offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN --Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that UTRAN adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE communication within it. This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity for uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a UE to handover to different adjacent cells. Cell
Description
Management Object
217
0 ~ 63 None 5 ----
Ec/No offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell (HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN)

TABLE 260 - EC/NO OFFSET HANDOVER TO UTR AN ADJACENT CELL
Ec/No offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN --Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that UTRAN adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE communication within it. This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity for uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a UE to handover to different adjacent cells. Cell 0 ~ 49 None 5 ----
Description

TABLE 261- CS ADJ ACENT CELL REPORT PRIORITY
Full name
CS adjacent cell report priority
218
RepPrioCS REP_PRIORITY 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter defines the priority of adjacent cells to report the measurement report during PS traffic operation. Priorities of the adjacent cell are as follows:
For above priorities, if the prioritys location has surplus, then leave it to adjacent cell of the next priority. For access technology such as UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with higher RepPrioPS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioPS, the cell with greater sum of RprtThoPSXXX (or XXXRprtThoPS) and RprtOffsetPSXXX (or XXXRprtOffsetPS) is preferred. Management Object Cell 0, 1 Value Range
Description
0: Low; 1: High
Unit
None
219
0 ----
PS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

TABLE 262 - PS ADJ ACENT CELL REPORT PRIORITY
PS adjacent cell report priority RepPrioPS REP_PRIORITY 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 -Cell 0, 1 None 0 ----

Is support CCN mode CCNSUPPORT CCN-ACTIVE 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0
220
Description
CNN mode refers to cell alternating notificaiton. When BSS supports CCN mode, if MS does cell reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message notification shall be delivered to network in normal case. After network receives this message, it can send specific system message about standby cell to MS. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Relation DN
TABLE 264 - RELATION DN
Relation DN ---This parameter is used to determine DN of the UTRAN external cell.
Description
, user In can click <Select> to select a cell in displayed interface. Cell None None None ----
221
UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

The interface of UTRAN adjacent cell handover parameters is shown in Figure 28.
FIGURE 28 - UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER P AR AMETERS
UTRAN HO ID (HoObjectId)
TABLE 265 - UTR AN HO ID
UTRAN HO ID HoObjectId --This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell handover object. Cell 1 ~ 64 None 1 ---
222
Related interfaces
--
RSCP offset handover (HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN)

TABLE 266 - RSCP OFFSET HANDOVER
RSCP offset handover HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN --Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that UTRAN adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE communication within it. This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity for uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a UE to handover to different adjacent cells. Cell 0 ~ 63 None 5 ----
Description
Ec/No offset handover (HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN)

TABLE 267 - EC/NO OFFSET HANDOVER
Ec/No offset handover HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN ---
223
Description
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that UTRAN adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE communication within it. This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity for uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a UE to handover to different adjacent cells. Cell 0 ~ 49 None 5 ----

CS adjacent cell report priority RepPrioCS --This parameter defines the priority of adjacent cells to report the measurement report during CS traffic operation. Priorities of the adjacent cell are as follows: (1) Adjacent cell in the same frequency band as the serving cell must have the following features:
BSIC of color code is valid; Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band (actual band place depends on SERVING_BAND_REPORTING) and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents frequency band of serving cell.
(2) Adjacent cell in the frequency band different from that of the serving cell must have the following features:
Description
BSIC of color code is valid;
224
Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band (actual band place depends on MULTIBAND_REPORTING) and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents the frequency band different from that of serving cell.
(3) Adjacent cells using other access technologies like WCDMA/FDD must have the following features:
The cells scramble is correct. Its measured field intensity should rank high among cells with the same access technologies (actual band place depends on XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING) and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by XXXRprtThoCS. Here, XXX represents access technologies like UTRAN/FDD.
(4) For GSM adjacent cell with valid BSIC, or GSM adjacent cell with permitted NCC but invalid BCC, or adjacent cell with other access technologies, if such a cells RepPrioCS and REPORTING_RATE are low, then the reporting frequency is low too. For above priorities:
Description
If the prioritys location has surplus, then leave it to adjacent cell of the next priority; For access technology such as WCDMA/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900M, the cell with higher RepPrioCS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioCS, the cell with greater sum of RprtThoCSXXX (or XXXRprtThoCS) and RprtOffsetCSXXX (or XXXRprtOffsetCS) is preferred.
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Cell 0, 1 None 0 --
--
225
Related interfaces
--
Relation DN
Relation DN ---This parameter is used to determine DN of the UTRAN external cell.
Description
In , user can click <Select> to select a cell in displayed interface. Cell None None None ----
UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters

The interface of UTRAN adjacent cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 29.
FIGURE 29 - UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL RESELECTION P ARAMETERS
226
Adjacent UTRAN cell reselection object ID (RSObjectId)

TABLE 270- UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL RESELECTION OBJECT ID
UTRAN Adjacent cell reselection object ID RSObjectId --This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell reselection object. Cell 1 ~ 64 None 1 ----
PS priority of adjacent cells reported in measurement report (RepPrioPS)

CS adjacent cell report priority RepPrioPS
227
REP_PRIORITY 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter defines the priority of adjacent cells to report the measurement report during PS traffic operation. Priorities of the adjacent cell are as follows:
For above priorities, if the prioritys location has surplus, then leave it to adjacent cell of the next priority. For access technology such as UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with higher RepPrioPS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioPS, the cell with greater sum of RprtThoPSXXX (or XXXRprtThoPS) and RprtOffsetPSXXX (or XXXRprtOffsetPS) is preferred. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Cell 0, 1 None 0 --
Description
228
---

Is support CCN mode CCNSUPPORT CCN-ACTIVE 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 CNN mode refers to cell alternating notificaiton. When BSS supports CCN mode, if MS does cell reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message notification shall be delivered to network in normal case. After network receives this message, it can send specific system message about standby cell to MS. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
Relation DN
Relation DN ----
229
This parameter is used to determine DN (BssIdSiteId-BtsId-Hold) of the handover cell or DN (EcId) of the external cell. Description In , user can click <Select> to select a cell in displayed interface. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell None None None ----
Frequency Hopping System Parameters

The interface of frequency hopping system parameters is shown in Figure 30.
FIGURE 30 - FREQUENCY HOPPING SYSTEM P AR AMETERS
Frequency hopping No. (FhsId)

TABLE 274 - FREQUENCY HOPPING NO.
Frequency hopping No. FhsId
230
--This parameter is a unique identification of frequency hopping system. Cell 1 ~ 255 None 1 ZGF05-12-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-005 Baseband Frequency Hopping 0 Frequency No. --
Hopping sequence No. (HSN)

TABLE 275 - HOPPING SEQUENCE NO.
Hopping sequence No. HSN Hopping sequence number 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 According to GSM 05.02 Frequency Hoping Algorithm, MAI is a function of TDMA Frame number (FN), Hoping Sequence Number (HSN) and Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). HSN determines the operation track of frequencies during the frequency hopping process. Using different HSN for cells having same MA can avoid frequency utilization conflict between adjacent cells during the frequency hopping process.
Description
Different timeslots can share the same group of MA and corresponding HSN. When HSN = 0, it is a special frequency hopping (i.e. circular frequency hopping) HSN can be derived from BCC of the cell, because cells using the same MA also have the same BCCH. For example, if HSN [(BCC6) +1, .., (BCC6) +6], then each cell may use any of the 6 HSNs. The remaining 0 and 49 ~ 63 are used in other special cases. If for simple, directly use 0 by default.
Management Object
Cell
231
0 ~ 63 None 0 ZGF05-12-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-005 Baseband Frequency Hopping ---
Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)

TABLE 276 - FREQUENCY HOPPING MODE
Frequency hopping mode FreqHopMode --This parameter indicates the mode of frequency hopping. Cell RFID freqhop, baseband freqhop None RFFH ZGF05-12-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-005 Baseband Frequency Hopping ---
MA frequency list. (MaFreqNum)

TABLE 277 - MA FREQUENCY LIST.
MA frequency list. MaFreqNum ---
232
This parameter provides a list of absolute RF channel number in a frequency hopping group. It is a CA sub-set of the home cell. The related information will be notified to MS when MS is notified of which channel should be used.
Description
In <Add> and <Delete> actions. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell Based on frequency setting None Based on frequency setting
, you can do
ZGF05-12-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-005 Baseband Frequency Hopping ZGF05-12-002 Support of 64 Frequencies Hopping ---
233
Chapter
Module Parameters
This chapter mainly explains module parameters.
Operation Control Parameters

The interface of operation control parameters is shown in Figure 31.
FIGURE 31 -PERATION CONTROL P AR AMETERS
235
Caution: Each parameter has a default value in initial interface. Settings for these parameters are very important for foreground operation, so we suggest it shall be modified by professional persons, and informal modification is not allowed for general users.
FUC Parameters
The interface of FUC parameters is shown as follows.
FIGURE 32 - FUC PAR AMETERS
Use system message method when MSC overload or link block

TABLE BLOCK 278 - USE SYSTEM MESSAGE METHOD WHEN MSC OVERLOAD OR LINK
Full name
Use system message method when MSC overload or link block
236
Chapter 2 - Module Parameters
---FUC is done by system message mothod while all MSC overloaded or SP congested (FUC shall be started for this kind of overload).
Description
Using system message method, that is, disable some MS accesses according to ACCN parameters in system message; Using FUC method, that is, disable some MS accesses by access random on RACH
BSC System message method, FUC method None FUC method ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Start system message method

TABLE 279 - START SYSTEM MESSAGE METHOD
Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions
Start system message method ---When CPU utilization of CMP is increased, whether system message method shall be used while reaching the threshold defined in section 0. BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control
237
---
Start limit
TABLE 280 - START LIMIT
Start limit ---FUC caused by CPU utilization of CMP uses CPU threshold of system message control method. It means if CPU utilization exceeds this threshold and "Start system message method" parameter is Yes, FUC can be done by system message control method. This parameter indicates the threshold of start system message control method.
Description
BSC 0 ~ 100 % 65 ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Start FUC flow control

TABLE 281 - START FUC FLOW CONTROL
Start FUC flow control ---When CPU utilization of CMP is increased, whether FUC flow control is used while reaching the threshold defined in section 0.
238
BSC Yes/No None Yes ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Start limit
TABLE 282 - START LIMIT
Start limit ---FUC caused by CPU utilization of CMP uses CPU threshold of FUC control method. It means if CPU utilization exceeds this threshold and "Start FUC flow control" parameter is Yes, flow can be controlled by FUC flow control. This parameter indicates the threshold of start FUC flow control.
Description
BSC 0 ~ 100 % 75 ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
239
The MAX control level for MSC overload or link block

TABLE 283 - THE M AX CONTROL LEVEL FOR MSC OVERLOAD OR LINK BLOCK
The MAX control level for MSC overload or link block ---It indicates allowed MAX control level while MSC is overloaded or link is blocked. BSC 0 ~ 10 None 6 ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Accept flow control

TABLE 284 - ACCEPT FLOW CONTROL
Accept flow control ---It indicates whether flow control is accepted (that is, when CPU utilization of CMP is too high, CMP refuses MS acess by certain proportion based on CPU utilization). BSC Allowed, disallowed None Allowed
Description
240
ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Handover parameters of BCCH and SD

The interface of Handover parameters of BCCH and SD is shown in Figure 33.
FIGURE 33 - HANDOVER PARAMETERS OF BCCH AND S D
Handover BCCH
TABLE 285 - HANDOVER BCCH
Handover BCCH --
241
--This parameter is used to indicate whether dynamic configured BCCH function is enabled by BSC. When this function is enabled, network can enable dynamic configured BCCH function. Specially, for which cell can enable this function, it is based on whether the cell can dynamically enable dynamic configured BCCH function. BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-09-007 Automatic BCCH Recovery ---
Description
Dynamic config SDCCH

TABLE 286 - DYNAMIC CONFIG SDCCH
Dynamic config SDCCH ---This parameter is used to indicate whether dynamic configured SDCCH function is enabled by BSC. When this function is enabled, network can enable dynamic configured SDCCH function. Specially, for which cell can enable this function, it is based on whether the cell can dynamically enable dynamic configured SDCCH function. BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-09-005 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH
Description
242
---
Scan SDCCH (100ms)

TABLE 287 - SCAN SDCCH
Scan SDCCH ---This parameter is used to indicate the scanning duration for idle SDCCH channel by the network shen dynamic configured SDCCH function is enabled in the cell. When network enables dynamic configured SDCCH function, the network may periodically check idle SDCCH channels in the cell according to this parameter, to decide conversion condition. This parameter can reflect response time for this case due to insufficient SDCCH channel resource. BSC 10 ~ 1000 100 ms 100 ZGF05-09-005 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH ---
Description
Scan BCCH
TABLE 288 - SCAN BCCH
Scan BCCH ----
243
Description
This parameter is used to indicate the scanning duration for idle BCCH channel by the network shen dynamic configured BCCH function is enabled in the cell. When network enables dynamic configured BCCH function, the network may periodically check idle BCCH carrier state in the cell according to this parameter, to decide conversion condition. This parameter can reflect response time for this case due to network BCCH carrier failure. BSC 600 ~ 9000 100 ms 3000 ZGF05-09-007 Automatic BCCH Recovery ---
BCCH starting delay

TABLE 289 -1 BCCH STARTING DELAY
BCCH starting delay ---It indicates initial delay time for BCCH handover, after receiving BCCH handover message, you can configure delay. Check BCCH carrier state after timer is timeout. If you need handover actually, handover flow shall be started formally. BSC 20 ~ 1800 100 ms 1200 ZGF05-09-007 Automatic BCCH Recovery ---
Description
244
BCCH finishing delay

TABLE 290 - BCCH FINISHING DELAY
BCCH finishing delay ---It indicates delay time before finishing BCCH handover, BTS block message is received after timer is timeout, select handover TRX to do handover. BSC 20 ~ 1800 100 ms 1200 ZGF05-09-007 Automatic BCCH Recovery ---
Description
Delay of TRX forcible release

TABLE 291 - DELAY OF TRX FORCIBLE RELEASE
Delay of TRX forcible release ---It indicates delay of TRX forcible release. During BCCH handover, if you select the carrier with existing service as BCCH carrier after handover, you can inform the service and handover to other carrier. Release the service on this carrier after timer is timeout. BSC 5 ~ 200 100 ms 10
Description
245
ZGF05-09-007 Automatic BCCH Recovery ---
Delay of TS forcible release

TABLE 292- DELAY OF TS FORCIBLE RELEASE
Delay of TS forcible release ---It indicates delay of TS forcible release. During dynamic config SDCCH converted to TCH, first handover the service on this timeslot to other timeslots, and release the service on this timeslot after timer is timeout. BSC 5 ~ 200 100 ms 10 ZGF05-09-005 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH ---
Description
Delay protection
TABLE 293 - DELAY PROTECTION
Delay protection ----
246
Description
This parameter is delay protection timer, which is used to indicate response timeout timer after waiting for BTS configuration finishing while dynamic config BCCH or SDCCH function is enabled and dynamic conversion condition is met. Restart flow after timer is timeout. BSC 1200 ~ 2400 100 ms 1800 ZGF05-09-007 Automatic BCCH Recovery ZGF05-09-005 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH ---
TCH->SDCCH limit
TABLE 294 - TCH->SDCCH LIMIT
TCH->SDCCH limit ---This parameter is used to indicate whether dynamic configured SDCCH function is enabled and conversion threshold from TCH to SDCCH. Only when idle SDCCH is lower than this threshold, the conversion from TCH to SDCCH can be done. BSC 2 ~ 64 None 4 ZGF05-09-005 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH ---
Description
247
SDCCH->TCH delay
TABLE 295 - SDCCH->TCH DELAY
SDCCH->TCH delay ---It indicates SDCCH->TCH delay. This parameter is used to enable dynamic config SDCCH function in the cell. After TCH is dynamically converted to SDCCH channel and SDCCH channel is idle, to prevent from frequent channel conversion, a time limit will be added for the conversion from SDCCH channel to TCH channel. During this limit, SDCCH channel can not be converted to TCH channel. BSC 0 ~ 24 None 0 ZGF05-09-005 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH ---
Description
The MAX cells' amount of simultaneously handover

TABLE 296 - THE M AX CELLS' AMOUNT OF SIMULTANEOUSLY HANDOVER
The MAX cells' amount of simultaneously handover ---It controls the MAX number of cells that can be handover simultaneously in a module. BSC 1~8 None
248
2 ZGF05-09-007 Automatic BCCH Recovery ---
Other Parameters
The interface of other parameters is shown in Figure 34.
FIGURE 34 - OTHER P AR AMETERS
B2 support AMR
TABLE 297 - B2 SUPPORT AMR
B2 support AMR ---
249
-Whether B2 carrier on BTSV2 site supports AMR voice algorithm determines whether service on B2 carrier can use AMR voice version. BSC Yes/No None No ----
CHR Enable
TABLE 298 - CHR ENABLE
CHR Enable ---It indicates whether call history record function is enabled. BSC Support/not support None Not supported ----
250
MR server IP
TABLE 299 - MR SERVER IP
MR server IP ---It describes IP address of MR data storage server. BSC Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255), x is decimal number None 0.0.0.0 ----
MR server port
TABLE 300 - MR SERVER PORT
MR server port ---It describes port of MR data storage server. BSC 0 ~ 65535 None 0 ----
251
Support NC2
TABLE 301 - SUPPORT NC2
Support NC2 ---It indicates whether to support idle NC2. BSC Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection ---
BER Weight
TABLE 302 - BER WEIGHT
BER Weight ---Voice quality inspects the weight of influence factors. This parameter indicates BER weight. The system calculate the weight of voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors. BSC 0 ~ 65535 None 1 ---
Description
252
Related interfaces
--
FER Weight
TABLE 303 - FER WEIGHT
FER Weight ---Voice quality inspects the weight of influence factors. This parameter indicates FER weight. The system calculates the weight of voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors. BSC 0 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
Description
Handover frequence weight

TABLE 304 - HANDOVER FREQUENCE WEIGHT
Handover frequence weight ---Voice quality inspects the weight of influence factors. This parameter indicates handover frequency weight. The system calculate the weight of voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors. BSC 0 ~ 65535
Description
253
None 1 ----
DTX weight
TABLE 305 - DTX WEIGHT
DTX weight ---Voice quality inspects the weight of influence factors. This parameter indicates DTX weight. The system calculates the weight of voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors. BSC 0 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
Description
Coding decode weight

TABLE 306- CODING DECODE WEIGHT
Coding decode weight ----
254
Description
Voice quality inspects the weight of influence factors. This parameter indicates coding decode weight. The system calculates the weight of voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors. BSC 0 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
Abis transmission error code weight

TABLE 307 - ABIS TRANSMISSION ERROR CODE WEIGHT
Abis transmission error code weight ---Voice quality inspects the weight of influence factors. This parameter indicates the weight of Abis transmission error code. The system calculates the weight of voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors. BSC 0 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
Description
255
Delay weight
TABLE 308 - DELAY WEIGHT
Delay weight ---Voice quality inspects the weight of influence factors. This parameter indicates delay weight. The system calculates the weight of voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors. BSC 0 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
Description
Resource block threshold at A interface

TABLE 309 - RESOURCE BLOCK THRESHOLD AT A INTERFACE
Resource block threshold at A interface ---It describes proportion threshold while alarm occurs by PCM at A interface. BSC 0 ~ 100 None 80 --
256
---
NSVC resource block threshold

TABLE 310 - NSVC RESOURCE BLOCK THRESHOLD
NSVC resource block threshold ---It describes proportion threshold while alarm occurs by NSVC at Gb interface. BSC 0 ~ 100 None 80 ----
Channel resource block threshold

TABLE 311 - CHANNEL RESOURCE BLOCK THRESHOLD
Channel resource block threshold ---It describes proportion threshold while alarm occurs in radio channel. BSC 0 ~ 100 None 80
257
----
IBS Parameters
The interface of IBS parameters is shown in Figure 35.
FIGURE 35 -IBS P AR AMETERS
IBS shutdown limit

TABLE 312 - IBS SHUTDOWN LIMIT
IBS shutdown limit ---
258
3GPP reference
-It describes IBS shutdown limit, when the cell can do IBS shutdown inspection, if traffic in current cell is lower than this threshold, this cell need close a carrier. BSC 0 ~ 70 % 30 ZGF05-13-006 Intelligent TRX Shutdown ---
Description
IBS powerup limit

TABLE 313 - IBS POWERUP LIMIT
IBS powerup limit ---It describes IBS powerup threshold. If traffic in current cell exceeds this threshold, it is considered this cell shall enable the carrier closed during IBS shutdown. This threshold shall be larger than "shutdown threshold". BSC 0 ~ 90 % 60 ZGF05-13-006 Intelligent TRX Shutdown ---
Description
259
IBS powerover limit

TABLE 314 - IBS POWEROVER LIMIT
IBS powerover limit ---It indicates the resource utilization threshold for urgent powerup in IBS shutdown function, after occupying channel proportion over this threshold, immediately enable the carriers that is closed during IBS shutdown. This threshold shall be larger than "powerup threshold". BSC 70 ~ 95 % 90 ZGF05-13-006 Intelligent TRX Shutdown ---
Description
IBS power priority

TABLE 315 - IBS POWER PRIORITY
IBS power priority ---It describes IBS power priority. BSC Carrier priority > interference band , interference band > carrier priority, only as per interference band, only as per carrier priority None Carrier priority > interference band
260
ZGF05-13-006 Intelligent TRX Shutdown ---
IBS time bitmap

TABLE 316 - IBS TIME BITMAP
IBS time bitmap ---It indicates bitmap at the segment of IBS shutdown function enabled, in hour. Based on time segment configuration, BSC decides whether current time belongs to the segment of IBS shutdown function, then check whether the cell allows to disable IBS shutdown carrier. BSC 0 ~ 23, Checked Hour Unchecked ZGF05-13-006 Intelligent TRX Shutdown ---
Description
BCCH forbbiden TS merger time bitmap

TABLE 317 - BCCH FORBBIDEN TS MERGER TIME BITMAP
BCCH forbbiden TS merger time bitmap ----
261
Description
It indicates BCCH forbbiden TS merger time bitmap, in hour. Intelligent TRX shutdown decides whether traffic of other carrier can migrate to BCCH carrier. BSC 0 ~ 23, Checked Hour Unchecked ZGF05-13-006 Intelligent TRX Shutdown ---
262
Appendix
Abbreviations
Abbreviation A AMR A (dB) BSC BSS BSSAP BSSGP BTS C CMP CPU CS D DBS DSP F FR G GERAN GPRS GSM H HR I IMSI IP L LLC Logical Link Control International Mobile Subscriber Identity Internet Protocol Half Rate GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network General Packet Radio Service Global System for Mobile Communication Full Rate Data Base Subsystem Digital Signal Processor Control Main Processor Central Processing Unit Circuit Switch Base Station Controller Base Station System Base Station System Application Part Base Station System EDGE/GPRS Protocol Base Transceiver Station Adaptive Multi Rate Full name
263
Abbreviation M MAC MS MSC MSS MTP N NS NSE O OMC OMP OMS P PACCH PAGCH PBCCH PCH PCU PDTCH PLMN PPCH PS PTP Q QoS R RACH RLC S SACCH SAPI SCCP SDCCH T TBF Quality of Service Network Service
Full name
Medium Access Control Mobile Station Mobile services Switching Center Mobile Switch System Message Transfer Protocol
Network Service Entity
Operation and Maintenance Center Operation Main Processor Operating Maintenance Subsystem
Packet Associated Control Channel Packet Access granted Channel Packet Broadcast Control Channel Paging Channel Packet Control Unit Packet Data Traffic Channel Public Land Mobile Network Packet Paging Channel Packet Switch Point To Point
Random Access Channel Radio Link Control
Slow Associated Control Channel Service Access Point Indicator Signal Connect Control Part Stand alone dedicated Control Channel
Temporary Block Flow
264
Appendix A - Abbreviations
Abbreviation TCH TDMA TFI TRX TS U UPPB UPU Um V VLR Traffic Channel
Full name
Time Division Multiplex Access TDM Fiber Interface board Transmitter & Receiver Time Slot
User Plane Processing Board User Plane Process Unit Um Interface
Visitor Location Register
265
266
Appendix
Value of Flow control Policy

Barre d Class Numb er 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Rxlev _ Acces s _Min 0 0 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11111 11111 11111 11111 11111 11111
Overlo ad Level 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Penal ty Time
Cell select Offset 0 0 0 -2(254) -3 (253) -4 (252) -4 (252) -3 (253) -2 (254) -1 (255) 0 0 0
Txinteg er 0 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
MaxRetrans
0 -1 (255) -2 (254) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253)
267
268
Appendix
Value of Power
GSM900 Value MS Output Power (dBm) Value GSM1800 MS Output Power (dBm)
0~2 3 4 5 16 17 18 19~31
39 37 35 33 11 9 7 5
29 30 31 0 1 13 14 15~28
36 34 32 30 28
4 2 0
269
270
Appendix
Value of Cell Layer Num
Adjacent Cell Current Cell Sectorized Cell GSM900M Macro Cell GSM900M Micro Cell GSM1800M Macro Cell GSM1800M Micro Cell Micromicro Cell
GSM Sectorized Cell 900M Macro Cell N SAME UPPER N UPPER UPPER
GSM 900M Micro Cell N LOWER SAME LOWER N N
GSM 1800M Macro Cell N N UPPER SAME UPPER UPPER
GSM 1800M Micro Cell N LOWER N LOWER SAME
Micromicro Cell N LOWER LOWER LOWER LOWER
N N N N N N
271
272
Appendix
Correlation between Parameter Interface Display and Database Value
BSC Global Resource Parameters Interface

Basic Property Parameters
Support MNC 3 digits (MNC3Digits)
Interface value displayed 2 digits 3 digits Database Value 0 1
Net Type (Net)

Interface value displayed CTCN China Mobile Communication Network (CMCN) China Unicom Communication Network (CUCN) Railway Telecom Network (RLTN) Database Value 1 2 3 4
273
Interface value displayed China Netcome (CNC) National Farm Transition Network (NFTN) Network 7 Network 8
Database Value 5 6 7 8
SP Type (SpType)
Interface value displayed Signaling End Point (SEP) Signaling transfer point (STP) Signaling terminal end point (STEP) Database Value 1 2 3
Is TC Type (TCType)
Interface value displayed Inner TC Outer TC Database Value 0 1
Global time zone (GlobalTimeZone)

Interface value displayed (GMT-12:00) Enewetak, Kwajalein Island (GMT-11:30) Midway Island, Samoan Islands (GMT-11:00) Midway Island, Samoan Islands (GMT-10:30) Hawaii (GMT-10:00) Hawaii (GMT-09:30) Alaskan (GMT-09:00) Alaskan (GMT-08:30) Western Standard Time (USA and Canada) (GMT-08:00) Western Standard Time (USA and Canada) (GMT-07:30) Arizona (GMT-07:00) Arizona (GMT-06:30) Mexico (GMT-06:00) Mexico, Saskatchewan Database Value -720 -690 -660 -630 -600 -570 -540 -510 -480 -450 -420 -390 -360
274
Appendix E - Correlation between Parameter Interface Display and Database Value
Interface value displayed (GMT-05:30) Bogota, Lima (GMT-05:00) Bogota, Lima, Eastern Standard Time (USA and Canada) (GMT-04:30) San Diego (GMT-04:00) San Diego (GMT-03:30) Newfoundlander (GMT-03:00) Brasilia, Buenos Aires (GMT-02:30) Mid-Atlantic (GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic (GMT-01:30) Cape Verde Islands, Azores Islands (GMT-01:00) Cape Verde Islands, Azores Islands (GMT-0:30) Greenwich Mean Time, London (GMT) Greenwich Mean Time, London (GMT+0:30) Greenwich Mean Time, London (GMT+01:00) Berlin, Roman, Paris (GMT+01:30) Berlin, Roman, Paris (GMT+02:00) Helsinki, Cairo, Athens (GMT+02:30) Helsinki, Cairo, Athens (GMT+03:00) Baghdad, Kuwait, Riyadh, Moscow (GMT+03:30) Teheran (GMT+04:00) Baku, Tbilisi (GMT+04:30) Kabul (GMT+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi (GMT+05:30) Calcutta, Madras, Bombay, New Delhi (GMT+06:00) Alma-ata, Dacca (GMT+06:30) Rangoon (GMT+07:00) Bangkok, Djakarta (GMT+07:30) Bangkok, Djakarta (GMT+08:00) Beijing (GMT+08:30) Beijing (GMT+09:00) Seoul, Tokyo (GMT+09:30) Adelaide, Darwin (GMT+10:00) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney, Guam (GMT+10:30) Canberra, Melbourne,
Database Value -330 -300 -270 -240 -210 -180 -150 -120 -90 -60 -30 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 360 390 420 450 480 510 540 570 600 630
275
Interface value displayed Sydney, Guam (GMT+11:00) Magadan, The Solomon Islands (GMT+11:30) Magadan, The Solomon Islands (GMT+12:00) Wellington, Marshall Islands (GMT+12:30) Wellington, Marshall Islands (GMT+13:00) Nuku'alofa
Database Value
660 690 720 750 780
Radio Basic Property Parameters

DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported (FuncExt)
Interface value displayed DCS1800 PCS1900 Database Value 0 1
MSC version ID (MSCVer)

Interface value displayed Release 98 or older Release 99 or newer Database Value
0 1
Others
Preferred speech version (half) (PreferSpeechVer) PreferSpeechVer is a field jointed by half-rate and full-rate. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shifting PreferSpeechVer PreferSpeechVer _1 = (PreferSpeechVer _0<<2)+
PreferSpeechVer _0: half-rate PreferSpeechVer _1: Full-rate
Tip: In this article, we use a formula to represent shift jointing mode. For instance, (PreferSpeechVer _0<<2)+ PreferSpeechVer _1, in which value of PreferSpeechVer_0 is shifted two bits to left and jointed with the value of PreferSpeechVer_1.
276
Interface value displayed Not specify the preferred version Half-rate version 1 Half-rate version 3
Database Value 0 1 3
Preferred speech version (full) (PreferSpeechVer) PreferSpeechVer is a field jointed by half-rate and full-rate. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shifting PreferSpeechVer PreferSpeechVer _1 = (PreferSpeechVer _0<<2)+
PreferSpeechVer _0: half-rate PreferSpeechVer _1: Full-rate

Interface value displayed Not specify the preferred version Full-rate version 1 Full-rate version 2 Full-rate version 3 Database Value 0 1 2 3
TFOControl TFOControl is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift TFOControl =(TFOControl _3<<3)+(TFOControl _2<<2)+(TFOControl _1<<1)+ TFOControl _0 TFOControl_0: TFO Enable TFOControl_1: coding/decoding type optimization enable TFOControl_2: coding/decoding type unmatched enable TFOControl_3: AMR optimization mode
AMR Half Method Parameters

Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM) IsAmrICM is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: IsAmrICM (full) + IsAmrICM (half), jointed by string.
Interface value displayed Initial codec mode Startmode codec Database Value 0 1
Start mode (AmrStartMode)
277
AmrStartMode is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrStartMode (full) + AmrStartMode (half), jointed by string. Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb) IsAmrNscb is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: IsAmrNscb (full) + IsAmrNscb (half), jointed by string. Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds) AmrThresholds is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrThresholds (full) + AmrThresholds (half), jointed by string from top to bottom. Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis) AmrHysteresis is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrHysteresis (full) + AmrHysteresis (half), jointed by string from top to bottom.
AMR Full Method Parameters

Start mode (AmrStartMode) AmrStartMode is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrStartMode (full) + AmrStartMode (half), jointed by string.
Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)

IsAmrNscb is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: IsAmrNscb (full) + IsAmrNscb (half), jointed by string. Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds) AmrThresholds is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrThresholds (full) + AmrThresholds (half), jointed by string from top to bottom. Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis) AmrHysteresis is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrHysteresis (full) + AmrHysteresis (half), jointed by string from top to bottom.
278
GPRS Property 1 Parameters

Cn CN is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom. Nn Nn is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom. Xn (%) Xn is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.

NACC supported (NACCSupport)
Interface value displayed Not support NACC Support NACC, not support LLC framework conversion Support NACC, also support LLC framework conversion Database Value 0 1 2
BSC's net operation mode (NMO)

Interface value displayed Network Operation Mode 1 Network Operation Mode 2 Network Operation Mode 3 Database Value 0 1 2
Downlink TBF retry (DITBFRetry)

Interface value displayed Not retry Retry 1 times Retry 2 times Database Value 0 1 2
EDGE Property Parameters

SGSN version ID (SGSNVer)
Interface value displayed Release 98 or older Release 99 or newer Database Value 0 1
279
R99 Ind (R99Ind)

Interface value displayed non-R99 version R99 version Database Value 0 1
GERAN External Cell Parameters

Cell type
Interface value displayed Umbrela Cell Macro Cell Macro Cell Pico Cell Extended cell Database Value 0 1 2 3 4
Frequency band (FreqBand)

Interface value displayed GSM900 EXT900 DCS1800 PCS1900 GSM850 Database Value 0 1 2 4
UTRAN External Cell Parameters

UTRAN cell type (CellTypeUTRAN)
Interface value displayed FDD TDD Database Value 0 1
UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)

Interface value displayed 0 (3.84Mcps) 1 (1.28Mcps) Database Value 0 1
280
Subcell Parameters
Basic Parameters 1
Cell type
Interface value displayed Umbrela Cell Macro Cell Macro Cell Pico Cell Extended cell Database Value 0 1 2 3 4

Interface value displayed GSM900 EXT900 DCS1800 PCS1900 GSM850 Database Value 0 1 2 4 7
Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand)

Interface value displayed GSM900 EXT900 DCS1800 PCS1900 GSM850 Database Value 0 1 2 4 7
GPRS service supported (PsSupport)

Interface value displayed Dont support GPRS GPRS service supported Support EDGE Database Value 0 1 2
Common control channel configuration (CcchConf)

Interface value displayed CCCH uses one physical channel, not combined with SDCCH CCCH uses one physical channel, combined with SDCCH Database Value 0 1
281
Interface value displayed CCCH uses two physical channels, not combined with SDCCH CCCH uses three physical channels, not combined with SDCCH CCCH uses four physical channels, not combined with SDCCH
Basic Parameters 2
AMR Codec Adjust Mode (AmrAdjMode)
Interface value displayed AMR quick rate adjustment mode Adjustment interval for configuration Database Value 0 1

Start mode (AmrStartMode) AmrStartMode is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrStartMode (full) + AmrStartMode (half), jointed by string. Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb) IsAmrNscb is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: IsAmrNscb (full) + IsAmrNscb (half), jointed by string. Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds) AmrThresholds is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrThresholds (full) + AmrThresholds (half), jointed by string from top to bottom. Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis) AmrHysteresis is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrHysteresis (full) + AmrHysteresis (half), jointed by string from top to bottom.
282

Start mode (AmrStartMode) AmrStartMode is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrStartMode (full) + AmrStartMode (half), jointed by string. Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb) IsAmrNscb is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: IsAmrNscb (full) + IsAmrNscb (half), jointed by string. Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds) AmrThresholds is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrThresholds (full) + AmrThresholds (half), jointed by string from top to bottom. Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis) AmrHysteresis is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing mode: AmrHysteresis (full) + AmrHysteresis (half), jointed by string from top to bottom.
Other Parameters
CipherMode CipherMode is a jointed field in database by CipherMode-0~ CipherMode-7. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
System Parameters
InterfBoundary InterfBoundary is a jointed field in database by InterfBoundary_0~ InterfBoundary_5. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
283

SI13 sending position (Si13Locate)
Interface value displayed BCCH Norm BCCH Ext Database Value 0 1
Packet access priority threshold (PriAcThr)

Interface value displayed Disallow packet access Allow packet access with the priority level 1 Allow packet access with the priority level 1-2 Allow packet access with the priority level 1-3 Allow packet access with the priority level 1-4 Allow priority Database Value 1 2 3 4 5 6
GPRS Cell Optional Parameters

T3168 (s)
Interface value displayed 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
T3192
Interface value displayed 500 1000 1500 0 80 120 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5
284
Interface value displayed 160 200
Database Value 6 7
DRX mode holding time (DrxTimeMax, s)

Interface value displayed Database Value
0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Packet control acknowledgment type (CtraCKType)

Interface value displayed 4 access burst RLC/MAC control block Database Value 0 1
Access burst type (AccessType)

Interface value displayed 8 bits 11 bits Database Value 0 1
N3102 decrease step (PanDec)

Interface value displayed 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
N3102 increase step (PanInc)

Interface value displayed 4 8 12 Database Value 0 1 2
285
Interface value displayed 16 20 24 28 32
Database Value 3 4 5 6 7
N3102 MAX (PanMax)

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 GPRS phone init coding
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GPRS phone init coding is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: 1*16Kbps+2~4*16Kbps jointed by string. GPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_0) InitAttachExch is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift (INITATTACHEXCH_1<<1)+INITATTACHEXCH_0). InitAttachExch_0: GPRS phones init code can be changed dynamically. InitAttachExch_1: EGPRS phones init code can be changed
GPRS NC Test Parameters

Packet Idle mode (NcRepPerI, s)
Interface value displayed 0.48 0.96 1.92 3.84 7.68 15.36 30.72 61.44 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
286
Packet transmission mode (NcRepPerT, s)

Interface value displayed 0.48 0.96 1.92 3.84 7.68 15.36 30.72 61.44 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Network control order (CtrlOrder)

Interface value displayed NC0 NC1 NC2 Database Value 0 1 2
NC hold time in non-drx mode (NcNoDrxPer, s)

Interface value displayed No non-DRX mode 0.24 0.48 0.72 0.96 1.20 1.44 1.92 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Extended measurement report order (ExMeaOrder)

Interface value displayed EM0 EM1 Database Value 0 1
Type of extended measurement report (ExtRepType)

Interface value displayed Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Database Value 0 1 2
Report period of extended measurement (ExtRepPer, s)
287
Interface value displayed 60 120 240 480 960 1920 3840 7680
Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GPRS Power Control Parameters

Power control measurement channel (PcMeasChan)
Interface value displayed BCCH PDCH Database Value 0 1
GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters

Reselection offset (ReselOffset) ReselOffset is a jointed field in database by ReselOff_0 and ReselOff_0. Jointing mode: ReselOff_0 + ReselOff_1 jointed by string. Reselection temporary offset (TempOffset, dB) TempOffset is a jointed field in database by TempOffset_0 and TempOffset_1. Jointing mode: TempOffset_0+ TempOffset_1 jointed by string.
Interface value displayed 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Large infinite Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime, 10s)
288
PenalTime is a jointed field in database by PenalTime_0 and PenalTime_1. Jointing mode: PenalTime_0 + PenalTime_1 jointed by string. Interval of reselecting the same cell (T_RESEL, s) T_RESEL is a jointed field in database by T_RESEL_0 and T_RESEL_1. Jointing mode: T_RESEL_0 + T_RESEL_1 jointed by string.
Interface value displayed 5 10 15 20 30 60 120 300 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_THR) HCS_THR is a jointed field in database by HCS_THR_0 and HCS_THR_1. Jointing mode: HCS_THR_0+HCS_THR_1 jointed by string. HCS priority (PrioClass) PrioClass is a jointed field in database by PrioClass_0 and PrioClass_1. Jointing mode: PrioClass_0+PrioClass_1 jointed by string. C31 hysteresis (C31_HYST) C31_HYST is a jointed field in database by C31_HYST_0 and C31_HYST_1. Jointing mode: C31_HYST_0+C31_HYST_1 jointed by string. GPRS cell reselection hysteresis (ReselHys, dB) ReselHys is a jointed field in database by ReselHys_0 and ReselHys_1. Jointing mode: ReselHys_0+ReselHys_1 jointed by string. Routing reselection hysteresis (RaReselHys, dB) RaReselHys is a jointed field in database by RaReselHys_0 and RaReselHys_1. Jointing mode: RaReselHys_0+RaReselHys_1 jointed by string. Random access attempt permitted (RadAcRetry) RadAcRetry is a jointed field in database by RadAcRetry_0 and RadAcRetry_1. Jointing mode: RadAcRetry_0+RadAcRetry_1 jointed by string. Usage of cell reselection offset (C32_QUAL)
289
C32_QUAL is a jointed field in database by C32_QUAL_0 and C32_QUAL_1. Jointing mode: C32_QUAL_0+C32_QUAL_1 jointed by string. GPRS access minimum signal level (RxLevAsMin) RxLevAsMin is a jointed field in database by RxLevAsMin_0 and RxLevAsMin_1. Jointing mode: RxLevAsMin_0+RxLevAsMin_1 jointed by string. HCS exist (HCS_EXIST) HCS_EXIST is a jointed field in database by HCS_EXIST_0 and HCS_EXIST_1. Jointing mode: HCS_EXIST_0+HCS_EXIST_1 jointed by string. GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCch) MsTxMaxCch is a jointed field in database by MsTxMaxCch_0 and MsTxMaxCch_1. Jointing mode: MsTxMaxCch_0+MsTxMaxCch_1 jointed by string.
GPRS Channel Parameters

Interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt)
Interface value displayed 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 20 25 32 50 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Interval period of packet access attempt (S)

Interface value displayed 12 Database Value 0
290
Interface value displayed 15 20 30 41 55 76 109 163 217
Database Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MAX Times of Attempt (MaxRetrans) MaxRetrans is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
1 2 4 7 Access Control Level (AccCtrlClass)
0 1 2 3
AccCtrlClass is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom. Access Persist Level (PersistLev) PersistLev is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.

EGPRS Phone Init Coding It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
Interface value displayed MCS1 MCS2 MCS3 MCS4 MCS5 MCS6 MCS7 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
291
Interface value displayed MCS8 MCS9
Database Value 7 8
Subcell Object Parameters

TRX Parameters
TRX Type (TrxType)
Interface value displayed Common TRX Extended TRX Database Value 0 1
Static power level (PwRreduction)

Interface value displayed Max output power Max output power -2dB Max output power -4dB Max output power -6dB Max output power -8dB Max output power -10dB Max output power -12dB Max output power +1.5dB Max output power +1dB Max output power +0.5dB Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 253 254 255
Channel Information Parameters

TsChannelComb
Interface value displayed TCH/F TCH/H (0, 1)+FACCH/H (0, 1)+SACCH/TH (0, 1) TCH/H (0, 0)+FACCH/H (0, 1)+SACCH/TH (0, 1)+TCH/H (0, 1) SDCCH/8+SACCH/C8 FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH BCCH+SDCCH/4 Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5
292
Interface value displayed BCCH+CCCH BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH SDCCH+CBCH PBCCH+ PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH;
Database Value 6 7 8 12 13 14
Ps Service Preference property

Interface value displayed No preference GPRS Preference EDGE Preference EDGE specialty Database Value 255 0 1 2
Power Control Parameters

Power control PwrDecrLimit It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom. Increase uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. Decrease uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. Increase uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. Decrease uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. Increase downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. Decrease downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
293
It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. Increase downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. Decrease downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. FR Power increasing step (db) (PWRINCSTEP_0) PWRINCSTEP is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. FR Power decreasing step (db) (PWRREDSTEP_0) PWRREDSTEP is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax) MsTxPwrMax is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. MIN power level of MS (MsTxPwrMin) MsTxPwrMin is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. MIN power level of BS (BsTxPwrMin) BsTxPwrMin is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR. MIN interval of power control (PcMinInterval) PcMinInterval is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR.
Handover Control Parameters

Frequency control (TrafficHoFreqrCtl) value for handover on traffic
Interface value displayed GSM900 EXT900
Database Value 0 1
294
Interface value displayed DCS1800 PCS1900 GSM850
HoPatternInd HoPatternInd is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift. HoPatternInd=(HoPatternInd4<<3)+(HoPatternInd3<<2)+( HoPatternInd2<<1)+ HoPatternInd1 HoPatternInd1: synchronization handover HoPatternInd2: Asynchronization handover HoPatternInd3: Pseudo-synchronization handover HoPatternInd4: Pre-synchronization handover HoControl HoControl is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift. HoControl=(HoControl18<<17)+(HoControl17<<16)+(HoCo ntrol16<<15)+(HoControl15<<14)+(HoControl14<<13)+(H oControl13<<12)+(HoControl12<<11)+(HoControl11<<10) +(HoControl10<<9)+(HoControl9<<8)+(HoControl8<<7)+( HoControl7<<6)+(HoControl6<<5)+(HoControl5<<4)+(HoC ontrol4<<3)+(HoControl3<<2)+(HoControl2<<1)+HoContr ol1 HoControl1: Allow SDCCH handover HoControl2: Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to uplink interference HoControl3: Allow inter-cell downlink interference handover attempt due to
HoControl4: Allow handover due to distance HoControl5: Allow standard PBGT handover HoControl6: Allow automatic handover based on traffic HoControl7: Allow handover based on direction HoControl8: Allow handover based on homocentric circularity HoControl9: Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference HoControl10: Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference HoControl11: Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT HoControl12: Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority HoControl13: Allow rapid handover
295
HoControl14: Allow Macro-Micro delay handover HoControl15: Allow Micro-Macro delay handover HoControl16: Allow internal handover based on TA HoControl17: Allow force transfer handover HoControl18: Subcell handover algorithm Subcell handover algorithm (HoControl18)
Interface value displayed Concentric handover Path loss and TA handover Database Value 0 1
UTRAN Cell Control Parameters

Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell (Qsearch_P) Qsearch_P is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: Qsearch_P_0+Qsearch_P_1 jointed by string. Qsearch_P_0: idle Qsearch_P_1: packet transmission FDD GPRS reselection offset (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset) FDD_GPRS_Qoffset is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0+ FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1 jointed by string. FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0: Idle FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1: packet transmission TDD GPRS reselection offset (TDD_GPRS_Qoffset) TDD_GPRS_Qoffset is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0+ TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1 jointed by string. TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0: Idle TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1: packet transmission PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_QminPS) FDD_QminPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: FDD_QminPS_0+ FDD_QminPS_1 jointed by string. FDD_QminPS_0: Idle FDD_QminPS_1: packet transmission Offset of FDD_QminPS (FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS) FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_0+FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_1 jointed by string.
296
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_0: idle FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_1: packet transmission PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_RSCPminPS) FDD_RSCPminPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: FDD_RSCPminPS_0+FDD_RSCPminPS_1 jointed by string. FDD_RSCPminPS_0: Idle FDD_RSCPminPS_1: Packet transmission Measurement report (FDDRprtTho2PS) threshold of Ec/No or RSCP
FDDRprtTho2PS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: FDDRprtTho2PS_0+FDDRprtTho2PS_1 jointed by string. FDDRprtTho2PS_0: Idle FDDRprtTho2PS_1: Packet transmission
UTRAN Handover Control Parameters

UTRAN handover (ServiceHo)
Interface value displayed Prefer to UTRAN handover Don't prefer to UTRAN handover Disallow UTRAN handover According to MSC, default handover to UTRAN first According to MSC, default don't prefer to UTRAN handover According to MSC, default disallow UTRAN handover Database Value 0 1 2 3 4 5
FDD/TDD handover (FDD/TDDPrio)

Interface value displayed Handover to FDD cell should be preferred. Prefer to TDD handover Database Value 0 1
Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

Interface value displayed Undefined At same layer as this cell Database Value 0 1
297
Interface value displayed At upper layer of this cell At lower layer of this cell
Database Value 2 3
Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

Interface value displayed Undefined At same layer as this cell At upper layer of this cell At lower layer of this cell Database Value 0 1 2 3
Frequency Hopping System Parameters

Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)
Interface value displayed Baseband freqhop RFFH Database Value 1 2
298
Appendix
Figures
Figure 1 - TRX Parameters ...................................................2 Figure 2 - Channel Information Parameters ............................9 Figure 3 - IP Information Parameters .................................. 17 Figure 4 - Carrier Panel Parameters..................................... 20 Figure 5 - Power Control Parameters ................................... 23 Figure 6 - Power Measurement Parameters .......................... 26 Figure 7- Power Adjust Threshold Parameters ....................... 35 Figure 8 Other Parameters ............................................... 43 Figure 9- GPRS Power Control Parameters............................ 49 Figure 10- Handover Pretreatment Parameters ..................... 54 Figure 11- Handover Threashold Parameters ........................ 65 Figure 12- Handover Condition Parameters .......................... 77 Figure 13- Handover Control Parameters ............................. 84 Figure 14- Other Parameters.............................................. 94 Figure 15- Handover algorithm Parameters ........................ 101 Figure 16- Subcell Parameters.......................................... 116 Figure 17 -BASIC PROPERTY 1 PARAMETERS ...................... 121 Figure 18 - BASIC PROPERTY 2 PARAMETERS ..................... 128 Figure 19- BASIC PROPERTY 1 PARAMETERS ...................... 136 Figure 20-BASIC PROPERTY 2 PARAMETERS ....................... 145 Figure 21 - GPRS Property 1 Parameters............................ 160 Figure 22 - GPRS Property 2 Parameters............................ 173 Figure 23- Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters................ 184 Figure 24 - Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters ................................................................................... 186 Figure 25 - Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters .................. 201
299
Figure 26 - Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters ................ 213 Figure 27 - UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters.................................................................... 216 Figure 28 - UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters ........ 222 Figure 29 - UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters ..... 226 Figure 30 - Frequency Hopping System Parameters ............. 230 Figure 31 -peration Control Parameters ............................. 235 Figure 32 - FUC parameters ............................................. 236 Figure 33 - Handover parameters of BCCH and SD .............. 241 Figure 34 - Other Parameters........................................... 249 Figure 35 -IBS Parameters............................................... 258
300
Tables
Table 1 - Manual Summary .................................................. ii Table 2 - Typographical Conventions .................................... iii Table 3 - Mouse Operation Conventions ................................ iv Table 4 - TRX ID ................................................................2 Table 5 - SubCell ID............................................................3 Table 6 - TRX Type .............................................................3 Table 7 - Priority ................................................................4 Table 8 - carrier frequency...................................................5 Table 9 - Static power level..................................................5 Table 10 - Power level.........................................................6 Table 11 - Support Fhs........................................................7 Table 12 - Frequency ..........................................................7 Table 13 - ARFCN List .........................................................8 Table 14 - Ts No.................................................................9 Table 15 - TsChannelComb ................................................ 10 Table 16 - TSC ................................................................. 12 Table 17 - MAIO ............................................................... 13 Table 18 - Dynamic ts ....................................................... 13 Table 19 - Ps Service Preference property ............................ 14 Table 20 - PDCH Priority .................................................... 15 Table 21 - TSC ................................................................. 15 Table 22 - PDCH............................................................... 16 Table 23 - Bipb Unit .......................................................... 17 Table 24 - DspSunit .......................................................... 18 Table 25 - DspMarkSeq ..................................................... 18 Table 26 - PortNo ............................................................. 19 Table 27 - Working modes ................................................. 20 Table 28 - Delayed transmitting number .............................. 21 Table 29 - use IRC............................................................ 22 Table 30 - Carrier support antenna jumping ......................... 22
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 301
Table 31 - Uplink rapid power control indication .................... 24 Table 32 - Downlink rapid power control indication ................ 24 Table 33 - Power control PwrDecrLimit ................................ 25 Table 34 - Report period of measurement for power control.... 26 Table 35 - Uplink power level ............................................. 27 Table 36 - Uplink level Weight ............................................ 27 Table 37 - Downlink power level ......................................... 28 Table 38 - Downlink level Weight ........................................ 29 Table 39 - Uplink quality level ............................................ 30 Table 40 - Uplink quality Weight ......................................... 31 Table 41 - Downlink quality level ........................................ 32 Table 42 - Downlink quality Weight ..................................... 33 Table 43 - Increase uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N ..................................................................................... 35 Table 44 - Increase downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N ................................................................................... 36 Table 45 - Decrease uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N ..................................................................................... 37 Table 46 - Decrease downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N........................................................................... 38 Table 47 - Increase uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N ................................................................................... 39 Table 48 - Increase downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N........................................................................... 40 Table 49 - Decrease uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N ................................................................................... 40 Table 50 - Decrease downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N........................................................................... 41 Table 51 - FR Power increasing step (db) ............................ 43 Table 52 - FR Power decreasing step ................................... 44 Table 53 - Uplink power control allowed............................... 44 Table 54 - Downlink power control allowed........................... 45 Table 55 - MAX power level of MS ....................................... 45 Table 56 - MIN power level of MS ....................................... 46 Table 57 - MIN power level of BS ........................................ 47 Table 58 - MIN interval of power control .............................. 48 Table 59 Receive Power Strength from MS Needed .............. 50 Table 60 - Uplink power control strategy.............................. 50 Table 61 - Downlink power control strategy.......................... 51
302
Appendix F - Tables
Table 62 - Downlink Power Control Mode ............................. 51 Table 63 - Power Control Level ........................................... 52 Table 64 - Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in A mode ...... 53 Table 65 - Number of zero allowed in AV.............................. 54 Table 66 - Uplink power level ............................................. 55 Table 67 - Uplink level Weight ............................................ 56 Table 68 - Downlink power level ......................................... 57 Table 69 - Downlink level Weight ........................................ 58 Table 70 - Uplink quality level ............................................ 59 Table 71 - Uplink quality Weight ......................................... 60 Table 72 - Downlink quality level ........................................ 61 Table 73 - Downlink quality Weight ..................................... 62 Table 74 - Distance........................................................... 63 Table 75 - Neighboring cell ................................................ 64 Table 76 - Uplink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P .... 65 Table 77 - Downlink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P 66 Table 78 - Uplink receive quality Threshold, Value N, Value P.. 67 Table 79 - Downlink receive quality Threshold, Value N, Value P ..................................................................................... 68 Table 80 - Intra-handover uplink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P ....................................................................... 70 Table 81 - Intra-handover downlink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P............................................................... 71 Table 82- Good C/I Threshold, Value N, Value P.................... 72 Table 83 - Bad C/I Threshold, Value N, Value P..................... 73 Table 84 - Rapid handover Threshold / Value N..................... 74 Table 85 - Macro-micro handover Threshold / Value N ........... 75 Table 86 - Distance handover value N / Value P .................... 76 Table 87 - PBGT handover Value N/Value P .......................... 76 Table 88 - Max Time Advance Threshold between MS and BTS 77 Table 89 - MIN interval between inter-cell handover .............. 78 Table 90 - Prior layer selecting parameter on signal level/quality ..................................................................................... 79 Table 91 - Layer adapting to PBGT handover (PbgtHolayer) .... 81 Table 92 - Synchronization ................................................ 81 Table 93 - Asynchronization ............................................... 82 Table 94 - Pseudo-synchronization...................................... 82 Table 95 - Pre-synchronization ........................................... 83
303
Table 96 - Allow SDCCH handover ...................................... 84 Table 97 - Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to uplink interference..................................................................... 85 Table 98 - Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to downlink interference..................................................................... 85 Table 99 - Allow handover due to distance ........................... 86 Table 100 - Allow standard PBGT handover .......................... 86 Table 101 - Allow automatic handover based on traffic .......... 87 Table 102 - Allow handover based on direction ..................... 87 Table 103 - Allow handover based on homocentric circularity.. 88 Table 104 -Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference........................................................ 88 Table 105 - Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference ........................................................ 89 Table 106 - Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT .................................................................... 90 Table 107 - Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority .... 90 Table 108 - Allow rapid handover........................................ 91 Table 109 - Allow Macro-Micro delay handover .................... 91 Table 110 - Allow Micro-Macro delay handover ..................... 92 Table 111 - Allow internal handover based on TA .................. 92 Table 112 - Allow force transfer handover ............................ 93 Table 113 - Penalty time for handover failure ....................... 94 Table 114 - Difference of dynamic priority............................ 95 Table 115 - PBGT difference............................................... 95 Table 116 - Layer control value for handover on traffic .......... 96 Table 117 - Frequency control value for handover on traffic.... 97 Table 118 - Threshold of traffic for handover ........................ 98 Table 119 - Lag time for PBGT between different layers ......... 99 Table 120 - Level offset for PBGT to up layer ........................ 99 Table 121- Level offset for PBGT to low layer...................... 100 Table 122 - Traffic handover threshold .............................. 101 Table 123 - Level offset during penalty .............................. 102 Table 124 - Uplink interference quality offset...................... 102 Table 125 - Uplink interference level offset......................... 103 Table 126 - Downlink interference quality offset.................. 104 Table 127 - Downlink interference level offset .................... 105 Table 128 - Invalid intra-handover time............................. 106
304
Appendix F - Tables
Table 129 - MAX count of invalid intra-handover ................. 107 Table 130- MAX path loss threshold on force handover ........ 108 Table 131 - MAX time advance threshold on force handover . 110 Table 132 - N value of force handover ............................... 112 Table 133 -P value of force handover ................................ 114 Table 134 - Dual band power offset................................... 116 Table 135 - The MAX of path loss...................................... 117 Table 136 - The MIN of path loss ...................................... 117 Table 137 - The MAX of time advance................................ 118 Table 138 - The MIN of time advance ................................ 118 Table 139 -1 N value of subcell handover........................... 119 Table 140 - P value of subcell handover ............................. 119 Table 141 - Subcell handover algorithm ............................. 120 Table 142 - Punishment period of UTRAN cell when handover failure........................................................................... 121 Table 143 - Slide window size for calculating Ec/No or RSCP average value to be zero ................................................. 122 Table 144- Number that measurement value allowed to be zero ................................................................................... 123 Table 145 - UTRAN handover ........................................... 123 Table 146 - FDD/TDD handover ........................................ 124 Table 147 - Threshold for load sharing............................... 125 Table 148 - Ec/No threshold when handover from GSM to 3G for load sharing .................................................................. 126 Table 149 - RSCP threshold when handover from GSM to TDD for load sharing.............................................................. 126 Table 150 - Inter system handover supported .................... 128 Table 151 - Directed retry to UTRAN cell allowed................. 129 Table 152 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Threshold ...................................................................... 129 Table 153 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value N ................................................................................... 130 Table 154 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value P ................................................................................... 131 Table 155 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Threshold ................................................................................... 131 Table 156 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value N ................................................................................... 132 Table 157 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value P ................................................................................... 133
305
Table 158 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Threshold ................................................................................... 133 Table 159 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value N ................................................................................... 134 Table 160 - Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value P ................................................................................... 135 Table 161 - Channel location of si2quater broadcast ............ 136 Table 162 - CS measurement type reported by UE .............. 137 Table 163 - Measurement threshold of UE performing UTRAN cell reselection .................................................................... 138 Table 164 - Threshold when UE performs search under specialized mode ............................................................ 139 Table 165 - Initial parameter instead of qsearch_c before UE receiving qsearch_C........................................................ 139 Table 166 - CS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report ........................................................................... 140 Table 167 - CS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells ............................................................................. 141 Table 168 - MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell................. 141 Table 169 - CS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report ....................................................... 142 Table 170 - FDD Reselection offset.................................... 143 Table 171 - Require UE to send UTRAN classmark change message early ............................................................... 144 Table 172 CS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell .. 145 Table 173 - CS Multiband report indication ......................... 146 Table 174 - CS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value ............................................................................ 147 Table 175 - TDD reselection offset .................................... 148 Table 176 - CS MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells in measurement report ....................................................... 148 Table 177 - CS UE report invalid cell level allowed............... 149 Table 178 - CS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication ............................................................. 150 Table 179 - GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 150 Table 180 - GSM 850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold ...................................................................... 151 Table 181 - GSM900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 152 Table 182 GSM900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level...... 153
306
Appendix F - Tables
Table 183- GSM1800M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 154 Table 184 - GSM1800M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold ...................................................................... 154 Table 185- GSM1900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 155 Table 186 - GSM1900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold ...................................................................... 156 Table 187- Table0-2 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset .................................................................... 157 Table 188 - UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold ...................................................................... 157 Table 189 - UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ........................................................................... 158 Table 190 - UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold ...................................................................... 159 Table 191 - PS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value ............................................................................ 160 Table 192 - CS measurement type reported by UE .............. 161 Table 193 - PS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report ........................................................................... 162 Table 194 - PS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell . 163 Table 195 - Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell .................................................................... 163 Table 196 - FDD GPRS reselection offset ............................ 164 Table 197 - TDD GPRS reselection offset............................ 165 Table 198 - PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell ............ 166 Table 199 - Offset of FDD_QminPS.................................... 166 Table 200 - PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell ............. 167 Table 201 - Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP 168 Table 202 - PS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells ............................................................................. 169 Table 203 - PS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report ....................................................... 169 Table 204- PS Multiband report indication .......................... 170 Table 205 - PS MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells in measurement report ....................................................... 172 Table 206 - PS UE report invalid cell level allowed ............... 174 Table 207 - PS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication ............................................................. 174 Table 208 - GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 175
307
Table 209 - GSM 850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold ...................................................................... 176 Table 210 - GSM900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 176 Table 211 GSM900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold ...................................................................... 177 Table 212 - GSM1800M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 178 Table 213 - GSM1800M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold ...................................................................... 179 Table 214 - GSM1900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 179 Table 215 - GSM1900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold ...................................................................... 180 Table 216- UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ................................................................................... 181 Table 217 - UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold ...................................................................... 182 Table 218 - UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset ........................................................................... 182 Table 219 - UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold ...................................................................... 183 Table 220 - Interference cell No. ...................................... 184 Table 221 - Related cell DN.............................................. 185 Table 222 - User Label .................................................... 186 Table 223 - Adjacent cell reselection and handover ID ......... 187 Table 224 - Priority of handover ....................................... 187 Table 225 - MAX power level of MS ................................... 188 Table 226 - MIN power level for handover access ................ 189 Table 227 - MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT ................................................................................... 190 Table 228 - MIN threshold of signal level for handover on power level ............................................................................. 191 Table 229 - MIN threshold of signal level for handover on quality ................................................................................... 191 Table 230 - MAX level difference of force handover ............. 192 Table 231 - Handover force resource threshold ................... 193 Table 232 - Neighboring cell layer..................................... 193 Table 233 - CS adjacent cell report priority ........................ 194 Table 234 - PS adjacent cell report priority......................... 196 Table 235 - Related cell DN.............................................. 198
308
Appendix F - Tables
Table 236 - Is related cell ................................................ 198 Table 237 - Is handover forced neighbor cell ...................... 199 Table 238 - Is support CCN mode ..................................... 200 Table 239 - Adjacent cell handover object ID...................... 201 Table 240 - Priority of handover ....................................... 202 Table 241 - MAX power level of MS ................................... 202 Table 242 - MIN power level for handover access ................ 203 Table 243 - MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT ................................................................................... 205 Table 244 - MIN threshold of signal level for handover on power level ............................................................................. 205 Table 245 - MIN threshold of signal level for handover on quality ................................................................................... 206 Table 246 - MAX level difference of force handover ............. 207 Table 247 - Handover force resource threshold ................... 208 Table 248 - Neighboring cell layer..................................... 208 Table 249 - CS adjacent cell report priority ........................ 209 Table 250 - Is related cell ................................................ 211 Table 251 - Is handover forced neighbor cell ...................... 211 Table 252 - Related cell DN.............................................. 212 Table 253 - Adjacent cell reselection object ID.................... 213 Table 254- Adjacent cell report priority .............................. 213 Table 255 - Is support CCN mode ..................................... 214 Table 256 - Related cell DN.............................................. 215 Table 257 -3 User Label .................................................. 216 Table 258 - Adjacent UTRAN cell handover and reselection object ID ................................................................................ 217 Table 259- RSCP offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell ..... 217 Table 260 - Ec/No offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell.... 218 Table 261- CS adjacent cell report priority ......................... 218 Table 262 - PS adjacent cell report priority......................... 220 Table 263 - Is support CCN mode ..................................... 220 Table 264 - Relation DN .................................................. 221 Table 265 - UTRAN HO ID................................................ 222 Table 266 - RSCP offset handover..................................... 223 Table 267 - Ec/No offset handover .................................... 223 Table 268 - CS adjacent cell report priority ........................ 224 Table 269 - Relation DN .................................................. 226
309
Table 270- UTRAN Adjacent cell reselection object ID .......... 227 Table 271 - CS adjacent cell report priority ........................ 227 Table 272 - Is support CCN mode ..................................... 229 Table 273 - Relation DN .................................................. 229 Table 274 - Frequency hopping No.................................... 230 Table 275 - Hopping sequence No..................................... 231 Table 276 - Frequency hopping mode ................................ 232 Table 277 - MA frequency list. .......................................... 232 Table 278 - Use system message method when MSC overload or link block ...................................................................... 236 Table 279 - Start system message method ........................ 237 Table 280 - Start Limit .................................................... 238 Table 281 - Start FUC flow control .................................... 238 Table 282 - Start Limit .................................................... 239 Table 283 - The MAX control level for MSC overload or link block ................................................................................... 240 Table 284 - Accept flow control ........................................ 240 Table 285 - handover BCCH ............................................. 241 Table 286 - Dynamic config SDCCH................................... 242 Table 287 - Scan SDCCH................................................. 243 Table 288 - Scan BCCH................................................... 243 Table 289 -1 BCCH starting delay ..................................... 244 Table 290 - BCCH finishing delay ...................................... 245 Table 291 - Delay of TRX forcible release ........................... 245 Table 292- Delay of TS forcible release .............................. 246 Table 293 - Delay protection............................................. 246 Table 294 - TCH->SDCCH limit......................................... 247 Table 295 - SDCCH->TCH delay ....................................... 248 Table 296 - The MAX cells' amount of simultaneously handover ................................................................................... 248 Table 297 - B2 support AMR ............................................ 249 Table 298 - CHR Enable................................................... 250 Table 299 - MR server IP ................................................. 251 Table 300 - MR server port .............................................. 251 Table 301 - Support NC2 ................................................. 252 Table 302 - BER Weight .................................................. 252 Table 303 - FER Weight................................................... 253
310
Appendix F - Tables
Table 304 - Handover frequence weight............................. 253 Table 305 - DTX Weight .................................................. 254 Table 306- Coding decode weight ..................................... 254 Table 307 - Abis transmission error code weight ................. 255 Table 308 - Delay weight................................................. 256 Table 309 - Resource block threshold at A interface............. 256 Table 310 - NSVC resource block threshold ........................ 257 Table 311 - Channel resource block threshold..................... 257 Table 312 - IBS Shutdown Limit ....................................... 258 Table 313 - IBS powerup Limit ......................................... 259 Table 314 - IBS powerover limit ....................................... 260 Table 315 - IBS power priority.......................................... 260 Table 316 - IBS time bitmap ............................................ 261 Table 317 - BCCH forbbiden TS merger time bitmap ............ 261
311
312
Index
Abbreviations ................... 263 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters .. 185 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters................... 200 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters................... 212 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters................... 184 Basic properties 1 ...... 121, 136 Basic properties 2 ...... 127, 144 Basic Property Parameters.. 273 BS Parameters.................. 258 BSC Global Resource Parameters Interface ..... 273 Carrier Panel Parameters...... 19 Cell Object Parameters ..........1 Channel Information Parameters.......................9 Correlation between Parameter Interface Display and Database Value ............. 273 Frequency Hopping System Parameters................... 231 FUC Parameters ................ 236 GPRS Parameters 1 ........... 160 GPRS Parameters 2 ........... 173 GPRS Power Control ............ 49 Handover Algorithm........... 101 Handover Condition ............. 77 Handover Control ................ 83 Handover Control Parameters53 Handover parameters of BCCH and SD ........................ 241 Handover Pretreatmen......... 54 Handover Threshold ............ 65 IP INFORMATION PARAMETERS .................................... 16 Module Parameters ........... 235 Operation Control Parameters .................................. 235 Other Parameters ............. 249 Others .............................. 93 Power Adjust Threshold ....... 34 Power Control Parameters .... 23 Power Survey..................... 26 Radio Basic Property Parameters .................. 276 Subcell Object Parameters . 292 Subcell Parameters ........... 116 TRX Parameters.................... 1 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters .................................. 215 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters .................. 222 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters .. 227 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters .................................. 136 Value of Cell Layer Num..... 271 Value of Flow control Policy 267 Value of Power ................. 269 ZXG10 NetNumen-G............... i
313

Radio Parameters Manual (Volume I)
Version 6.20
Revision History Date Nov 30, 2008 Apr 24, 2009 Revision No. R1.0 R1.1 Serial No. sjzl20083219 sjzl20083219 Reason for Issue First edition Updated

ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Radio Parameters Manual (Volume I)
Contents
Purpose ................................................................................ i Intended Audience ................................................................. i Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge .............................................. i What Is in This Manual ........................................................... i Related Documentation.......................................................... ii Conventions ........................................................................ iii How to Get in Touch............................................................. iv
Chapter 1.......................................................................... 1 Overview .......................................................................... 1

Radio Parameters in GSM Network........................................... 1 Methods to Modify Radio Parameters ....................................... 2 Format to Describe Radio Parameters ...................................... 8 Precautions in Radio Parameters Adjustment............................. 9
Chapter 2........................................................................ 11 Public Resource Radio Parameters ............................... 11

GERAN Subnetwork Parameters ............................................ 11 BSC Managed Element Parameters ........................................ 13 Configuration Set Parameters ............................................... 18
Chapter 3........................................................................ 21 BSC System Radio Parameters...................................... 21

BSC Global Resource Parameters..................................... 21
Basic Property Parameters ................................................... 21 Radio Basic Property Parameters ........................................... 39 Others............................................................................... 51 Function Parameters............................................................ 64 Timer 1 ............................................................................. 71 Timer 2 parameter .............................................................. 88
GPRS Max Retrying Times................................................... 107 GPRS Timer Parameters ..................................................... 116 AMR Half Method Parameters .............................................. 132 AMR Full Method Parameters............................................... 138 GPRS Property 1 Parameters............................................... 144 GPRS Property 2 Parameters............................................... 154 BVC Flow Control Parameters .............................................. 163 FUC Flow Control Map Parameter ......................................... 171 EDGE Property Parameters ................................................. 176 IP INFORMATION PARAMETERS ........................................... 183 Timer parameters at Ater interface ...................................... 196 GERAN External Cell Parameters.......................................... 203 GPRS Property Parameters ................................................. 212 UTRAN External Cell Parameters .......................................... 227
Appendix A ...................................................................237 Abbreviations ...............................................................237 Appendix B ...................................................................241 Figures..........................................................................241 Tables ...........................................................................243 Index ............................................................................253
About This Manual

Purpose
Intended Audience


Section Chapter 1, Overview
Summary Introduces the definition and classification of radio parameters in GSM network, radio resource management and precautions in radio parameters adjustment. Introduces a series of parameters of GERAN subnetwork, BSC managed element and configuration set. Introduces a series of relevant parameters of BTS, BSC, external cell and UTRAN external cell. Lists all the abbreviations used in this manual. Lists all the figures and tables appeared in this manual. Lists all the index appeared in this manual.
Chapter 2, Public Resource Radio Parameters Chapter 3, BSC System Radio Parameters Appendix A, Abbreviations Appendix B Figures and Tables Index
The following documents are related to this manual: ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Documentation Guide ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Alarm Handling Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Notification Handling Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem OMM Software Installation Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Configuration Manual (Initial Configuration Guide) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Configuration Manual (Function Configuration Guide) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem MML Command Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Parameters Manual (Volume II) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Parameters Manual (Volume III) Subsystem Subsystem Radio Radio
ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Diagnostic Test) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Signaling Tracing)
ii
About This Manual
ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume I ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume II ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume III
Conventions
TABLE 3- MOUSE OPERATION CONVENTIONS
Meaning Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once. Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice. Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once. Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and
iii
Typeface
Meaning moving the mouse.
How to Get in Touch

iv
Chapter
Overview
This chapter explains the definition and classification of radio parameters in GSM network, modification methods of radio parameters, explanation format of radio parameters, and precautions in radio parameters adjustment.
Radio Parameters in GSM Network

GSM is an integrated system covering fields of network technology, digital stored program control technology, all transmission technologies and radio technologies. GSM consists of Network Sub System (NSS), Base Station Subsystem (BSS) and Mobile Station (MS). GSM system signaling structure covers MAP interface, A interface (between MSC and BSC), Abis interface (between BSC and BTS), Ater interface (between BSC and external TC) and Um interface (between BTS and MS, also called air interface). All these objects and interfaces contain large quantity of configuration parameters and performance parameters, some of which are determined during the development and production of the equipment, and most of which depend on actual need and operation by network providers. Settings and adjustment of latter parameters have a great impact on the operation of entire GSM network. Radio parameters in GSM network refer to parameters related to radio devices and radio resources. These parameters have an important impact on coverage of cells, distribution of signaling flow and service property of network, etc. Therefore, adjusting radio parameters reasonably plays a very important part in GSM network optimization. GSM radio parameters are classified into project parameters and resource (cell) parameters. 1. Project Parameters
Project parameters refer to parameters related to design, installation, and commissioning of the project, like antenna height, antenna direction, antenna gain, antenna download obliquity and cable loss, etc. These parameters must be determined during network design and are seldom changed during the operation of the network. 2. Resource (Cell) Parameters Resource (cell) parameters refer to parameters related to configuration and utilization of radio resources, which usually transmit on radio interface (Um) to keep the base station and mobile station consistent. Radio parameters covered in this manual are mainly resource parameters. Radio resource parameters in BSS contain: GERAN subnet parameters, BSC management NE parameters, configuration set parameters; Global resource parameters for BSC, site parameters, GERAN external cell parameters, UTRAN external cell parameters; Cell Parameters; TRX parameters, power control parameters, handover control parameters, UTRAN handover control parameters, adjacent interference cell parameters, adjacent handover cell parameters, adjacent reselection cell parameters, adjacent handover and reselection cell parameters, UTRAN adjacent cell handover and reselection parameters, UTRAN adjacent handover cell parameters, UTRAN adjacent reselection cell parameters, frequency hopping system parameters.
Methods to Modify Radio Parameters

After successfully login NetNumen M31, user can perform the following steps: 1. In left topology tree of NetNumen M31 main interface, rightclick shortcut menu corresponding to NE agent by created GSM, select [Start NE Agent], as shown in Figure 1.
Chapter 1 - Overview
FIGURE 1 - SELECT START NE AGENT
2. Click [Start NE Agent], the system automatically starts this NE. 3. After starting, in left topology tree of NetNumen M31 main interface, right-click shortcut menu corresponding to NE agent by created GSM, select [NE Management Configuration Management], as shown in Figure 2.
FIGURE 2 - SELECT [NE M ANAGEMENTCONFIGURATION M AN AGEMENT]
1 Click [Configuration Management], the system enters into configuration management interface, as shown in Figure 3.
FIGURE 3 - CONFIGURATION M AN AGEMENT INTERFACE
The tree in the left pane shows the objects to be created and maintained. User can double click the nodes that its parameters shall be modified, corresponding parameter interface occurs in right window.
2 Under initial case, [Modify] shortcut button in configuration management object toolbar is inactivated, which can not be modified. User shall activate this button by the action of "Apply Mutex Right". Note: "Apply Mutex Right" function is to avoid multiple clients do actions for the data, which may cause data confused and errors. Take the data modification of primary configuration set as an example, specific steps as follows: i. Right-click [BSC Management NE ID], select [Apply Mutex Right] in pull-down menu, as shown in Figure 4.
FIGURE 4 - SELECT [APPLY MUTEX RIGHT]
ii. Click [Apply Mutex Right], [Prompt] dialog box pops up, as shown in Figure 5.
FIGURE 5 - [PROMPT] DIALOG BOX
iii. Click <Yes> button, Apply Mutex Right is successful, symbol occurs in topology tree, as shown in Figure 6. At this time, shortcut key is activated, and the user can modify configuration data under this management NE.
FIGURE 6 - SUCCESSFUL APPLY MUTEX RIGHT
iv. After modifying data, user shall right-click [BSC Management NE ID], select [Apply Mutex Right] in pulldown menu, as shown in Figure 7. After the permission is released, other user can operate the configuration data under this management NE.
FIGURE 7 - SELECT [RELEASE EXCLUSIVE PERMISSION]
Format to Describe Radio Parameters

Each radio parameter in this manual is individually clarified by using tables, for details see Table 4.
TABLE 4 - FORM AT TO DESCRIBE RADIO P AR AMETERS
Chinese parameter name on the interface Abbreviation for English parameters
3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters
Parameter name in 3GPP protocol 3GPP protocol version number for parameter reference Descriptive text for this parameter Involved object by the parameter Value range of this parameter. If the parameter is in mapping form, actual parameter value that corresponds to all indices will be enumerated Parameter unit Default value and its description on parameter interface Relevant functions and features of the network that corresponds to this parameter Influenced parameters due to variations of this parameter
Caution: Radio parameters in this system is modified through offline modification mode, that is, the modification on interface only can be effective after the synchronization action to foreground is conducted. This article doesn't explain it more. Some paramter values in the interface are not fully same as those in database, with certain corresponding relationship between them. For specific corresponding relationship see appendix E.
Precautions in Radio Parameters Adjustment

Radio parameters adjustment, according to the type of the problem to be solved, falls into two kinds. First is to solve static problem, that is, to correct traffic model in system design by measuring actual average traffic and signaling flow in every district and to solve common problems existing for long. Second is to solve problems at a particular time like traffic overload in some district, channel congestion due to sudden events or random events. For the first type, service providers must perform measurement and summarization on actual operation regularly, and then perform appropriate adjustment on global or partial parameters and configurations. For the second type, network operators adjust some radio parameters at real time according to instant data from measurement results.
Most radio parameters in GSM system are based on one cell or one location area. It is necessary to consider whether parameter adjustment in this cell will influence other cells, especially the adjacent one, for parameters between cells are related to each other greatly. Otherwise, it may cause negative influence. Determine whether the problem results from equipment fault (including connections) first when it occurs in some part of the network. Adjust radio parameters only when determined that the problem does result from service.
10
Chapter
Public Resource Radio Parameters

This chapter introduces a series of parameters of GERAN subnetwork, BSC managed element and configuration set.
GERAN Subnetwork Parameters

The interface of GERAN subnetwork parameters is shown in Figure 8.
FIGURE 8 - GERAN SUBNETWORK P AR AMETERS
User label
User label ---Name for user to identify the subnetwork
11
BSC Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
Subnetwork ID
TABLE 6 - SUBNETWORK ID
Subnetwork ID ---Unique identification of Subnetwork defined by users BSC 1 ~ 4095 None None ----
Subnetwork type
TABLE 7 - SUBNETWORK TYPE
Subnetwork type ----
12
Chapter 2 - Public Resource Radio Parameters
Define the subnetwork type as GERAN subnetwork. It is unmodifiable after being created successfully BSC GERAN subnetwork None GERAN subnetwork ----
BSC Managed Element Parameters

The interface of BSC managed element parameters is shown in Figure 9.
F I G U R E 9 - B S C M A N A G E D E L E M E N T P AR A M E T E R S
User label
User label ---
13
-Username to identify the BSC managed element BSC Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
Managed element ID
TABLE 9 - MANAGED ELEMENT ID
Managed element ID ---Identify BSC managed element, which can be not repeated under same network management, but it can't be modified after creation. BSC 1 ~ 4095 None 1 ----
Managed element type

TABLE 10 - 1MANAGED ELEMENT TYPE
Full name
Managed element type
14
Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference Description Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces
---Identify the type of managed element. It is unmodifiable after being created successfully BSC BSC Managed Element None BSC Managed Element ----
O&M board IP address

TABLE 11 - O&M BOARD IP ADDRESS
O&M board IP address ---Managed element IP address is the network interface address of operation and maintenance board, which is unique for each NE. Its value is relative with the office number in Ground Resource Management Configuration. On configuration, it should be consistent with the IP address of OMP on iBSC. It can not be repeated within managed elements. BSC Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255), x is decimal number None 129.0.31.1 ---
Description
15
Related interfaces
--
Software version
TABLE 12 - SOFTWARE VERSION
Software version ---Specify the software version of BSC. It is unmodifiable after being created successfully BSC None None v 6.20.000 ----
Vendor name
TABLE 13 - VENDOR NAME
Vendor name ---Specify the provider of BSC equipment. BSC Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None --
16
---
Location
TABLE 14 - LOCATION
Location ---Specify the location of BSC. BSC Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
Longitude
TABLE 15 - LONGITUDE
Longitude ---Specify the geographic longitude of BSC BSC -180 ~ 180 Degree 180
17
----
Latitude
TABLE 16 - LATITUDE
Latitude ---Specify the geographic latitude of BSC. BSC -90 ~ 90 Degree 90 ----
Configuration Set Parameters

The interface of configuration set parameters is shown in Figure 10. Table 17 shows the configuration set parameters.
18
FIGURE 10 - CONFIGUR ATION SET PARAMETERS
User label
User label ---Configuration set to identify the BSC managed element. BSC Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
19
20
Chapter
BSC System Radio Parameters

This chapter explains BSC global resource parameters, GERAN external cell parameters, and UTRAN external cell parameters.
BSC Global Resource Parameters

Below introduces BSC Global Resource Parameters.
Basic Property Parameters

The interface of basic property parameters is as shown in Figure 11.
21
FIGURE 11 - BASIC PROPERTY P AR AM ETERS
User label
User label ---Name for BSC global resource easily to be identified by a user BSC Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
22
Chapter 3 - BSC System Radio Parameters
Mobile Country Code (MCC)

TABLE 19 - MOBILE COUNTRY CODE
Mobile Country Code MCC --Mobile Country Code (MCC) is used to uniquely identify the home country of the mobile users (or system), China is 460 BSC 0 ~ 999 None 460 -Country Code (MCC) --
Support MNC 3 digits (MNC3Digits)

TABLE 20 - THE M AX LENGTH TO SUPPORT MNC
The max length to support MNC MNC3Digits --Whether supports 3 digits Mobile Network Code or not BSC 2/3 digits None 2 digits --
23
Mobile Network Code (MNC) Mobile Network Code (MNC) Mobile Network Code (MNC) --
Mobile Network Code (MNC)

TABLE 21 - MOBILE NETWORK CODE
Mobile Network Code MNC --Mobile Network Code (MNC) uniquely identifies a specific PLMN network in a country (decided by MCC). For instance, 07 is PLMN network of China Mobile BSC
Description
Management Object
Value Range
When MNC3Digits is selected as 2 digits, MNC value will be 0~99; When MNC3Digits is selected as 3 digits, MNC value will be 0~999;
None 0 -MNC --
OMP IP (OMP_IP)
TABLE 22 - OMP IP
OMP IP OMP_IP ---
24
OMP IP is the IP address that OMP uses to setup link with NM. This parameter shall be consistent with O&M board IP configuration BSC Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255), x is decimal number None 129.0.31.1 ----
OMP MAC (OMP_MAC)

TABLE 23 - OMP M AC
OMP MAC OMP_MAC --MAC address of OMP board, default is 0.208.208.161.0.254. If 0 is filled in, MAC address for OMP is generated based on default foreground rule, which is 0.208.208.161.0.BUREAUNO.
Description
In single OS environment, you can use default value, no further setting required; but for multiple OS environment (such as in a lab), default value may cause conflict (multiple OS environment refers to the environment with above 2 OS environment is connected to a same Hub, so address conflict may be caused) BSC xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx. xx is hexadecimal number, value range is 0~F None 00 00 00 00 00 00 ---
25
Related interfaces
--
OMC subnet mask (Info4)

TABLE 24 - SUBNET M ASK AT OMC INTERFACE
OMC subnet mask Info4 --It is the subnet mask of the OMP IP address. In single OS environment, you can use default value, no further setting required; but for multiple OS environment (such as in a lab), default value may cause conflict (multiple OS environment refers to the environment with above 2 OS environment is connected to a same Hub, so address conflict may be caused) BSC Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255), x is decimal number None 255.0.0.0 ----
Description
OMC Gateway (Info5)

TABLE 25 - OMC GATEWAY
OMC Gateway Info5 ---
26
Infor5 is the IP address of gateway from OMP to iOMCR. Description This parameter can be kept unchanged, default value is ok. Only when other access shall be shielded by setting gateway, user can configure it. BSC Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255), x is decimal number None 0.0.0.0 ----
OMC SERVER IP (Info6)

TABLE 26 - OMC SERVER IP
OMC SERVER IP Info6 --OMC server subnet (Info6) is defined by user and set according to network configuration. Info6 is the IP address that iOMCR uses to setup link with OMP.
Description
This parameter can be kept unchanged. If configuring it, it shall be consistent with IP address of userdefined-zxgsmomcr-ftpip = *.*.*.* in deploy-gsmomcr001_properties in background Server, that is, cell address. BSC Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255), x is decimal number None 0.0.0.0 ---
27
Related interfaces
--
OMCB IP
TABLE 27 - OMCB IP
OMCB IP ---OMCB IP address
Description
Not required normally, default value is ok. When site connected with BSC is SDR, user shall configure it. BSC Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255), x is decimal number None 0.0.0.0 ----
Net Type (Net)

TABLE 28 - NET TYPE (NET)
Net Type Net --User defines network category belonging to this office on demands. BSC CTCN, CMCN, CUCN, RLTN, CNC, NFTN, Network 7, Network 8 None
28
CTCN ----
SP Type (SpType)
TABLE 29 - SP TYPE
SP type SpType --Role of this BSC in whole signaling network shall be selected based on actual network condition. Normally, BSC and MSC are signaling terminal points. If application at upper layer of signaling exists, signal is not transitted. Signaling transit point (STP) is used to aggregated and forwarded. The equipment integrated with SEP and STEP functions is STEP BSC Signaling End Point (SEP), Signaling Transit Point (STP), Signaling Transit End Point (STEP) None Signaling End Point (SEP) ----
Description
Restart Flag (Restart)

TABLE 30 - RESTART FL AG
Restart Flag Restart --
29
-Whether the signaling point restart function shall be enabled. Not required normally, default value is ok BSC Yes/No None Yes ----
Bureau No. (Bureau No.)

TABLE 31 - BUREAU NO.
Office Code Bureau NO. --It is defined by the customer and set according to the network configuration, keeping different in whole topology tree, which can't be modified after creation. BSC 1 ~ 253 None 1 ----
Description
30
Signaling point restart time as STP (stpT18, ms)

TABLE 32 - SIGNALING POINT RESTART TIME AS STP
Signaling point restart time as STP stpT18 --Restart time when local signaling pint is STP BSC 0 ~ 65535 ms 10000 ----
Test code (TestCode)

TABLE 33 - TEST CODE
Test code TestCode --Test code functions as link test, MTP may send test message timely to verify availability of the link, and you shall use same test code while responding to the office. BSC No more than 15 characters. None 0 ---
Description
31
Related interfaces
--
CPU thread tracing (Info2, %)

TABLE 34 - CPU THREAD TRACING
CPU Thread Tracing Info2 --If CPU occupancy exceeds this threshold, signaling trace is automatically enabled to analyze network, mainly including MTP and SCCP signaling trace, excluding signaling trace at Abis interface. BSC 0 ~ 100 % 50 ----
Description
Alarm value of communicate flux of module control (Info16, byte)

TABLE 35 - ALARM VALUE OF COMMUNICATE FLUX OF MODULE CONTROL
Alarm value of communicate flux of module control Info16 --Alarm value of communication flux of module control. If actual communication flux exceeds configured value, it triggers alarm. Default value is 1M Byte, don't modify it normally. BSC 10240 ~ 0xffffffff
Description
32
Byte 1048576 ----
Longitude
TABLE 36 - LONGITUDE
Longitude Longitude --Identify BSC geographical longitude (longitude in BSC managed element parameter is not synchronized to foreground, and property of BSC global resource may be synchronized to foreground). BSC -180 ~ 180 Degree 180 ----
Description
Latitude
TABLE 37 - LATITUDE
Latitude Latitude ---
33
Description
Identify BSC geographical latitude (latitude in BSC managed element parameter is not synchronized to foreground, and property of BSC global resource may be synchronized to foreground). BSC -90 ~ 90 Degree 90 ----
Support GE platform (GESupport)

TABLE 38 - SUPPORT GE PLATFORM
Support GE platform GESupport --Switch to support GE platform BSC Yes/No None No ----
Is TC Type (TCType)
TABLE 39 - IS TC TYPE
Is TC Type (TCType) TCType
34
--Switch to support outer TC function, which can not be modified after configuration. BSC Inner and outer TC None Inner TC ZGF05-01-002 Remote Transcoder Support ---
SNTP SYNC cycle (info10, ms)

TABLE 40 - SNTP SYNC CYCLE
SNTP SYNC Cycle Info10 --BSC conducts time synchronization by SNTP cycle and server. BSC 16000 ~ 16284000 ms 1800000 ----
35
SNTP sever address (Info9, ms)

TABLE 41 - SNTP SERVER ADDRESS
SNTP Server Address Info9 --IP address of SNTP server. It synchronizes the clock of each NE. Not required normally, default value is ok. BSC Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255), x is decimal number None 129.0.31.1 ----
Global time zone (GlobalTimeZone)

TABLE 42 - GLOBAL TIME ZONE
Global time zone GlobalTimeZone --Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), it is set according to the local time zone, China is GMT + 08:00 BSC All valid time zone None (GMT+08:00) Beijing --
36
---
Summer time flag (SummerTimeFlag)

TABLE 43 - SUMMER TIME FLAG
Summer time flag SummerTimeFlag --Defined according to user requirement. If yes, you can configure "Summer start time" and "Summer end time". BSC Yes/No None No ----
Summer start time(SummerStartTime)

TABLE 44 - SUMMER START TIME
Summer Start Time SummerStartTime --When "Summer time flag" parameter is yes, you can configure this parameter, defined on user demands. BSC
37
Month: 1 ~ 12; Value Range Day: 1 ~ 31. Time: 0 ~ 23; Minute: 0 ~ 59 Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces None [1, 1, 0, 0] ----
Summer end time(SummerEndTime)

TABLE 45 - SUMMER END TIME
Summer End Time SummerEndTime --When "Summer time flag" parameter is yes, you can configure this parameter, defined on user demands. BSC
Month: 1 ~ 12;
Value Range
Day: 1 ~ 31. Time: 0 ~ 23; Minute: 0 ~ 59
None [1, 1, 0, 0] ----
38
Radio Basic Property Parameters

The interface of basic radio property parameters is as shown in Figure 12.
FIGURE 12 - RADIO B ASIC PROPERTY PAR AMETERS
Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)

TABLE 46 - DYNAMIC HR ENABLE
Dynamic HR Enable DynaHREnable --This parameter determines whether dynamic HR is supported. If Yes, HR-FR channels could be real time switched dynamically based on the traffic according to the following policy: in peak hour, the system will switch part or all FR channels to HR channels automatically to reduce the network congestion rate; in idle hour, the system will switch part or all HR channels to FR channels automatically to keep good voice quality; BSC Yes/No
Description
39
None No ZGF05-11-002 Full dynamic channel allocation on Um interface ZGF05-17-003 Dynamic Half Rate Allocation ---
Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR (HRThs)

TABLE 47 - THRESHOLD FOR TRX SWITCHED FROM FR TO HR
Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR HRThs --When channel occupation exceeds this threshold, it will apply for half-rate channel directly to increase the user capacity. BSC 1 ~ 100 % 60 ZGF05-11-002 Full dynamic channel allocation on Um interface ZGF05-17-003 Dynamic Half Rate Allocation ---
DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported (FuncExt)

TABLE 48 - DCS1800/PCS1900 SUPPORTED
DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported FuncExt --
40
-Specify the frequency supported. It is unmodifiable after being created successfully. BSC DCS1800, PCS1900 None DCS1800 -Frequency band (FreqBand) Frequency band (FreqBand) Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand) --
Load indication allowed (LoadInd)

TABLE 49 - LOAD INDICATION
Load Indication LoadInd --The load indication process informs the adjacent BSC of the cell load at border to provide more reference information in normal handover and the internal traffic handover of BSC.
Description
This parameter determines if load indication is available, an also determines the validity of parameter Load valid time and Load indication period. If this parameter is No (load indication process is disabled), the latter two parameters are invalid. Otherwise they are valid. BSC Yes/No None No ---
41
Related interfaces
--
Send confusion message allowed (ConfusionMsg)

TABLE 50 - SEND CONFUSION MESSAGE ALLOWED
Send confusion message allowed ConfusionMsg --Confusion message is bidirectional. If the received message could not be processed properly for some reason, and there is no other proper fault message to send, the system will send confusion message. BSC Yes/No None No ----
Description
Inter-Cell handover allowed (InHoEnable)

TABLE 51 - INTER-CELL HANDOVER ALLOWED
Inter-Cell handover allowed InHoEnable --According to GSM specifications, intra-BSC intercell handover is implemented by the following methods: BSC controlled inter-cell handover without MSC involvement. MSC controlled inter-cell intra-BSC handover whose handover flow is similar to that of inter-BSC handover. This parameter decides the choice of method for inter-cell intraBSC handover. Do select No for this parameter if it is not necessary.
Description
42
BSC Yes/No None Yes ----
Send assignment failure allowed (ExDRSendAssFail)

TABLE 52 - SEND ASSIGNMENT FAILURE ALLOWED
Send assignment failure allowed ExDRSendAssFail --Whether external redirection allows assignment failure BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-005 Directed Retry ---
Load indication valid time (LoadValidTime)

TABLE 53 - LOAD VALID TIME
Load Valid Time LoadValidTime Time indication IE
43
3GPP reference
48.008 Mobile Switching Centre - Base Station System (MSC-BSS) interface In load indication process, BSC sends BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to MSC periodically, notifying about the load status. The message includes time indication information which indicates the valid time length of the service load information. MSC relays the BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to neighboring BSCs. This parameter represents the valid time length of the load message. 255 means valid permanently. BSC 0 ~ 255 10 s 18 --A Interface
Description
Load indication period (LoadIndPrd)

TABLE 54 - LOAD INDICATION PERIOD
Load Indication Period LoadIndPrd --In load indication process, BSC sends BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to MSC periodically, notifying about the load status. The message includes time indication information which indicates the valid time length of the service load information. MSC relays the BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to neighboring BSCs. When the load indication message is sent periodically, this parameter decides the period for BSC to send the load indication message. BSC 10 ~ 65530 100 ms 1500
Description
44
--A Interface
Automatic resource indication threshold (ResourceIndThs)

TABLE 55 - AUTOMATIC RESOURCE INDICATION THRESHOLD
Automatic resource indication threshold ResourceIndThs --This parameter defines that BSC automatically indicates to MSC about the ratio of presently available channels to the total channels. When available cell resource is lower than this parameter, resource indication shall be sent to MSC about this cell condition, which shall be configured by O&M. The four modes of resource indication from BSC are as follows:
Description
Automatic Mode: BSC instantly returns BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION message as an acknowledgment without any resource information, after receiving the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message. BSC automatically sends BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION message to MSC. BSC uses the periodicity IE in BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST to determine the indication messages interval (unless the Periodicity IE is 0 and BSC ignores 0) once O&M of BSC satisfies the Auto condition (service threshold or the interval between any two messages). One time mode: BSC instantly returns a BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION message with resource information after receiving BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message. BSC stops sending and waits for next BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST if the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message does not contain Extended Resource Indication IE. If it does, BSC will follow the rules of Subsequent Mode element in the
45
message, same as Mode 4. If the previous mode is 1 or 3, BSC will adopt Mode 1 or 3. Otherwise, it will adopt Mode 4. Period mode: After BSC receives the "BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST" message, it will immediately return a "BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION" message that contains the resource information. After that, BSC periodically sends the "BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION" message. If "Periodicity IE" in the "BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST" message is not 0, then the period to send the message is the value of "Periodicity IE" multiplied by 100ms. If Periodicity IE is 0, then the message is wrong and the whole "BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST" message is regarded as wrong. Stop mode: After the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message is received, BSC immediately returns a BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION message without any resource information as an acknowledgement. And then, it will no longer send the cell resource information to MSC.
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 0 ~ 100 % 30 ----
Resource adjust threshold (ResourceAdjustThs)

TABLE 56 - RESOURCE ADJUST THRESHOLD
Resource adjust threshold ResourceAdjustThs ---
46
Description
When bytes transmitted for packet service data have crossed the threshold, timeslot allocation is adjusted from single timeslot to multiple timeslots (or the threshold from single timeslot to multiple timeslots for packet service timeslot allocation). BSC 200 ~ 5000 Byte 2000 ----
BSC MAX reset number (BSCMaxResetNum)

TABLE 57 - BSC M AX RESET NUM
BSC Max Reset Num BscMaxResetNum --The maximum allowable resets to BSC. After BSC sends the BSSAP RESET message to MSC, if BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message fails to reach BSC from MSC within GSM-specified T4 time interval, the resetting will be repeated. BSSAP RESET message repeats up to N times. MSC ends the reset process and notifies OMS incase of no reply from BSC after N times. N depends on this parameter.
Description
BSC 1 ~ 255 None 3 --A Interface
47
AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs)

TABLE 58 - AMR DYNAMIC HR CONVERSION THRESHOLD
AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold AmrHRThs --When busy timeslot/general timeslot >= AmrHRThs/100, and carrier and cell support AMR, subsequent service prefers AMR voice rate.
Description
This threshold value can be configured on BSC and BTS, when "User cell dynamic HR parameter" (UseCellDynHRPara) is yes, AmrHRThs value configured by cell will be used, otherwise AmrHRThs configured by BSC is used. BSC 0 ~ 100 % 50 ZGF05-17-008 Independent Threshold for Dynamic AMR HR/FR Conversion ---
Range of BARANG
TABLE 59 TABLE0-1 RANGE OF BAR AN G
Range of BARANG ----
48
Value includes single frequency or frequency range, sent to MS in CHANNEL RELEASE. Certain frequency can be firstly inspected while MS selects cell. Input the minimum and maximum value of broadcast range in the left and right blank in
Description
and click Add to save this range. Range of BARANG can be same within different global resource. Note: input frequency range can't be crossed. Management Object BSC PGSM1 ~ 124 EGSM0 ~ 124, 975 ~ 1023 Value Range DCS1800512 ~ 885 GSM1900512 ~ 810 GSM850128 ~ 251 Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces None 0&&0 ----
MR report enable (MrRptEnable)

TABLE 60 - MR REPORT ENABLE
MR report enable MrRptEnable ---
49
Description
This parameter determines whether data report function is supported for measurement report, incombination with MrRptTimap. If enable, and place it at this time, report function of measurement data is supported. BSC Yes/No
Management Object
Value Range
Yes: enable; No: disable;
None No ----
TRX PS busy threshold (TrxPSBusyThs)

TABLE 61 - TRX PS BUSY THRESHOLD
TRX PS busy threshold TrxPSBusyThs --This parameter is used to collect PS service on the idle carrier while applying for PS, against infinite expansion. Application sequence: the idle carrier above this threshold idle carrier idle carrier below this threshold. Calculate it according to remained available quota on each available PS timeslot * number of accessed Abis * 100 / user number.
Description
BSC 1 ~ 6400 None 900 ---
50
Related interfaces
--
Others
The interface of others parameters is shown in Figure 13.
User priority for EMLPP (PriThreshold)

TABLE 62 - USER PRIORITY
User Priority PriThreshold ---
51
This parameter (PriThreshold) use the service of preferred access for high-priority subscriber, that is eMLPP service, the system may set some reserved channels (currently, only full rate TCH channels are supported to be the reserved channels). Description When CS instance calls database to apply for channels, the subscriber's PriorityLevel information reaches to database, and is compared with PriThreshold in the database and BSC table. When PriorityLevel =< PriThreshold (the less the subscriber's priority level value, the higher the priority level, that is the subscriber's priority level is not lower than PriThreshold priority), the reserved channel can be used. BSC 1 ~ 15 None 2 ZGF05-09-009 Enhancement on Channel Allocation ---
Low priority level (LowPrioLevel)

TABLE 63 - LOW USER PRIORITY
Low User Priority LowPrioLevel --When the subscriber's PriorityLevel is bigger than or equal to this parameter (LowPrioLevel), use the low priority subscriber channel selection mode set by 4-1bit of ChanSelectPrio in BTS table. When PriorityLevel is less than this parameter (LowPrioLevel), use the high priority subscriber channel selection mode set by 8-5 bit of ChanSelectPrio in BTS table. BSC 1 ~ 15 None 1
Description
52
ZGF05-09-009 Enhancement on Channel Allocation ---
Preferred speech version (half) (PreferSpeechVer)

TABLE 64 - PREFERRED SPEECH VERSION (HALF)
Preferred speech version (half) PreferSpeechVer --When implementing the CS channel allocation policy, describe the preferred half-rate speech version. Half-rate version 1 refers to HR, and version 3 refers to AMR BSC Not specify the preferred version, Half-rate version 1, Half-rate version 3 None Not specify the preferred version ZGF05-17-002 Half rate ---
Description
Preferred speech version (full) (PreferSpeechVer)

TABLE 65 - PREFERRED SPEECH VERSION (FULL)
Preferred speech version (full) PreferSpeechVer ---
53
Description
When implementing the CS channel allocation policy, describe the preferred full-rate speech version. Full-rate version 1 refers to FR, version 2 refers to EFR, and version 3 refers to AMR BSC Not specify the preferred version, Full-rate version 1, full-rate version 2, full-rate version 3 None Not specify the preferred version ZGF05-17-004 Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) Speech Codec ---
Reserved Channel First (RsvChanFirst)

TABLE 66 - RESERVED CHANNEL FIRST
Reserved Channel First RsvChanFirst --The selection order of reserved channel and nonreserved channel BSC Yes/No None Yes ZGF05-25-017 eMLPP ---
EMLPP channel Reserved time (EMLPPThs, %)

TABLE 67 - EMLPP CHANNEL RESERVED TIME
Full name
eMLPP channel Reserved time
54
EMLPPThs --When using high priority user to access service, that is, EMLPP service, the system may configure certain remained channels BSC 0 ~ 100 % 0 ZGF05-25-017 eMLPP ---
Lenght of super vision (LcsSuperVision)

TABLE 68 - LENGTH OF SUPER VISION
Length of super vision LcsSuperVision --Supervise the timer length in whole locating process.
Description
After BSC sends locating request to SMLC, this timer is configured and shall receives locating response prior to timeout, otherwise locating process is terminated. BSC 100 ~ 1000 None 250 ZGF06-25-001 LCS launched via PS domain ZGF05-25-022 LCS with CGI+TA ZGF05-25-023 LCS with AGPS --
55
Related interfaces
--
Length of radio (LcsRadio)

TABLE 69 - LENGTH OF RADIO
Length of radio LcsRadio --Supervise the timer length to transmit radio information.
Description
This timer supervises the process to deliver MS the message related with locating. Start while sending message to MS, and stop while receiving response from MS. BSC 10 ~ 100 None 50 ZGF06-25-001 LCS launched via PS domain ZGF05-25-022 LCS with CGI+TA ZGF05-25-023 LCS with AGPS ---
Length of timer waiting intra BSS handover (LcsWaitInTraHO)

TABLE 70 - LENGTH OF TIMER WAITING INTRA BSS HANDOVER
Length of timer waiting intra BSS handover LcsWaitInTraHO ---
56
Length of timer waiting intra BSS handover completed. Description Continue locating process after handover is finished, with a length threshold for waiting. Stop while this timer length is exceeded. BSC 20 ~ 100 None 60 ZGF05-25-022 LCS with CGI+TA ZGF05-25-023 LCS with AGPS ---
Starting time for oriented retry (rmsT10, 100ms)

TABLE 71 - STARTING TIME FOR ORIENTED RETRY
Starting time for oriented retry rmsT10 --This parameter is T10 timer. BSC 50 ~ 200 100 ms 130 --A Interface
57
Monitor physical context request (rmsT9108, 100ms)

TABLE 72 - MONITOR PHYSICAL CONTEXT REQUEST
Monitor physical context request rmsT9108 --This parameter is timer T9108. Currently, the process to monitor physical context request is not used, reserved for later use. BSC 20 100 ms 20 --Um interface
Timer for MSG Waiting (TWaitMsg, 100ms)

TABLE 73 - TIMER FOR MSG W AITING
Timer for MSG Waiting TWaitMsg --Timer for MSG Waiting on RanAWorker process. RanAWorker process is the working process of RANA module. Start if RANA instance is created, stop if message is received, and instance is released if timeout. BSC 5 ~ 20 100 ms 20
Description
58
----
Timer for RANCSEST Waiting (TWaitRancsEst, 100ms)

TABLE 74 - TIMER FOR RANCSEST W AITING
Timer for RANCSEST Waiting TWaitRancsEst --Time to wait for RANCS process applying for resource protection.
Description
RANCS process is to process CS service. This timer is started if RANA receives external handover request and applying for channel from RANCS; stop if receiving RANCS response, and fail to send handover to interface A if timeout. BSC 10 ~ 100 100 ms 100 ----
Timer for RANCSCLECOM waiting (TWaitRancsCleCom, 100ms)

TABLE 75 - TIMER FOR RANCSCLECOM WAITING
Timer for RANCSCLECOM waiting TWaitRancsCleCom --
59
3GPP reference
-Interval for RanAWorker process waiting for RANCS process responding ClearCom. RanAWorker process is the working process of RANA module. Start if sending clear command to RANCS, stop if receiving RANCS response, and continue release process if timeout. BSC 10 ~ 30 100 ms 30 ----
Description
Timer for CCM waiting (CcmWaitTimer, 100ms)

TABLE 76 - TIMER FOR CCM WAITING
Timer for CCM waiting CcmWaitTimer --Timer that is waiting for disconnecting and disabling BTS during dynamic channel conversion.
Description
Start if CCM starts channel conversion, stop if receiving successive module and BTS response, and send message to BTS again if timeout. BSC 45 ~ 55 100 ms 45 ----
60
Get Static param timer (GetStaticParamTimer, 100ms)

TABLE 77 - GET STATIC PARAM TIMER
Get Static param timer GetStaticParamTimer --The counting parameter, used by RancRrm, is used to timely poll UPU unit below CMP. This timer is configured periodically, and query resource occupation data for UPU if timeout. BSC 60 ~ 600 100 ms 120 ----
Description
HR channel percentage threshold (HRTsPercentage)

TABLE 78 - HR CHANNEL PERCENTAGE THRESHOLD
HR channel percentage threshold HRTsPercentage --When HR timeslot in the cell / general timeslot in the cell < HRTsPercentage/100, the cell can generate new HR channel.
Description
This parameter can be configured on BSC and BTS. If the proportion of HR timeslot in the cell is lower than HRTsPercentage/100 of BSC and BTS, the cell can generate new HR channel. BSC
Management Object
61
0 ~ 100 % 50 ----
TFO Enable (TFOControl_0)

TABLE 79 - TFO ENABLE
TFO Enable TFOControl_0 --This parameter is one of TFO control parameters, to describe whether TFO is enabled. 0 represents disable, 1 represents enable. 0: disable;
Description
1: enable. When TFO is not enabled, or value of TFOControl_0 is 0, other switch is disabled and values of TFOControl_1, TFOControl_2 and TFOControl_3 are 0 too.
BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-17-006 TFO ---
62
Coding/decoding type optimization enable (TFOControl_1)

TABLE 80 - CODING/DECODING TYPE OPTIMIZATION ENABLE
coding/decoding type optimization enable TFOControl_1 --This parameter is one of TFO control parameters, to describe whether coding/decoding type can be optimized. 0 represents disable, 1 represents enable. 0: disable; 1: enable.
Description
Coding/decoding type unmatched enable (TFOControl_2)

TABLE 81 - CODING/DECODING TYPE UNMATCHED ENABLE
Coding/decoding type unmatched enable TFOControl_2 --This parameter is one of TFO control parameters, to describe whether unmatched coding/decoding type can not be solved. 0 represents disable, 1 represents enable. 0: disable; 1: enable.
Description
63
AMR Optimization Mode (TFOControl_3)

TABLE 82 - AMR OPTIMIZATION MODE
AMR Optimization Mode TFOControl_3 --This parameter is one of TFO control parameters, to describe whether it is AMR optimization mode. 0: don't support ACS variations; 1: support ACS variations.
Description
BSC Support or don't support ACS variations None Don't support ACS variations. ZGF05-17-006 TFO ---
Function Parameters
The interface of function parameters is shown in Figure 14.
64
FIGURE 14 - FUNCTION P ARAMETERS
Support Multi PLMN (MPLMNSupport)

TABLE 83 - SUPPORT MULTI PLMN
Support Multi PLMN MPLMNSupport --This parameter is a switch to support multi PLMN, to determine whether multi PLMNs are supported. One iBSC can support up to 16 operators. BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-05-006 Multi PLMN ---
65
Support BTS of different net handover (InterNetHO)

TABLE 84 - SUPPORT BTS OF DIFFERENT NET HANDOVER
Support BTS of different net handover InterNetHO --This parameter is a switch to support inter-cell handover with different network number. This parameter only can be activated after "support multiple network number" function is enabled. BSC Yes/No None No ----
Description
Support FLEX A(FlexASupport)

TABLE 85 - SUPPORT FLEX A
Support FLEX A FlexASupport --This parameter is a switch to support FLEX A, to determine whether FlexA function is supported. One iBSC can support up to 16 MSCs BSC Yes/No None No
66
ZGF05-01-034 Flex A ---
Support FLEX GB (FLEXGBSupport)

TABLE 86 - SUPPORT FLEX GB
Support FLEX GB FLEXGBSupport --This parameter is a switch to support FLEX GB, to determine whether Flex GB function is supported. One iBSC can support up to 16 SGSNs BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-01-035 Flex Gb ---
MSP support (MSPSupport)

TABLE 87 - MSP SUPPORT
MSP Support MSPSupport ---
67
This parameter is a switch to support MSP, to determine whether MSP function is supported. Description One signaling point can configure up to 16 links. To have more bandwidth at port A and implement multi-signaling point function, you can configure more links at port A. BSC Yes/No None No ----
Support RIM (RIMSupport)

TABLE 88 - SUPPORT RIM
Support RIM RIMSupport --Swith to support RIM function BSC Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-005 Inter-BSC NACC ---
RIM retry times (RIMRetryTimes)

TABLE 89 - RIM RETRY TIMES
Full name
RIM retry times
68
RIMRetryTimes --RIM retry times. Send it again based on this number if timeout, up to 3 times. BSC 0~3 None 0 ZGF06-01-005 Inter-BSC NACC ---
Support different reset parameter in idle and transfer status (PSReselParam2)

TABLE 90 STATUS - SUPPORT DIFFERENT RESET PAR AMETER IN IDLE AND TRANSFER
Support different reset parameter in idle and transfer status PSReselParam2 --Whether support different reset parameter in idle and transfer status BSC Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-008 Different Cell Reselection Parameters for IDLE and ACTIVE Status ---
69
Support HR channel frag finishing (HRDfragSupport)

TABLE 91 - SUPPORT HR CHANNEL FRAG FINISHING
Support HR channel frag finishing HRDfragSupport --This parameter is a switch to support HR channel frag finishing functions, which can be configured both on BSC and BTS. Only when both BSC and BTS are enabled, and finished HR frags / idle HR channel in the cell is no more than HRDefragThs, HR channel defragmentation function is enabled, otherwise it is disabled BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-11-004 HR Concentration ---
Description
Report voice quality (VoiceQualityReport)

TABLE 92 - REPORT VOICE QUALITY
Report voice quality VoiceQualityReport --Whether voice quality is reported BSC Yes/No None No
70
ZGF05-17-012 Speech Quality Supervision ---
Timer 1
The interface of timer 1 parameters is shown in Figure 15.
FIGURE 15 - TIMER 1 P ARAM TERS
Blocking/unblocking period (T1, 100ms)

TABLE 93 - BLOCKING/UNBLOCKING PERIOD
Blocking/unblocking period T1 T1 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0
71
Description
This parameter is T1 timer. BSS blocks/unblocks a terrestrial circuit and sends BLOCK/UNBLOCK message to MSC due to various reasons such as O&M intervention, equipment failure/recovery, and radio resources unavailable/available. T1 timer sets the time interval between BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message sent from MSC to BSC and BLOCK/UNBLOCK message. T1 is used to identify it during this period. BSC 30 ~ 150 100 ms 80 --A Interface
Global Resetting Period (T4, 100ms)

TABLE 94 - GLOBAL RESETTING PERIOD
Global Resetting Period T4 T4 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 This parameter is T4 timer, monitoring the BSSAP RESET message sent from BSC to MSC.
Timer start: T4 starts when a global resetting occurs in BSC.

Description
Timer stop: The BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message from MSC is received. Timeout action: If T4 expires, BSC will repeat the whole process.
BSC 60 ~ 150 100 ms 100
72
--A Interface
Protection period for handover request (T7, 100ms)

TABLE 95 - PROTECTION PERIOD FOR HANDOVER REQUEST
The protective period for handover request T7 T7 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 This parameter is T7 timer, monitoring BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED message. T7 timer is maximum period between the BSC sent BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED message and when MSC returns BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND message. MSC sends BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT message to BSC in case of failure and after that BSC stops T7 timer.
Timer Start: T7 timer starts when BSC sends BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED message to MSC.
Description
Timer Stop: T7 timer suspends when BSC receives BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND or BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT message from MSC. BSC sends other BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED message to MSC when receiving BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT message. Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime and the external handover conditions are still satisfied, BSC will instantly repeat HANDOVER REQUIRED process.
BSC 100 ~ 200 100 ms 100 --
73
-A Interface
Source BSC handover executing period (T8, 100ms)

TABLE 96 - SOURCE BSC HANDOVER EXECUTION PERIOD
Source BSC handover execution period T8 T8 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 This parameter is T8 timer. It is the execution period for external handover process in source BSC.
Timer Start: T8 timer starts when BSC receives BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND message.
Description
Timer Stop: T8 timer stops when BSC receives BSSAP CLEAR COMMAND message or RIL3_RR HANDOVER FAILURE message from MSC. Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, BSC will send BSSAP CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC.
BSC 50 ~ 700 100 ms 120 --A Interface
Assignment period (T10, 100ms)

TABLE 97 - ASSIGNMENT PERIOD
Full name
Assignment period
74
T10 T10 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 This parameter is T10 timer. It supervises assignment process as follows:
Timer Start: T10 timer starts when MS receives ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message.
Description
Timer Stop: T10 timer suspends when MS receives ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE and ASSIGNMENT FAILURE messages. Action Overtime: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send BSSAP ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message to MSC.
Protection period for global resetting (T13, 100ms)

TABLE 98 - PROTECTION PERIOD FOR GLOBAL RESETTING
Protective period for global resetting T13 T13 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0
75
This parameter is T13 timer, which is a protection time period for a local call clearing process.
Timer Start: T13 timer starts when BSC receives BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND message.
Description
Timer Stop: T13 timer suspends when SCCP receives a SSP/SPI message. Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSS will send BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message to MSC.
Circuit resetting period on BSS side (T19, 100ms)

TABLE 99 - CIRCUIT RESETTING PERIOD ON BSS SIDE
Circuit resetting period on BSS side T19 T19 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 If BSC SCCP connection is abnormal while the circuits must be released to idle status, BSS will send the BSSAP CIRCUIT RESET message to MSC and start T19. After MSC receives this message, it will release the corresponding services and the circuits to the idle status and send the BSSAP CIRCUIT RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message to BSC. T19 timer stops when MSC receives RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE message from BSC. BSC 30 ~ 150 100 ms 80
Description
76
--A Interface
Circuit group blocking/unblocking Period (T20, 100ms)

TABLE 100 - CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCKING/UNBLOCKING PERIOD
Circuit group blocking/unblocking Period T20 T20 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 For some reasons (O&M intervention; equipment fault/recovery; radio resources unavailable/available), BSS will block a group of terrestrial circuits, then send the BSSAP CIRCIUIT GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK message to MSC. After receiving this message, MSC will send the BSSAP CIRCIUIT GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWKEDGE message to BSS for notification. BSC 30 ~ 150 100 ms 80 --A Interface
Description
RLSD message receive protection timer (T9101, 100ms)

TABLE 101 - RLSD MESSAGE RECEIVE PROTECTION TIMER
RLSD message receive protection timer T9101 --
77
3GPP reference
-This parameter is timer T9101, supervising the reception of RLSD.
Timer start: T9101 starts when BSC sends the BSSAP CLEAR COMPLETE message to MSC.
Description
Timer stop: T9101 stops when the RLSD message from MSC is received. Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send RLSD message to release SCCP connection.
Channel activation protection timer (rmsT9103, 100ms)

TABLE 102 - CHANNEL ACTIVATION PROTECTION TIMER
Channel activation protection timer rmsT9103 ---
78
This parameter is timer T9103, monitoring channel activation process.
Timer Start: T9103 timer starts when BSC sends CHANNEL ACTIVATION message to BTS.
Description
Timer Stop: T9103 timer suspends when BSC receives CHANNEL ACTIVATION ACK or CHANNEL ACTIVATION NACK message. Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send RF CHANNEL RELEASE message to BTS
BSC 20 100 ms 20 --Abis interface
MSC clear command protection timer (T9104, 100ms)

TABLE 103 - MSC CLEAR COMM AND PROTECTION TIMER
MSC clear command protection timer T9104 --This parameter is T9104 timer. It supervises CLEAR COMMAND from MSC.
Timer Start: T9104 timer starts when BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC.
Description
Timer Stop: T9104 timer suspends when BSC receives CLEAR COMMAND message from MSC. Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, CLEAR REQUEST message will be resent (four times at the most).
79
SCCP connection protection timer (T9105, 100ms)

TABLE 104 - SCCP CONNECTION PROTECTION TIMER
SCCP Connection Timer T9105 --This parameter is T9105 timer, monitoring SCCP connection process.
Timer Start: T9105 timer starts when BSC sends BSSAP SCCP_CONNECTION_REQ message to MSC.
Description
Timer Stop: T9105 suspends when BSC receives SCCP_CONNECTION_CONFIRM / SCCP_CONNECTION_REFUSED message. Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CHANNEL RELEASE message to MS.
BSC 20 ~ 60 100 ms 30 ---
80
Related interfaces
A Interface
External handover protection Timer in target cell (T9113, 100ms)

TABLE 105 - EXTERNAL HANDOVER PROTECTION TIMER IN TARGET CELL
External handover protection Timer in target cell T9113 --This parameter is T9113 timer, monitoring external handover in the target cell.
Timer Start: T9113 timer starts when BSC sends HANDOVER REQUEST ACK message to MSC.
Description
Timer Stop: T9113 timer suspends when BSC sends HANDOVER COMPLETE message from MS or CLEAR COMMAND message from MSC. Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC.
Protective time waiting for access (rmsT1, 100ms)

TABLE 106 - PROTECTIVE TIME WAITING FOR ACCESS
Protective time waiting for access rmsT1 --
81
3GPP reference
-This parameter is rmsT1 timer. It indicates protection waiting time for MS access during assignment or handover, after channel activation process.
Description
Timer start: The destination channel receives the CHL ACITIVATION ACK message and sends the RADIO AVAILABLE message to the source channel. Timer stop: In MS access, the destination channel receives the ASSIGNMENT COM or HANDOVER COM message.
BSC 0 ~ 300 100 ms 70 --Abis interface
Protective time for applying to channel (rmsT2, 100ms)

TABLE 107 - PROTECTION TIME FOR CHANNEL REQUEST
Protection time for channel request rmsT2 ---
82
This parameter is T2 timer.
Timer start: The new channel sends the RADIO APPLY message.
Description
Timer stop: Channel request succeeds and the new channel receives the RADIO AVAILABLE message; or the channel request fails and the RADIO UNAVAILABLE message is received; or the RAIO PROCEEDING message is received in queuing.
BSC 20 ~ 50 100 ms 40 ----
Protective time for link establishment response (rmsT3, 100ms)

TABLE 108 - PROTECTION TIME FOR LINK ESTABLISHMENT RESPONSE
Protection time for link establishment response rmsT3 --This parameter is T3 timer.
Timer start: RANCS instance sends "ESTABLISH IND" to RANA instance.

Description
Timer stop: RANCS instance receives the "CONNECT CONF" sent by RANA instance, or the "CONNECT FAIL" when RANA fails to establish the link.
BSC 30 ~ 100 100 ms 60
83
----
Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM (rmsT4, 100ms)
TABLE 109 - PROTECTIVE TIME FOR P0 CONFIRMS THE MESSAGE HO/ASS COM
Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM rmsT4 --This parameter is T4 timer.
Description
Timer start: After RANCS receives the "HO COM" or "ASS COM" message of MS and forwards it to RANA. Timer stop: RANCS receives acknowledgement of "HO COM" or "ASS COM" message by RANA.
BSC 10 ~ 80 100 ms 30 ----
Encryption mode modification time (rmsT5, 100ms)

TABLE 110 - ENCRYPTION MODE MODIFICATION TIME
Full name
Encryption mode modification time
84
rmsT5 --This parameter is timer T5, used to supervise modification process of encryption mode, that is, the timer that waits for MS response after configuring radio encryption mode.
Description
Timer Start: T5 timer starts when BSC receives CIPHER MODE COMMAND message from MSC. Timer Stop: T5 timer suspends when BSC receives CIPHER MODE COMPLETE message from MS. Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send BSSAP CIPHER MODE REJECT message to MSC.
SAPI3 link establishment time (rmsT6, 100ms)

T A B L E 1 1 1 - S AP I 3 L I N K E S T A B L I S H M E N T T I M E
SAPI3 link establishment time rmsT6 ---
85
Timer T6 supervises link establishment of SAPI3.
Timer start: timer T6 starts when BSC receives the DTAP (SAPI = 3) message from MSC and there is no SAPI3 link.
Description
Timer stop: timer T6 stops when BSC receives the ESTABLISH CONFIRM message from BTS. Overtime action: When timer T6 expires, the BSSMAP SAPI"n" REJECT message will be sent to MSC.
External handover protective time (rmsT8, 100ms)

TABLE 112 - EXTERNAL HANDOVER PROTECTIVE TIME
External handover protection time rmsT8 --This parameter is timer rmsT8, monitoring external handover process.
Description
Timer start: rmsT8 starts after handover command is sent in Serve state while RANCS instance shall be handovered externally. Timer stop: rmsT8 timer stops if RANCS instance receives HO COMCLEAR CMD(handover success) or UM HO FAIL (handover failed).
BSC 50 ~ 650
86
100 ms 100 ----
Protective time for No7 signal instantaneous disconnection (T3, 100ms)

TABLE 113 - PROTECTIVE TIME FOR DISCONNECTION NO7 SIGNAL INSTANTANEOUS
Protective time for No7 signal instantaneous disconnection T3 --This timer is configured to prevent from signal instantaneous disconnection and wrong actions. If disconnection duration of no.7 link exceeds timer protective time, global resetting is issued. If no signaling point reachable event is received during delay time, no.7 link is considered as disconnection and global resetting process begins; if reachable signaling point is received during delay time, no.7 link is considered as instantaneous disconnection. BSC 10 ~ 200 100 ms 100 --A Interface
Description
87
Protective time that PO responses external handover completion message (rmsT7, 100ms)
TABLE 114 - PROTECTIVE TIME THAT PO RESPONSES EXTERNAL H ANDOVER
COMPLETION MESSAGE
Protective time that PO responses external handover completion message rmsT7 T7 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0
Description
Timer start: it starts when RANCS sends the HANDOVER REQUIRED message to MSC. Timer stop: it stops when RANCS instance receives HANDOVER COMMAND response from MSC.
Timer 2 parameter
The interface of timer 2 parameters is shown in Figure 16.
88
FIGURE 16 - TIMER 2 P ARAM TERS
Protective time for RF channel release (rmsT9, 100ms)

TABLE 115 - PROTECTIVE TIME FOR RF CHANNEL RELEASE
Protective time for RF channel release rmsT9 --This parameter is T9 timer.
Description
Timer start: T9 starts when RF CHANNEL RELEASE is sent to BTS when RANCS instance is released. Timer stop: T9 stops when RANCS instance receives RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACKNOWLEDGE response from BTS.
BSC 10 ~ 50 100 ms 20 --
89
-Abis interface
Queue period of assignment (rmsT11, 100ms)

TABLE 116 - QUEUE PERIOD OF ASSIGNMENT
Queue period of assignment rmsT11 T11 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 This parameter is T11 timer. It determines the maximum allowable queue time which starts from the assignment request. BSC 10 ~ 150 100 ms 60 ZGF05-10-001 Queuing -A Interface
Acknowledgment interval for periodic status (rmsT12, 100ms)

TABLE 117 - ACKNOWLEDGMENT INTERVAL FOR PERIODIC STATUS
Acknowledgment interval for periodic status rmsT12 ---
90
Description
Timer Start: T12 timer starts periodically when RANCS receives CONNECT CONF message from RANA. Timer decides to perform activity check at peer end. Lately, it is periodical start. Timer Stop: T12 timer stops when RANCS instance receives RELEASE TYPE message.
BSC 50 ~ 18000 100 ms 50 ----
Mode modification process time (rmsT13, 100ms)

TABLE 118 - MODE MODIFICATION PROCESS TIME
Mode modification process time rmsT13 --This parameter is T13 timer. It supervises BTS and MS modes modification process. Mode modification refers to modify channel mode. When there is not SDCCH and FACCH is allocated, new channel is not allocated after assignment, but modify the modes.
Description
Timer start condition: When BSC sends the MODE MODIFY message to BTS and sends the CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message to MS. Timer stop: When BSC receives the MODE MODIFY ACK/NACK message from BTS and the CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message from MS. Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send BSSAP ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message to MSC.
91
BSC 35 ~ 100 100 ms 60 --Abis interface
Protective time of UM assignment completion (rmsT14, 100ms)

TABLE 119 - PROTECTIVE TIME OF UM ASSIGNMENT COMPLETION
Protective time of UM assignment completion rmsT14 --This parameter is timer T14. It is the period between sending of ASS/HO COM and receiving of ASS/HO COM ACK messages at destination instance. BSC 10 ~ 50 100 ms 20 ----
Description
Waiting time for oriented retry (rmsT16, 100ms)

TABLE 120 - W AITING TIME FOR ORIENTED RETRY
Waiting time for oriented retry rmsT16
92
--When attempting oriented retry, if target cell has not been gained through inspection, you shall configure rmsT16 to wait for receiving measurement report, and then check whether oriented retry is conducted at target cell after rmsT16 is timeout. This process can be repeated for several times. BSC 20 ~ 60 100 ms 20 ----
Description
Queue period for handover (rmsTqho, 100ms)

TABLE 121 - QUEUE PERIOD FOR HANDOVER
Queue period for handover rmsTqho --It is the maximum allowable queue time for handover attempt, calculated from handover request. BSC 10 ~ 150 100 ms 50 ZGF05-10-001 Queuing ---
93
First Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control (rmT11, 100ms)

TABLE 122 - FIRST OVERLOAD PERIOD OF FLOW TRAFFIC CONTROL
First Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control mT11 --Overload contains overloads of CPU, MSC signaling point, MSC service, and CCCH. In cell overload conditions, BSC adopts a timer mT11 for traffic flow control. This clock is used together with mT12 to modify the parameter ACCESS CONTROL configured for the cell and notify MS via the system information for flow control. The value of timer must be less than that of timer mT12. BSC 30 ~ 150 100 ms 80 ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Description
Second Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control (mT12, 100ms)

TABLE 123 - SECOND OVERLOAD PERIOD OF FLOW TRAFFIC CONTROL
Second Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control mT12 ---
94
Overload contains overloads of CPU, MSC signaling point, MSC service, and CCCH. In cell overload conditions, BSC adopts a timer mT12 for traffic flow control. The mT12 timer in combination with mT11 timer modifies ACCESS CONTROL parameter in the cell. BSC notifies the MS to achieve flow control through system information. The value of timer must be more than that of mT11 timer. The two clocks control the cell flow as follows: When the network receives the overload message for the first time, the system decreases the flow by one level, and starts mT11 and mT12. The OVERLOAD message during mT11 period will be ignored. If the OVERLOAD message is received between mT11 and mT12, the flow will be decreased by another level and both mT11 and mT12 will be restarted. If BSC does not receive OVERLOAD message after mT12 timer stops, the flow increases to one more level, and the mT12 timer restarts. Lower grade and higher grade represent different proportion to reject service. BSC 50 ~ 200 100 ms 150 ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Description
Time of Micro-Micro handover delay (Tmicro, 100ms)

TABLE 124 - TIME OF MICRO-MICRO HANDOVER DELAY
Time of Micro-Micro handover delay Tmicro ---
95
Description
In micro-micro handover control, a delay time value is required (the timer value). Timer Start: relevant timer starts instantly when a call enters a micro cell. Timer Stop: relevant timer stops when it reaches the set value. Existing call can use neighboring micro cell in the same layer only when the timer stops. In this way, it could prevent fast moving mobiles staying in the micro cell layer. BSC 50 ~ 200 100 ms 80 ZGF05-05-001 Multi-layer Cell Structure ---
BSIC decoding period (Tbsic, 100ms)

TABLE 125 - BSIC DECODING PERIOD
BSIC decoding period Tbsic --The parameter Tbsic defines a period, which is calculated from call establishment or handover completion (inter-cell or intra-cell). TC/I evaluation is considered as unreliable during this period, thus, handover to a special TRX is not allowed. During this period, MS can decode BSIC that interferes with neighboring cells before handover procedure starts. This parameter is only valid in concentric circle case.
Description
BSC 20 ~ 640 100 ms 50 ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH
96
---
Protection of resources on external in-Handover (aisT4, 100ms)

TABLE 126 - PROTECTION OF RESOURCES ON EXTERNAL IN-HANDOVER
Protection of resources on external in-Handover aisT4 --AppRadioApp-AppRadioAvail (external hand in), RadioApplying status protection timer. The timer is in RadioApplying status after receiving the A_Ho_Req message and before receiving APP_RADIO_AVAIL message. BSC 30 ~ 150 100 ms 40 ----
Description
Serving status protection timer (aisT12, 100ms)

TABLE 127 - SERVING STATUS PROTECTION TIMER
Serving status protection timer aisT12 ---
97
Description
Serving status protection timer. After CR is sent and CC is received and before any further message is received. After App_Ass_Com message is received and before the call is cleared. After App_Ho_Com message is received at the handover from external cell and before the call is cleared. After timer is timeout, handshake is conducted for inter-process message transmission.
BSC 100 ~ 18000 100 ms 3000 ----
Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD (rmsT3121, 100ms)

TABLE 128 - HANDOVER PROTECTING TIMER TO WCDMA/FDD
Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD rmsT3121 T3121 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 Timer T3121, protection time after sending intersystem to utran handover command (UM) to UE.
Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends "inter-system to utran handover command" message to MS.
Description
Timer stop: the timer stops when BSC receives "CLEAR COMMAND" message from MSC or "HANDOVER FAILURE" message from MS. Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC.
BSC 1 ~ 650
98
100 ms 100 --A Interface
Immediate assignment period (rmsT3101, 100ms)

TABLE 129 - IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT PERIOD
Immediate assignment period rmsT3101 T3101 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 This timer indicates the time period for the instant assigning process.
Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message.
Description
Timer Stop: The timer stops when BSC receives ESTABLISH INDICATION message. Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send CHANNEL RELEASE message to BTS.
BSC 10 ~ 50 100 ms 30 --Um interface, Abis interface
99
Handover period of source cell (rmsT3103, 100ms)

TABLE 130 - HANDOVER PERIOD OF SOURCE CEL
Handover period of source cell rmsT3103 T3103 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 This timer indicates the time period for internal handover process of BSC.
Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends HANDOVER COMMAND message to MS.
Description
Timer Stop: The timer suspends when BSC receives HANDOVER COMPLETE message on a new channel or HANDOVER FAILURE message on an old channel from MS. Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send a CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC, and the new channel is released.
Assignment period (rmsT3107, 100ms)

TABLE 131 - ASSIGNMENT PERIOD
Assignment period rmsT3107 T3107 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0
100
This timer indicates the time period for assignment period and internal handover of a cell..
Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message to MS.
Description
Timer Stop: The timer stops when BSC receives RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE message or RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message. Overtime Action: If this time is overtime, in the case of assignment, the former and new channel will be released; in the case of cell internal handover, the BSC will send a CLEAR REQUEST message to the MSC.
Channel release period (rmsT3109, 100ms)

TABLE 132 - CHANNEL RELEASE PERIOD
Channel release period rmsT3109 T3109 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0
101
This timer supervises the channel release process.
Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends RIL3_RR CHANNEL RELEASE message to MS.
Description
Timer Stop: The timer stops when BSC receives RELEASE INDICATION message from BTS (when BTS receives DISC frame from MS). Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CHANNEL RELEASE message to MS.
Channel deactivation delay (rmsT3111, 100ms)

TABLE 133 - CHANNEL DEACTIVATION DELAY
Channel deactivation delay rmsT3111 T3111 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 After releasing the UM interface radio link layer, in order to make sure the radio link is disconnected, BSC sets a period of protection time rmsT3111. Releases the wireless channel and deactivates it after rmsT3111 timer stops.
Description
Timer start: rmsT3111 timer starts when BSC receives RELEASE INDICATION message. Overtime Action: If rmsT3111 timer is overtime, the BSC will send RF CHANNEL RELEASE message to BTS.
Management Object
BSC
102
1~5 100 ms 3 --Abis interface
Continue Timer for mode modify (TModeModifyConn, 100ms)

TABLE 134 - CONTINUE TIMER FOR MODE MODIFY
Continue Timer for mode modify TModeModifyConn --Connection delay timer. This timer is used to wait for connection finished after sending connection request, including Abis connection and TC connection. BSC 50 ~ 70 100 ms 50 ----
Description
Handover protecting time to UTRAN (mT7, 100ms)

TABLE 135 - HANDOVER PROTECTING TIME TO UTRAN
Handover protecting time to UTRAN mT7 T7
103
3GPP reference
3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 This timer is used to send HANDOVER REQUIRED to MSC, where target cell is UTRAN cell, waiting for response from MSC.
Description
Timer start: this timer starts if BSC sends HANDOVER REQUIRED to MSC, where target cell is UTRAN cell. Timer stop: it stops when BSC receives HANDOVER COMMAND from MSC. Timeout action: configure penalty for UTRAN target cell carried in HANDOVER REQUIRED.
Time of destination instance waiting for available resources when forced disconnection (rms T15, 100ms)
TABLE 136 - TIME OF DESTINATION INSTANCE WAITING FOR AV AIL ABLE
RESOURCES WHEN FORCED DISCONNECTION
Available time to wait for resources by the target instance in forced release rmsT15 ---
104
Description
Timer start: When the target instance decides forced release, it will send the "PREEMPT APPLY" to the released object. Timer stop: The target instance receives the "RESOURCE AVAILABLE" message from the released object, indicating that the resources are available.
BSC 10 ~ 50 100 ms 30 ----
Protecting time of FUC response to system message broadcast (BcProtect, 100ms)

TABLE 137 - PROTECTING TIME OF FUC RESPONSE TO SYSTEM MESSAGE
BROADCAST
Protecting time of FUC response to system message broadcast BcProtect --Protection timer for system message broadcast to wait for the response of FUC. FUC response is used to ensure BTS correctly receives system message. BSC 30 ~ 100 100 ms 50 ---
105
Related interfaces
--
HO performed ack timer (TwaitHoPFMAck, 100ms)

TABLE 138 - HO PERFORMED ACK TIMER
HO performed ack timer TwaitHoPFMAck --When using IP carrier at user plane of interface A, because TC is placed at MGW, CN shall be informed to replace codec during intra-BSC handover. CN replacement codec is triggered by HANDOVER PERFORMED message. To ensure MSC has received this message and successfully command MGS to replace codec against obstacles at speech aspect, HANDOVER PERFORMED ACK message is added. This timer is used to wait for HANDOVER PERFORMED ACK message from MSC.
Description
Timer start: it starts when BSC sends HANDOVER PERFORMED message to MSC. Timer stop: it stops when BSC receives HANDOVER PERFORMED ACK message from MSC. Timeout action: release call while sending CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC.
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 50 ~ 70 100 ms 60 --A Interface
106
GPRS Max Retrying Times

The interface of GPRS maximum retrying times is shown in Figure 17.
FIGURE 17 - GRPS M AX RETRYING TIMES
MAX times of BVC block retry (BVCBlkMax)

T A B L E 1 3 9 - M AX T I M E S O F B V C B L O C K R E T R Y
MAX times of BVC block retry BVCBlkMax BVC-BLOCK-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
107
If the PTP BVC must be blocked due to OAM intervention or equipment faults (disable blocking/unblocking the signaling BVC), BSS will first set the BVC status as Blocked and discard the uplink service data. To notify SGSN to stop sending downlink data, BSS initiates BVC blocking procedure. BSC repeats BVC blocking procedure after sending BVC BLOCK message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive BVC BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in BSSGPT1, then BVC blocking repeats for a maximum of N times. BSC stops BVC blocking and notifies OMS for N times if there is no answer. N depends on maximum retries of BVC BLOCK. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 3 ~ 10 None 3 --Gb interface
Description
MAX times of BVC unblock retry (BVCUnblkMax)

T A B L E 1 4 0 - M AX T I M E S O F B V C U N B L O C K R E T R Y
MAX times of BVC unblock retry BVCUblkMax BVC-UNBLOCK-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
108
If the PTP BVC must be unblocked due to the OAM intervention or recovery of the equipment fault (disable blocking/unblocking the signaling BVC), BSS will first set the BVC status as Unblocked. To notify SGSN to start sending the downlink data, BSS will initiate the BVC unblocking procedure. BSC repeats the BVC unblocking procedure after sending the BVC UNBLOCK message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the BVC UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in BSSGPT1 then BVC unblocking repeats for a maximum of N times. BSC stops BVC unblocking and notifies OMS for N times if there is no answer. N depends on maximum retries of BVC UNBLOCK. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 3 ~ 10 None 3 --Gb interface
Description
MAX times of BVC reset retry (BVCRestMax)

T A B L E 1 4 1 - M AX T I M E S O F B V C R E S E T R E T R Y
MAX times of BVC reset retry BVCRestMax BVC-RESET-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
109
To keep the initial status consistent between the two BVC sides, the Reset BVC process must be initiated in the following cases: 1) system faults that affect the BVC function in BSS or SGSN (such as restart upon power-on); 2) lower layer network service entity failure (such as frame relay fault); 3) lower layer network service entity capability update (for example, frame relay capability changed from 0kbps to greater than 0kbps); 4) change of the corresponding relationship between BVC and the cell. Description For faults that affect NSE, BSC initiates Signaling BVC RESET procedure. For faults that affect a single BVC, BSC initiates the PTP BVC RESET procedure. BSC initiates all PTP BVC RESET procedure for corresponding NSE after a signaling BVC reset procedure. BSC repeats the BVC RESET procedure after sending BVC RESET message to SGSN and if BSC fails to receive BVC RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in BSSGPT2. BSC repeats the BVC RESET procedure for a maximum of N times. BSC stops BVC RESET and notifies OMS for N times if there is no answer. N depends on maximum retries of BVC RESET. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 0 ~ 255 None 3 --Gb interface
MAX times of NS block retry (NSBlkMax)

T A B L E 1 4 2 - M AX T I M E S O F N S B L O C K R E T R Y
MAX times of NS block retry NSBlkMax NS-BLOCK-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0
110
Description
BSC repeats the blocking process when sending the NS BLOCK message to SGSN. If NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN fails to reach BSC within specified NS_T1 time then BSC repeats the NS BLOCK message for a maximum of N times. BSC stops BLOCK procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS BLOCK.
BSC 0 ~ 10 None 3 --Gb interface
MAX times of NS unblock retry (NSUnblkMax)

T A B L E 1 4 3 - M AX T I M E S O F N S U N B L O C K R E T R Y
MAX times of NS unblock retry NSUnblkMax NS-UNBLOCK-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 BSC repeats UNBLOCK procedure after sending NS UNBLOCK message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN within NS_T1 timer, then BSC repeats the NS UNBLOCK message for a maximum of N times. BSC stops UNBLOCK procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS UNBLOCK.
Description
BSC 0 ~ 10 None 3 ---
111
Related interfaces
Gb interface
MAX times of NS alive retry (NSAliveMax)

T A B L E 1 4 4 - M AX T I M E S O F N S A L I V E R E T R Y
MAX times of NS alive retry NSAliveMax NS-ALIVE-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 BSC repeats alive procedure after sending NS Alive message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive NS Alive ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN within NS_T4 timer then BSC repeats NS Alive message for a maximum of N times. NS Alive process is specified by the procotol, used to test connection condition of NSVC terminal side. BSC stops BSC Alive procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS Alive.
Description
BSC 0 ~ 20 None 10 --Gb interface
MAX times of suspend retry (SuspendMax)

T A B L E 1 4 5 - M AX T I M E S O F S U S P E N D R E T R Y
MAX times of suspend retry SuspendMax SUSPEND-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
112
MS first sends a SUSPEND message to BSS over SDCCH when a Class B GPRS MS is about to initiate a voice service. BSS initiates suspending procedure to SGSN to notify SGSN to stop sending PS paging and downlink packet data after BSS receives the message. Description BSC repeats suspending procedure after sending SUSPEND message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive SUSPEND ACK/NACK message from SGSN in BSSGPT3 then BSC repeats the suspending procedure for a maximum of N times. BSC stops suspending and notify OMS for N times if there is no answer. N depends on maximum suspending retries. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 0 ~ 10 None 3 --Gb interface
MAX times of resume retry (ResumeMax)

T A B L E 1 4 6 - M AX T I M E S O F R E S U M E R E T R Y
MAX times of resume retry ResumeMax RESUME-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
113
BSSGP layer parameters. when GPRS-attached MS leaves a special mode, BSS adopts one of the following strategies: Notify MS of carrying out route area upgrade. Notify SGSN of recovering the GPRS service. In case of Routing Area Update, MS and SGSN directly negotiate GMM status. With the Resume method (usually for the MS in the packet transmission status), BSS will initiate the "RESUME" process to SGSN for the purpose of notifying SGSN to start the normal packet downlink transmission action. If BSC fails to receive the RESUME ACK/NACK message from SGSN in BSSGPT4, then repeats Resume procedure for a maximum of N times. BSC stops the Resume procedure and notify OMS N times if there is no answer. N depends on the maximum times of resuming retry. BSC 0 ~ 10 None 3 --Gb interface
Description
MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry (UpdateMax)

T A B L E 1 4 7 - M AX T I M E S O F R A D I O A C C E S S C A P A B I L I T I E S U P D A T E R E T R Y
MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry UpdateMax RA-CAPABILITY-UPDATE-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
114
Description
BSSGP layer parameters. when MS is establishing uplink/downlink TBF, BSS requires information about the radio access capability of MS. BSS obtains such information from SGSN through Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure. BSC repeats this procedure after sending the RADIO ACCESS CAPABILITIES UPDATE message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the RADIO ACCESS CAPABILITIES UPDATE ACK/NACK message from SGSN in BSSGPT5 then the Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure repeats for a maximum of N times. After N times if there is no answer, then BSC stops Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure and notify OMS. N depends on the maximum update retry times. BSC 0 ~ 10 None 3 --Gb interface
MAX times of PFC create retry (DownLoadBssPFCMax)

TABLE 148 - M AXIMUM TIMES OF RETRYING TO CREATE PFC
Maximum times of retrying to create PFC DownLoadBssPFCMax DOWNLOAD-BSS-PFC-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 Max retry times to create PFC. If "Creat BSS PFC" is not received before timer BSSGPT6 is timeout, BSS sends "Download BSS PFC" message according to max times of retrying to create PFC. If "Creat BSS PFC" is not received still after trying DownLoadBSSPRCMax+1, the process is completed and inform O&M BSC 0 ~ 10 None
Description
115
3 ZGF06-20-002 Streaming Service Policies ZGF06-20-001 Service based QoS (UMTS) ZGF06-07-006 Quality of Service (QoS) -Gb interface
MAX times of PFC modify retry (ModifyBssPFCMax)

T A B L E 1 4 9 - M AX T I M E S O F P F C M O D I F Y R E T R Y
Maximum times of retrying to modify PFC ModifyBssPFCMax MODIFY-BSS-PFC-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 Max retry times to modify PFC. If "Modify BSS PFC Ack" is not received before timer BSSGPT8 is timeout, BSS sends "Modify BSS PFC" message according to max times of retrying to modify PFC. If "Modify BSS PFC Ack" is not received still after trying ModifyBssPFCMax +1, the process is completed and inform O&M BSC 0 ~ 10 None 3 ZGF06-20-002 Streaming Service Policies ZGF06-20-001 Service based QoS (UMTS) ZGF06-07-006 Quality of Service (QoS) -Gb interface
Description
GPRS Timer Parameters

The interface of GPRS timer parameters is shown in Figure 18 - .
116
FIGURE 18 - GPRS TIMER PAR AMETERS
BVC block/unblock retry time (BssgpT1, 100ms)

TABLE 150 - BVC BLOCK/UNBLOCK RETRY TIME
BVC block/unblock retry time BssgpT1 T1 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
117
Description
It monitors BSSGP blocking/unblocking process. Global process in BSC central module MP uses the timer value. BSS initiates BVC blocking/unblocking procedure for a point-to-point BVC in case of OAM intervention or device faults. BSC repeats this procedure, if SGSN does not return BVC BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACK/NACK messages. The interval between the messages is the BVC blocking/unblocking retry time. BSC 10 ~ 300 100 ms 30 --Gb interface
BVC reset retry time (BssgpT2, 100ms)

TABLE 151 - BVC RESET RETRY TIME
BVC reset retry time BssgpT2 T2 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 It monitors BSSGP reset procedure. BSS initiates "BVC reset" process when BVC (including PTP BVC and signaling BVC) is required to be reset (disconnection to connection at Gb interface, and cell is changed from GPRS support to GPRS/EDGE support) due to certain reason. BSC repeats the procedure if SGSN does not return BVC RESET ACK/NACK message. The interval between the messages is the BVC reset retry time. BSC 10 ~ 1200 100 ms 30 --
Description
118
-Gb interface
Suspend retry time (BssgpT3, 100ms)

TABLE 152 - SUSPEND RETRY TIME
Suspend retry time BssgpT3 T3 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 Class B MS notifies the network to suspend packet service when MS is ready to perform a voice service. BSS initiates to suspend SGSN procedure after receiving SUSPEND message from MS and repeats the procedure if SGSN does not return SUSPEND ACK/NACK message. The interval between the messages is the suspend retry time. BSC 1 ~ 100 100 ms 30 --Gb interface
Description
Resume retry time (BssgpT4, 100ms)

TABLE 153 - RESUME RETRY TIME
Resume retry time BssgpT4 T4 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
119
Description
It monitors BSSGP resuming procedure. Service process in BSC peripheral module MP uses the timer value. BSS initiates resuming procedure to SGSN when GPRS-attached MS is not in dedicated mode and BSS uses Notify SGSN to resume GPRS service policy. BSS repeats the procedure if SGSN does not return RESUME ACK/NACK message. The interval between the messages is the resuming retry time. BSC 1 ~ 100 100 ms 30 --Gb interface
Access capability update retry time (BssgpT5, 100ms)

TABLE 154 - ACCESS CAP ABILITY UPDATE RETRY TIME
Access capability update retry time BssgpT5 T5 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 It monitors BSSGP RA_CAPABILITY procedure. Service process in BSC peripheral module MP uses the timer value. BSC repeats Radio Access Capability Update procedure after BSS initiates RA_CAPABILITY procedure to SGSN and if SGSN does not return the RA_CAPABILITY UPDATE ACK/NACK message. The interval between the messages is the retry time for radio access capability update. BSC 10 ~ 300 100 ms 30 --
Description
120
-Gb interface
PFC creating retry time (BssgpT6, 100ms)

TABLE 155 - PFC CREATING RETRY TIME
PFC creating retry time BssgpT6 T6 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 PFC creating retry time The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
Description
Timer start: it starts while BSC initiates Download PFC process; Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGSN Create PFC message; Timeout action: retransfer for N times (configurable)
BSC 1 ~ 100 100 ms 30 --Gb interface
PFC modifying retry time (BssgpT8, 100ms)

TABLE 156 - PFC MODIFYING RETRY TIME
Retry time to modify PFC BssgpT8 T8 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
121
Retry time to modify PFC. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
Timer start: it starts while BSC initiates Modify BSS PFC process;
Description
Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGSN Modify BSS PFC Ack message; Timeout action: retransfer for N times (configurable)
BSC 1 ~ 100 100 ms 30 ZGF06-20-002 Streaming Service Policies ZGF06-20-001 Service based QoS (UMTS) ZGF06-07-006 Quality of Service (QoS) -Gb interface
Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure (NS_T1, s)

TABLE 157 - TIMER THAT MONITORS THE BLOCK/UNBLOCK PROCEDURE
Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure NS_T1 Tns-block 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
Description
Timer start: it starts if NS block/unblock procedure is initiated; Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGSN response; Timeout action: retransfer for N times (configurable)
BSC 1 ~ 120
122
s 10 --Gb interface
Timer that monitors reset procedure (NS_T2, s)

TABLE 158 - TIMER THAT MONITORS RESET PROCEDURE
Timer that monitors reset procedure NS_T2 Tns-reset 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 Timer that monitors reset procedure. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
Description
Timer start: initiated;
it
starts
if
NS
reset
is
Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGSN response; Overtime actions: Repeat NS process, and the timer restarts
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 1 ~ 120 s 10 --Gb interface
reset
NC-Cycle of NS-VC test process (NS_T3, s)

TABLE 159 - NC-CYCLE OF NS-VC TEST PROCESS
Full name
NC-Cycle of NS-VC test process
123
NS_T3 Tns-test 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 NC-Cycle of NS-VC test process. The conditions of timer start, restart, and timeout actions are as follows:
Description
Timer start: it starts after NS Reset process is finished; Timer restart: it restarts after receiving NS Alive Ack; Timeout action: send NS Alive message on timeout.
BSC 1 ~ 60 s 30 --Gb interface
Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC (NS_T4, s)

TABLE 160 - TIMER THAT MONITORS ALIVE PROCESS OF NSVC
Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC NS_T4 Tns-alive 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0
124
Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
Description
Timer start: initiated;
it
starts
if
NS
Alive
is
Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGSN response; Timeout action: retransfer for N times (configurable)
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 3 s 3 --Gb interface
MAX attempt period of reset (NS_T5, s)

TABLE 161 - M AXIMUM ATTEMPT PERIOD OF RESET
Maximum attempt period of reset NS_T5 --Maximum attempt period of reset. Start timer NS_T5 while starting NS reset process, no reset response is received before NS_T2 timer is timeout, repeat NS reset process until timer NS_T5 is timeout. If still no reset response is received, NS reset process shall be terminated and report NS alarm to O&M. If reset response is received prior to timeout, the timer is cleared. BSC 180 s 180 --
Description
125
-Gb interface
TFI and USF release timer (T3169, 10ms)

TABLE 162 - TFI AND USF RELEASE TIMER
TFI and USF release timer T3169 T3169 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is timer T3169. During the packet uplink transmission, if N3101 or N3103 counter stops, BSS starts the T3169 timer. Network utilizes TFI and USF resources on release when T3169 stops.
Description
Timer Start: T3169 timer starts when the counter N3101 = N3101_MAX or the counter N3103 = N3103_MAX. Timer Stop: None; Timeout action: Release USF and TFI resources.
BSC 0 ~ 65535 10 ms 500 --Um interface
TBF release timer (T3191, 10ms)

TABLE 163 - TBF RELEASE TIMER
TBF Release Timer T3191 T3191
126
3GPP reference
3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is timer T3191. During the packet downlink transmission, RLC data block transmits BSN on maximum load condition (that is, the final downlink data block). Network sends RLC data block with Final Block Identifier (FBI) field set at 1. FBI includes effective RRBP field to initialize the release of downlink TBF. Network starts the T3191 timer. For each RLC data block that receives FBI with value 1 and contains effective RRBP domain:
Description
In acknowledged mode, MS sends the Package Downlink Confirmation/Nonconfirmation message with Final Acknowledgement Identifier (FAI) domain as 1 through the uplink block specified in RRBP domain. Network re-transmits the RLC data block until receiving PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message and before the T3191 timer stops. T3191 timer is enabled when the network wish to retransmit again. The network releases TBF when T3193 timer stops. The network also releases TBF when T3191 stops. In unacknowledged mode, MS sends the PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message in the uplink block specified as per RRBP field. T3191 terminates to enable only when the network receives the PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message before T3191 stops. The network releases TBF when T3193 timer stops. The network also releases TBF when T3191 stops.
127
TBF release time of downlink transmission (T3193, 10ms)

TABLE 164 - TBF RELEASE TIME OF DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION
TBF release time of downlink transmission T3193 T3193 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is timer T3193 which is used for protection on TBF release during downlink packet transmission. Refer to the description of T3191 timer given below:
Description
Timer start condition: The final PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK or PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message is received. Timer stop: The network establishes a new downlink TBF. Timeout action: Release the TFI resource.
This parameter is bigger than timer T3192 to make sure the TFI of MS is unique at the same time.
TBF protect time when radio link failure (T3195, 10ms)

TABLE 165 - TBF PROTECT TIME WHEN RADIO LINK FAILURE
TBF protect time when radio link failure T3195 T3195
128
3GPP reference
3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter the protection time of TBF when the radio link fails or when the cell change leads to MS failure to respond. During the packet downlink transmission, if the N3105 counter stops, BSS starts the T3195 timer. Network uses the TFI resource again when T3195 timer stops.
Description
Timer start: T3195 timer starts when the counter N3105 = N3105_MAX Timer stop: None. Timeout action: Release the TFI resource.
PS channel delay release timer (PSRelDelay, 100ms)

TABLE 166 - PS CHANNEL DELAY RELE ASE TIMER
PS channel delay release timer PSRelDelay --Information of releasing this PS channel when this threshold is achieved. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
Description
Timer start: it starts while all service are released on PDTCH; Timeout action: release PDTCH channel, during which if this channel is occupied again, the timer shall be cleared.
Management Object
BSC
129
200 ~ 600 100 ms 300 ----
RIR Timer (TRIR, 100ms)

TABLE 167 - RIR TIMER
RIR Timer TRIR T(RIR) 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 RIM RIR timer duration. This timer starts while controlling BSS sends request message to serving BSS; this timer stops while receiving PDU message sent by serving BSS. If this timer is timeout, message request process is failed, or message request process is initiated again by controlling BSS. This parameter is valid after "support RIM" function is enabled.
Description
RI Timer (TRI, 100ms)

TABLE 168 - RI TIMER
Full name
RI Timer
130
TRI T(RI) 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 RIM RI timer duration. This timer starts when serving BSS sends message PDU to controlling BSS and response indication bit is configured as "Ack response is required". This timer stops while receiving Ack from controlling BSS. If this timer is timeout, the process is failed, or message indication process is initiated again by serving BSS. This parameter is valid after "support RIM" function is enabled.
Description
RIAE Timer (RIAE, 100ms)

T A B L E 1 6 9 - R I AE T I M E R
RIAE Timer TRIAE T(RIAE) 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0 RIM RIAE timer duration. This timer starts when controlling BSS initiates RAN Information Application Error process and response indication bit is configured as "Ack response is required". This timer stops while receiving Ack response from serving BSS. If this timer is timeout, the process is failed, or this process is initiated again by controlling BSS. This parameter is valid after "support RIM" function is enabled.
Description
Management Object
BSC
131
50 ~ 300 100 ms 50 --Gb interface

The interface of AMR half method parameters is shown in Figure 19.
FIGURE 19 - AMR HALF METHOD P AR AMETERS
132
AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHalfAcs)

TABLE 170 - AMR HALF ACTIVE CODEC SET
AMR Half Active Codec Set AmrHalfAcs --The code has 8 bits. Bit 6~ Bit 8: reserved; Bit 5: 7.40 kbps; Bit 4: 6.70 kbps Bit 2: 5.15 kbps; Bit 1: 4.75 kbps. Yes represents 1 and No represents 0. Four coding modes could be set at the most. Default code is 00011110 (that is 30). BSC From 4.75 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, 5.90 kbit/s, 6.70 kbit/s to 7.40 kbit/s, value range is Yes/No. None Default is [No, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes] in order. ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) Start mode (AmrStartMode) --
Description
133
Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds)

TABLE 171 - THRESHOLDS OF AMR
Thresholds of AMR AmrThresholds --The threshold of changing AMR mode includes five factors: AmrThresholds1, AmrThresholds2, AmrThresholds3, AmrThresholds4, and AmrThresholds5. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met:
Description
AmrThresholds1 =< AmrThresholds2 =< AmrThresholds3 =< AmrThresholds4 =< AmrThresholds5 AmrThresholds1+AmrHysteresis1 AmrThresholds2+AmrHysteresis2 AmrThresholds3+AmrHysteresis3 AmrThresholds4+AmrHysteresis4 AmrThresholds5+AmrHysteresis5 =< =< =< =<
Management Object
BSC Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Value range is 0~63.
0: 0.0 dB;
Value Range
1: 0.5 dB; 2: 1.0 dB 63: 31.5 dB
None [22, 25, 29, 34, 40] ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---
Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)

T A B L E 1 7 2 - H Y S T E R E S I S O F AM R
Full name
Hysteresis of AMR
134
AmrHysteresis --The hysteresis of changing AMR mode includes five factors: AmrHysteresis1, AmrHysteresis2, AmrHysteresis3, AmrHysteresis4, and AmrHysteresis5. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met: AmrThresholds1+AmrHysteresis1 AmrThresholds2+AmrHysteresis2 AmrThresholds3+AmrHysteresis3 AmrThresholds4+AmrHysteresis4 AmrThresholds5+AmrHysteresis5 BSC Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Value range is 0~15. =< =< =< =<
Description
Management Object
0: 0.0 dB;
Value Range
1: 0.5 dB; 2: 1.0 dB 15: 7.5 dB
None [4, 5, 5, 6, 6] ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---
Initial codec mode (IsAmrICM)

TABLE 173 - INITIAL CODEC MODE
Initial codec mode IsAmrlCM --Use the coding mode specified by Startmode BSC
135
Startmode codec, Initial codec mode None Startmode codec ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---

TABLE 174 - STARTMODE CODEC MODE
Startmode codec mode AmrStartMode --Startmode codec mode BSC
136
When only a value is configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1~4; When two values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1~3; When three values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1~2; When four values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1;
Value Range
When all values are configured as "No" for 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is null;
The values are as follows:
1: Select the coding mode with lowest bit rate as the initial coding mode. 2: Select the coding mode with the second lowest bit rate, if there is more than one coding mode. 3: Select the coding mode with the third lowest bit rate, if there is more than two coding modes. 4: Select the coding mode with the fourth lowest bit rate, if there are more than three coding modes.
Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces None 1 ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---

TABLE 175 - ENABLE NOISE CONTROL
Full name
Enable noise control
137
IsAmrNscb --This parameter defines whether AMR noise control is enabled, that is, to suppress background noise and keep original voice quality.
Description
No: Enable noise suppression; Yes: Disable noise suppression;
BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---

The interface of AMR full method parameters is shown in Figure 20 - .
138
FIGURE 20 - AMR FULL METHOD P AR AMETERS
AMR Full Active Codec Set (ArmFullAcs)

T AB L E 1 7 6 - AM R F U L L AC T I V E C O D E C SE T
AMR full Active Codec Set AmrFullAcs --The code has 8 bits. The code has 8 bits. Bit 8: 12.2 kbps; Bit 7: 10.2 kbps; Bit 6: 7.95 kbps; Bit 5: 6.70 kbps Bit 2: 5.15 kbps; Bit 1: 4.75 kbps. Yes represents 1 and No represents 0. Default code is 10101010 (that is 170). BSC From 4.75 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, 5.90 kbit/s, 6.70 kbit/s, 7.40 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s, 10.2 kbit/s to 12.2 kbit/s, value range is Yes/No. None Default is [No, Yes, No, Yes, No, Yes, No, Yes] in order. ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) Start mode (AmrStartMode)
Description
139
Related interfaces
--
Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds)

Thresholds of AMR AmrThresholds --The threshold of changing AMR mode includes seven factors: AmrThresholds1, AmrThresholds2, AmrThresholds3, AmrThresholds4, AmrThresholds5, AmrThresholds6, AmrThresholds7. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met: AmrThresholds1 =< AmrThresholds2 =< AmrThresholds3 =< AmrThresholds4 =< AmrThresholds5 =< AmrThresholds6 =< AmrThresholds7, AmrThresholds1+AmrHysteresis1 =< AmrThresholds2 + AmrHysteresis2 =< AmrThresholds3 + AmrHysteresis3 =< AmrThresholds4 + AmrHysteresis4 =< AmrThresholds5 + AmrHysteresis5 =< AmrThresholds6 + AmrHysteresis6 =< AmrThresholds7 + AmrHysteresis7 BSC Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Value range is 0~63.
Description
Management Object
0: 0.0 dB;
Value Range
1: 0.5 dB; 2: 1.0 dB 63: 31.5 dB
None [6, 9, 13, 18, 24, 31, 39] ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---
140

Hysteresis of AMR AmrHysteresis --The hysteresis of changing AMR mode includes seven factors: AmrHysteresis1, AmrHysteresis2, AmrHysteresis3, AmrHysteresis4, AmrHysteresis5, AmrHysteresis6, AmrHysteresis7. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met:
Description
AmrThresholds1+AmrHysteresis1 AmrThresholds2+AmrHysteresis2 AmrThresholds3+AmrHysteresis3 AmrThresholds4+AmrHysteresis4 AmrThresholds5+AmrHysteresis5 AmrThresholds6+AmrHysteresis6 AmrThresholds7+AmrHysteresis7 BSC
=< =< =< =< =< =<
Management Object
Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Value range is 0~15.
0: 0.0 dB;
Value Range
1: 0.5 dB; 2: 1.0 dB 15: 7.5 dB
None [3, 4, 3, 5, 5, 5, 6] ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR)
--
Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM)

Initial codec mode IsAmrICM
141
--Use the coding mode specified by Startmode BSC Startmode codec, Initial codec mode None Startmode codec ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---

Startmode codec mode AmrStartMode --Startmode codec mode BSC
142
When four values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1~4; When five values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1~3; When six values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1~2; When seven values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1;
Value Range
When all values are configured as "No" for 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is null;

Full name
143
Description
BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---

144
BVC flow control period (CellFcPer, 10ms)

TABLE 182 - BVC FLOW CONTROL PERIOD
BVC flow control period CellFcPer --This parameter is the BVC leakage ratio measurement period in the BVC Flow Control process, that is, BVC long measurement period. To provide reference to the BVC flow control at SGSN side, the BSSGP process at BSS side periodically measures the current BVC leakage ratio. BSC initiates the BVC flow control procedure unconditionally when the long measurement timer overflows. SGSN confirms to BSC if the difference of leakage ratios between the two times exceeds CellFcThs. BSC also initiates BVC flow control procedure with SGSN confirmation if the short measurement timer overflows, and the difference of the leakage ratio between the two timers exceed CellFcThs. BSC 0 ~ 65535 10 ms
Description
145
3000 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-010 BVC Flow Control (in DL) ---
MS flow control period (MsFcPer, 10ms)

TABLE 183 - MS FLOW CONTROL PERIOD
MS flow control period MsFcPer --This parameter is the MS leakage ratio measurement period in the MS Flow Control process, that is, MS long measurement period. For reference of flow control at SGSN side, the BSSGP process at BSS side periodically measures the current leakage ratio of each MS. When the long measurement timer overflows, the MS Flow Control process is initialized unconditionally. If the difference between the two leakage ratios exceeds MsFcThs, SGSN must acknowledge it. When the short measurement timer overflows, and the difference between the two leakage ratios exceeds MsFcThs, the MS Flow Control process is initialized, which also needs acknowledgement of SGSN. BSC 0 ~ 65535 10 ms 3000 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-011 MS Flow Control (in DL) ---
Description
146
NSVC peer to peer delay (Delay, ms)

TABLE 184 - NSVC PEER TO PEER DELAY
NSVC Peer to Peer Delay Delay --This is an NS link layer parameter. NSVC is an endto-end concept. The NSVC end-to-end delay is a basis for flow control in frame relay. It is optionally configured in the background. BSC 1 ~ 20 ms 10 ----
Description
Cn
TABLE 185 - CN
Cn ----
147
This parameter is used to determine the increase of coding mode level. Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel, the GPRS data block may employ the CS1 to CS-4 coding modes, with data rates 9.05 kbps, 13.4 kbps, 15.6 kbps, and 21.4 kbps, respectively. The low level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data throughput. User can choose different coding modes for each timeslot or even each TBF. The network selects the coding mode dynamically according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality at the transmission of the GPRS data, to reach maximum radio throughput. Good radio transmission quality means that the probability of the retransmission of the error radio blocks is small. In this time the coding mode that carries large data volume (that is, high level coding mode) can be used. For TBF (uplink and downlink) in the channel coding mode CSn (1=n=3), if the number of data blocks transmitted consecutively and correctly exceeds the predefined parameter Cn[n-1], the coding mode will be increased by one level. Footnote 1, 2, and 3 in the interface are coding conversion parameters among CS1~CS2, CS2~CS3, and CS3CS4. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 0 ~ 255 None 85 ZGF06-03-004 Switching Points between Coding Schemes Configurable ---
Description
Nn
TABLE 186 - NN
Nn ----
148
This parameter is used to determine the decrease of coding mode level. It is used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP. Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel, the GPRS data block may employ the CS1 to CS-4 coding modes, with data rates 9.05 kbps, 13.4 kbps, 15.6 kbps, and 21.4 kbps, respectively. The low level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data throughput. User can choose different coding modes for each timeslot or even each TBF. The network selects the coding mode dynamically according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality at the transmission of the GPRS data, to reach maximum radio throughput. The coding mode with stronger anti-interference capability (that is, low level coding mode) must be used when the radio transmission quality is poor. The coding level decreases to one level if Nn[n-2] data blocks are transmitted, the number of consecutive data blocks losses in the coding mode CSn (2 =< n =< 4) for the TBF (downlink and uplink) is Xn[n-2]%. Footnote 1, 2, and 3 in the interface are coding conversion parameters among CS1~CS2, CS2~CS3, and CS3CS4. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 0 ~ 255 None 20 ZGF06-03-004 Switching Points between Coding Schemes Configurable ---
Description
Xn (%)
TABLE 187 - XN
Xn (%) ----
149
This parameter is the threshold for determining the decrease in the level of the coding mode. It is used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP. Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel, the GPRS data block may employ the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes, with data rates 9.05 kbps, 13.4 kbps, 15.6 kbps, and 21.4 kbps, respectively. The low level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data throughput. User can choose different coding modes for each timeslot or even each TBF. The network selects the coding mode dynamically according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality at the transmission of the GPRS data, to reach maximum radio throughput. The coding mode with stronger anti-interference capability (that is, low level coding mode) must be used when the radio transmission quality is poor. The coding level decreases to one level if Nn[n-2] data blocks are transmitted, the number of consecutive data blocks losses in the coding mode CSn (2 =< n =< 4) for the TBF (downlink and uplink) is Xn[n-2]%. Footnote 1, 2, and 3 in the interface are coding conversion parameters among CS1~CS2, CS2~CS3, and CS3CS4. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 0 ~ 100 % 25 ZGF06-03-004 Switching Points between Coding Schemes Configurable ---
Description
MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data blocks (N3101)

T A B L E 1 8 8 - M AX A L L O W E D N U M B E R O F C O N T I N U O U S L O S S E S O F U P L I N K
DATA BLOCKS
MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data blocks N3101 N3101 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0
150
Description
This parameter is counter N3101, which is used at RLC/MAC layer of BRP. During packet uplink transmission, BSS specifies USF (corresponding to one uplink TBF) for each uplink block. For a USF, if the network receives correct data from a specified uplink block, N3101 clears for that TBF. If the number of losses in specified uplink block exceeds N3101, then T3169 timer starts. Network uses the TFI and USF resources when T3169 stops. BSC 9 ~ 255 None 10 --Um interface
Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries (N3103)

T A B L E 1 8 9 - T I M E S O F P A C K E T U P L I N K A C K / N AC K R E T R I E S
Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries N3103 N3103 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0
151
This parameter is counter N3103, which is used at RLC/MAC layer of BRP. Network sends a PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message and sets FAI as 1 during packet uplink transmission, if network detects that all RLC data blocks have been received at the end of uplink TBF (CV = 0, and V(Q) = V(R). The RLC/MAC control block header contains a valid RRBP domain. Counter N3103 clears. Description MS sends PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message in the block specified in RRBP and release TBF if MS receives PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message with FAI1 from network side. Network re-transmits PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message with N3103 counter incrementing, if the network fails to receive PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message in the radio block specified in the RRBP field. The network starts T3169 timer if the value of N3103 exceeds the limiting N3103max. Network uses the TFI and USF resources when T3169 stops. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 0 ~ 255 None 10 --Um interface
MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink RLC/MAC control message (N3105)
T A B L E 1 9 0 - M AX A L L O W E D N U M B E R O F C O N T I N U O U S L O S S E S O F U P L I N K RLC/M AC CONTROL MESSAGE
MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink RLC/MAC control message N3105 N3105 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0
152
This parameter is counter N3105, which is used at RLC/MAC layer of BRP. During packet uplink transmission, BSS specifies USF (corresponding to one uplink TBF) for each uplink block. For a USF, if the network receives correct data from a specified uplink block, N3101 clears for that TBF. If the number of losses in specified uplink block exceeds N3101, then T3169 timer starts. Network uses the TFI and USF resources when T3169 stops. BSC 0 ~ 255 None 10 --Um interface
Description
Support extended uplink dynamic allocation (ExUpDynSupport)

TABLE 191 - SUPPORT EXTENDED UPLINK DYNAMIC ALLOCATION
Support extended uplink dynamic allocation ExUpDynSupport --It describes to support extended uplink dynamic allocation. Extended uplink dynamic allocation is Extend Dynamic Allocation. While using this function, the MS only need listen USF allocation with the least timeslot, so you can determine to send uplink block on all allocated uplink timeslot. When this parameter is configured as Yes and cell parameter EXUPDYNSUPPORT is also enabled, it indicates the cell starting extended dynamic allocation function. BSC Yes/No None No
Description
153
ZGF06-05-002 Extended Dynamic Allocation ---

NACC supported (NACCSupport)

TABLE 192 - N ACC SUPPORTED
NACC supported NACCSupport ---
154
Description
LLC framework conversion refers to the process: on NACC, if target cell is the cell in BSC, downlink LLC frame data that has not been sent to this MS from BSC is transferred to target cell, and then it is sent to this MS after MS uplink TBF link is established. BSC Not Support NACC; Support NACC, not LLC Frame Transfer; Support NACC and LLC Frame Transfer. None Not support NACC ZGF06-01-004 Network-assisted Cell Change ---
BSC's net operation mode (NMO)

TABLE 193 - BSC'S NET OPERATION MODE
BSC's net operation mode NMO ---
155
There are three network operation modes:
Network operation mode 1: The network sends CS paging message to GPRS attached MS on the same channel as GPRS paging channel (packet paging channel or CCCH paging channel), or on GPRS traffic channel (when a packet data channel is allocated). Mode 1 indicates that MS only need to monitor one paging channel.
Network operation mode 1 is required while configuring PBCCH; Gs interfce is required while configuring network operation mode 1.
Description
Network operation mode 2: The network sends CS paging message to GPRS attached MS on CCCH paging channel, for GPRS paging. Mode 2 indicates that the MS only need to monitor CCCH paging channel, but when BSC allocates a packet data channel, the CS paging message uses the CCCH paging channel. Network operation mode 3: The network sends CS paging message to GPRS attached MS on CCCH paging channel, while GPRS paging message is sent either on packet paging channel (if packet paging channel is available in the cell) or on CCCH channel. Mode 3 indicates that the MS must monitor two paging channels (if packet paging channel is available in the cell) in order to receive CS or GPRS paging message.
BSC Network operation mode 1, 2, and 3 None Network Operation Mode 2 ----
156
Satellite transmission at Gb interface indication (IsSatelliteGB)

TABLE 194 - S ATELLITE TRANSMISSION AT GB INTERFACE INDICATION
Satellite transmission at Gb interface indication IsStatelliteGB --It describes whether BSC system supports "satellite transmission at Gb interface". This function is mainly to implement the modification of delay. BSC Yes/No None No ZGF05-01-018 Gb Interface over Satellite ---
Extended RLC send window allowed (IsWindowExpend)

TABLE 195 - EXTENDED RLC SEND WINDOW ALLOWED
Extended RLC send window allowed IsWindowExpend --Whether extended RLC send window is allowed BSC Yes/No None No --
157
---
Support TBF establish (TBF_EST)

TABLE 196 - SUPPORT TBF ESTABLISH
Support TBF establish TBF_EST --Indicates whether BSC supports TBF establishment process. TBF flow establishment refers to while releasing uplink TBF, to determin whether new uplink TBF shall be established immediately for CTRL_ACK field in Packet Control Acknowledgement message. BSC Yes/No None No ----
Description
Support signal extended uplink TBF (SIGNAL_EUTBF)

TABLE 197 - SUPPORT SIGNAL EXTENDED UPLINK TBF
Support signal extended uplink TBF SIGNAL_EUTBF ---
158
Description
This parameter indicates whether signaling uplink TBF can use extended uplink TBF functions. This parameter has the functions when the cell supports for extended uplink TBF. Signaling TBF at this place refers to TBF established to transmit GMM signaling. BSC Yes/No None No ZGF06-07-008 Delayed TBF Release in UL ---
Resource pool for PS rate (PsAbisThs, %)

TABLE 198 - RESOURCE POOL FOR PS RATE
Resource pool for PS rate PsAbisThs --Full dynamic Abis resource pool provides use proportion of PS channel. if default value for this parameter is configured as 80%, which refers to upper limit for PS. The aim is to idle Abis resource while CS channel is activated. If this threshold is exceeded, Abis resource can't be allocated to PS service again. BSC 0 ~ 100 % 80 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation ---
Description
159
Downlink TBF retry (DITBFRetry)

TABLE 199 - DOWNLINK TBF RETRY
DITBFRetry --Indicates the number of retry after downlink poll overflow BSC Not retry; one time; two times None Not retry ----
Maximum PS uplink user per ts (MaxPsUserPerTs_0)

TABLE 200 - MAXIMUM PS UPLINK USER PER TS
Maximum PS uplink user per ts MaxPsUserPerTs_0 --This parameter describes maximum PS uplink user per ts. BSC 2~8 None 4 ---
160
Related interfaces
--
Maximum PS downlink user per ts (MaxPsUserPerTs_1)

TABLE 201 - MAXIMUM PS DOWNLINK USER PER TS
Maximum PS downlink user per ts MaxPsUserPerTs_1 --This parameter describes maximum PS downlink user per ts. BSC 2 ~ 16 None 6 ----
PS capability threshold 0 (PSCapaThs_0)

TABLE 202 - PS CAP ABILITY THRESHOLD 0
PS capability threshold 0 PSCAPATHS_0 ---
161
This parameter is one of timeslot group PS access capability (PSCAPATHS_0/PSCAPATHS_1). 0 represents uplink, 1 represents downlink. To reach the purpose of radio channel cluster for similar service, PS channel allocation algorithm will try to allocate on the busiest TRX with existing PS service, until the access capability of this TRX is reduced to certain degree. PSCAPATHS_0/PSCAPATHS_1 is a threshold configured for timeslot average of timeslot group access capacity on TRX. When average value of access capacity is reduced to this threshold, you shall try to find new TRX to meet the demands of PS channel application to search new TRX. For instance: PSCAPATHS_0/PSCAPATHS_1=3/2 It indicates the idlest timeslot group for TRX has 3Abis resource for each radio timeslot, and it carries more than 2 users, you shall attempt aborting this TRX, and attempt PS access on some idle TRXs. If idler TRX cant be found, you have to allocate it on the carrier with very poor access capability. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 1 ~ 8640 None 40 ----
Description
PS capability threshold 1 (PSCAPATHS_1)

TABLE 203 - PS CAP ABILITY THRESHOLD 1
PS capability threshold 1 PSCAPATHS_1 ---
162
This parameter is one of timeslot group PS access capability (PSCAPATHS_0/PSCAPATHS_1). 0 represents uplink, 1 represents downlink. To reach the purpose of radio channel cluster for similar service, PS channel allocation algorithm will try to allocate on the busiest TRX with existing PS service, until the access capability of this TRX is reduced to certain degree. PSCAPATHS_0/PSCAPATHS_1 is a threshold configured for timeslot average of timeslot group access capacity on TRX. When average value of access capacity is reduced to this threshold, you shall try to find new TRX to meet the demands of PS channel application to search new TRX. For instance: PSCAPATHS_0/PSCAPATHS_1=3/2 It indicates the idlest timeslot group for TRX has 3Abis resource for each radio timeslot, and it carries more than 2 users, you shall attempt aborting this TRX, and attempt PS access on some idle TRXs. If idler TRX cant be found, you have to allocate it on the carrier with very poor access capability. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces BSC 1 ~ 8640 None 40 ----
Description
BVC Flow Control Parameters

The interface of BVC flow control parameters is as shown in Figure 23.
163
FIGURE 23 - BVC FLOW CONTROL P ARAMETERS
BVC flow control supported (BVCFlowCtrl)

TABLE 204 - BVC FLOW CONTROL SUPPORTED
BVC flow control supported BVCFlowCtrl --BVC flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and only in downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes, in order to avoid one BVC on BSS to abandoning some LLC data because of the overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too many LLC frame caches) and to avoid abandoning new downlink LLC data because of limit of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches).
Description
BSSGP process at BSS side counts current leaking rate of BVC periodically (including short statistics and long statistics). This parameter originates unconditionally if long statistics timer overflows and SGSN acknowledgement is necessary if discrepant range of adjacent leaking rates is over CellFcThs. BVC flow control supported originates and SGSN confirmation is necessary if short statistics timer overflows and discrepant range of adjacent leaking rates is over CellFcThs. BSC
Management Object
164
Yes/No None Yes ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-010 BVC Flow Control (in DL) ---
MS flow control supported (MSFlowCtrl)

TABLE 205 - MS FLOW CONTROL SUPPORTED
MS flow control supported MSFlowCtrl --MS flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and only in downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes, to avoid one MS on BSS to abandoning some LLC data because of the overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too many LLC frame caches) and to avoid abandoning new downlink LLC data because of limit of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches).
Description
BSSGP process at BSS side counts current leaking rate of MS periodically (including short statistics and long statistics). This parameter originates unconditionally if long statistics timer overflows and SGSN acknowledgement is necessary if discrepant range of adjacent leaking rates is over MsFcThs. MS flow control supported originates and SGSN confirmation is necessary if short statistics timer overflows and discrepant range of adjacent leaking rates is over MsFcThs. BSC Yes/No None No ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-011 MS Flow Control (in DL) --
165
Related interfaces
--
Flow control mode (FlowCtrlMode)

TABLE 206 - FLOW CONTROL MODE
Flow control mode FlowCtrlMode --BSC has different flow control modes report flow control parameters to SGSN. The modes are as follows:
1: Mode 1: Report flow control parameters according to actual traffic on radio interface counted at BSC;
Description
2: Mode 2: Report flow control parameters according to max traffic that the cell can provide; 3: Mode 3: Reserved
"Flow control mode 1 parameter" is enabled if selecting "mode 1"; "Flow control mode 2 parameter" is enabled if selecting "mode 2".
BSC 1~3 None 1 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-010 BVC Flow Control (in DL) -Gb interface
Parameter of flow control mode1 (FlowCtrlMode1Para)

TABLE 207 - P AR AMETER OF FLOW CONTROL MODE 1
Parameter of Flow control mode 1 FlowCtrlMode1Para
166
--BSC reports flow control parameters according to actual traffic at radio interface when adopting mode 1. Actual counted value is smaller due to radio interface re-transmission and TBF failure. So BSC multiplies the actual traffic with a multiple determined by this parameter when reporting flow control parameters. BSC 1 ~ 100 100 bps 1 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-010 BVC Flow Control (in DL) -Gb interface
Description
Parameter of flow control mode2 (FlowCtrlMode2Para)

TABLE 208 - P AR AMETER OF FLOW CONTROL MODE 2
Parameter of Flow control mode 2 FlowCtrlMode2Para --BSC reports flow control parameters according to max traffic that the cell can provide when adopting mode 2. Maximum value depends on configured channels. Counting formula: channels * max traffic that every channel can provide. This parameter is max traffic that every channel can provide, with the unit of 100 bps. BSC 10 ~ 1000 100 bps 214 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-010 BVC Flow Control (in DL)
Description
167
-Gb interface
BVC flow control R MIN value (BVCFlowCtrlRMin, 100bps)

TABLE 209 - BVC FLOW CONTROL R MIN VALUE
BVC flow control R MIN value BVCFlowCtrlRMin --This is the minimum value of leaking rate R in reported BVC flow control parameters under all kinds of flow control mode, that is, the reported parameter R must be equal or over the set value, in the unit of 100 bps. BSC 10 ~ 300 100 bps 80 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-010 BVC Flow Control (in DL) ---
Description
MS flow control R MIN value (MSFlowCtrlRMin, 100bps)

TABLE 210 - MS FLOW CONTROL R MIN VALUE
MS flow control R MIN value MSFlowCtrlRMin ---
168
Description
This is the minimum value of leaking rate R in reported MS flow control parameters under all kinds of flow control mode, that is, the reported parameter R must be equal or over the set value, in the unit of 100 bps. BSC 10 ~ 300 100 bps 80 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-011 MS Flow Control (in DL) ---
BVC flow control threshold (CellFcThs, %)

TABLE 211 - BVC FLOW CONTROL THRESHOLD
BVC flow control threshold CellFcThs --It is the triggering threshold of 'BVC flow control'. BVC flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and only in downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes, in order to avoid one BVC on BSS to abandoning some LLC data because of the overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too many LLC frame caches) and to avoid abandoning new downlink LLC data because of limit of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches). The BSSGP process at the BSS side periodically (long or short) measures the current leakage ratio of BVC. If the long measurement timer overflows, the "BVC Flow Control" process is initiated unconditionally. If the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than CellFcThs, SGSN must acknowledge it. If the short measurement timer overflows and the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than CellFcThs, the "BVC Flow Control" process is initiated, which also needs acknowledgement of SGSN. BSC
Description
Management Object
169
1 ~ 100 % 80 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-010 BVC Flow Control (in DL) ---
MS flow control threshold (MsFcThs, %)

TABLE 212 - MS FLOW CONTROL THRESHOLD
MS flow control threshold MsFcThs --The triggering threshold of MS flow control. MS flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and only in downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes, to avoid one MS on BSS to abandoning some LLC data because of the overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too many LLC frame caches) and to avoid abandoning new downlink LLC data because of limit of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches). The BSSGP process at the BSS side periodically (long or short) measures the current leakage ratio of MS. If the long measurement timer overflows, the MS Flow Control process is initiated unconditionally. If the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than MsFcThs, SGSN must acknowledge it. If the short measurement timer overflows and the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than MsFcThs, the MS Flow Control process is initiated, which also needs acknowledgement of SGSN. BSC 1 ~ 100 % 80 ZGF06-07-009 DL Flow Control ZGF06-07-011 MS Flow Control (in DL)
Description
170
---
FUC Flow Control Map Parameter

Interface of FUC Flow Control Map parameter shown in Figure 24.
FIGURE 24 - FUC FLOW CONTROL M AP PAR AMETERS
Flow control reason

TABLE 213 - FLOW CONTROL REASON
Flow control reason ---This parameter describes FUC flow control level. The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified. BSC Level 0~10
171
None [Level 0~10] ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Hurry Call
TABLE 214 - HURRY CALL
Emergency call ---This parameter describes hurry call percentage corresponding to certain FUC flow control level. The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified. BSC Level 0~10, value range is: 0~100 % [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0] ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ZGF05-25-006 Emergency Call Handling ---
Description
Call Rebuilt
TABLE 215 - CALL REBUILT
Call Rebuilt ----
172
Description
This parameter describes call rebuilt percentage corresponding to certain FUC flow control level. The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified. BSC Level 0~10, value range is: 0~100 % [0, 50, 75, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100] ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Call Response
TABLE 216 - CALL RESPONSE
Call Response ---This parameter describes call response percentage corresponding to certain FUC flow control level. The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified. BSC Level 0~10, value range is: 0~100 % [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 50, 50, 75, 75, 75] ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Description
173
Calling
TABLE 217 - CALLING
Calling ---This parameter describes calling percentage corresponding to certain FUC flow control level. The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified. BSC Level 0~10, value range is: 0~100 % [0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 25, 40, 78, 100, 100, 100] ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Description
Site Refresh
TABLE 218 - SITE REFRESH
Location Update ---This parameter describes site refresh percentage corresponding to certain FUC flow control level. The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified. BSC Level 0~10, value range is: 0~100 % [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 25, 50, 75]
Description
174
ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
GPRS Access
TABLE 219 - GPRS ACCESS
GPRS access ---This parameter describes site refresh percentage corresponding to certain FUC flow control level. The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified. BSC Level 0~10, value range is: 0~100 % [0, 0, 0, 20, 46, 73, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100] ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Description
Restore
TABLE 220 - RESTORE
Restore ---This parameter describes site refresh percentage corresponding to certain FUC flow control level. The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified.
Description
175
BSC Level 0~10, value range is: 0~100 % [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0] ZGF05-23-001 BSC Load Control ---
Flow control map slim adjust (bit)

TABLE 221 - FLOW CONTROL MAP SLIM ADJUST (BIT)
Flow control map slim adjust (bit) ---FUC establishes a channel request refuse map. After flow control is started, you can be based on this bitmap to determine whether certain access can be refused. Each bit in this map represents whether to allow channel access due to this reason: 1 represents refusal, 0 represents allowance.
Description
BSC None Bit None ----

The interface of EDGE property parameters is shown in Figure 25.
176
FIGURE 25 - EDGE PROPERTY P AR AMETERS
Support PFC (PFC Support)

TABLE 222 - SUPPORT PFC
Support PFC PFCSupport -Section 44.060 12.24, 23.060, 48.018 This parameter is broadcasted through SI13, PSI1, and PSI13 messages. In EGPRS system with broadband features, the QoS concept of UMTS has been imported, which enables transferring the negotiable QoS configuration to BSS through Gb interface. BSS can maintain QoS subscribing information through function PFC (packet flow context) flow, which include acquiring QoS, modifying QoS, and deleting QoS signaling flow. Network notifies MS whether the network supports PFC flow through the system message parameter PFC_FEATURE_MODE. If yes, the MS will add PFI when establishing uplink TBF (PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST). BSS can decide QoS as MS requires according to PFI.
Description
BSC Yes/No
177
None No ZGF06-20-002 Streaming Service Policies ZGF06-20-001 Service based QoS (UMTS) ZGF06-07-006 Quality of Service (QoS) ---
BSC support page coordination (PagCoordination)

TABLE 223 - BSC SUPPORT PAGE COORDINATION
BSC support page coordination PagCoordination --This parameter determines whether intra-BSC cell supports CS based paging. This parameter is broadcasted in GPRS CELL OPTIONS through SI13, PSI1, and PSI13 messages. For more information, refer to the protocol 04.60 12.24. It is invalid when NMO is 1. BSC Yes/No None No ----
Description
R99 Ind (R99Ind)

TABLE 224 - R99 IND
R99 Ind R99Ind
178
--R99 protocol version ID. BSS considers this parameter as a basis to determine whether to encode/decode message field added after R99 version for the protocol. BSC Version of R98 or its before, Version of R99 None R99 version --Um interface
Description
RS
TABLE 225 - RS
RS RS --Uplink throughput weight value at Gb interface, the dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. BSC 0 ~ 100 None 20 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation ---
179
RR
TABLE 226 - RR
RR RR --Downlink throughput weight value at Gb interface, the dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. BSC 0 ~ 100 None 20 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation ---
RA
TABLE 227 - RA
RA RA --Weight value of EGPRS MS accessing request times, the dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. BSC 0 ~ 100 None 10 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation --
180
Related interfaces
--
RM
TABLE 228 - RM
RM RM --Weight value of high-bandwidth request times, the dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. BSC 0 ~ 100 None 25 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation ---
RB
TABLE 229 - RB
RB RB --Weight value of the highest bandwidth usage, the dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. BSC 0 ~ 100 None 10 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation
181
---
RG
TABLE 230 - RG
RG RG --This parameter defines weights of GPRS carrier proportion, RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100 BSC 0 ~ 100 None 5 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation ---
RE
TABLE 231 - RE
RE RE --This parameter defines weights of EDGE carrier proportion, RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100 BSC 0 ~ 100
182
None 10 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation ---
C
TABLE 232 - C
C C --This parameter defines how to trigger adjustment threshold of dynamic resource BSC 0 ~ 10 None 5 ZGF05-01-023 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation ---
IP INFORMATION PARAMETERS
The interface of IP information parameters is as shown in Figure 26.
183
FIGURE 26 - IP INFORMATION P AR AMETERS
Begin NSVC of IPGB (IPGBStartNSVC)

TABLE 233 - BEGIN NSVC OF IPGB
Begin NSVC of IPGB IPGBStartNSVC --This parameter describes the initial value of foreground NSVC on IPGB, indicating NSVC value for IPGB is generated from this value. BSC 1 ~ 62976 None 32768 ZGF05-01-027 Gb over IP --
184
Related interfaces
Gb interface
SNS add retries (SNSAddMax)

TABLE 234 - SNS ADD RETRIES
SNS add retries SNSAddMax SNS-ADD-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 This parameter describes the max retries of SNS addition operation, when SNS Ack is not received for SGSN on SNS-T1 timeout, BSS retries addition operation repeatedly. The process ends and informs O&M when SNS Ack is still not received after the max retries. BSC 3 ~ 10 None 3 ZGF05-01-027 Gb over IP -Gb interface
Description
SGSN configure retries (SNSConfigMax)

TABLE 235 - CONFIGURE RETRIES
SGSN configure retries SNSConfigMax SNS-CONFIG-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 This parameter describes the max retries of SNS configuration operation, when SNS Config Ack is not received for SGSN on SNS-T1 timeout, BSS retries configuration operation repeatedly. The process ends and informs O&M when SNS Config Ack is still not received after the max retries.
Description
185
BSC 3 ~ 10 None 3 ZGF05-01-027 Gb over IP -Gb interface
SNS modify retries (SNSChgWeightMax)

TABLE 236 - SNS MODIFY RETRIES
SNS modify retries SNSChgWeightMax SNS-CHANGEWEIGHT-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 This parameter describes the max retries of SNS change weight, when SNS Ack is not received for SGSN on SNS-T1 timeout, BSS retries change weight repeatedly. The process ends and informs O&M when SNS Ack is still not received after the max retries. BSC 3 ~ 10 None 3 ZGF05-01-027 Gb over IP -Gb interface
Description
SNS delete retries (SNSDelMax)

TABLE 237 - SGSN DELETE RETRIES
SNS delete retries SNSDelMax
186
SNS-DELETE-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 This parameter describes the max retries of SNS delete operation, when SNS Ack is not received for SGSN on SNS-T1 timeout, BSS retries delete operation repeatedly. The process ends and informs O&M when SNS Ack is still not received after the max retries. BSC 3 ~ 10 None 3 ZGF05-01-027 Gb over IP -Gb interface
Description
SNS SIZE (SNSSizeMax)

TABLE 238 - SNS SIZE
SNS SIZE SNSSizeMax SNS-SIZE-RETRIES 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 This parameter describes the max retries of SNS SIZE operation, when SNS Size Ack is not received for SGSN on SNS-T1 timeout, BSS retries SIZE operation repeatedly. The process ends and informs O&M when SNS Size Ack is still not received after the max retries. BSC 3 ~ 10 None 3 ZGF05-01-027 Gb over IP --
Description
187
Related interfaces
Gb interface
SNS process monitoring timer (SNS_T1, 100ms)

TABLE 239 - SNS PROCESS MONITORING TIMER
SNS process monitoring timer SNS_T1 Tsns-prov 3GPP TS48.016 V5.4.0 This parameter describes SNS process monitoring timer. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
Description
Timer start: it starts after SNS process begins; Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGS response from SGSN; Timeout action: retransfer for N times (N is configurable)
BSC 10 ~ 100 100ms 30 ZGF05-01-027 Gb over IP -Gb interface
Abis CS
TABLE 240 - ABIS CS
Abis CS ----
188
CS service corresponds to used TOS under IP Abis. Description This parameter field belongs to service IP telegraph service type (IPTOS). TOS means TypeOfService, which is used to indicate service type or quality required by datagram. BSC 0 ~ 64 None 0 ----
Abis PS
TABLE 241 - ABIS PS
Abis PS ---PS service corresponds to used TOS under IP Abis.
Description
This parameter field belongs to service IP telegraph service type (IPTOS). TOS means TypeOfService, which is used to indicate service type or quality required by datagram. BSC 0 ~ 64 None 0 ----
189
A CS
TABLE 242 - A CS
A CS ---CS service corresponds to used TOS under IP A.
Description
IPOE CS
TABLE 243 - IPOE CS
IPOE CS ---CS service corresponds to used TOS under IP Over E1.
Description
This parameter field belongs to service IP telegraph service type (IPTOS). TOS means TypeOfService, which is used to indicate service type or quality required by datagram. BSC 0 ~ 64 None
190
0 ----
IPOE PS
TABLE 244 - IPOE PS
IPOE PS ---PS service corresponds to used TOS under IP Over E1.
Description
IPOE SCTP
TABLE 245 - TABLE0-2 IPOE SCTP
IPOE SCTP ----
191
SCTP packets corresponds to used TOS under IP Over E1. Description This parameter field belongs to service IP telegraph service type (IPTOS). TOS means TypeOfService, which is used to indicate service type or quality required by datagram. BSC 0 ~ 64 None 0 ----
IPGb Conversation TOS

TABLE 246 - IPGB CONVERSATION TOS
IPGb Conversation TOS ---TOS used while Qos service type is conversation under IP GB.
Description
192
IPGb Streaming TOS

TABLE 247 - IPGB STREAMING TOS
IPGb Streaming TOS ---TOS used while Qos service type is streaming media service under IP GB.
Description
IPGb Interactive TOS

TABLE 248 - IPGB INTERACTIVE TOS
IPGb Interactive TOS ---TOS used while Qos service type is interactive under IP GB.
Description
This parameter field belongs to service IP telegraph service type (IPTOS). TOS means TypeOfService, which is used to indicate service type or quality required by datagram. BSC 0 ~ 64 None
193
0 ----
IPGb Background TOS

TABLE 249 - IPGB BACKGROUND TOS
IPGb Background TOS ---TOS used while Qos service type is background service under IP GB.
Description
IPGb TOS
TABLE 250 - IPGB TOS
IPGb TOS ----
194
TOS used while Qos service type is general under IP GB. Description This parameter field belongs to service IP telegraph service type (IPTOS). TOS means TypeOfService, which is used to indicate service type or quality required by datagram. BSC 0 ~ 64 None 0 ----
DSCP Field of SCTP Packet (Info3)

TABLE 251 - DSCP FIELD OF SCTP P ACKET
DSCP Field of SCTP Packet Info3 --DSCP Field of SCTP Packet
Description
195
Timer parameters at Ater interface

In basic property interface, if you select "Outer TC" in "TC type supported (TCType)", a parameter interface named Ater Timer will be added. For Ater Timer parameter interface see Figure 27.
FIGURE 27 - TIMER P AR AMETERS AT ATER INTERFACE
Ater wait SCCP connection timer (TAterWaitConn, 100ms)

TABLE 252 - ATER WAIT SCCP CONNECTION TIMER
Ater wait SCCP connection timer TAterWaitConn --This parameter describes SCCP CONNECT CONFIRM message used to wait for iTC after iBSC configures this timer. BSC 5 ~ 20 100ms
196
15 --Ater Interface
Ater wait resource timer (TWaitAterRes, 100ms)

TABLE 253 - ATER WAIT RESOURCE TIMER
Ater wait resource timer TWaitAterRes --This parameter describes RESOURCE REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message used to wait for iTC after iBSC configures this timer. BSC 10 ~ 30 100ms 20 --Ater Interface
Ater wait resource release timer (TAterWaitRel, 100ms)

TABLE 254 - ATER WAIT RESOURCE RELEASE TIMER
Ater wait resource release timer TAterWaitRel ---
197
This parameter describes RESOURCE RELEASE ACKNOWLEDGE message used to wait for iTC after iBSC configures this timer. BSC 20 ~ 50 100ms 20 --Ater Interface
Ater handover monitor timer (TAterMoniterHO, 100ms)

TABLE 255 - ATER HANDOVER MONITOR TIMER
Ater handover monitor timer TAterMoniterHO --This parameter describes monitor handover process when iBSC configures this timer to use outer iTC. BSC 70 ~ 170 100ms 120 --Ater Interface
198
Ater wait resource acknowledge timer (TWaitAterResAck, 100ms)

TABLE 256 - ATER WAIT RESOURCE ACKNOWLEDGE TIMER
Ater wait resource acknowledge timer TWaitAterResAck --This parameter describes the response to apply for resource from iTC, to configure this timer wait for iTC during iBSC handover. BSC 5 ~ 25 100ms 15 --Ater Interface
Ater block circuit timer (TAterCicBlk, 100ms)

TABLE 257 - ATER BLOCK CIRCUIT TIMER
Ater block circuit timer TAterCicBlk --This parameter describes BLOCKING ACKNOWLEDGE message or UNBLOCKING ACKNOWLEDGE message used to wait for iTC after iBSC configures this timer. BSC 30 ~ 150 100ms 80
Description
199
--Ater Interface
Ater wait resource timer (TAterBlkCicGrp, 100ms)

TABLE 258 - ATER WAIT RESOURCE TIMER
Ater wait resource timer TAterBlkCicGrp --This parameter describes BLOCKING CIRCUIT GROUP ACKNOWLEDGE message or UNBLOCKING CIRCUIT GROUP ACKNOWLEDGE message used to wait for iTC after iBSC configures this timer. BSC 30 ~ 150 100ms 80 --Ater Interface
Description
Ater reset circuit timer (TAterRstCic, 100ms)

TABLE 259 - ATER RESET CIRCUIT TIMER
Ater reset circuit timer TAterRstCic --This parameter describes RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE message used to wait for iTC after iBSC configures this timer.
200
BSC 30 ~ 150 100ms 80 --Ater Interface
Ater reset timer (TAterRst, 100ms)

TABLE 260 - ATER RESET TIMER
Ater reset timer TAterRst --This parameter describes RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message used to wait for iTC when iBSC configures this timer. BSC 60 ~ 150 100ms 100 --
Ater Interface
Ater reset guard timer (TITCRst, 100ms)

TABLE 261 - ATER RESET GUARD TIMER
Ater reset guard timer TITCRst --
201
-This parameter describes iBSC configures this timer to delay when resetting globally, to release resource. BSC 30 ~ 60 100ms 40 --Ater Interface
Ater reset timer (TBIkACic, 100ms)

TABLE 262 - ATER RESET TIMER
Ater reset timer TBlkACic --This parameter describes BLOCKING A CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE message or UNBLOCKING CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE message used to wait for iTC when iBSC configures this timer. BSC 30 ~ 150 100ms 100 --Ater Interface
Description
202
Ater reset guard timer (TBIkACicGrp, 100ms)

TABLE 263 - ATER RESET GUARD TIMER
Ater reset guard timer TBlkACicGrp --This parameter describes BLOCKING A CIRCUIT GROUP ACKNOWLEDGE message or UNBLOCKING A CIRCUIT GROUP ACKNOWLEDGE message to wait for iTC after iBSC configures this timer. BSC 30 ~ 150 100ms 100 --Ater Interface
Description
GERAN External Cell Parameters

The interface of GERAN external cell parameters is as shown in Figure 28.
203
FIGURE 28 - GER AN EXTERNAL CELL PAR AMETERS
User label
User label ---Specific GERAN cell name for users to identify Cell Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None
204
----
External cell ID
TABLE 265 - EXTERNAL CELL ID
External cell ID ---External cell number Cell 1 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
Cell type
TABLE 266 - CELL TYPE
Cell Type CellType --GERAN External Cell type Cell Umbrella cell, Macro Cell, Micro Cell, Micro-micro Cell, Extended Cell None
205
Macro Cell ----

Mobile Country Code MCC --MCC consists of three digits of decimal number. It is used to uniquely identify the home country of the mobile user (or system). Cell 0 ~ 999 None 460 ZGF05-05-006 Multi PLMN ---

Mobile Network Code MNC --MNC consists of three digits of decimal number. It uniquely identifies a specific PLMN network in a country (determined by MCC).
206
Management Object
Cell
Value Range
None 0 ZGF05-05-006 Multi PLMN ---

TABLE 269 - FREQUENCY BAND
Frequency Band FreqBand --The frequency band of the system Cell
Value Range
When the value of DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt) is DCS1800, it value range is GSM900, EXT900, DCS1800, GSM850; When the value of DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt) is PCS1900, it value range is GSM900, EXT900, PCS1900, GSM850;
None GSM900 -BCCH frequency (BcchArfcn) --
207
BCCH frequency (BcchArfcn)

TABLE 270 - BCCH FREQUENCY
BCCH frequency BcchArfcn --ARFCN of the cell BCCH carrier Cell
When Frequency Band is GSM900, its value range is 1~124; When Frequency Band is EXT900, its value range is 0~124, 975~1023;
Value Range
When Frequency Band is PCS1900, its value range is 512~810; When Frequency Band is DCS1800, its value range is 512~885; When Frequency Band is GSM850, its value range is 128~251;
None 1 ----
LAC
TABLE 271 - L AC
LAC LAC ---
208
Description
Each GSM PLMN is divided into many location areas (LAs) in order to determine the MS location, the location area code identifies the different location areas. LAC comes under LAI (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). One location area contains multiple cells. Cell 1 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
CI
TABLE 272 - CI
Cell ID CI --In order to distinguish each cell in GSM PLMN uniquely, the network operators allocate a unique code for each cell in a location area. Cell 0 ~ 65535 None 0 ----
209
NCC
TABLE 273 - NCC
Network Colour Code NCC --NCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). NCC is to enable mobile stations to distinguish adjacent and different GSM PLMN cells. Neighboring operators usually have different NCCs. The NccPermitted parameter uses NCC to assist MS in BCCH frequency selection of adjacent cells belonging to other PLMN networks. NCC is the cell parameter. NccPermitted prohibits MS to measure cell information of other operators. NCC actually occupies three bits. NCC is one of the network identification parameters. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 None 0 ----
Description
BCC
TABLE 274 - BS COLOR CODE (BCC)
BS Color Code (BCC) BCC ---
210
Description
BCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). BCC is used to enable mobile stations to distinguish the adjacent cells with same BCCH carrier frequency and belonging to the same GSM PLMN. In addition, the GSM specifications recommend defining TSC (Training Sequence Code) of BCCH channel of every cell equal to the respective cell BCC. BCC occupies three bits. BCC is one of the network identification parameters. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 None 0 ----

TABLE 275 - GPRS SERVICE SUPPORTED
GPRS service supported PsSupport --Determine if the cell supports GPRS. Cell Yes/No None No -5.1.2.1 TsChannelComb --
211
GPRS Property Parameters

If GPRS service supported is YES, a sub-interface GPRS property will appear in the main interface, as shown in Figure 29.
FIGURE 29 - GPRS P AR AMETERS OF GER AN EXTERNAL CELL
Reselection offset (ReselOffset_0)

TABLE 276 - RESELECTION OFFSET
Reselection offset ReselOffset_0 GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
212
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.Cell reselection in GPRS system follows C32 standard. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM, contains a cell reselection offset parameter. This parameters not necessary to append in packet system message when the offset value is 0 dB. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0 ~ 31 2 dB 0 ----

Reselection offset ReselOffset_1 GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH.Cell reselection in GPRS system follows C32 standard. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM, contains a cell reselection offset parameter. This parameters not necessary to append in packet system message when the offset value is 0 dB. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0 ~ 31 2 dB 0 --
Description
213
---
Reselection temporary offset (TempOffset_0, dB)

TABLE 278 - RESELECTION TEMPORARY OFFSET
Reselection temporary offset TempOffset_0 GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time of cell reselection. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinite dB 0 ----
Description

Reselection temporary offset TempOffset_1 GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
214
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time of cell reselection. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinite dB 0 ----
Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_0, 10s)

TABLE 280 - PENALTY TIME OF CELL RESELECTION
Penalty time of cell reselection PenalTime_0 GPRS_PENALTY_TIME 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time of cell reselection. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0 ~ 31 10 s 0 --
Description
215
---

Penalty time of cell reselection PenalTime_1 GPRS_PENALTY_TIME 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time of cell reselection. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0 ~ 31 10 s 0 ----
Description
HSC exist (HCS_EXIST_0)

TABLE 282 - HSC EXIST
HCS Exist HCS_EXIST_0 ---
216
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) and broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.PSI message indicates whether the HSC exist (HCS priority and Threshold of HSC signal level) exist in the cell. MS ignores HSC exist parameters of other cells if serving cell does not use HSC exist parameters (all the cells use Threshold of HSC signal level of infinity). This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell Yes/No None No ----
HSC Exist (HCS_EXIST_1)

TABLE 283 - HSC EXIST
HCS Exist HCS_EXIST_1 --This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) and be informed to MS on PACCH.PSI message indicates whether the HSC exist (HCS priority and Threshold of HSC signal level) exist in the cell. MS ignores HSC exist parameters of other cells if serving cell does not use HSC exist parameters (all the cells use Threshold of HSC signal level of infinity). This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell Yes/No None No
Description
217
----
Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_THR_0)

TABLE 284 - THRESHOLD OF HSC SIGNAL LEVEL
Threshold of HSC signal level HCS_THR_0 HCS_THR 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.Threshold of HSC signal level identifies the HCS signal strength threshold of the cell. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0 ~ 31 None 0 ----
Description

Threshold of HSC signal level HCS_THR_1 HCS_THR 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
218
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is informed to MS on PACCH.Threshold of HSC signal level identifies the HCS signal strength threshold of the cell. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0 ~ 31 None 0 ----
HCS priority (PrioClass_0)

TABLE 286 - HCS PRIORITY
HCS Priority PrioClass_0 PRIORITY_CLASS 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS, indicating cell HCS priority. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0~7 None 0 ----
Description
219

TABLE 287 - PRIORITY
HCS Priority PrioClass_1 PRIORITY_CLASS 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is informed to MS on PACCH, indicating cell HCS priority. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0~7 None 0 ----
Description
Allow SOLSA MS to access (EXC_ACC)

TABLE 288 - ALLOW SOLSA MS TO ACCESS
Allow SOLSA MS to access EXC_ACC EXC_ACC 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 System broadcasts this parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, and SI7 messages. In addition, the parameter information is available in PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of local and neighboring cells. The network uses Allow SOLSA MS to access to prevent MS from residing in the cell. Cell Yes/No None
Description
220
No ----
Cell reselection status (CellBrAc2)

TABLE 289 - CELL RESELECTION STATUS
Cell Reselection Status CellBrAc2 CELL_BAR ACCESS_2 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 Cell reselection status belongs to HCS, and the system broadcasts to MS in PSI3 message. It indicates the cell reselection status. Cell Yes/No None No ----
LSA ID (LSA_ID)
TABLE 290 - LSA ID
LSA Mark LSA_ID LSA ID 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
221
Description
System broadcasts the parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, SI7, and PSI3 messages of serving cell. In addition, system broadcasts the parameter information in PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. LSA ID specifies LSA identifier of the cell. Cell 0 ~ 16777215 None 0 ----
RAC
TABLE 291 - R AC
RAC RAC --RAC is a composition part of Routing Area Identity (RAI). RAI defines the GPRS serving cell identification. GPRS system divides the location area (LAs) to several routing areas (RAs) using RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC). Routing Area (RA) distribution, similar to GSM system, uses the location area to manage a group of cells. MS initiates Routing area update procedure in cell reselection mode if new RAI differs from old RAI during cell reselection. MS and SGSN in standby state can know the routing area information. SGSN sends request to BSC for MS paging in that new routing area when network carries packet data or circuit data to transmit. RAI cannot span more than one SGSN.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 255 None 0
222
----
GPRS access minimum signal level (RxLevAsMin_0)

TABLE 292 - GPRS ACCESS MINIMUM SIGNAL LEVEL
GPRS access minimum signal level RxLevAsMin_0 GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN( 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.This parameter indicates the minimum receiving level while allowing MS access to this system (GPRS). GSM Specifications recommend that the receiving level must be larger than the threshold level when MS needs to access the network (GPRS access minimum signal level). Such condition prevents MS from accessing the system in case of low receiving signal level (the communication quality cannot guarantee normal communication process after system access). In addition, it is also one of the standards for MS to make the cell selection and the cell reselection (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32). This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0 ~ 63
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm; 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm)
Unit Default
None 12 (-99 dBm~-98 dBm)
223
----

GPRS access minimum signal level RxLevAsMin_1 GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter is informed to MS on PACCH. This parameter indicates the minimum receiving level while allowing MS access to this system (GPRS). GSM Specifications recommend that the receiving level must be larger than the threshold level when MS needs to access the network (GPRS access minimum signal level). Such condition prevents MS from accessing the system in case of low receiving signal level (the communication quality cannot guarantee normal communication process after system access). In addition, it is also one of the standards for MS to make the cell selection and the cell reselection (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32). This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0 ~ 63
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm; 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm)
Unit Default
None 12 (-99 dBm~-98 dBm)
224
----
GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_0)

TABLE 294 - GPRS M AX INITIAL ACCESS SIGNAL LEVEL
GPRS MAX initial access signal level MsTxMaxCCH_0 GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.Network controls the MS transmit power during communication with BTS. The network controls MS power using power command. MS outputs transmit power closest to the specified power value if unavailable. The power before MS receives the network power control information (the power used in random access), depends on this parameter when MS is receiving PBCCH. MS uses this parameter for cell selection and reselection involving calculation of C1 and C2 values.
Description
Refer to appendix C, for the maximum power before MS receives the power control information. Setting principle: in the premise of certain MS access success rate at the cell edge, decrease the access level of MS as much as possible. Generally, it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS) and 2 (for GSM1800MS). In practice, after setting this parameter, perform dialing test at the cell edge, increase or decrease the value of this parameter according to the MS access success rate and access time tested with different parameter setup. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH.
Cell 0 ~ 31 None 5
225
----
GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_1)

TABLE 295 TABLE0-3 GPRS M AX INITIAL ACCESS SIGNAL LEVEL
GPRS MAX initial access signal level MsTxMaxCCH_1 GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter is informed to MS on PACCH.Network controls the MS transmit power during communication with BTS. The network controls MS power using power command. MS outputs transmit power closest to the specified power value if unavailable. The power before MS receives the network power control information (the power used in random access), depends on this parameter when MS is receiving PBCCH. MS uses this parameter for cell selection and reselection involving calculation of C1 and C2 values.
Description
Refer to appendix C, for the maximum power before MS receives the power control information. Setting principle: in the premise of certain MS access success rate at the cell edge, decrease the access level of MS as much as possible. Generally, it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS) and 2 (for GSM1800MS). In practice, after setting this parameter, perform dialing test at the cell edge, increase or decrease the value of this parameter according to the MS access success rate and access time tested with different parameter setup. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state.
Cell 0 ~ 31 None 5
226
----
UTRAN External Cell Parameters

The interface of UTRAN external cell parameters is shown in Figure 30.
FIGURE 30 - UTR AN EXTERNAL CELL P ARAMETERS
227
User label
User label ---Specific UTRAN cell name for users to identify Cell Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
External UTRAN ID (EcUTRANId)

TABLE 297 - EXTERNAL UTR AN ID
External UTRAN ID EcUTRANId --Serial number of UTRAN external cell Cell 1 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
228
UTRAN cell type (CellTypeUTRAN)

TABLE 298 - UTR AN CELL TYPE
UTRAN cell type CellTypeUTRAN --The type of this UTRAN cell. When selecting TDD, two configurable parameters may occur in the interface, such as "UTRAN adacent cell bandwidth" and "Apply Sync Case". Cell FDD, TDD None FDD -UTRAN cell Frequency (ArfcnUTRAN)
Description
Scrambling code or Cell Parameter (ScCodeCellPara) Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD) --

Mobile Country Code MCC --MCC consists of three digits of decimal number. It is used to uniquely identify the home country of the mobile user (or system). Cell 0 ~ 999 None 460
229
----

Mobile Network Code MNC --MNC consists of three digits of decimal number. It uniquely identifies a specific PLMN network in a country (determined by MCC). Cell
Value Range
None 0 ----
UTRAN cell Frequency (ArfcnUTRAN)

TABLE 301 - UTR AN CELL FREQUENCY
UTRAN cell Frequency ArfcnUTRAN --UTRAN cell Frequency
230
Management Object
Cell
When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is FDD, value range is 9612 ~ 9888, 10562 ~ 10838; When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD and "UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)" is 0 (3.84 Mcps), value range is 9262 ~ 9638, 9662 ~ 9938, 10062 ~ 10113; When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD and "UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)" is 1 (1.28 Mcps), value range is 9254 ~ 9646, 9654 ~ 9946, 10054 ~ 10121;
Unit None
Value Range
When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is FDD, default value is 9612; When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD and "UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)" is 0 (3.84 Mcps), default value is 9262; When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD and "UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)" is 1 (1.28 Mcps), default value is 9254;
Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces ----
Default
LAC
TABLE 302 - L AC
LAC LAC --Location area code identifies the different location areas. LAC comes under LAI (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). One location area contains multiple cells.
231
Cell 1 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
RNC ID (RNC_Id)
TABLE 303 - RNC ID
RNC ID RNC_Id --Each RNC has a unique number in the UTRAN network of PLMN to route corresponding UTRAN interface message correctly. Cell 0 ~ 4095 None 0 ----
C ID (C_Id)
TABLE 304 - C ID
C ID C_Id --
232
-Identify UTRAN adjacent cell Cell 0 ~ 65535 None 0 ----
Scrambling code or Cell Parameter (ScCodeCellPara)

TABLE 305 - SCRAMBLING CODE OR CELL P AR AMETER
Scrambling code or Cell Parameter ScCodeCellPara ---
Description
FDD: It is described in detail in protocol 3GPP TS25.213. The scrambling code is used to distinguish the carriers in UTRAN/FDD network. MS measure the main scrambling code of the downlink CPICH channel in cell for handover or cell reselection. The scrambling codes are divided into 0~511. There are one main scrambling code and 15 auxiliary scrambling codes in each group. 511 main scrambling codes could be divided into 64 scrambling code sets, and there are 8 scrabbling codes in each set; TDD: The parameters describing adjacent cell
Management Object
Cell
233
Value Range
When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is FDD, this parameter represents FDD interference code, value range is 0 ~ 511; When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD, this parameter represents TDD cell parameter, value range is 0 ~ 127;
None 0 ----
TX diversity indication (DiverSity)

TABLE 306 - TX DIVERSITY INDICATION
TX diversity indication DiverSity --Whether UTRAN adjacent cell employs diversity transmission. Cell Yes/No None No ----
RAC
TABLE 307 - R AC
RAC RAC
234
--RAC is a part of Routing Area Identity (RAI). RAI defines the GPRS serving cell identification. GPRS system divides the Location Area (LA) to several routing areas (RAs) using RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC). Routing Area (RA) distribution, similar to GSM system, uses the location area to manage a group of cells. MS initiates Routing area update procedure in cell reselection mode if new RAI differs from old RAI during cell reselection. MS and SGSN in standby state can know the routing area information. SGSN sends request to BSC for MS paging in that new routing area when network carries packet data or circuit data to transmit. RAI cannot span more than one SGSN.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 255 None 0 ----
UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)

TABLE 308 - UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL BANDWIDTH
UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth BandWidthUTRAN --Whether UTRAN adjacent cell employs diversity transmission. Cell 1 (1.28Mcps), 0 (3.84Mcps) None 1 (1.28Mcps)
235
-UTRAN cell Frequency (ArfcnUTRAN) Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD) --
Apply Sync Case / Apply TSTD (SyncCaseTSTD)

TABLE 309 - APPLY SYNC CASE / APPLY TSTD
Apply Sync Case / Apply TSTD SyncCaseTSTD --When "UTRAN cell type" is TDD, this parameter occurs and can be configured, indicating whether to apply SyncCase or TSTD. Based on different parameter value of "UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)", this parameter name may be varied. Cell
Description
Management Object
Value Range
When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD and "UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)" is 1 (1.28 Mcps), the parameter indicates whether to apply TSTD, parameter value is "apply TSTD", value range is Yes, No; When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD and "UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidthUTRAN)" is 0 (3.84 Mcps), the parameter indicates whether to apply SyncCase, parameter value is "apply Sync Case", value range is Yes, No;
None No ----
236
Appendix
Abbreviations
237
Abbreviation M MAC MS MSC MSS MTP N NS NSE O OMC OMP OMS P PACCH PAGCH PBCCH PCH PCU PDTCH PLMN PPCH PS PTP Q QoS R RACH RLC S SACCH SAPI SCCP SDCCH T TBF
Full name
Network Service Network Service Entity
Quality of Service
238
Abbreviation TCH TDMA TFI TRX TS U UPPB UPU Um V VLR
Full name Traffic Channel Time Division Multiplex Access TDM Fiber Interface board Transmitter & Receiver Time Slot
239
240
Appendix
Figures
Figure 1 - Select Start NE Agent ...........................................3 Figure 2 - Select [NE ManagementConfiguration Management] .......................................................................................4 Figure 3 - Configuration Management Interface ......................4 Figure 4 - Select [Apply Mutex Right] ....................................6 Figure 5 - [Prompt] Dialog Box .............................................7 Figure 6 - Successful Apply Mutex Right.................................7 Figure 7 - Select [Release Exclusive Permission] .....................8 Figure 8 - GERAN SUBNETWORK PARAMETERS ..................... 11 Figure 9 - BSC MANAGED ELEMENT PARAMETERS ................. 13 Figure 10 - CONFIGURATION SET PARAMETERS.................... 19 Figure 11 - BASIC PROPERTY PARAMETERS.......................... 22 Figure 12 - RADIO BASIC PROPERTY PARAMETERS................ 39 Figure 13 - Other Parameters ............................................. 51 Figure 14 - Function Parameters ......................................... 65 Figure 15 - TIMER 1 PARAMTERS ........................................ 71 Figure 16 - TIMER 2 PARAMTERS ........................................ 89 Figure 17 - GRPS MAX RETRYING TIMES............................ 107 Figure 18 - GPRS timer parameters................................... 117 Figure 19 - AMR Half Method Parameters ........................... 132 Figure 20 - AMR full Method Parameters ............................ 139 Figure 21 - GPRS Property 1 Parameters............................ 145 Figure 22 - GPRS Property 2 Parameters............................ 154 Figure 23 - BVC FLOW CONTROL PARAMETERS ................... 164 Figure 24 - FUC Flow Control Map Parameters .................... 171 Figure 25 - EDGE Property Parameters .............................. 177
241
Figure 26 - IP Information Parameters............................... 184 Figure 27 - Timer Parameters at Ater Interface ................... 196 Figure 28 - GERAN External Cell Parameters....................... 204 Figure 29 - GPRS PARAMETERS OF GERAN EXTERNAL CELL .. 212 Figure 30 - UTRAN External Cell Parameters....................... 227
242
Tables
Table 1 - Manual Summary .................................................. ii Table 2 - Typographical Conventions .................................... iii Table 3- Mouse Operation Conventions ................................. iii Table 4 - Format to Describe Radio Parameters.......................8 Table 5 - User Label.......................................................... 11 Table 6 - Subnetwork ID ................................................... 12 Table 7 - Subnetwork Type ................................................ 12 Table 8 - User Label.......................................................... 13 Table 9 - Managed Element ID ........................................... 14 Table 10 - 1Managed element type ..................................... 14 Table 11 - O&M Board IP Address ....................................... 15 Table 12 - Software Version ............................................... 16 Table 13 - Vendor Name.................................................... 16 Table 14 - Location ........................................................... 17 Table 15 - Longitude ......................................................... 17 Table 16 - Latitude ........................................................... 18 Table 17 - User Label ........................................................ 19 Table 18 - User Label ........................................................ 22 Table 19 - Mobile Country Code .......................................... 23 Table 20 - The max length to support MNC........................... 23 Table 21 - Mobile Network Code ......................................... 24 Table 22 - OMP IP ............................................................ 24 Table 23 - OMP MAC ......................................................... 25 Table 24 - subnet mask at OMC interface............................. 26 Table 25 - OMC Gateway ................................................... 26 Table 26 - OMC SERVER IP ................................................ 27 Table 27 - OMCB IP .......................................................... 28 Table 28 - Net Type (Net) .................................................. 28 Table 29 - SP Type ........................................................... 29
243
Table 30 - Restart Flag...................................................... 29 Table 31 - Bureau No. ....................................................... 30 Table 32 - Signaling Point Restart Time as STP ..................... 31 Table 33 - Test Code......................................................... 31 Table 34 - CPU Thread Tracing ........................................... 32 Table 35 - Alarm value of communicate flux of module control 32 Table 36 - Longitude......................................................... 33 Table 37 - Latitude ........................................................... 33 Table 38 - Support GE platform .......................................... 34 Table 39 - Is TC Type........................................................ 34 Table 40 - SNTP SYNC Cycle .............................................. 35 Table 41 - SNTP Server Address ......................................... 36 Table 42 - Global Time Zone .............................................. 36 Table 43 - Summer Time Flag ............................................ 37 Table 44 - Summer Start Time ........................................... 37 Table 45 - Summer End Time............................................. 38 Table 46 - Dynamic HR Enable ........................................... 39 Table 47 - Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR ............ 40 Table 48 - DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported............................. 40 Table 49 - Load Indication ................................................. 41 Table 50 - Send confusion message allowed ......................... 42 Table 51 - Inter-Cell handover allowed ................................ 42 Table 52 - Send assignment failure allowed.......................... 43 Table 53 - Load Valid Time ................................................ 43 Table 54 - Load Indication Period........................................ 44 Table 55 - Automatic resource indication threshold................ 45 Table 56 - Resource adjust threshold .................................. 46 Table 57 - BSC Max Reset Num .......................................... 47 Table 58 - AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold................ 48 Table 59 Table0-1 Range of BARANG.................................. 48 Table 60 - MR report enable............................................... 49 Table 61 - TRX PS busy threshold ....................................... 50 Table 62 - User Priority ..................................................... 51 Table 63 - Low User Priority ............................................... 52 Table 64 - Preferred speech version (half)............................ 53 Table 65 - Preferred speech version (full)............................. 53
244
Appendix B - Tables
Table 66 - Reserved Channel First....................................... 54 Table 67 - EMLPP channel Reserved time ............................. 54 Table 68 - Length of super vision ........................................ 55 Table 69 - Length of radio ................................................. 56 Table 70 - Length of timer waiting intra BSS handover........... 56 Table 71 - Starting time for oriented retry............................ 57 Table 72 - Monitor physical context request.......................... 58 Table 73 - Timer for MSG Waiting ....................................... 58 Table 74 - Timer for RANCSEST Waiting............................... 59 Table 75 - Timer for RANCSCLECOM waiting ......................... 59 Table 76 - Timer for CCM waiting........................................ 60 Table 77 - Get Static param timer....................................... 61 Table 78 - HR channel percentage threshold......................... 61 Table 79 - TFO Enable....................................................... 62 Table 80 - Coding/decoding type optimization enable ............ 63 Table 81 - Coding/decoding type unmatched enable .............. 63 Table 82 - AMR Optimization Mode...................................... 64 Table 83 - Support Multi PLMN ........................................... 65 Table 84 - Support BTS of different net handover.................. 66 Table 85 - Support FLEX A ................................................. 66 Table 86 - Support FLEX GB ............................................... 67 Table 87 - MSP Support..................................................... 67 Table 88 - Support RIM ..................................................... 68 Table 89 - RIM retry times ................................................. 68 Table 90 - Support different reset parameter in idle and transfer status ............................................................................. 69 Table 91 - Support HR channel frag finishing ........................ 70 Table 92 - Report Voice Quality .......................................... 70 Table 93 - Blocking/unblocking period ................................. 71 Table 94 - Global Resetting Period ...................................... 72 Table 95 - Protection period for handover request ................. 73 Table 96 - Source BSC handover execution period................. 74 Table 97 - Assignment period ............................................. 74 Table 98 - Protection period for global resetting .................... 75 Table 99 - Circuit resetting period on BSS side ..................... 76 Table 100 - Circuit group blocking/unblocking Period ............. 77 Table 101 - RLSD message receive protection timer .............. 77
245
Table 102 - Channel activation protection timer .................... 78 Table 103 - MSC clear command protection timer ................. 79 Table 104 - SCCP connection protection timer ...................... 80 Table 105 - External handover protection Timer in target cell . 81 Table 106 - Protective time waiting for access ...................... 81 Table 107 - Protection time for channel request .................... 82 Table 108 - Protection time for link establishment response.... 83 Table 109 - Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM ............................................................................... 84 Table 110 - Encryption mode modification time..................... 84 Table 111 - SAPI3 link establishment time ........................... 85 Table 112 - External handover protective time...................... 86 Table 113 - Protective time for No7 signal instantaneous disconnection................................................................... 87 Table 114 - Protective time that PO responses external handover completion message ......................................................... 88 Table 115 - Protective time for RF channel release ................ 89 Table 116 - Queue period of assignment .............................. 90 Table 117 - Acknowledgment interval for periodic status ........ 90 Table 118 - Mode modification process time ......................... 91 Table 119 - Protective time of UM assignment completion ...... 92 Table 120 - Waiting time for oriented retry .......................... 92 Table 121 - Queue period for handover................................ 93 Table 122 - First Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control......... 94 Table 123 - Second Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control..... 94 Table 124 - Time of Micro-Micro handover delay ................... 95 Table 125 - BSIC decoding period ....................................... 96 Table 126 - Protection of resources on external in-Handover... 97 Table 127 - Serving status protection timer.......................... 97 Table 128 - Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD.......... 98 Table 129 - Immediate assignment period ........................... 99 Table 130 - Handover period of source cel ......................... 100 Table 131 - Assignment period ......................................... 100 Table 132 - Channel release period ................................... 101 Table 133 - Channel deactivation delay ............................. 102 Table 134 - Continue Timer for mode modify ...................... 103 Table 135 - Handover protecting time to UTRAN ................. 103
246
Appendix B - Tables
Table 136 - Time of destination instance waiting for available resources when forced disconnection................................. 104 Table 137 - Protecting time of FUC response to system message broadcast ...................................................................... 105 Table 138 - HO performed ack timer ................................. 106 Table 139 - MAX times of BVC block retry .......................... 107 Table 140 - MAX times of BVC unblock retry....................... 108 Table 141 - MAX times of BVC reset retry .......................... 109 Table 142 - MAX times of NS block retry ............................ 110 Table 143 - MAX times of NS unblock retry ........................ 111 Table 144 - MAX times of NS Alive retry ............................ 112 Table 145 - MAX times of suspend retry............................. 112 Table 146 - MAX times of resume retry.............................. 113 Table 147 - MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry ................................................................................... 114 Table 148 - Maximum times of retrying to create PFC .......... 115 Table 149 - MAX times of PFC modify retry ........................ 116 Table 150 - BVC block/unblock retry time .......................... 117 Table 151 - BVC reset retry time ...................................... 118 Table 152 - Suspend retry time ........................................ 119 Table 153 - Resume retry time ......................................... 119 Table 154 - Access capability update retry time .................. 120 Table 155 - PFC creating retry time................................... 121 Table 156 - PFC modifying retry time ................................ 121 Table 157 - Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure122 Table 158 - Timer that monitors reset procedure................. 123 Table 159 - NC-Cycle of NS-VC test process ....................... 123 Table 160 - Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC ........ 124 Table 161 - Maximum attempt period of reset .................... 125 Table 162 - TFI and USF release timer............................... 126 Table 163 - TBF release timer .......................................... 126 Table 164 - TBF release time of downlink transmission ........ 128 Table 165 - TBF protect time when radio link failure ............ 128 Table 166 - PS channel delay release timer ........................ 129 Table 167 - RIR Timer ..................................................... 130 Table 168 - RI Timer....................................................... 130 Table 169 - RIAE Timer ................................................... 131
247
Table 170 - AMR Half Active Codec Set .............................. 133 Table 171 - Thresholds of AMR ......................................... 134 Table 172 - Hysteresis of AMR.......................................... 134 Table 173 - Initial codec mode ......................................... 135 Table 174 - startmode codec mode ................................... 136 Table 175 - Enable noise control....................................... 137 Table 176 - AMR full Active Codec Set ............................... 139 Table 177 - Thresholds of AMR ......................................... 140 Table 178 - Hysteresis of AMR.......................................... 141 Table 179 - Initial codec mode ......................................... 141 Table 180 - startmode codec mode ................................... 142 Table 181 - Enable noise control....................................... 143 Table 182 - BVC flow control period .................................. 145 Table 183 - MS flow control period .................................... 146 Table 184 - NSVC peer to peer delay................................. 147 Table 185 - Cn ............................................................... 147 Table 186 - Nn............................................................... 148 Table 187 - Xn ............................................................... 149 Table 188 - MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data blocks.................................................................... 150 Table 189 - Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries .......... 151 Table 190 - MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink RLC/MAC control message ............................................... 152 Table 191 - Support extended uplink dynamic allocation ...... 153 Table 192 - NACC supported ............................................ 154 Table 193 - BSC's net operation mode............................... 155 Table 194 - Satellite transmission at Gb interface indication . 157 Table 195 - Extended RLC send window allowed ................. 157 Table 196 - Support TBF establish .................................... 158 Table 197 - Support signal extended uplink TBF.................. 158 Table 198 - Resource pool for PS rate................................ 159 Table 199 - Downlink TBF retry ........................................ 160 Table 200 - Maximum PS uplink user per ts........................ 160 Table 201 - Maximum PS downlink user per ts.................... 161 Table 202 - PS capability threshold 0 ................................ 161 Table 203 - PS capability threshold 1 ................................ 162 Table 204 - BVC flow control supported ............................. 164
248
Appendix B - Tables
Table 205 - MS flow control supported............................... 165 Table 206 - flow control mode .......................................... 166 Table 207 - Parameter of Flow control mode 1 .................... 166 Table 208 - Parameter of Flow control mode 2 .................... 167 Table 209 - BVC flow control R MIN value .......................... 168 Table 210 - MS flow control R MIN value ............................ 168 Table 211 - BVC flow control threshold .............................. 169 Table 212 - MS flow control threshold................................ 170 Table 213 - Flow Control Reason....................................... 171 Table 214 - Hurry Call ..................................................... 172 Table 215 - Call Rebuilt ................................................... 172 Table 216 - Call Response ............................................... 173 Table 217 - Calling ......................................................... 174 Table 218 - Site Refresh .................................................. 174 Table 219 - GPRS Access ................................................. 175 Table 220 - Restore ........................................................ 175 Table 221 - Flow control map slim adjust (bit) .................... 176 Table 222 - Support PFC.................................................. 177 Table 223 - BSC support page coordination ........................ 178 Table 224 - R99 Ind........................................................ 178 Table 225 - RS ............................................................... 179 Table 226 - RR ............................................................... 180 Table 227 - RA ............................................................... 180 Table 228 - RM .............................................................. 181 Table 229 - RB ............................................................... 181 Table 230 - RG............................................................... 182 Table 231 - RE ............................................................... 182 Table 232 - C................................................................. 183 Table 233 - Begin NSVC of IPGB ....................................... 184 Table 234 - SNS Add Retries ............................................ 185 Table 235 - configure retries ............................................ 185 Table 236 - SNS Modify Retries ........................................ 186 Table 237 - SGSN delete retries........................................ 186 Table 238 - SNS SIZE ..................................................... 187 Table 239 - SNS process monitoring timer ......................... 188 Table 240 - Abis CS ........................................................ 188
249
Table 241 - Abis PS ........................................................ 189 Table 242 - A CS ............................................................ 190 Table 243 - IPOE CS ....................................................... 190 Table 244 - IPOE PS ....................................................... 191 Table 245 - Table0-2 IPOE SCTP...................................... 191 Table 246 - IPGb Conversation TOS .................................. 192 Table 247 - IPGb Streaming TOS ...................................... 193 Table 248 - IPGb Interactive TOS ..................................... 193 Table 249 - IPGb Background TOS .................................... 194 Table 250 - IPGb TOS ..................................................... 194 Table 251 - DSCP Field of SCTP Packet .............................. 195 Table 252 - Ater wait SCCP connection timer ...................... 196 Table 253 - Ater wait resource timer ................................. 197 Table 254 - Ater wait resource release timer ...................... 197 Table 255 - Ater handover monitor timer ........................... 198 Table 256 - Ater wait resource acknowledge timer .............. 199 Table 257 - Ater block circuit timer ................................... 199 Table 258 - Ater wait resource timer ................................. 200 Table 259 - Ater reset circuit timer ................................... 200 Table 260 - Ater reset timer............................................. 201 Table 261 - Ater reset guard timer.................................... 201 Table 262 - Ater reset timer............................................. 202 Table 263 - Ater reset guard timer.................................... 203 Table 264 - User Label .................................................... 204 Table 265 - External cell ID ............................................. 205 Table 266 - Cell Type ...................................................... 205 Table 267 - Mobile Country Code ...................................... 206 Table 268 - Mobile Network Code ..................................... 206 Table 269 - Frequency Band ............................................ 207 Table 270 - BCCH frequency ............................................ 208 Table 271 - LAC ............................................................. 208 Table 272 - CI ............................................................... 209 Table 273 - NCC............................................................. 210 Table 274 - BS Color Code (BCC)...................................... 210 Table 275 - GPRS service supported.................................. 211 Table 276 - Reselection offset .......................................... 212
250
Appendix B - Tables
Table 277 - Reselection offset .......................................... 213 Table 278 - Reselection temporary offset ........................... 214 Table 279 - Reselection temporary offset ........................... 214 Table 280 - Penalty time of cell reselection......................... 215 Table 281 - Penalty time of cell reselection......................... 216 Table 282 - HSC Exist ..................................................... 216 Table 283 - HSC Exist ..................................................... 217 Table 284 - Threshold of HSC signal level .......................... 218 Table 285 - Threshold of HSC signal level .......................... 218 Table 286 - HCS Priority .................................................. 219 Table 287 - Priority......................................................... 220 Table 288 - Allow SOLSA MS to access .............................. 220 Table 289 - Cell Reselection Status ................................... 221 Table 290 - LSA ID ......................................................... 221 Table 291 - RAC ............................................................. 222 Table 292 - GPRS access minimum signal level ................... 223 Table 293 - GPRS access minimum signal level ................... 224 Table 294 - GPRS MAX initial access signal level ................. 225 Table 295 Table0-3 GPRS MAX initial access signal level...... 226 Table 296 - User Label .................................................... 228 Table 297 - External UTRAN ID......................................... 228 Table 298 - UTRAN cell type............................................. 229 Table 299 - Mobile Country Code ...................................... 229 Table 300 - Mobile Network Code...................................... 230 Table 301 - UTRAN cell Frequency .................................... 230 Table 302 - LAC ............................................................. 231 Table 303 - RNC ID......................................................... 232 Table 304 - C ID ............................................................ 232 Table 305 - Scrambling code or Cell Parameter ................... 233 Table 306 - TX diversity indication .................................... 234 Table 307 - RAC ............................................................. 234 Table 308 - UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth........................ 235 Table 309 - Apply Sync Case / Apply TSTD......................... 236
251
252
Index
Abbreviations ................... 237 AMR Full Method Parameters .................................. 138 AMR Half Method Parameters .................................. 132 Basic Property Parameters.... 21 BSC Global Resource Parameters..................... 21 BSC Managed Element Parameters..................... 13 BSC System Radio Parameters .................................... 21 BVC Flow Control Parameters .................................. 163 Configuration Set Parameters18 EDGE Property Parameters . 176 Format to Describe Radio Parameters.......................8 FUC Flow Control Map Parameter .................... 171 Function Parameters............ 64 GERAN External Cell Parameters................... 203 GERAN Subnetwork Parameters .................................... 11 GPRS Max Retrying Times .. 107 GPRS Property 1 Parameters .................................. 144 GPRS Property 2 Parameters .................................. 154 GPRS Property Parameters . 212 GPRS Timer Parameters..... 116 IP INFORMATION PARAMETERS .................................. 183 Methods to Modify Radio Parameters ...................... 2 Others .............................. 51 Overview ............................. 1 Precautions in Radio Parameters Adjustment...... 9 Public Resource Radio Parameters .................... 11 Radio Basic Property Parameters .................... 39 Radio Parameters in GSM Network........................... 1 Timer 1 ............................. 71 Timer 2 parameter .............. 88 Timer parameters at Ater interface ...................... 196 UTRAN External Cell Parameters .................................. 227
253

Radio Parameters Manual (Volume II)
Version 6.20
Revision History Date Nov 30, 2008 Apr 24, 2009 Revision No. R1.0 R1.1 Serial No. sjzl20086194 sjzl20086194 Reason for Issue First edition Updated

Contents
Purpose ................................................................................ i Intended Audience ................................................................. i Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge .............................................. i What Is in This Manual ........................................................... i Related Documentation.......................................................... ii Conventions ........................................................................ iii How to Get in Touch............................................................. iv
Chapter 1.......................................................................... 5 Cell Parameters................................................................ 5

Basic Parameters 1..........................................................5
Basic Parameters 2 ............................................................. 19 Basic Parameters 3 ............................................................. 32 Optional Parameters............................................................ 48 Cell Selection Parameters..................................................... 55 Service Process Additional Parameters ................................... 66 System Parameters ............................................................. 76 AMR Half Method Parameters................................................ 84 AMR Full Method Parameters ................................................ 91 Cell Optional Parameters...................................................... 97 Other Parameters ............................................................. 102 GPRS Basic Parameters...................................................... 108 SGSN ID (SGSNID) ........................................................... 108 GPRS Property 1 Parameters .............................................. 112 GPRS Other Parameters 2 .................................................. 123 GPRS Property 3 Parameters .............................................. 136 GPRS Cell Optional Parameters ........................................... 142 GPRS NC Survey Parameters .............................................. 151 GPRS Power Control Parameters ......................................... 159 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters ....................................... 164
GPRS Channel Parameters .................................................. 190 EDGE Property Parameters ................................................. 201
Appendix A ...................................................................211 Abbreviations ...............................................................211 Appendix B ...................................................................215 Figures..........................................................................215 Tables ...........................................................................217 Index ............................................................................225
About This Manual

Purpose
Intended Audience


ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Radio Parameters Manual (Volume II)
Section Cell Parameters Appendix A, Abbreviations Appendix B Figures and Tables Index
Summary Introduces the cell parameters. Lists all the abbreviations used in this manual. Lists all the figures and tables appeared in this manual. Lists all the index appeared in this manual.
The following documents are related to this manual: ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Documentation Guide ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Alarm Handling Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Notification Handling Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem OMM Software Installation Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Configuration Manual (Initial Configuration Guide) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Configuration Manual (Function Configuration Guide) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem MML Command Manual ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Parameters Manual (Volume I) Station Subsystem Subsystem Radio Radio
ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Parameters Manual (Volume III)
ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Diagnostic Test) ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Signaling Tracing) ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume I ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume II ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20) Base Station Controller Performance Counter Manual - Volume III
ii
About This Manual
Conventions
TABLE 3- MOUSE OPERATION CONVENTIONS
Meaning Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once. Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice. Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once. Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and moving the mouse.
iii
How to Get in Touch

iv
Chapter
Cell Parameters
This chapter explains the cell parameters, including basic parameters, optional parameters, and GPRS/EDGE parameters.
Basic Parameters 1
The interface of cell basic parameters 1 is shown in Figure 1.
FIGURE 1 - CELL BASIC P ARAMETERS 1
User label
Full name
User label
---Specific cell name for users to identify Cell Character string with the maximum length of 40 None None ----
BTS ID (BtsId)
TABLE 5 - BTS ID
Cell ID BtsId --Serial number of this cell. Cell 1~6 None Sorted by practice ----
Chapter 1 - Cell Parameters
Cell type
TABLE 6 - CELL TYPE
Cell Type CellType --The type of this cell. If you need configure S8001 cell, micro-micro cell shall be selected for cell type. Cell Umbrella cell, Macro Cell, Micro Cell, Micro-micro Cell, Extended Cell None Macro Cell -TA MAX (TaMax) TA allowed (TaAllowed) --
Country Code (MCC)

TABLE 7 - COUNTRY CODE
Country Code MCC --Mobile Country Code (MCC) is used to uniquely identify the home country of the mobile users (or system), assigned internationally, China is 460. Cell Based on "Mobile country code" in BSC global resource parameters. None Based on "Mobile country code" in BSC global resource parameters.
----
MNC
TABLE 8 - MNC
MNC MNC --Mobile Network Code (MNC) uniquely identifies a specific PLMN network in a country (decided by MCC). For instance, 07 is PLMN network of China Mobile. Cell Based on "Mobile network code (MNC)" in BSC global resource parameters. None Based on "Mobile network code (MNC)" in BSC global resource parameters. ----
Description
LAC
TABLE 9 - LAC
LAC LAC ---
Description
Each GSM PLMN is divided into many location areas (LAs) in order to determine the MS location, the location area code identifies the different location areas. LAC comes under LAI (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). One location area contains multiple cells. Cell 1 ~ 65535 None 1 ----
CI
TABLE 10 - CI
Cell ID CI --In order to distinguish each cell in GSM PLMN uniquely, the network operators allocate a unique code for each cell in a location area, that is, CI. Cell 0 ~ 65535 None 0 ----
NCC
TABLE 11 - NCC
Network Colour Code NCC --NCC is one of the composing parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). NCC is to enable mobile stations to distinguish adjacent and different GSM PLMN cells. Generally, different adjacent operator has different NCC. NCC has three digits. NCC is one of the network identification parameters. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 None 0 ----
Description
BCC
TABLE 12 - BS COLOR CODE (BCC)
BS Color Code (BCC) BCC --BCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). BCC is used to enable mobile stations to distinguish the adjacent cells with same BCCH carrier frequency and belonging to the same GSM PLMN. In addition, the GSM specifications recommend defining TSC (Training Sequence Code) of BCCH channel of every cell equal to the respective cell BCC. BCC occupies three bits. BCC is one of the network identification parameters.
Description
10
Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 None 0 ----

TABLE 13 - FREQUENCY BAND
Frequency band FreqBand --The frequency band types for GSM operation. Cell
Value Range
None GSM900 ZGF05-01-015 EGSM Frequency Band Support ZGF05-01-003 Multiband BSC 5.1.1.9 Frequency --
11
Subcell used (SubCellUsed)

TABLE 14 - SUBCELL USED
Subcell used SubCellUsed --Defined according to user requirement.
Description
If user selects subcell used, the system may automatically add "power control 2" node under cell node, used to control cell power. If the user selects don't use subcell, "power control 2" node may be automatically deleted. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH 5.1.1.3 Subcell ID (SubCellId) --
Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand)

TABLE 15 - FREQUENCY BAND OF SUBCELL
Frequency band of subCell SubFreqBand --If 'Subcell used' is 'Yes', this parameter is configurable. Cell
12
Value Range
None GSM900 ZGF05-01-003 Multiband BSC ZGF05-05-002 Concentric Circle Technology ZGF05-09-006 Co-BCCH/Common BCCH ---
ARFCN list (CaArfcnList)

TABLE 16 - ARFCN LIST
ARFCN list CaArfcnList --The radio frequency set. Cell ARFCN set, the value range of each ARFCN is the same as BCCH. Based on frequency setting at subsequent BTS, the system automatically fills it in this box. None None ZGF05-12-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping ---
Value Range
13

TABLE 17 - GPRS SERVICE SUPPORTED
GPRS service supported PsSurpport --Whether this cell supports GPRS (EDGE) service. If selecting "GPRS supported" or "EDGE supported", relevant sub-page may occur in the interface. Cell Don't support GPRS, Support GPRS, Support EDGE None Dont support GPRS ZGF06-09-004 EGPRS Activation per Cell ---
Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)

TABLE 18 - DYNAMIC HR ENABLE
Dynamic HR Enable DynaHREnable --If this cell supports dynamic HR. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-11-002 Full dynamic channel allocation on Um interface ZGF05-17-003 Dynamic Half Rate Allocation --
14
Related interfaces
--
Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara)

TABLE 19 - USE CELL DYNAMIC HR PAR AMETER
Use cell dynamic HR parameter UseCellDynHRPara --If Dynamic HR support indication is Yes, this parameter is configurable, indicating whether cell dynamic HR parameter is enabled. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-11-002 Full dynamic channel allocation on Um interface ZGF05-17-003 Dynamic Half Rate Allocation ---
CBC supported (SmsCbUsed)

TABLE 20 - CBC SUPPORTED
CBC supported SmsCbUsed ---
15
Description
CBC service is an important service provided by mobile communication system, mainly used to distribute information to the mobile subscribers within certain geographical location area. The difference from P2P sms service contains: receiver for P2P sms is specific mobile subscriber, but receiver for CBC is all mobile subscribers within certain area, including external subscribers roaming in this area. This parameter identifies whether this cell supports the function of cell broadcasting short message.
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-26-002 Cell Broadcast SMS 5.1.2.1 TsChannelComb --
Threshold for a single trx switched from FR to HR (HRThs, %)

TABLE 21 - THRESHOLD FOR A SINGLE TRX SWITCHED FROM FR TO HR
Threshold for a single trx switched from FR to HR HRThs --When iBSC and cell enables dynamic HR functions, and percentage of TCH/F channel used in the cell (TCH/F channels occupied in the cell / all available TCH channels in the cell (including IDLE and BUSY)) exceeds this threshold, convert TCH/F -> TCH/H. Cell 1 ~ 100 % 60 ZGF05-11-002 Full dynamic channel allocation on Um interface ZGF05-17-003 Dynamic Half Rate Allocation
Description
16
---
Use cell dynamic AMR parameter (UseCellAMRParam)

TABLE 22 - USE CELL DYNAMIC AMR P ARAMETER
Use cell dynamic AMR parameter UseCellAMRParam --This parameter indicates whether AMR parameter in the cell is enabled.
Description
If the cell doesn't enable its own AMR parameters, AMR parameter value configured by BSC is configured as the predominent; If the cell is enabled, AMR parameter value configured by the cell is configured as the predominent;
Cell Use, not use None Not use ----
Common control channel configuration (CcchConf)

TABLE 23 - COMMON CONTROL CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Common control channel configuration CcchConf --
17
3GPP reference
-Common control channel configuration is one of the system control parameters. In GSM system, CCCH includes Access Grant Channel (AGCH) and Paging Channel (PCH). It is used to send access granting (that is instant assignment) message and paging message. In each cell, all service channels share CCCH. According to the configuration of the service channel in the cell and the traffic mode of the cell, CCCH could be one or more than one physical channel, and CCCH could share the same physical channel with SDCCH The combination mode of the common control channel in cell depends on CCCH configuration parameter and it should be consistent with the actual configuration of cell CCH. It could be observed from this parameter: BS_CC_CHANS (Number of CCCH); BS_CCCH_SDCCH_COMB (If combined with SDCCH). This parameter is broadcasted to all MSs in the cell by message RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3.
Description
Management Object
Cell CCCH uses one physical channel, not combined with SDCCH; CCCH uses one physical channel, combined with SDCCH; CCCH uses two physical channels, not combined with SDCCH; CCCH uses three physical channels, not combined with SDCCH; CCCH uses four physical channels, not combined with SDCCH. None CCCH uses one physical channel, not combined with SDCCH ZGF05-09-002 Supports SDCCH/4 and SDCCH/8 5.1.2.1 TsChannelComb --
Value Range
Template file
TABLE 24 TEMPLATE FILE
Template file ---
18
-Click <Select> button, a windows pops up, select the template file in this path; click <Clear> button to clear selected template files. Cell Local File None -----
Basic Parameters 2
19
TA MAX (TaMax)
TABLE 25 - TA M AX
TA Max TaMax --It represents the maximum TA supported by extended cell. Cell
Value Range
When "Cell Type (CellType)" is nonextended cell, value range is 0 ~ 63; When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, value range is 0 ~ 219;
None
Unit
Default
When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, default value is 63;
non-
When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, default value is 219;

ZGF05-13-001 Extended Cell Coverage ---
TA allowed (TaAllowed)
TABLE 26 - TA ALLOWED
TA Allowed TaAllowed --It represents the maximum TA granted to be accessed into the cell. Cell
20
Value Range
When "Cell Type (CellType)" is nonextended cell, value range is 0 ~ 63; When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, value range is 0 ~ 219;
None 63 ----
CCCH load indication period (CcchLoadIndPrd, s)

TABLE 27 - CCCH LOAD INDICATION PERIOD
CCCH Load Indication Period CcchLoadIndPrd --According to the GSM standard, BTS sends periodical message CCCH LOAD INDICATION to BSC as long as CCCH (RACH+PCH+AGCH) channel exceeds the threshold value set in O&M until the CCCH is not over the threshold value any more. CCCH load indication period parameter defines the period of sending CCCH LOAD INDICATION message. This parameter is one of the BTS configuration parameters.
Description
Cell 1 ~ 255 s 2 ----
21
Periodical location updating timer (T3212, 360s)

TABLE 28 - PERIODICAL LOCATION UPDATING TIMER
Periodical location updating timer T3212 T3212 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.13.0 Location update results from two major causes in GSM system. One is when MS changes from old LAC to new LAC and the second is when the network notifies MS for periodic location update. Network controls the location time interval and depends upon T3212 timer. Network broadcasts to all MSs in the cell by RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message. T3212 timer is one of the system control parameters. This parameter affects the overall service performance of the network and the utilization of the radio resource. For the area with higher traffic, the period could be bigger (for example 16 or 20 hours, even 25 hours); for the area with ordinary traffic, the value of T3212 could be smaller (for example 3 or 6 hours); for the area with extreme overload traffic, it is recommended to set T3212 as 0. Cell 0 ~ 255
Description
Management Object
0: positive infinite, location update is not required;

Value Range
1: 6 minutes; 2: 12 minutes; 255: 1530 minutes;
360 s 10 ----
22
CCCH load indication (RACH) (CcchLoadINDThs_0)

TABLE 29 - CCCH LOAD INDICATION (R ACH)
CCCH load indication (RACH) CcchLoadINDThs_0 --When load degree in RACH channel for BTS exceeds this threshold, BTS sends CCCH LOAD INDICATION message periodically to iBSC until load degree in RACH channel doesn't exceed this threshold value. Cell 0 ~ 100 None 80 ----
Description
CCCH load indication (PAGCH) (CcchLoadNDThs_1)

TABLE 30 - CCCH LOAD INDICATION (P AGCH)
CCCH load indication (PAGCHRACH) CcchLoadINDThs_1 --When load degree in PCH channel for BTS exceeds this threshold, BTS sends CCCH LOAD INDICATION message periodically to iBSC until load degree in PCH channel doesn't exceed this threshold value. Cell 0 ~ 100 None
Description
23
80 ----
NCC permitted (NccPermitted)

TABLE 31 - NCC PERMITTED
NCC permitted NccPermitted --Add or Delete NCC within the value range in
Description
. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Cell 0~7 None 0 --
24
---
Support Repeated ACCH (RepeatACCH)

TABLE 32 - SUPPORT REPEATED ACCH
Support Repeated ACCH RepeatACCH --This parameter determines whether to use FACCH/SACCH retransmission function. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-17-010 Repeated FACCH/SACCH for AMR ---
Start PA Power Off (StartPAPowerOff)

TABLE 33 - START PA POWER OFF
Start PA Power Off StartPAPowerOff --To save energy and reduce consumption, BTS system shall turn off PA offset voltage while close power for idle timeslots.l If configuring on BTS, FPGA can determine whether PA offset voltage shall be turned off. Cell
Description
Management Object
25
Yes/No Value Range
Yes: enable; No: disable;
None No ZGF05-13-007 Intelligent Timeslot Shutdown ---
Switch Flag of Ceil TRX Power Off (StartTRXPowerOff)

TABLE 34 - SWITCH FLAG OF CEIL TRX POWER OFF
Switch Flag of Ceil TRX Power Off StartTRXPowerOff --It marks whether "Switch Flag of Ceil TRX Power Off" is enabled. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-13-006 Intelligent TRX Shutdown ---
Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR FR Bug (AMR FR)
TABLE 35 - BSS RADIO LINK TIMER'S M AX V ALUE FOR AMR FR BUG

26
Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR HR Bug AMR FR
--Fault detection period in AMR-FR channel. Within this period, pick average value through s times of measurement, and judge link fault threshold, to dertermine whether the channel is failed. Cell 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64 None 64 ----
Description
Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR FR Bug (AMR HR)
TABLE 36 - BSS RADIO LINK TIMER'S M AX V ALUE FOR AMR FR BUG
Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR HR Bug AMR HR --Fault detection period in AMR-HR channel. Within this period, pick average value through s times of measurement, and judge link fault threshold, to dertermine whether the channel is failed. Cell 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64 None 64 ---
Description
27
Related interfaces
--
AMR Codec Adjust Mode (AmrAdjMode)

TABLE 37 - AMR CODEC ADJUST MODE
AMR Codec Adjust Mode AmrAdjMode --Setting of AMR rate adjustment mode:
Description
AMR quick rate adjustment mode: master adjustment time by BTS itself; Interval to adjust adjustment time shall background
Cell AMR quick rate adjustment mode, interval to adjust configuration None AMR quick rate adjustment mode ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
configuration: be defined at
AMR Codec Interval (480ms, AmrAdjInterval)

TABLE 38 - AMR CODEC INTERVAL
AMR Codec Interval AmrAdjInterval --AMR adjustment interval.This parameter is only meaningful when AmrAdjMode is "interval to adjust configuration".
28
Cell 1 ~ 50 480 ms 1 ZGF05-17-009 AMR Power Control ---
Support HR channel frag collected (HRDfragSupport)

TABLE 39 - SUPPORT HR CHANNEL FRAG COLLECTED
Support HR channel frag collected HRDfragSupport --This parameter is a switch of frag collection in HR channel, which can be configured on BSC and BTS. Only when both BSC and BTS are enabled, and finished HR frags / idle HR channel in the cell is no more than HRDefragThs, HR channel defragmentation function is enabled, otherwise it is disabled Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-11-004 HR Concentration ---
Description
29
Threshold of HR Defrag (HRDefragThs)

TABLE 40 - THRESHOLD OF HR DEFRAG
Threshold of HR Defrag HRDefragThs --Threshold of HR Defrag. This parameter can be configured on BTS. Only when both BSC and BTS can enable HRDfragSupport, and finished HR frags / idle HR channel in the cell is no more than HRDefragThs, HR channel defragmentation function is enabled, otherwise it is disabled Cell 0 ~ 100 None 70 ZGF05-11-004 HR Concentration ---
Description
Percentage of HR Ts (HRTsPercentage)
TABLE 41 - PERCENTAGE OF HR TS
Percentage of HR Ts HRTsPercentage --When HR timeslot in the cell / general timeslot in the cell < HRTsPercentage/100, the cell can generate new HR channel.
Description
This parameter can be configured on BSC and BTS. If the proportion of HR timeslot in the cell is lower than HRTsPercentage/100 of BSC and BTS, the cell can generate new HR channel. Cell 0 ~ 100
30
% 50 ----
AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs)

TABLE 42 - AMR DYNAMIC HR CONVERSION THRESHOLD
AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold AmrHRThs --When busy timeslot/general timeslot >= AmrHRThs/100, and carrier and cell support AMR, subsequent service prefers AMR voice rate.
Description
This threshold value can be configured on BSC and BTS, when "User cell dynamic HR parameter" (UseCellDynHRPara) is yes, AmrHRThs value configured by cell will be used, otherwise AmrHRThs configured by BSC is used. Cell 0 ~ 100 None 50 ZGF05-17-008 Independent Threshold for Dynamic AMR HR/FR Conversion ---
FR-HR HandOver Based On Cell Load (FRTHRHOSupport)

TABLE 43 - FR-HR HANDOVER BASED ON CELL LOAD
Full name
FR-HR HandOver Based On Cell Load
31
FRTHRHOSupport --FR-HR HandOver Based On Cell Load Cell Yes/No None No ----
Basic Parameters 3
32
Average bursts count surveyed by RACH (AvgSlots)

TABLE 44 - AVERAGE BURSTS COUNT SURVEYED BY RACH
Average bursts count surveyed by RACH AvgSlots --Average bursts count surveyed by RACH specifies the number of bursts measured on RACH. RACH channel overloads if receiving signal levels of this parameter BP are less than RACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst. BTS uses this parameter. Cell 0 ~ 100 None 60 ----
Description
Overload sending period (OverloadPrd, s)

TABLE 45 - OVERLOAD SENDING PERIOD
Overload sending period OverloadPrd --According to GSM specification, TRX sends periodic OVERLOAD message to notify BSC until overload disappears. Overload sending period specifies period for TRX to send OVERLOAD message. It is one of the configuration parameters of BTS (all TRXs under BTS use same period). Cell 1 ~ 255
Description
33
s 2 ----
BA Show (BcchBaInd)
TABLE 46 - BA SHOW
BA Show BcchBaInd --BA indication of BCCH. Adjacent cell list can be broadcasted on BCCH and transferred on SACCH. The adjacent cell list transferred on BCCH can be different from that on SACCH. When MS reports the measurement data of adjacent cell, either BCCH adjacent cell list or SACCH adjacent cell list will be referred. Therefore, to know which adjacent cell list is referred by MS, a BA indication is added when transferring adjacent cell list on BCCH and SACCH. When reporting the measurement result, MS notifies the network side about the corresponding BA indication of the referred adjacent cell list. As a result, the network side recognizes which adjacent cell list this MS uses. This parameter describes the BS indication value when the adjacent cell list being transferred on BCCH. In the case of transferring adjacent cell list on SACCH, the BA indication value used is the reverse of the parameter.
Description
0: BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on BCCH (System message 2, 2bis, 2ter) is 0; BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on SACCH (System message 5, 5bis, 5ter) is 1. 1: BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on BCCH (System message 2, 2bis, 2ter) is 1; BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on SACCH (System message 5, 5bis, 5ter) is 0.
Management Object Value Range Unit Cell 01 None
34
1 ----
MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin)

TABLE 47 - MIN RECEIVED SIGNAL LEVEL TO ACCESS
MIN received signal level to access RxLevAccessMin RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 3GPP TS45.008 V5.22.0 MIN received signal level to access specifies the minimum received signal level for MS to access any cell. In general, GSM system specifies to keep the receiving level greater than a threshold in order to maintain communication speech quality. In addition, the criterion assists MS to select and reselect the cell. System broadcasts parameter information to all MSs in a cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. MIN received signal level to access is one of the cell selection parameters. Recommended value is usually approximated according to MS receiving sensitivity. When network observes uneven traffic distribution in certain cells, MIN received signal level to access increases the resulting C1 and C2 to decrease the cell effective coverage range. However, the value of this parameter cannot be too large. Otherwise, large value change can bring void area across cell boundaries to result in sudden call drop problem. The value of this parameter must not exceed -90 dBm for cell traffic balancing conditions. At the preliminary running stage of the network, this parameter can be usually set as 10 (that is, -101 dBm ~ -100 dBm) or lower, which is higher than the MS receiving sensitivity 102 dBm. However, when the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage in a cell is not a problem, this parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB).
Description
Management Object
Cell
35
0 ~ 63
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
None 10 (-101 dBm~-100 dBm) ZGF06-01-002 Support of C1 Criteria ---
MAX number of re-transmitting events times (MRetrans)

TABLE 48 - MAX NUMBER OF RE-TRANSMITTING EVENTS TIMES
MAX number of re-transmitting events times MRetrans ---
36
MS sends the channel request message on RACH channel to the network to start immediate assignment process. RACH is an ALOHA channel, the network enables MS to send multiple channel request messages before the MS receives the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message to increase the access success rate of MS. Maximum number of allowable resend time depends on MAX number of retransmitting events times. Network broadcasts this parameter information to MS in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4 messages. MAX number of re-transmitting events times is one of the control parameters of GSM system. Description
For the cell radius over 3km and the area with small traffic, it can be set as 3 (that is, the maximum number of resending times is 7) to improve the access success rate of MS. For the cell radius less than 3km and the area with common traffic, it can be set as 2 (that is, the maximum number of resending times is 4); Define value as 1 (maximum number of resending times is 2) for the micro cell. Define value as 0 (maximum number of resending times is 1) for the micro cell with heavy traffic and the cell with congestion.
Management Object
Cell 0~3
0: 1 times;
Value Range
1: 2 times; 2: 4 times; 3: 7 times;
None 2 (4 times) ----
37
Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch)

TABLE 49 - CONTROL CHANNEL M AX POWER LEVEL
Control channel MAX power level MsTxPwrMaxCch MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH 3GPP TS45.008 V5.22.0 In the communication between MS and BTS, the transmission power is controlled by the network. The network sets the power of MS by power command, which is transmitted on SACCH (SACCH carries the power command with 2-header bytes information, one is power control byte and the other one is timing advance byte). MS sets the specified output transmission power according to the power control header extracted from the SACCH. MS uses the nearest possible output power even if the power command sends maximum output power. For SACCH is Channel Associated Signaling and it has to be used together with SCCCH and TCH, so the power control of MS starts after MS receives SACCH. The power of MS before receiving SACCH (that is the power when sending channel request on RACH) is determined by Control channel MAX power level.
Description
Control channel MAX power level is one of the cell selection and reselection parameters of MS, involving calculation of C1 and C2 values. This parameter is broadcasted to all MS in the cell via RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4. Refer to appendix C, for the maximum power before MS receives the power control information. If this parameter is too large, the MS close to BTS will interfere with the adjacent channel; If it is too small, the MS access success rate at the edge of cell will be very low. Setting principle: in the premise of certain MS access success rate at the cell edge, decrease the access level of MS as much as possible. Generally, it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS) and 0 (for GSM1800MS). In practice, after setting this parameter, perform dialing test at the cell edge, increase or decrease the value of this parameter according to the MS access success rate and access time tested with different parameter setup.
Management Object
38
Cell
0 ~ 31 None 5 ZGF06-01-002 Support of C1 Criteria ---
Number of multiframes of the PCH (BsPaMframe)

TABLE 50 - NUMBER OF MULTIFRAMES OF THE PCH
Number of multiframes of the PCH BsPaMframs BS-PA-MFRMS 3GPP TS45.002 V5.13.0 Number of multiframes of the PCH specifies the repeat cycle of PCH group subchannel using multiple 51-MultiFrame structures. It is one of the system control parameters. According to GSM Specifications, a unique IMSI identifies MS and paging group. IMSI determines the PCH sub-channel for MS in a paging group. In the actual network, MS tunes only to the paging sub-channel during IDLE mode in the serving cell and ignores other paging sub-channels. In other IDLE time, MS shuts off the hardware equipment power supply to save power. Number of multiframes of the PCH determines the number of paging sub-channels of the paging channel in a cell. MS use this parameter to find out its home paging group, so as to monitor corresponding paging subchannel. Network broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message. Number of multiframes of the PCH is one of the system control parameters.
Description
Cell 2~9 None 5 ZGF05-15-001 Paging
39
---
Number of slots to spread transmission (TxInteger)

TABLE 51 - NUMBER OF SLOTS TO SPREAD TRANSMISSION
Number of slots to spread transmission TxInteger Tx_integer 3GPP TS44.018 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Number of slots to spread transmission belongs to PRACH control. Network broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. Whenever establishing a new connection, MS sends a channel request message to the network through PRACH channel.
Description
As PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve MS access success rate, the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages before receiving packet assignment message. If MS does not receive any response for the previous channel request message, MS resends channel request message after waiting for a random period. Network uses S parameter to determine random waiting time. Cell 0 ~ 15 Assume timeslot number is S, so
Management Object
0: S=12; 1: S=15; 2: S=20; 3: S=30;

Value Range
4: S=41; 5: S=55; 6: S=76; 7: S=109; 8: S=163; 9: S=217; 10 ~ 15: reserved
40
None 14 ----
Interval of SDCCH re-sending phy info message (T3105d, 10ms)

TABLE 52 - INTERVAL OF SDCCH RE-SENDING PHY INFO MESSAGE
Interval of SDCCH re-sending phy info message T3105d T3105 3GPP TS44.018 V5.22.0 It is the interval for resending the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION message during an asynchronous handover of SDCCH channel. This timer is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
Timer Start: It starts when network sends the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message.
Description
Timer Stop: It stops when the network receives a layer-2 frame that can be correctly decoded or receives the HANDOVER FAILURE message from the former channel. Overtime Acton: If the timer is overtime, RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message will be redelivered.
Cell 1 ~ 67 10 ms 28 ---
41
Related interfaces
--
Interval of TCH re-sending PHY INFO message (T3105f, 10ms)

TABLE 53 - INTERVAL OF TCH RE-SENDING PHY INFO MESSAGE
Interval of TCH re-sending PHY INFO message T3105f T3105 3GPP TS44.018 V5.22.0 It is the interval for resending the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION message during an asynchronous handover of TCH channel. This timer is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
Timer Start: It starts when network sends the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message.
Description
Timer Stop: It stops when the network receives a layer-2 frame that can be correctly decoded or receives the HANDOVER FAILURE message from the former channel. Overtime Acton: If the timer is overtime, RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message will be redelivered.
Cell 1 ~ 32 10 ms 10 ----
42
Number of blocks reserved for AGCH (BsAgBlkRes)

TABLE 54 - NUMBER OF BLOCKS RESERVED FOR AGCH
Blocks for PAGCH in Frames BsAgBlkRes
BS_AG_BLKS_RES
3GPP TS45.002 V5.13.0 The number of blocks used for AGCH in 51MultiFrame. It is recommended that this value of the cells in the same local area is identical. Cell 0~7 None 2 ----
Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch channel (T200_0, 5ms)

TABLE 55 - LAPDM TIMER FOR CONTROLLING SDCCH CHANNEL
LAPDM timer used for controlling the SDCCH channel. T200_0 T200 -T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200. Cell 1~7 5ms 1
43
--Um interface
Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel (T200_1, 5ms)

TABLE 56 - LAPDM TIMER FOR CONTROLLING FACCH/FULL RATE CHANNEL
Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel T200_1 T200 -T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200. Cell 1~7 5ms 1 --Um interface
Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel (T200_2, 5ms)

TABLE 57 - LAPDM TIMER FOR CONTROLLING FACCH/HALF RATE CHANNEL
Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel T200_2 T200 --
44
T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200. Cell 1~7 5ms 1 --Um interface
Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel (T200_3, 10ms)
TABLE 58 - LAPDM TIMER FOR CONTROLLING SACCH WITH TCH SAPI0
CHANNEL
Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel T200_3 T200 -T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200. Cell 1~7 10ms 2 --Um interface
45
Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel (T200_4, 10ms)
TABLE 59 - LAPDM TIMER FOR CONTROLLING SACCH WITH SDCCH CHANNEL
Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel T200_4 T200 -T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200. Cell 1~7 10ms 2 --Um interface
Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch sapi3 channel (T200_5, 5ms)

TABLE 60 - LAPDM TIMER FOR CONTROLLING SDCCH SAPI3 CHANNEL
LAPDM timer used for controlling the SDCCH sapi3 channel. T200_5 T200 -T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200. Cell 1~7 5ms
46
1 --Um interface
Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel (T200_6, 10ms)
TABLE 61 - LAPDM TIMER FOR CONTROLLING SACCH WITH TCH SAPI3
CHANNEL
Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel T200_6 T200 -T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200. Cell 1~7 10ms 2 --Um interface
Support TFO (TFOSupport)

TABLE 62 - SUPPORT TFO
Support TFO TFOSupport ---
47
This describes whether cell supports TFO. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-17-006 TFO ---
Optional Parameters
The interface of optional parameters is shown in Figure 4 - .
FIGURE 4 - OPTIONAL P ARAMETERS
IMSI attach/detach allowed (ImsIadAllowed)

TABLE 63 - IMSI ATTACH/DETACH ALLOWED

48
IMSI attach/detach allowed ImsIadAllowed --
3GPP reference
-IMSI attach/detach allowed determines whether cell allows IMSI Attach/Detach procedure. IMSI detach occur when MS reports switch-off or when the SIM card is taken out from the MS. The network (normally VLR) marks Detach flag in subscriber information table. Such procedure assists the network to prevent unnecessary paging broadcast message to MS. Likewise, the IMSI Attach occur when the MS reports switch-on or reinserting of the SIM card. After successful IMSI attach, MS requests for Location Update (LU) for inconsistent LAI in SIM card with that of serving cell. The network (normally VLR) marks Attach flag in subscriber information table. This parameter is included in Control channel information and is used for RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message. This parameter of each cell in the same location area should be identical.
Description
Cell Yes/No None Yes ----
Cell bar access (CellBarAccess)

TABLE 64 - CELL BAR ACCESS
Cell bar access CellBarAccess CELL_BAR_ACCESS 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 PLMN carriers can determine whether to allow MS to access a specific cell (for example the cell in test or the cell for absorbing traffic only). Network broadcasts Cell bar access information to MS in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4 messages.
Description
49
Call re-establishment allowed (CallReestablish)

TABLE 65 - CALL RE-ESTABLISHMENT ALLOWED
Call re-establishment allowed CallReestablish RE 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 For the call drop caused by radio link failure resulted from burst interference or high building, MS could originate call re-establishment process to restore the call. However, the network determines whether to allow reestablishment by enabling Call re-establishment allowed. Network broadcasts the parameter information to MS in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4, message. Call re-establishment allowed is one of the network function parameters.
Description
50
Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed (DtxDwlink)

TABLE 66 - DOWNLINK DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION ALLOWED
Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed DtxDwlink DTX 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0 3GPP TS 48.058 V5 DTX mode is an optional downlink feature of GSM System. The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode means that the system does not transmit signals during the speech intermission of the subscriber conversation. This parameter participates in determining to use DTX mode in downlink direction.
Description
Actually, using DTX in downlink direction (in CHANNEL ACTIVATION message and MODE MODIFY message sent to BTS) is determined together by this parameter and the DTX indication in downlink direction in ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message and HANDOVER REQUEST message of MSC.
Yes: enable; No: disable

Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-08-001 Discontinuous Transmission Downlink ---
Emergency call allowed (EmergencyCall)

TABLE 67 - EMERGENCY CALL ALLOWED
Emergency call allowed EmergencyCall EC
51
3GPP reference
3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 Generally, a valid SIM card is required for any MS in GSM Network to get various network services. But the operators could decide whether to allow MS emergency call service for the MS without SIM card or with SIM card whose access level is disabled by current cell, for example the police station. Select Yes for Emergency call allowed to enable this function. Network broadcasts the parameter information to MS in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4, message. Call re-establishment allowed is one of the network function parameters.
Description
Yes: Do not allow Emergency call for MSs whose access level is 0~9. For the MSs whose access level is 11~15, if its corresponding access control bit is T, the emergency call is also not allowed. No: Allow Emergency call for all MSs
GSM specifications define emergency call phone number as 112, which is different from Chinese emergency call, but 112 is generally connected to the automatic voice service to inform the users about the number of various special services. Hence, EC should be set as No, that is to allow the emergency call.
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-25-006 Emergency Call Handling ---
Cell bar qualify (CellBarQualify)

TABLE 68 - CELL BAR QU ALIFY
Cell bar qualify CellBarQualify CBQCELL_BAR_QUALIFY
52
3GPP reference
3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter preferably selects certain cells in the cell selection process according to capacity, traffic and functional difference in overlapping areas. This function can be implemented by configuring CellBarQualify. CellBarQualify is used to limit cell priority in special case. Network broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. It is one of the cell selection parameters. The validity of this parameter depends upon cell reselection parameter indication. Select No for Cell Bar Access and No for Cell bar qualify, that is, the cell priority is defined as Normal. MS preferably enter some types of cells. Set the priority of this cell type as Normal, while the priorities of other cells to Low. In some cases, such as micro cellular application, and dualfrequency networking, this setting will not affect the cell reselection.
Description
Access control (AccessControl)

TABLE 69 - ACCESS CONTROL
Access control AccessControl AC CN, Access Control Class N 3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0
53
All MSs in GSM system have an access class (15 classes in total). The MSs that are in the class ranging between 0 and 9 are common ones. The MSs that are in the class ranging between 11 and 15 are special MSs (no access class 10). Therefore, the system can disable the MSs with certain access classes to access the cell (for example during the installation and commissioning or the congestion control). This information can reach MS inside the cell in RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4 messages through Access control. It is also one of the system control parameters. The degree of congestion for any CCCH or processor overload during congestion control can be reduced by temporarily prohibiting one type or multiple types of subscribers from accessing the system (for subscribers of access levels 0 ~ 9). In general, the system shows the following overload conditions:
RACH overload, which should be found in the CCCH LOAD INDICATION message and processed by BSS according to the standard GSM08.58; AGCH overload, which should be found in the DELETE INDICATION message first, and handled by BSS by not sending the IMMEDIATE REJECT message; PCH overload, which should be found in the CCCH LOAD INDICATION message, and the BSS will not make any process but notify the MSC; Other types of overload, which can be found in the OVERLOAD message, for example, MTP overload.
Input the control level value in
Description
, add and delete in this pane.
54
Cell 0 ~ 9, 11 ~ 15 None None ZGF05-22-001 MS Access Control ---
Cell Selection Parameters

The interface of cell selection parameters is shown in Figure 5.
FIGURE 5 - CELL SELECTION P AR AMETERS
Additional reselection parameter indication (AdditionReselPI)

TABLE 70 - ADDITIONAL RESELECTION PARAMETER INDICATION
attached reselection parameter indication AdditionReselPI --
55
3GPP reference
-The cell selection and reselection of MS depends on the C1 and C2 parameters, according to the definition in the GSM specification. Network carriers decide whether to use C2 as the cell reselection parameter. Additional reselection parameter indication is to notify MS whether C2 criterion is adoptable during the cell reselection. Network broadcasts the parameter information to MS in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. Additional reselection parameter indication is one of the cell selection parameters. Value Instruction:
Description
Yes: MS takes off cell reselection parameter PI and the parameters related to computing C2 from the rest bytes SI7/8 Rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 7 or 8. No: MS should obtain the PI parameter related to the cell reselection and parameters related to the C2 calculation from the rest octets of the SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 message (SI4 Rest Octets).
Generally, the system messages 7 and 8 are seldom used. Normally this parameter is No. It should be Yes when the system adopts the system messages 7 and 8, and the cell reselection uses C2.
Cell reselection parameter indication (CellReselPI)

TABLE 71 - CELL RESELECTION PAR AMETER INDICATION
Cell reselection parameter indication CellReselPI
56
--Cell reselection parameter indication notifies the MS whether to use C2 as the cell reselection parameter and if there is the related parameter for calculating C2. It indicates whether the related parameter for calculating cell reselection standard C2 is contained in SYSTEM INFORMATION message and whether C2 standard is adopted in the cell reselection. The successive Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset and Penalty time are invalid, and MS takes C1 as the cell reselection standard when this value is No. This parameter is broadcasted to all MS in the cell in RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. Cell reselection parameter indication is one of the cell selection parameters. Value Instruction:
Description
Yes: MS gets parameters to compute C2 from cell broadcast system messages and regard C2 as a cell reselection standard. Parameters Cell bar qualify, Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset and Penalty time are invalid. No: MS considers C1 parameter as a cell reselection standard. Parameters Cell bar qualify, Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset and Penalty time are invalid.
Enable this parameter, if related cell adopts C2 as the cell reselection standard. Otherwise, disable it. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell Yes/No None No ----
Reselection offset (ReselOffset)

Full name
Reselection offset
57
ReselOffset CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
58
The cell reselection due to radio channel quality takes C2 as the standard. C2 is formed according to C1 parameter, and some special offset parameters, to add the special influence as to enable MS to enter some cells in priority. Usually, such measures allow balancing the traffic on the network. Besides C1, there are three factors affecting C2: Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset, and Penalty time. Cell reselection offset is a magnitude value, which indicates the human modified value of C2. Calculate a modified value of C2 to encourage or prevent MS accessing a certain cell, so as to implement balance network. Network broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. It is one of the cell selection parameters. The validity of this parameter depends upon Cell reselection parameter indication. The setting of Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset and the Penalty time are are classified into three cases:
In case of large traffic or poor communication quality inside a cell due to certain causes, normally MS is expected not to work in that cell (that is, certain repulsion to that cell).
Description Penalty time can be set as 31 in such cases. Temporary offset is invalid, and the numerical value of C2 equals C1 minus this parameter Cell reselection offset. Therefore, the C2 value corresponding to the cell is decreased, and reduces the possibility that MS reselecting the cell. Besides, the proper value of this parameter Cell reselection offset can be set according to the repulsive nature of cell. The more is the repulsive nature, the larger is the Cell reselection offset. Vice versa in case of a smaller Cell reselection offset.
For cells with small traffic and low equipment utilization, normally MS is encouraged to work in that cell (that is, certain propensity to that cell).
Cell reselection offset must be set between 0 ~ 10 (corresponding to 0 ~ 20 dB) in this case, according to tendency of the cell. The more is the tendency, the larger is the Cell reselection offset. Vice versa in case of a smaller Cell reselection offset. It is usually better to set the Temporary offset same as Cell reselection offset, or a little higher than Cell reselection offset. The main function of Penalty time is to avoid frequent cell reselection of MS. The common recommended setting is 1 (20 seconds) or 2 (40 seconds) (the 1800 cell of dual-frequency network is such a case). For cells with ordinary traffic, usually ReselOffset should be set as ZTE CORPORATION Confidential and Proprietary Information of 0 and PenaltyTime59 as 31. Thus, C2 is equal to C1, that is, without human factors on the cell.
Cell 0 ~ 63 2 dB 0 ----
Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset, 10dB)

TABLE 73 - TEMPORARY OFFSET
Temporary offset TemporaryOffset TEMPORARY_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 The cell reselection due to radio channel quality takes C2 as the standard. C2 is formed according to C1 parameter, and some special offset parameters, to add the special influence as to enable MS to enter some cells in priority. Usually, such measures allow balancing the traffic on the network. Besides C1, there are three factors affecting C2: Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset, and Penalty time. Temporary offset indicates the temporary modification value for C2. Temporary means that it only acts on C2 for a period and the period depends on parameter Penalty time. Network broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. It is one of the cell selection parameters. The validity of this parameter depends upon Cell reselection parameter indication.
Description
Cell 0~7 10 dB 1 --
60
---
Penalty time (PenaltyTime, 20s)

TABLE 74 - PENALTY TIME
Penalty time PenaltyTime PENALTY_TIME 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 The cell reselection due to radio channel quality takes C2 as the standard. C2 is formed according to C1 parameter, and some special offset parameters, to add the special influence as to enable MS to enter some cells in priority. Usually, such measures allow balancing the traffic on the network. Besides C1, there are three factors affecting C2: Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset, and Penalty time. Temporary offset indicates the temporary modification value for C2. Temporary means that it only acts on C2 for a period and the period depends on parameter Penalty time. Network broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. It is one of the cell selection parameters. The validity of this parameter depends upon Cell reselection parameter indication.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 31 20 s 0 ----
61
Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ReselHysteresis, 2dB)

TABLE 75 - CELL RESELECTING HYSTERESIS LEVEL
Cell reselecting hysteresis level ReselHysteresis CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 Whenever MS moves across the two cell boundaryregions with different location area codes, it initiates Location Update (LU) procedure in IDLE mode. C2 values obtained at the boundary for two adjacent cells are different because of fading characteristic of radio channel. It causes MS to select cell frequently. In this case, LU interval is more than cell reselection interval. This affects call success rate, due to unreachable paging response to calling party. This increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio resources to be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate of the system, as MS cannot respond to paging during location update. In addition, value difference must be greater than the value specified in CRH. Network broadcasts the parameter information to MS in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. Cell reselecting hysteresis level is one of the cell selection parameters. Define Cell reselecting hysteresis level to 4 or 5 and make certain adjustments in following cases:
Description
Increase cell reselection parameters of adjacent cells with different LAC. Signaling traffic overload often occurs due to large demand of services. When the adjacent cells in different location areas have large overlapped coverage, it is suggested to increase the CRH parameter. If the adjacent cells with different LACs are poor in overlapped coverage, that is, there is coverage gap, or the adjacent place is an area with few slow moving objects such as the expressway, the CRH parameter should be set as 1 ~ 3 (that is, 2dB ~ 6dB for the CRH level).
62
Cell 0~7 2 dB 4 ----
Early category classmark sending control (ECSC)

TABLE 76 - EARLY CATEGORY CLASSM ARK SENDING CONTROL
Early category classmark sending control ECSC --According to GSM specification, MS transmits appended class mark information (Classmark 3) to the network through the CLASSMARK CHANGE message as soon as possible. Early category classmark sending control determines whether the network supports ECSC function. Network broadcasts the parameter information to MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message. If there is a cell in another frequency band in the adjacent cell for handover or the current cell itself is extended GSM cell and the function of early category classmark sending control is enabled, set ECSC as Yes, otherwise set as No.
Description
Cell Yes/No None Yes ----
63
New setup cause indication (NECI)

TABLE 77 - NEW SETUP CAUSE INDICATION
New setup cause indication NECI --The serving channels in the GSM system can be classified into channels with full rate and channels with half rate according to GSM specifications. Common GSM system supports channels with full rate. The network operators decide whether the network support half rate service. The new setup reason denotes the NECI to notify MS if the area supports the half rate service. The parameter notifies MS through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. NECI is one of networks functional parameters.
Description
No: half rate service access not supported by this cell; Yes: half rate service access supported by this cell.
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell Yes/No None No ----
Power offset indication (PowOffsetInd)

TABLE 78 - POWER OFFSET INDICATION
Power offset indication PowOffsetInd ---
64
Description
This parameter decides whether to add offset value for Control channel MAX power level parameter while sending access request message on RACH for Class 3 MS of GSM1800. The necessity of offset value depends on Power offset indication, that is, this parameter decides whether Power offset indication is valid. This parameter also affects MS calculating cell selection and cell reselection standards C1 and C2. Network broadcasts the parameter information to MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3, 4, 7 and 8 messages.
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-002 Support of C1 Criteria ---
Power offset (PowOffset, 2dB)

TABLE 79 - POWER OFFSET
Power offset PowOffset POWER OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 According to the GSM specification, for Class 3 MS of GSM 1800, the transmission power for sending access request message on RACH is to the value of Control channel MAX power level plus a modified value. Power offset specifies the modified value. It determines if this parameter is valid. This parameter also affects the calculation of cell selection standard C1 and cell reselection standard C2. Network broadcasts the parameter information to MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3, 4, 7 and 8 messages.
Description
Cell 0~3 2 dB
65
0 ZGF06-01-002 Support of C1 Criteria ---
Service Process Additional Parameters

The interface of service process additional parameters is shown in Figure 6 - .
FI G U R E 6 - S ER V I C E P R OC ES S AD D I T I O N AL P AR AM E T E R S
Directed retry indication (DrInd)

TABLE 80 - DIRECTED RETRY INDICATION
Directed retry indication DrInd ---
66
This parameter indicates whether to use directed retry feature. Network assigns corresponding service channel for MS in an adjacent cell, if there is no service channel available in serving cell. Description Directed retry indication defines a special handover process that can reduce the call drop ratio. Directed retry falls into intra-BSC directed retry and inter-BSC directed retry. The former one does not need the participation of MSC, while the latter one does. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-02-005 Directed Retry ---
Queue allowed when assign (QueueInd_0)

TABLE 81 - QUEUE ALLOWED WHEN ASSIGN
Queue allowed when assign QueueInd_0 --This parameter decides whether to allow queuing in assignment process. Cell improves the call drop rate with the use of such techniques. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-10-001 Queuing ---
67
Queue allowed when handover (QueueInd_1)

TABLE 82 - QUEUE ALLOWED WHEN HANDOVER
Queue allowed when handover QueueInd_1 --This parameter decides whether queuing can be performed during a handover process and when there are no available channels in the cell. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-10-001 Queuing ---
Preemption allowed when assign (PreemptionInd_0)

TABLE 83 - PREEMPTION ALLOWED WHEN ASSIGN
Preemption allowed when assign PreemptionInd_0 --It decides whether forced disconnection is allowed during the assignment. The priority in the assignment request or handover is valid and the preemption is valid. Those connections with low priority can be forcefully disconnected (handover) to allocate their resources to other assignments or handover request with higher priority. Assignment request indicate the call status. Cell Yes/No None
Description

68
No ZGF05-25-017 eMLPP ---
Preemption allowed when handover (PreemptionInd_1)

TABLE 84 - PREEMPTION ALLOWED WHEN HANDOVER
Preemption allowed when handover PreemptionInd_1 --It decides whether forced disconnection is allowed during the handover. The priority in the assignment request or handover is valid and the preemption is valid. Those connections with low priority can be forcefully disconnected (handover) to allocate their resources to other assignments or handover request with higher priority. A Handover request indicates the call status. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-25-017 eMLPP ---
Description
When assigned forced handover (ForcedHoInd_0)

TABLE 85 - WHEN ASSIGNED FORCED HANDOVER
When assigned forced handover ForcedHoInd_0 --
69
3GPP reference
-This parameter indicates whether the low priority subscribers can be forcefully handover to other cell, so that high priority subscribers can obtain channels. This parameter represents whether forced handover is allowed during assignment. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-25-017 eMLPP ---
Description
When handover forced handover (ForcedHoInd_1)

TABLE 86 - WHEN HANDOVER FORCED HANDOVER
When handover forced handover ForcedHoInd_1 --This parameter indicates whether the low priority subscribers can be forcefully handover to other cell, so that high priority subscribers can obtain channels. This parameter represents whether forced handover is allowed during handover. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-25-017 eMLPP ---
Description
70
NO. of candidate cells for handover (CandidateNum)

TABLE 87 - NO. OF CANDIDATE CELLS FOR HANDOVER
NO. of candidate cells for handover CandidateNum --This parameter decides maximum number of candidate cells for handover that can be contained in BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED message from BSC to MSC. Cell 1 ~ 16 None 6 ----
Description
Fast average indication (FastAvg)

TABLE 88 - FAST AVER AGE INDICATION
Fast average indication FastAvg ---
71
Network may not perform handover or power control if less measurement data is available during call process. The average calculating process for these processes is enabled only when the measured data reaches a certain window size. Common average process does not take place, for the five measured values BSC receives. BSC directly calculates the average of the 5 measured values if the fast average process is adopted. Description There are three cases resulting in insufficient data for calculating the average value, that is, call establishment period, after handover and after power control. After performing power control once, former measured values are discarded in situations where they could result in an error control (measured values without the influence on handover control are still existing). In addition, old measured values are discarded after the handover has occurred keeping it from causing error control (the forward and backward cells are in the same BSC). Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell Yes/No None No ----
Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call (FacchCallInd_0)

TABLE 89 - ALLOWED FACCH CALL SETUP AFTER EMERGENCY CALL
Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call FacchCallInd_0 --BSC can allocate the suitable TCH channel when an MS attempts to access the network, and there is no SDCCH available in the cell. That is the so-called FACCH call establishment. Cell
Description
Management Object
72
Yes/No None Yes ZGF05-11-001 Immediate TCH Assignment ZGF05-09-003 Channel Assignment Algorithm ZGF05-25-006 Emergency Call Handling ---
Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond (FacchCallInd_1)

TABLE 90 - ALLOWED FACCH CALL SETUP WHEN PAGE RESPOND
Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond FacchCallInd_1 --BSC can allocate the suitable TCH channel when an MS attempts to access the network, and there is no SDCCH available in the cell. That is the so-called FACCH call establishment. Cell Yes/No None Yes ZGF05-11-001 Immediate TCH Assignment ZGF05-09-003 Channel Assignment Algorithm ---
Description
Allowed call setup on FACCH (FacchCallInd_2)

TABLE 91 - ALLOWED CALL SETUP ON FACCH
Allowed call setup on FACCH FacchCallInd_2
73
--BSC can allocate the suitable TCH channel when an MS attempts to access the network, and there is no SDCCH available in the cell. That is the so-called FACCH call establishment. Cell Yes/No None Yes ZGF05-11-001 Immediate TCH Assignment ZGF05-09-003 Channel Assignment Algorithm ---
Description
Allowed call reestablished on FACCH (FacchCallInd_3)

TABLE 92 - ALLOWED CALL REESTABLISHED ON FACCH
Allowed call reestablished on FACCH FacchCallInd_3 --BSC can allocate the suitable TCH channel when an MS attempts to access the network, and there is no SDCCH available in the cell. That is the so-called FACCH call establishment. Cell Yes/No None Yes ZGF05-11-001 Immediate TCH Assignment ZGF05-09-003 Channel Assignment Algorithm ---
Description
74
BCCH switch allowed (CanBcchExch)

TABLE 93 - BCCH SWITCH ALLOWED
BCCH switch allowed CanBcchExch --This parameter decides whether the cell allows BCCH switch. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-09-007 Automatic BCCH Recovery ---
SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed (CanSdcchDyn)

TABLE 94 - SDCCH DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION ALLOWED
SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed CanSdcchDyn --This parameter decides whether the cell allows SDCCH dynamic configuration. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-09-005 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH --
75
Related interfaces
--
Minimal resource threshold (ResourceThs, %)

TABLE 95 - MINIMAL RESOURCE THRESHOLD
Minimal resource threshold ResourceThs --Minimum resource threshold allowed by the cell, which is used to calculate dynamic cell priority. Cell 0 ~ 100 % 100 ZGF05-02-008 Dynamic Handover Priority Algorithm ---
System Parameters
The interface of system parameters is shown in Figure 7.
76
FIGURE 7 - SYSTEM P AR AMETERS
Interference averaging period (InterfAvgPrd)

TABLE 96 - INTERFERENCE AVER AGING PERIOD
Interference averaging period InterfAvgPrd
INTAVE
3GPP TS45.008 V5.22.0 BTS needs to measure interference on the unallocated traffic channels, calculate the average of the recent interference values periodically and convert it into the corresponding interference band information, and then transfer it to BSC in the RF RESOURCE INDICATION message as a factor to be considered in channel allocation of BSC. This parameter is one of the BTS configuration parameters. Cell 1 ~ 31 None 31 ZGF05-09-008 Idle Channel Measurement --
Description
77
Related interfaces
--
Interference Band Boundary (InterfBoundary_0~ InterfBoundary_5)

TABLE 97 - INTERFERENCE BAND BOUNDARY
Interference Band Boundary InterfBoundary_0~ InterfBoundary_5
LIMITn
3GPP TS45.008 V5.22.0 BTS needs to measure interference on the unallocated traffic channels. BTS calculates the average of recent interference values on periodic basis and converts it into corresponding interference band information. BTS then, transfers to BSC in the RF RESOURCE INDICATION message to consider it as a factor in channel allocation strategy.
Description
The interface boundaries are used to help the conversion of the interference level (average) value into corresponding interference band information. Altogether six boundaries determine five interference bands. In fact, it is unnecessary to set interference boundary 0 and interference boundary 5. One represents infinity and the other represents negative infinity. This parameter, describing the remaining four boundaries, is one of the BTS configuration parameters. Generally, -85 dBm ~ -115 dBm is used for interference boundaries 1 ~ 4.
Management Object
Cell Assuming the value of interference boundary is L:
L=0: -110 dBm;

Value Range
L=1: -109 dBm
L=63: -47 dBm; L=Other: reserved

Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters None Interference band 0~5: [0, 10, 15, 20, 25, 63] ZGF05-09-008 Idle Channel Measurement --
78
Related interfaces
--
Radio link timeout on MS side (MsRadioLKTmOut)

TABLE 98 - RADIO LINK TIMEOUT ON MS SIDE
Radio link timeout on MS side MsRadioLKTmOut RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT 3GPP TS45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is the maximum value of radio link counter S at Ms side, transmitted on BCCH or SACCH by BSS. Radio link counter S is used to evaluate radio link failure. When MS can't decode SACCH message (BFI=1), S decrements; when MS successfully receives SACCH message (BFI=0), S increases by 2. If S is decreased to 0, it indicates radio link fault, call shall be reestablished or released. Cell 0 ~ 15 None 15 ----
Description
Radio link failure criterion (ConFailCriterion)

TABLE 99 - RADIO LINK FAILURE CRITERION
Radio link failure criterion ConFailCriterion ---
79
The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link fails according to two criteria: One is based on the uplink SACCH error rate and the other is based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. Radio link failure criterion determines the method that the BTS uses as the standard to judge connection failure. If SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge connection failure, BTS uses the same value of Radio link timeout and the same process as MS does. Thus, BTS avoids inconsistent judgment standards in the uplink and downlink directions. Meanwhile, the Receiving level threshold and Receiving quality threshold parameters are invalid. If the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to judge connection failure, BTS will use the two parameters Receiving level threshold and Receiving quality threshold. The value range is as follows:
Description
1: Uplink SACCH Error Rate Based (in order to ensure the same judgment standard in the uplink and downlink directions); 2: RXLEV/RXQUAL Measurement Based
Radio link timeout on BSS side (BsRadioLKTmOut)

TABLE 100 - RADIO LINK TIMEOUT ON BSS SIDE
Radio link timeout on BSS side BsRadioLKTmOut RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT 3GPP TS45.008 V5.22.0
80
Description
This parameter is the maximum value of radio link counter S at BSS side, transmitted on PBCCH by BSS under the leading of packet system message 2. Cell 0 ~ 15 None 15 ----
Receiving level threshold (RxLevThs)

TABLE 101 - RECEIVING LEVEL THRESHOLD
Receiving level threshold RxLevThs --The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link fails according to two criteria: One is based on the uplink SACCH error rate and the other is based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. The radio link is considered as failed if BTS detects one of the following conditions: The uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold; The uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold. This only applies, if the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to judge a connection failure. Receiving level threshold specifies the threshold of receiving level. This parameter is invalid if uplink SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge connection failure (Radio link failure criterion is 1). Receiving level threshold is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
Description
Management Object
Cell
81
0 ~ 63
0: < -110 dBm;

Value Range
1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63: > -48 dBm

Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces None 10 ----
Receiving quality threshold (RxQualThs)

TABLE 102 - RECEIVING QUALITY THRESHOLD
Receiving quality threshold RxQualThs -GSM 12.21 The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link fails according to two criteria. One is based on uplink SACCH error rate, and the other is based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. The radio link is considered as failed if BTS detects one of the following conditions: The uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold; The uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold. This only applies, if the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as a standard to judge a connection failure. Receiving quality threshold specifies the receiving threshold quality. This parameter is invalid if uplink SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge a connection failure. This parameter is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
Description
Management Object
Cell
82
0~7
0: corresponding BER range <0.2%; 1: 0.2% ~ 0.4%;

Value Range
20.4% ~ 0.8% 66.4% ~ 12.8% 7: > 12.8%
None 6 ----
Radio link failure checking period (RxLevQualprd)

TABLE 103 - RADIO LINK FAILURE CHECKING PERIOD
Radio link failure checking period RxLevQualprd -GSM 12.21 Period to detect radio linkd failure at network side (in the unit of SACCH multiframe), including the detection of channel strength (dBm) and signal quality received in each channel. Cell 1 ~ 63 SACCH multiframe 63 ----
Description
83

The interface of AMR half method parameters is shown in Figure 8.
FIGURE 8 - AMR HALF METHOD P AR AMETERS
84
AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHalfAcs)

TABLE 104 - AMR HALF ACTIVE CODEC SET
AMR Half Active Codec Set AmrHalfAcs --The code has 8 bits. Bit 6~ Bit 8: reserved; Bit 5: 7.40 kbps; Bit 4: 6.70 kbps Bit 2: 5.15 kbps; Bit 1: 4.75 kbps. Yes represents 1 and No represents 0. Four coding modes could be set at the most. Default code is 00011110 (that is 30). Cell From 4.75 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, 5.90 kbit/s, 6.70 kbit/s, 7.40 kbit/s, to 7.95 kbit/s. Value range is Yes/No. None Default is [No, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, No] in order. ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) Start mode (AmrStartMode) --
Description
Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds)

Thresholds of AMR AmrThresholds ---
85
The threshold of changing AMR mode includes four factors: AmrThresholds1, AmrThresholds2, AmrThresholds3, AmrThresholds4, AmrThresholds5. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met: Description AmrThresholds1AmrThresholds2 AmrThresholds3AmrThresholds4 AmrThresholds5 AmrThresholds1AmrHysteresis1 AmrThresholds2AmrHysteresis2 AmrThresholds3AmrHysteresis3 AmrThresholds4AmrHysteresis4 AmrThresholds5AmrHysteresis5 Management Object Cell Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Value range is 0~63.
0: 0.0 dB;
Value Range
1: 0.5 dB; 2: 1.0 dB 63: 31.5 dB
None 2225293440 ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---

Hysteresis of AMR AmrHysteresis ---
86
Description
The hysteresis of changing AMR mode includes five factors: AmrHysteresis1, AmrHysteresis2, AmrHysteresis3, AmrHysteresis4, and AmrHysteresis5. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met: AmrThresholds1AmrHysteresis1AmrThresholds2 AmrHysteresis2AmrThresholds3 AmrHysteresis3AmrThresholds4 AmrHysteresis4AmrThresholds5AmrHysteresis5 Cell Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Value range is 0~15. 0: 0.0 dB;
Management Object
Value Range
1: 0.5 dB; 2: 1.0 dB 15: 7.5 dB
Initial codec mode (IsAmrICM)

Initial codec mode IsAmrlCM --Use the coding mode specified by Startmode Cell Startmode codec, Initial codec mode None Startmode codec ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR)
87
---

Startmode codec mode AmrStartMode --Startmode codec mode Cell
88
When only a value is configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1~4; When two values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1~3; When three values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1~2; When four values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1;
Value Range
When all values are configured as "No" for 5 elements in "AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is null;

Full name
89
Description
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---
Reserved rate of eMLPP (EmlppThs)

TABLE 110 - RESERVED RATE OF EMLPP
eMLPP channel Reserved time EmlppThs --This parameter defines eMLPP channel reserved time, that is, the proportion of eMLPP channel in all available channels in the cell. Cell 0 ~ 100 None 20 ZGF05-25-017 eMLPP ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) --
90
Related interfaces
--
Use cell EMLPP Threshold (UseCellEmlppThs)

TABLE 111 - USE CELL EMLPP THRESHOLD
Use cell EMLPP Threshold UseCellEmlppThs --This parameter defines whether to use eMLPPThs. If yes, you shall select cell property, otherwise to select BSC property. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-25-017 eMLPP ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---

The interface of AMR full method parameters is shown in Figure 9-.
91
FIGURE 9 - AMR FULL METHOD P AR AMETERS
AMR Full Active Codec Set (ArmFullAcs)

T AB L E 1 1 2 - AM R F U L L AC T I V E C O D E C SE T
AMR full Active Codec Set AmrFullAcs --The code has 8 bits. The code has 8 bits. Bit 8: 12.2 kbps; Bit 7: 10.2 kbps; Bit 6: 7.95 kbps; Bit 5: 6.70 kbps Bit 2: 5.15 kbps; Bit 1: 4.75 kbps. Yes represents 1 and No represents 0. Default code is 10101010 (that is 170). Cell From 4.75 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, 5.90 kbit/s, 6.70 kbit/s, 7.40 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s, 10.2 kbit/s to 12.2 kbit/s, value range is Yes/No. None Default is [No, Yes, No, Yes, No, Yes, No, Yes] in order. ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) Start mode (AmrStartMode)
Description
92
Related interfaces
--
Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds)

Thresholds of AMR AmrThresholds --The threshold of changing AMR mode includes seven factors: AmrThresholds1, AmrThresholds2, AmrThresholds3, AmrThresholds4, AmrThresholds5, AmrThresholds6, AmrThresholds7. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met:
Description
AmrThresholds1AmrThresholds2AmrThresholds3 AmrThresholds4AmrThresholds5 AmrThresholds6AmrThresholds7AmrThresholds1 AmrHysteresis1AmrThresholds2 AmrHysteresis2AmrThresholds3AmrHysteresis3 AmrThresholds4AmrHysteresis4 AmrThresholds5AmrHysteresis5AmrThresholds6 AmrHysteresis6AmrThresholds7 AmrHysteresis7 Cell Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Value range is 0~63.
Management Object
0: 0.0 dB;
Value Range
1: 0.5 dB; 2: 1.0 dB 63: 31.5 dB
93

Hysteresis of AMR AmrHysteresis --The hysteresis of changing AMR mode includes seven factors: AmrHysteresis1, AmrHysteresis2, AmrHysteresis3, AmrHysteresis4, AmrHysteresis5, AmrHysteresis6, AmrHysteresis7. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met:
Description
AmrThresholds1AmrHysteresis1AmrThresholds2 AmrHysteresis2AmrThresholds3 AmrHysteresis3AmrThresholds4 AmrHysteresis4AmrThresholds5 AmrHysteresis5AmrThresholds6 AmrHysteresis6AmrThresholds7AmrHysteresis7 Cell Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Value range is 0~15.
Management Object
0: 0.0 dB;
Value Range
1: 0.5 dB; 2: 1.0 dB 15: 7.5 dB
Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM)

Initial codec mode IsAmrICM --
94
-Use the coding mode specified by Startmode Cell Startmode codec, Initial codec mode None Startmode codec ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---

Startmode codec mode AmrStartMode --Startmode codec mode Cell
95
When four values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1~4; When five values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1~3; When six values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1~2; When seven values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1;
Value Range
When all values are configured as "No" for 8 elements in "AMR full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is null;

Full name
96
Description
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-17-005 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR) ---
Cell Optional Parameters

The interface of cell optional parameters is shown in Figure 10.
97
FIGURE 10 - CELL OPTIONAL P AR AMETERS
Protection period for access attempt (T3122, s)

TABLE 118 - PROTECTION PERIOD FOR ACCESS ATTEMPT
Protection period for access attempt T3122 T3122 3GPP TS44.018 V5.22.0 The network sends IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message to MS when it receives a channel request message from MS and will not allocate a suitable channel to MS. IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message contains T3122 timer parameter to prevent possible wireless channel blocking caused by repeated channel requests sent by the MS, which is waiting for indication information unit.
Description
MS cannot restart a new call until the time indicated by T3122 is elapsed if it receives the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message. This parameter is also one of the system control parameters, and is sent to MS in the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message. Following are the suggested values: 10 s ~ 15 s for normal traffic area; 15 s ~ 25 s for dense traffic area
Cell 0 ~ 255
98
s 10 --Um interface
Multiband report indication (MulbandReport)

TABLE 119 - MULTIBAND REPORT INDICATION
Multiband report indication MulbandReport MULTIBAND_REPORTING 3GPP TS45.008 V5.22.0
99
MS in single-frequency GSM system needs only to report contents of six adjacent cells with the strongest signals in a frequency band, when reporting the survey result of adjacent cells to the network. In multi-band networking, MS can enter with priority into a specific frequency band during handover. The MS reports the survey result according to the signal intensity and the frequency band of the signals, according to the actual situation. Multiband report indication is used to notify MS to report contents of adjacent cells in multiple frequency bands. It is one of the system control parameters. The setting of this parameter is subject to traffic in each frequency band. General principles to set the parameters are as follows: 0: If the traffic of each frequency band is almost equivalent, and the operator has no choice over the frequency band. 3: If the traffic of each frequency band is quite different, and the operator hopes that MS enters a specific frequency band with priority. The values are as follows:
Description
0: MS reports the survey results of six known and allowed adjacent cells with the strongest NCC according to the signal intensity, regardless of which frequency band adjacent cells are in. 1: MS reports the measurement result of one adjacent cell with strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cell list (excluding frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of which frequency bands they are in. 2: MS reports the survey result of two adjacent cells with the strongest signals in the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent cell table. In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of which frequency bands they are in.
100
3: MS reports the survey result of three adjacent cells with the strongest signals in the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent cell table. In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION which frequency bands they are in.
Cell 0~3 None 3 ----
Uplink discontinuous transmission (DtxUplinkBcch)

TABLE 120 - UPLINK DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION
Uplink discontinuous transmission DtxUplinkBcch DTX 3GPP TS44.018 V5.22.0 The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode means that the system does not transmit signals during the speech intermission of the subscriber conversation. This parameter controls how MS uses the DTX mode. System broadcasts RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message to all MSs in the cell. In addition, it may be necessary to notify MSs of older versions (of the first stage) through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6 message on SACCH. For MSs of newer versions, the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6 message contains Uplink discontinuous transmission. This parameter is one of the network function parameters. The values are as follows:
Description
MS could use DTX; MS should use DTX; MS should not use DTX;
If both the BTS equipment and TRAU support the DTX mode, set the parameter as 1 (employ DTX). Otherwise set it as 2 (not employ DTX). Management Object Value Range Cell 0~2
101
None 1 ZGF05-08-002 Discontinuous Transmission Uplink ---
Other Parameters
The interface of the other parameters is shown in Figure 11.
102
RACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst (RachBuysThs)

TABLE 121 - R ACH RECEIVING SIGNAL LEVEL THRESHOLD FOR BUSY BURST
RACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst RachBuysThs --RACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst is the threshold for receiving signal level in RACH bursts. If the value is exceeded (that is less than RACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst dBm), system considers that as a busy RACH. Cell 0 ~ 63
Description
Management Object
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
None 63 ----
Preprocessing indication (Preprocess)

TABLE 122 - PREPROCESSING INDICATION
Preprocessing Preprocess ---
103
The survey report contains the large amount (message amount) of Abis interface information. Preprocess of the survey report can be transferred to BTS to reduce the burden of Abis interface link. After preprocess, BTS averages the survey data of MS by its own, and reports to BSC in a lower frequency. Average reporting period can be two, three or four SACCH multi-frames (480 ms). That is, the frequency decreases from the original twice/s to once/2 s, so the message amount of Abis interface decreases. However, the decrease of message amount still depends on whether the message length before preprocess is same as that after preprocess. One disadvantage of preprocess is that the handover control and power control are not in time, which increases the possibility of disconnection rate. This parameter determines whether to use preprocess and its period or not. The values are as follows:
Description
0: Do not use preprocess 2: Use preprocess; the average reporting period is 2 SACCH multi-frames 3: Use preprocess; the average reporting period is 3 SACCH multi-frames 4: Use preprocess; the average reporting period is 4 SACCH multi-frames Other values: Reserved
MAX resending times for physical information (NY1)

T A B L E 1 2 3 - M AX R E S E N D I N G T I M E S F O R P H Y S I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
MAX resending times for physical information NY1
104
--BTS sends RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message to notify MS the advanced time value that is used during asynchronous handover process to be in accordance with GSM specifications. BTS starts the T3105 timer after the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message is sent once. BTS resends message RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION and restart the T3105 timer if the timer stops and fails to decode the frames in second layer correctly (format A or format B) or TCH frames. MAX resending times for physical information decides maximum number of resending times for RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message. This parameter is one of the BTS configuration parameters.
Description
Cell 5 ~ 35 None 8 ----
Low priority of channel select priority (ChanSelectPrio_0)

TABLE 124 - LOW PRIORITY OF CHANNEL SELECT PRIORITY
Low priority of channel select priority ChanSelectPrio_0 --Specify the channel type used by low priority subscriber. Cell No change, Full rate first, Half rate first, Only full rate allowed, Only half rate allowed None
105
No change ZGF05-09-009 Enhancement on Channel Allocation ZGF05-17-002 Half rate ---
High priority of channel select priority (ChanSelectPrio_1)

TABLE 125 - HIGH PRIORITY OF CHANNEL SELECT PRIORITY
High priority of channel select priority ChanSelectPrio_1 --Specify the channel type used by high priority subscriber. Cell No change, Full rate first, Half rate first, Only full rate allowed, Only half rate allowed None No change ZGF05-09-009 Enhancement on Channel Allocation ZGF05-17-002 Half rate ---
Cell Support Encryption Mode (CipherMode-0~ CipherMode-7)

TABLE 126 - CELL SUPPORT ENCRYPTION MODE
Cell Support Encryption Mode CipherMode-0~ CipherMode-7 ---
106
Description
Cell Support Encryption Mode is the encryption mode supported by BTS. The required encryption algorithm is contained in BSSAP CIPHER MODE COMMAND or BSSAP ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND message sent by the MSC side. By checking this parameter, BSC can learn whether the cell supports this required encryption algorithm to give a proper response. Cell 8 types, Value Ranges are all Yes/No None [Yes, No, No, No, No, No, No, No] ZGF05-21-001 Support of A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm ---
MR report time bitmap (MrRptTimeBmp)

TABLE 127 - MR REPORT TIME BITM AP
MR report time bitmap MrRptTimeBmp --This parameter provides a check function about 0 ~ 23 time points. You can enable measurement data report at different points. Each time point indicates a hour, within 0~23 hours. Only if checking corresponding time and enabling report function about measurement report data, MR data can be reported.
Description
Management Object
Cell checked, unchecked
Value Range
Checked: it indicates that measurement report shall be enabled within this time duration; Unchecked: it indicates that measurement report shall be disabled within this time duration;
Unit
None
107
Unchecked ----
GPRS Basic Parameters

If GPRS service supported in Basic parameters 1 is support GPRS, the sub-interface of GPRS parameters will appear. The interface of GPRS basic property parameters is as shown in Figure 12.
FIGURE 12 - GPRS BASIC PROPERTY P ARAMETERS
SGSN ID (SGSNID)
TABLE 128 - SGSN ID
SGSN ID SGSNID ---
108
Description
SGSN serial number assigned by internal iBSC, which is assigned while user creates SGSN. This serial number can't be modified and can be deleted after creation. Cell 1 ~ 16 None Depends on the actual configuration. ZGF05-05-006 Multi PLMN ---
NSEI
TABLE 129 - NSEI
NSEI NSEI --In GPRS protocol stack, every unique BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) that is NSEI+BVCI for each GPRS cell belongs to Network Service Entity (NSE). NSEI uniquely identifies every NSE. ZXG10 iBSC supports several NSEs for future expandability option. Only when user firstly configures NSE in "Relevant configuration at GB interface", this parameter is optional.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 65535 None Depends on the NSE configuration at Gb interface ----
109
BVCI
TABLE 130 - BVCI
BVCI BVCI --BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) provides an approach for communication between different BSSGP entities. The peer-to-peer Point-to-Point (PTP) or Point-to-Multipoint (PTM) or inter-signaling entity transmission of BSSGP PDUs lies on BVC. BVCI identifies each virtual connection. BVCI enables the network service layer to route BSSGP PDUs to the peer entity. One NSE carries only one signaling BVC (BVCI=0).
Description
Cell 2 ~ 65535 None 2 ----
RAC
TABLE 131 - R AC
RAC RAC ---
110
Description
RAC is a part of Routing Area Identity (RAI). RAI defines the GPRS serving cell identification. GPRS system divides the Location Area (LA) to several routing areas (RAs) using RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC). Routing Area (RA) distribution, similar to GSM system, uses the location area to manage a group of cells. MS initiates Routing area update procedure in cell reselection mode if new RAI differs from old RAI during cell reselection. MS and SGSN in standby state can know the routing area information. SGSN sends request to BSC for MS paging in that new routing area when network carries packet data or circuit data to transmit. RAI cannot span more than one SGSN.
Cell 0 ~ 255 None 0 ----
UPU unit
TABLE 132 - UPU UNIT
UPU Unit UpuUnit --It is corresponding with the board position in physical configuration Cell Depends on the actual configuration. None Depends on the actual selection. ---
111
Related interfaces
--
DSP No.
TABLE 133 - DSP NO.
DSP ID DSP --This parameter depends on physical configured DSP, if all DSPs are configured, DSP number is within range of 9~22, otherwise it is configured DSP number. Cell Determined by user configured DSP quantity. If all DSPs on UPPB are configured, DSP number shall be within 9~22, otherwise it shall be configured DSP number. If all DSPs on UPPB/2 board are configured, DSP number shall be within 9~13, 17~21, 25~29, otherwise it shall be configured DSP number.
Description
Management Object
Value Range
None Minimum DSP number configured by user ----

112
Additional reselect parameter indictor (AddResPI2)

TABLE 134 - ADDITIONAL RESELECTION PAR AMETER INDICATION
attached reselection parameter indication AddResPI2 ---
113
The cell selection and reselection of MS depends on the C1 and C2 parameters, according to the definition in the GSM specification. Network carriers decide whether to use C2 as the cell reselection parameter. Additional reselection parameter indication is to notify MS whether C2 criterion is adoptable during the cell reselection. System broadcasts through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages to MS in the cell. It is one of the cell selection parameters. The values are as follows: Description
Yes: MS takes off cell reselection parameter PI and the parameters related to computing C2 from the rest bytes SI7/8 Rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 7 or 8. No: MS should obtain the PI parameter related to the cell reselection and parameters related to the C2 calculation from the rest octets of the SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 message (SI4 Rest Octets).
Generally, system information TYPE 7 and TYPE 8 are rarely used, this parameter must be set as No, otherwise some MS (for example NEC) are not able to access the network.
SI13 sending position (Si13Locate)

TABLE 135 - SI13 SENDING POSITION
SI13 Sending Position Si13Locate --
114
3GPP reference
-This parameter is used at MS side. SI13 sending position indicates the scheduling position of SI13 on BCCH. SI13 is related to the GPRS services. SI13 can be sent on either of the following: BCCH Norm position. In this case, it occupies the BCCH block with TC = 4; TC = ((FN DIV 51) mod (8)).
Description
BCCH Ext position. In this case, it occupies one fixed AGCH block with TC = 0. SI13 is sent with low success rate on the BCCH Ext position, because SI13 has to compete with other messages, such as IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message, for delivery opportunity. For this case, the parameter value of Access Allowed Reserved Blocks must be set greater than 0. Otherwise, SI13 will not be sent. Cell BCCH Norm, BCCH Ext None BCCH Norm ----
RACOLOR (RaColor)
TABLE 136 - R ACOLOR
RACOLOR RaColor ---
115
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through SI3, SI4, SI7 and SI8 messages. RACOLOR is similar to the BCC function in the GSM system. In some cases, such as interBSC cell reselection, the GPRS network assigns different RACOLOR values to adjacent cells with the same route area code to ensure that MS can initiate the Routing Area Updating process. In this way, when MS receives different RACOLOR values in the cells with the same routing area code, it initiates the Routing Area Updating process similar as when it spans two different routing areas.
Cell 0~7 None 0 ----
Minimal number of idle CS channel (CsChansThs)

TABLE 137 - MINIM AL NUMBER OF IDLE CS CHANNEL
Minimal number of idle CS channel CsChansThs --DBS uses this parameter on BSC MP. It indicates minimum threshold of the number of IDLE channels under the CS status, when the network converts the switchable channel to the PS channel.
Description
System may fail to convert a dynamic switchable channel to a PS channel, if the number of idle CS channels is lower than the threshold. When a PS + CS channel in the CS status is released, it can be converted and used by PS if the total number of idle channels in the cell is greater than this threshold. Cell 0 ~ 255 None

116
2 ----
Packet access priority threshold (PriAcThr)

TABLE 138 - P ACKET ACCESS PRIORITY THRESHOLD
Packet access priority threshold PriAcThr --This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI13 and SI13 messages. Packet access priority threshold indicates the priority level of MS packet access allowed in the cell as similar to the function of ACCESS CLASS. Cell No package access, Allow priority 1, Allow priority 1-2, Allow priority 1-3, Allow priority 1-4, Allow priority None Allow priority ----
Description
Packet System Information Send Speed (SendSpeed)

TABLE 139 - P ACKET SYSTEM INFORM ATION SEND SPEED
Packet System Information Send Speed SendSpeed (PSI2, PSI3, PSI3BIS, PSI4, PSI5, PSI13, PSI3ter, PSI8, PSI3quater) --
117
3GPP reference
-This parameter is used for global process on BRP. Packet System Information Send Speed indicates whether various types of PSI messages are sent at high rate. As there are limited packet system messages (16) sent at high rate, and the number of sent messages often varies due to different content lengths of different types of packet system messages, the user can only roughly specify the sending rate of each type of system message. Before sending the message, the global process dynamically specifies the sending rate of each packet system message type according to the user requirement and the system limitation.
Description
Cell 9 types, Yes/No None [Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes] ----
Overload report period on PRACH (OvLoadPer, s)

TABLE 140 - OVERLOAD REPORT PERIOD ON PRACH
PRACH OverLoad Report Period OvLoadPer --Parameters used by FUC at BTS side. The interval of PRACH overload period reported by BTS and informed by BSC. Cell 0 ~ 255 s 10 --
118
-Abis interface
Link error counter (RLTimeout)

TABLE 141 - LINK ERROR COUNTER
Link error counter RLTimeout --This parameter is used by BTS. BSC informs this parameter to BTS through O&M message, explaining measurement counter while BTS can't correctly decode GPRS data. Cell 0 ~ 100 None 20 --Abis interface
Description
PRACH receive signal level threshold (PrachBusyT)

TABLE 142 - PRACH RECEIVE SIGNAL LEVEL THRESHOLD
PRACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst PrachBusyT ---
119
Description
BTS uses this parameter information. PRACH channel overload is one of the reasons for overload control. The busy ratio of random access burst decides the PRACH overload. If a bursts level exceeds the value specified by PRACH receive signal level threshold, the burst is considered as a busy burst.
Management Object
Cell 0 ~ 63
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
None 63 ----
Average measuring bursts number on PRACH (MeaAvgSlot)

TABLE 143 - AVER AGE M EASURING BURSTS NUM BER ON PRACH
Average measuring bursts number on PRACH MeaAvgSlot --BTS uses this parameter information. and this parameter must be in sync with BTS whenever changed. Average measuring bursts number on PRACH indicates the number of measured bursts on PRACH. If the receiving signal level of Average bursts count surveyed by RACH BPs is lower than the value of this parameter, overloading of PRACH channel occur.BTS uses this parameter. The BTS needs to be synchronized when modifying the parameter.
Description
120
Cell 0 ~ 100 None 60 ----
Buffer threshold of paging message (PccchIndTh_0, %)

TABLE 144 - BUFFER THRESHOLD OF PAGING MESSAGE
Buffer threshold of paging message PccchIndTh_0 --Paging message buffer is overloaded threshold for packet paging channel PPCH. The judgment scheme is as follows: i.Calculate the paging message buffer corresponding to a paging channel. ii.Divide the message number stored in the buffer by the maximum storage amount. iii.Multiply the obtained percentage by 100. Compare the result with the threshold. If the result exceeds the threshold, then the overload can be decided. Cell 0 ~ 100 % 50 ZGF05-15-001 Paging ---
Description
121
Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period (PccchIndTh_1, %)

TABLE 145 - QUEUE LENGTH THRESHOLD IN 64 MULTIFRAME PAGING PERIOD
Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period PccchIndTh_1 --FUC on BTS uses this parameter information. It indicates overload threshold in PCCCH (PRACH, PPCH) threshold. This parameter is an array with 3 elements, in the unit of %.
PccchIndTh[0]: paging message buffer is overloaded for packet paging channel PPCH. Its decision mechanism is to first calculate paging message body buffer corresponding to one paging channel, then message total quantity saved in this buffer divided by maximum storage to gain a percentage, multiplied by 100, then compared with this threshold, if it exceeds it will be considered as overload; PccchIndTh[1]: paging group overload threshold of packet paging channel. Its decision mechanism is to first accumulate the message ready to issue in buffer queue for each paging group pair, then divided by accumulation of maximum storage in buffer queue corresponding to each paging group, multiplied by 100, compared with this threshold, if it exceeds the threshold, it will be considered as overload; PccchIndTh[2]: PRACH overload threshold. Its decision mechanism is to first divide total blocks quantity of this PRACH by busy blocks on a PRACH, multiplied by 100, compared with this threshold, if it exceeds the threshold, it will be considered as overload.
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Cell 0 ~ 100 % 50
Description
122
ZGF05-15-001 Paging ---
PRACH overload threshold ratio (PccchIndTh_2, %)

TABLE 146 - PRACH OVERLOAD THRESHOLD RATIO
PRACH overload threshold ratio PccchIndTh_2 --Total block quantity on this PRACH divided by busy blocks on a PRACH, multiplied by 100, then compared with this threshold, if it exceeds this threshold, it will be considered as overload. Cell 0 ~ 100 % 50 ----
Description
GPRS Other Parameters 2

123
Is Support CCN mode (CCNActive)

Is Support CCN mode CCNActive CCN_ACTIVE 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter indicates whether the cell supports CCN mode. CNN mode refers to cell alternating notificaiton. When BSS supports CCN mode, if MS does cell reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message notification shall be delivered to network in normal case. After network receives this message, it can send specific system message about standby cell to MS. Cell Yes/No None No
Description
124
ZGF06-01-004 Network-assisted Cell Change -Um interface
Is cell support system message status flow (SIStatusInd)

TABLE 148 - IS CELL SUPPORT SYSTEM MESSAGE STATUS FLOW
Is cell support system message status flow SIStatusInd --This parameter indicates whether the cell supports system message status flow, broadcasted to MS in SI13 and PSI13. It describes whether the network supports PSI (SI) Status process. MS informs its network side which PSI (SI) subsets are required for received PSI (SI) message by sending Packet PSI (SI) Status message on PACCH. This parameter is used in CCN mode, to assist finishing NACC fast cell reselection Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-004 Network-assisted Cell Change -Um interface
Description
Allow SOLSA MS to access (EXC_ACC)

TABLE 149 - ALLOW SOLSA MS TO ACCESS
Allow SOLSA MS to access EXC_ACC --
125
3GPP reference
-System broadcasts this parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, and SI7 messages. In addition, the parameter information is available in PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of local and neighboring cells. The network uses Allow SOLSA MS to access to prevent MS from residing in the cell. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
CCCH SplitPgCycle support (SpgcSuport)

TABLE 150 - CCCH SPLITPGCYCLE SUPPORT
CCCH SplitPgCycle support SpgcSuport --This parameter is used at MS side and FUN side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI3 and SI13 messages. CCCH SplitPgCycle support indicates whether to support the SplitPgCycle function on CCCH. Split_Pg_Cycle means sending the PACKET IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT, PACKET PAGING and PACKET IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT messages on multiple blocks. Cell Yes/No None No ---
Description
126
Related interfaces
--
Extended paging supported (EpageMode)

TABLE 151 - EXTENDED PAGING SUPPORTED
Extended paging supported EpageMode --This parameter indicates whether support extended paging. Extended paging means that MS still can receive and analyze the message within 3 intervals after the blocks indicated by its paging group. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-15-001 Paging -Um interface
Description
PSI status supported (PsiStatInd)

TABLE 152 - PSI STATUS SUPPORTED
PSI status supported PsiStatInd ---
127
This parameter is used at the MS side and on the BRP. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message, and indicates whether the network supports PACKET PSI STATUS message. Description This function is optional. When PsiStatInd = 1, MS can send the PACKET PSI STATUS message to the network and indicate the current value of the PSI message stored on it. Later, the network sets PSI message for this MS on the PACCH to speed up the subsequent flow of MS. Otherwise MS has to listen to the PSI message only at the time points scheduled by the network. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-004 Network-assisted Cell Change ---
Is the cell support extendable uplink TBF (EXT_UTBF)

TABLE 153 - IS THE CELL SUPPORT EXTENDABLE UPLINK TBF
Is the cell support extendable uplink TBF EXT_UTBF --This parameter indicates whether the cell supports extended uplink TBF. After BSS receives CV=0 uplink block, if the cell supports extended uplink TBF, it enters into extended uplink TBF status. At this time, it continues assign uplink block resource to MS. If new uplink data is required to send during extended uplink, re-establishment of uplink TBF is not required. This function requires extended uplink function shall be supported at MS side.
Description
Cell Yes/No None
128
Yes ZGF06-07-008 Delayed TBF Release in UL -Um interface
Uplink delay time (UIDelayTime, ms)

TABLE 154 - UPLINK DELAY TIME
Uplink delay time UlDelayTime --It indicates uplink delay time, to describe uplink TBF delay time. When uplink TBF is released, if extended uplink TBF function is not supported, this timer starts, access to uplink delay state, to wait for downlink LLC arrival. Release uplink TBF after timer is timeout. Cell 0 ~ 4000 ms 1000 ZGF06-07-008 Delayed TBF Release in UL -Um interface
Description
Downlink delay time (DIDelaytime, ms)

TABLE 155 - DOWNLINK DELAY TIME
Downlink delay time DlDelaytime ---
129
Description
It indicates downlink TBF delay time. When downlink TBF is released, this timer starts, access to delay state, to wait for new downlink LLC frame. Release downlink TBF after timer is timeout. Cell 500 ~ 4000 ms 2000 ZGF06-07-007 Delayed TBF Release in DL -Um interface
Extend uplink TBF time (ExtUITBFTime, ms)

TABLE 156 - EXTEND UPLINK TBF TIME
Extend uplink TBF time ExtUITBFTime --It indicates extended uplink TBF delay time. When uplink TBF is released, if extended uplink TBF function is supported, this timer starts, access to extended uplink TBF state, to wait for new uplink LLC frame. Release uplink TBF after timer is timeout. Cell 0 ~ 3000 ms 1500 ZGF06-07-008 Delayed TBF Release in UL -Um interface
Description
130
Interval number of GPRS TBF downlinks RRBP (GPRSDIRrbpInterVal)

TABLE 157 - INTERVAL NUMBER OF GPRS TBF DOWNLINK'S RRBP
Interval number of GPRS TBF downlinks RRBP GPRSDIRrbpInterVal --Interval that downlink Gprs TBF requires MS to send Packet Downlink Ack/Nack. Cell 3 ~ 20 None 10 --Um interface
Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlinks RRBP (EGPRSDIRrbpInterVal)

TABLE 158 - INTERVAL NUMBER OF EGPRS TBF DOWNLINKS RRBP
Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlinks RRBP EGPRSDIRrbpInterVal --Interval that downlink EGPRS TBF requires MS to send EGPRS Packet Donwlink Ack/Nack. Cell 6 ~ 60 None 10 --
131
-Um interface
Interval number of GPRS TBF uplinks ACK (GPRSUIAckInterVal)

TABLE 159 - INTERVAL NUMBER OF GPRS TBF UPLINKS ACK
Interval number of GPRS TBF uplinks ACK GPRSUlAckInterVal --Interval that uplink Gprs TBF network sends Packet Downlink Ack/Nack to MS. Cell 3 ~ 20 None 10 --Um interface
Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplinks ACK (EGPRSUIAckInterVal)

TABLE 160 - INTERVAL NUMBER OF EGPRS TBF UPLINKS ACK
132
Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplinks ACK EGPRSUlAckInterVal --Interval that uplink Egprs TBF network sends Packet Downlink Ack/Nack to MS. Cell 3 ~ 20
None 8 --Um interface
Uplink measure report period (Ulmeasureperiod, ms)

TABLE 161 - UPLINK MEASURE REPORT PERIOD
Uplink measurement report period Ulmeasureperiod --This parameter is used by UPPB, describing uplink measurement report period reported by BTS and handled by BSC. Cell 400 ~ 2000 ms 800 --Abis interface
Calculating period of load on PPCH (LoadPer, s)

TABLE 162 - CALCULATING PERIOD OF LOAD ON PPCH
Calculating period of load on PPCH LoadPer ---
133
This parameter is used by FUC at BTS side, describing period to calculate PPCH channel load. Cell 0 ~ 16 s 10 --Abis interface
PSI1 send period (Psi1ReppPer)

TABLE 163 - PSI1 SEND PERIOD
PSI1 Send Period Psi1ReppPer --This parameter is used at MS side and FUN side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI3 messages of local and adjacent cells. PSI1 send period indicates the sending period and destination of the PSI1 message in a cell. PSI1 contains information about cell reselection, PRACH control, control channel description, and possible global power control parameters. System sends the message at high repetition rate as long as PBCCH exists. Cell 0 ~ 15
Description
Management Object
0: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 1 multiframes;

Value Range
1: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 2 multiframes; 15: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 16 multiframes;
Unit Default
s 4
134
----
Selective granularity (USFGranularity)

TABLE 164 - SELECTIVE GRANULARITY
Selective granularity USFGranularity --IT IS ASSIGNED TO THE MS IN PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT MESSAGE, indicating the uplink block allocation granularity of the GPRS MS from the network when cell employs dynamic allocation. Cell 0~1
Description
Management Object
Value Range
0: allocation granularity is 1 for uplink block; 1: allocation granularity is 4 for uplink block;
None 0 ----
Support extended uplink dynamic allocation (EXUPDYNSUPPORT)

TABLE 165 - SUPPORT EXTENDED UPLINK DYNAMIC ALLOCATION
Support extended uplink dynamic allocation EXUPDYNSUPPORT --
135
3GPP reference
-This parameter indicates whether cell supports extended uplink dynamic allocation. While using this function, the MS only need listen USF allocation with the least timeslot, so you can determine to send uplink block on all allocated uplink timeslot. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-05-002 Extended Dynamic Allocation -Um interface
Description

136
C/I (Sc)
TABLE 166 - C/I (SC)
C/I Sc --iBSC uses MEAN_BEP as C/I to indicate radio transmission quality, and adjusts block allocation according to radio transmission quality. Divide MEAN_BEP into 7 grades, and each grade corresponds to a weight. The weight is dynamically added to the weight calculated from UMTS QoS parameters, as the evidence of allocating shared block. Allocation weight that corresponds to MEAN_BEP grade is as follows: MEAN_BEP grade weight 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0~4 5~9 10 ~ 13 14 ~ 17 18 ~ 21 22 ~ 26 27 ~ 31 MEAN_BEP value -3*Sc -2*Sc -Sc 0 Sc 2*Sc 3*Sc Allocation
Description
Cell 0~8 None 2 ZGF06-10-003 C/I based Packet Scheduling ZGF06-07-005 Packet Scheduling ---
ARP (Sa)
TABLE 167 - ARP (SA)
ARP (Sa) sa
137
--It adjusts allocation weight for shared radio block by ARP parameters (priority level). Allocation weight that corresponds to ARP is as follows: ARP 1 2 3 Allocation weight 2*Sa Sa 0
Description
Cell 0~8 None 2 ZGF06-10-002 Support ARP in packet scheduling ZGF06-07-005 Packet Scheduling ---
THP (St)
TABLE 168 - THP
THP St ---
138
It adjusts allocation weight for shared radio block by THP parameters included in interactive service. Allocation weight that corresponds to THP is as follows: THP 0 Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0~8 None 2 ZGF06-07-005 Packet Scheduling --Allocation weight 0 St 2*St 3*St 4*St 5*St 6*St 7*St 8*St
Support PS Queuing (PsQueueInd)

TABLE 169 - SUPPORT PS QUEUING
Support PS Queuing PsQueueInd --If PFC is suppoted, iBSC allocates radio resource according to signature QoS parameters from user side, when QoS guarantee rate for user signature is unsatisfied (including through grabbing), and the QoS parameter allows queuing, if this parameter is enabled, iBSC allocates radio resource to user according to Best Effort, and insert the user into the queue, to wait for allocation of radio resource. Queuing time can be gotten through PFC process; otherwise if this parameter is disabled, access to this service is directly refused. When this parameter is Yes, you can configure PsMaxQueueInstNum.
Description
139
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-20-002 Streaming Service Policies ZGF06-20-001 Service based QoS (UMTS) ZGF06-07-006 Quality of Service (QoS) ---
Max PS Queue Count (PsMaxQueueInstNum)

TABLE 170 - MAX PS QUEUE COUNT
Max PS Queue Count PsMaxQueueInstNum --This paramter indicates the number of allowed queues in the cell. When the user number in queue reaches this value, the service that shall be queued shall be refused to access. When PsQueueInd is Yes, you can configure this paramter.
Description
Cell 1 ~ 16 None 8 ZGF06-20-002 Streaming Service Policies ZGF06-20-001 Service based QoS (UMTS) ZGF06-07-006 Quality of Service (QoS) ---
140
Support PS Preemption (PsPreemptionInd)

TABLE 171 - SUPPORT PS PREEMPTION
Support PS Preemption PsPreemptionInd --When PFC is supported, iBSC allocates radio resource according to signature QoS parameters from user side. When signed QoS guarantee rate can't be satisfied and user own QoS parameter allows preemption. When this parameter is enabled, this user can preempte radio resource with low priority. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-20-002 Streaming Service Policies ZGF06-20-001 Service based QoS (UMTS) ZGF06-07-006 Quality of Service (QoS) ---
Description
Support 3G NACC (Support3GCCN)

TABLE 172 - SUPPORT 3G N ACC
Support 3G NACC Support3GCCN --This parameter indicates whether support NACC to 3G cell. Cell Yes/No None No
141
ZGF06-01-005 Inter-BSC NACC ---
Support PS Prmp CS (PSPrmpCSSupport)

TABLE 173 - SUPPORT PS PRMP CS
Support PS Prmp CS PSPrmpCSSupport --This parameter indicates when dynamic channel with preferred PDCH is occupied, to determine whether the channel can be preempted by PS service. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
GPRS Cell Optional Parameters

The interface of GPRS cell optional parameters is shown in Figure 16 - .
142
FIGURE 16 - GPRS CELL OPTIONAL P ARAMETERS
T3168 (s)
TABLE 174 - T3168
T3168 (s) T3168 T3168 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 MS uses this parameter, it is one of the GPRS cell options parameters and it is broadcasted to the MS in PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 message.
Description
T3168 indicates the maximum time to wait for PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT message after MS sends PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message (or PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message with Channel Request Description IE). Cell 0.5 ~ 4.0 (Step length is 0.5) s 4.0 ---
143
Related interfaces
Um interface
T3192
TABLE 175 - T3192
T3192 T3192 T3192 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. During the packet downlink transmission, if RLC data block is the final downlink data block to be transmitted, the network sends the RLC data block with the Final Block Identifier (FBI) domain as 1. It contains an effective RRBP field to initialize the release of the downlink TBF. For each RLC data block that receives FBI with value 1 and contains effective RRBP domain:
Description
In acknowledged mode, the MS sends PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message whose FBI domain is 1 on the uplink block specified by the RRBP domain. In unacknowledged mode, MS sends the PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message in the uplink block specified as per RRBP field. Then MS starts the T3192 timer.
When T3192 stops, the system releases the resources, stops listening to the PDCCH channel, and turns to listen to the paging channel. Within the protection period of T3192, if the MS receives the PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT or PACKET TIMESLOT RECONFIGURE message from the network, T3192 will stop and turn to the packet transmission status.
Cell 500, 1000, 1500, 0, 80, 120, 160, 200 ms 500 ---
144
Related interfaces
Um interface
DRX mode holding time (DrxTimeMax, s)

TABLE 176 - DRX MODE HOLDING TIME
DRX mode holding time DrxTimeMax DRX_TIMER_MAX 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages, and indicates the value of DRX_TIMER_MAX.
Description
When the MS changes from the packet BUSY mode to the packet IDLE mode, it should first enter the Non-DRX mode. Minimum values of this parameter and DRX_TIMER_MAX parameters determine the time length for MS to stay in the Non-DRx mode. Cell 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 s 2 ZGF06-07-012 GPRS non-DRX Mode -Um interface
MAX blocks transmission in each TS (BsCvMax)

T A B L E 1 7 7 - M AX B L O C K S T R A N S M I S S I O N I N E A C H T S
Max Blocks Transmission in Each TS BsCvMax BS_CV_MAX 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
145
This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13, and SI13 messages. This parameter indicates the value of MAX blocks transmission in each TS. Blocks Transmission in each TS. This parameter determines the following: Time length of T3198 timer used by MS. This time length is equal to the time represented by this parameter. Time length of T3200 used by MS in Non-DRX mode. This time length = 4 time represented by this parameter. Value of N3104max = (3 (BsCvMax+3) Number of timeslots assigned in the uplink). All uplink data blocks sent by MS contain the COUNT DOWN VALUE (CV) field. The network can use this field to calculate the data blocks to be sent on current uplink TBF. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0 ~ 15 None 15 --Um interface
Description
Packet control acknowledgment type (CtraCKType)

TABLE 178 - P ACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGMENT TYPE
Packet control acknowledgment type CtraCKType CONTROL_ACK_TYPE 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used on RLC/MAC layer of BRP and at MS side. It belongs to the GPRS cell option parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages, indicating the default format for the MS to send the PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message. Cell 4 access bursts, RLC/MAC control block
Description
146
None RLC/MAC control block --Um interface
Access burst type (AccessType)

TABLE 179 - ACCESS BURST TYPE
Access burst type AccessType ACCESS_BURST_TYPE 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13, and SI13 messages. Access burst type indicates whether to use the 8-bit or 11-bit access burst in PRACH and PTCCH/U, and the PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message. The main difference between the two types is that the 11-bit access burst can take more content than the 8-bit access burst.
Description
Cell 8 bits, 11 bits None 8 bits ZGF06-04-003 8/11 bit Access Burst -Um interface
N3102 decrease step (PanDec)

TABLE 180 - N3102 DECREASE STEP
N3102 decrease step PanDec
147
PAN_DEC 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. They belong to the GPRS cell option parameters, and they are broadcast to the MS in the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages, indicating the values of parameters of PAN_DEC, PAN_INC and PAN_MAX. After each cell reselection, the MS will set the initial value of N3102 as the PanMax value. (1) When the MS receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to move V(S) forward, it adds PanInc to N3102 (but the maximum value shall not exceed PanMax). (2) When the MS detects the stall condition (V(S) = V(A) + W(S)), T3182 will start. When it receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message that enables V(S) < V(A) + W(S), T3182 stops. If T3182 expires, the MS will subtract PanDec from N3102. When the condition satisfies N3102 < 0, the MS will take cell reselection as abnormal release. When one of PanDec, PanInc, and PanMax is zero, N3102 is invalid. Cell 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 None 4 --Um interface
Description
N3102 increase step (PanInc)

TABLE 181 - N3102 INCREASE STEP
N3102 increase step PanInc PAN_INC 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
148
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. They belong to the GPRS cell option parameters, and they are broadcast to the MS in the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages, indicating the values of parameters of PAN_DEC, PAN_INC and PAN_MAX. After each cell reselection, the MS will set the initial value of N3102 as the PanMax value. (1) When the MS receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to move V(S) forward, it adds PanInc to N3102 (but the maximum value shall not exceed PanMax). (2) When the MS detects the stall condition (V(S) = V(A) + W(S)), T3182 will start. When it receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message that enables V(S) < V(A) + W(S), T3182 stops. If T3182 expires, the MS will subtract PanDec from N3102. When the condition satisfies N3102 < 0, the MS will take cell reselection as abnormal release. When one of PanDec, PanInc, and PanMax is zero, N3102 is invalid. Cell 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 None 8 --Um interface
N3102 MAX (PanMax)

T A B L E 1 8 2 - N 3 1 0 2 M AX
N3102 Max PanMax PAN_MAX 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
149
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. They belong to the GPRS cell option parameters, and they are broadcast to the MS in the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages, indicating the values of parameters of PAN_DEC, PAN_INC and PAN_MAX. After each cell reselection, the MS will set the initial value of N3102 as the PanMax value. (1) When the MS receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to move V(S) forward, it adds PanInc to N3102 (but the maximum value shall not exceed PanMax). (2) When the MS detects the stall condition (V(S) = V(A) + W(S)), T3182 will start. When it receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message that enables V(S) < V(A) + W(S), T3182 stops. If T3182 expires, the MS will subtract PanDec from N3102. When the condition satisfies N3102 < 0, the MS will take cell reselection as abnormal release. When one of PanDec, PanInc, and PanMax is zero, N3102 is invalid. Cell 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 None 32 --Um interface
GPRS phone init coding

TABLE 183 - GPRS PHONE INIT CODING
GPRS phone init coding ---This parameter indicates the default-coding mode for GPRS MS initial access, under different Abis interface link bandwidths. It is a two-dimensional array. It represents the default coding mode corresponding to GPRS MS less than 1 16 kbps and 2 ~ 5 16 kbps bandwidth respectively. Cell
Description
Management Object
150
1*16 kbps: CS1, CS2; 2~4*16 kbps: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4
None [CS2, CS2] ZGF06-03-002 Initial Coding Scheme per Cell Settable ---
GPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_0)

TABLE 184 - GPRS PHONES INIT CODE CAN BE CHANGED
GPRS phones init code can be changed InitAttachExch_0 --This parameter indicates whether GPRS phones default code can be changed dynamically. Cell Yes/No None Yes --Um interface
GPRS NC Survey Parameters

The interface of GPRS NC survey parameters is shown in Figure 17 - .
151
FIGURE 17 - GPRS NC SURVEY PAR AMETERS
Packet Idle mode (NcRepPerI, s)

TABLE 185 - P ACKET IDLE MODE
Packet Idle mode NcRepPerI NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_I 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI2Quater and PSI5 message. This parameter indicates the period of MS reporting cell reselection survey in packet IDLE mode. When Network control order is NC0, the parameter information is not necessary to broadcast through PSI5 message. This parameter also can be sent to MS through PMO message. Cell 0.48, 0.96, 1.92, 3.84, 7.68, 15.36, 30.72, 61.44 s 61.44 ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection
Description
152
-Um interface
Packet transmission mode (NcRepPerT, s)

TABLE 186 - P ACKET TRANSMISSION MODE
Packet transmission mode NcRepPerT NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to NC measurement parameter, which is broadcasted to MS in system message SI2Quater and PSI5 message. This parameter indicates the period of MS reporting cell reselection survey in packet transmission mode. When Network control order is NC0, the parameter information is not necessary to broadcast through PSI5 message. This parameter also can be sent to MS through PMO message. Cell 0.48, 0.96, 1.92, 3.84, 7.68, 15.36, 30.72, 61.44 s 3.84 ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection -Um interface
Description
Extended measurement report order (MeaOrder)

TABLE 187 - EXTENDED MEASUREMENT REPORT ORDER
Extended measurement report order MeaOrder MEASUREMENT_ORDER 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
153
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through PSI1 message. Extended measurement report order is to indicate the survey report command of MS in a cell. This parameter indicates whether PSI5 is sent.
Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection -Um interface
Network control order (CtrlOrder)

TABLE 188 - NETWORK CONTROL ORDER
Network control order CtrlOrder NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI5, PSI13, SI3 and SI2quater messages. Network control order indicates the network control command used in the cell. If the parameter equals to NC0, then NC survey parameters (NC hold time in non-drx mode, and Cell Reselection Survey Report Period) can be ignored; if the parameter is NC1 or NC2 and NC measurement parameters are ignored, use the default value. The values are as follows:
Description
NC0: MS controls cell reselection, and there is no survey report; NC1: MS controls cell reselection and sends the survey report; NC2: The network controls cell reselection and MS sends the survey report.
154
Cell NC0, NC1, NC2
None NC0 ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection -Um interface
NC hold time in non-drx mode (NcNoDrxPer, s)

TABLE 189 - NC HOLD TIME IN NON-DRX MODE
NC hold time in non-drx mode NcNoDrxPer NC_ NON_DRX_PERIOD 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to network control survey and is used at MS side. System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI2Quater and PSI5 message. This parameter indicates the minimal time for an MS to stay in the non-DRX mode after sending an NC survey report. When Network control order is NC0, the parameter information is not necessary to broadcast through PSI5 message. This parameter also can be sent to MS through PMO message. Cell No non-DRX mode, 0.24, 0.48, 0.72, 0.96, 1.20, 1.44, 1.92 s 0.48 ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection -Um interface
Description
155
Extended measurement report order (ExMeaOrder)

TABLE 190 - EXTENDED MEASUREMENT REPORT ORDER
Extended measurement report order ExMeaOrder EXT_MEASUREMENT_ORDER 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI5 message. This parameter indicates whether the MS performs extended survey. In addition, it indicates how to interpret the other extended survey parameters (Type of extended measurement report and Report period of extended measurement). The values are as follows:
Description
EM0: MS performs no extended survey EM1: MS must send the extended survey report to the network
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell EM0, EM1 None EM0 ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection -Um interface
Type of extended measurement report (ExtRepType)

TABLE 191 - TYPE OF EXTENDED MEASUREMENT REPORT
Type of extended measurement report ExtRepType EXT_REPORTING_TYPE 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
156
This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to extended survey and is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI5 message. This parameter indicates the type of extended survey report sent by MS. System sends the parameter information through the PSI5 message when Extended measurement report order is EM1. The values are as follows:
Description
Type I: This type of report must be extended if the frequency points for the extended survey are among the six strongest carrier frequencies, even if the BSIC decoding is successful. The report should cover the receiving signal level and the successfully decoded BSIC (if any); Type II: This type of report must be extended if all the frequency points for the extended survey are located in the six strongest carrier frequencies, the BSIC decoding is successful and the NCC part is allowed for survey. The report should cover the receiving signal level and the successfully decoded BSIC; Type III: Use this type of report to report all the frequency points for the extended survey. No BSIC decoding is necessary. The report should contain the receiving signal level. Besides, the interference of each carrier frequency shall be reported.
Cell Type1, Type2, Type3 None Type 1 ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection -Um interface
Report period of extended measurement (ExtRepPer, s)

TABLE 192 - REPORT PERIOD OF EXTENDED MEASUREMENT
Report period of extended measurement ExtRepPer
157
EXT_REPORTING_PERIOD 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to extended survey and is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI5 message. This parameter indicates the interval of the extended survey report. System sends the parameter information through the PSI5 message when Extended measurement report order is EM1. Cell 60, 120, 240, 480, 960, 1920, 3840, 7680 s 1920 ZGF06-01-006 Network Controlled Cell Reselection -Um interface
Description
The Size of Test Report's Slip Window (Wnd)

TABLE 193 - THE SIZE OF TEST REPORT'S SLIP WINDOW
The Size of Test Report's Slip Window Wnd --When NC2 network controls the cell reselection, this parameter is used. When the number of measurement reports reaches this parameter setting value, average processing is done for measurement report. Cell 1~8 None 4 ---
Description
158
Related interfaces
--
Allowed report number of the same cell in Slip Window (AllowedRepNum)

TABLE 194 - ALLOWED REPORT NUMBER OF THE SAME CELL IN SLIP WINDOW
Allowed report number of the same cell in Slip Window AllowedRepNum --When NC2 network controls the cell reselection, this parameter is used. When adjacent cell receives average level, and the number of valid measurement report received in slip window is lower than setting value, this calculation shall be punished. Cell 1~6 None 3 ----
Description
GPRS Power Control Parameters

The interface of GPRS power control parameters is shown in Figure 18.
159
FIGURE 18 - GPRS POWER CONTROL P ARAMETERS
Filter period in the packet idle mode (T_AVG_W, s)

TABLE 195 - FILTER PERIOD IN THE PACKET IDLE MODE
Filter period in the packet idle mode T_AVG_W T_AVG_W 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to global power control and GPRS power control, and is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter indicates the filter period of the signal intensity for power control in the packet idle mode. Cell
Description
Management Object
160
0 ~ 31
0: filter period is 2(0/2)/6 multiframes; 1: filter period is 2(1/2)/6 multiframes;

Value Range
25: filter period is 2(25/2)/6 multiframes; 26~31: filter multiframes;

Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces s 0 ----
period
is
2(25/2)/6
Filter period in packet transmission mode (T_AVG_T, s)

TABLE 196 - FILTER PERIOD IN PACKET TRANSMISSION MODE
Filter period in packet transmission mode T_AVG_T T_AVG_T 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to global power control and GPRS power control, and is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter indicates the filter period of the signal intensity for power control in the packet transmission mode. Cell 0 ~ 31
Description
Management Object
0: filter period is 2(0/2)/6 multiframes;

Value Range
1: filter period is 2(1/2)/6 multiframes;
25: filter period is 2(25/2)/6 multiframes; 26 ~ 31: reserved

Unit s
161
0 ----
PSI4 sending mark (Psi4Send)

TABLE 197 - PSI4 SENDING M ARK
PSI4 sending mark Psi4Send INT_MEAS_CHANNEL_LIST_AVAIL 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter belongs to global power control and is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. This parameter indicates whether to broadcast the optional PSI4 message. If PSI4 is to be broadcast, it will contain a list of channels that interfere with the survey. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
Power control measurement channel (PcMeasChan)

TABLE 198 - POWER CONTROL MEASUREMENT CHANNEL
Power control measurement channel PcMeasChan PC_MEAS_CHAN 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
162
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to global power control and GPRS power control, and is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter indicates the position where the downlink power strength is surveyed for uplink power control. Cell BCCH, PDCH None BCCH ----
Power control parameter (Alpha)

TABLE 199 - POWER CONTROL PAR AMETER
Power control parameters Alpha ALPHA 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to global power control and GPRS power control, and is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter determines the MS transmission power control Alpha (). Cell 0 ~ 10 parameters controlled by MS transmitting power is Alpha (),
Description
Management Object
0: = 0.0;
Value Range
1: = 0.1; 10: = 1.0; 11~15: = 1.0
Unit
None
163
0 ----
Filter constant of power control (N_AVG_I)

TABLE 200 - FILTER CONSTANT OF POWER CONTROL
Filter constant of power control N_AVG_I N_AVG_I 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to global power control and GPRS power control, and is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter is a filter constant used to optimize the interference signal intensity in power control. Cell 0 ~ 15 None 0 ----
Description
GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters

The interface of GPRS cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 19.
164
FIGURE 19 - GPRS CELL RESELECTION PARAMETERS

Reselection offset ReselOffset_0 GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.Cell reselection in GPRS system follows C32 standard. Cell reselection in GPRS system follows C32 standard. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM, contains a cell reselection offset parameter. This parameters not necessary to append in packet system message when the offset value is 0 dB. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell
Description
Management Object
165
0 ~ 31
0: -52 dB; 1: -48 dB;

Value Range
22: +12 dB; 31: +48 dB

-52 dB ~ -12 dB12 dB ~ 48 dB step is 4 dB, -12 dB ~ 12 dB step is 2 dB
2 dB 0 ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria ---
Reselection offset 2 (ReselOffset_1)

TABLE 202 - RESELECTION OFFSET 2
Reselection offset 2 ReselOffset_1 GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH.Cell reselection in GPRS system follows C32 standard. Cell reselection in GPRS system follows C32 standard. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM, contains a cell reselection offset parameter. This parameters not necessary to append in packet system message when the offset value is 0 dB. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell
Description
Management Object
166
0 ~ 31
0: -52 dB; 1: -48 dB;

Value Range
22: +12 dB;
31: +48 dB
Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces 2 dB 0 ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria ---

Reselection temporary offset TempOffset_0 GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time parameter. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinite dB 0 ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria --
Description
167
Related interfaces
--
Reselection temporary offset 2 (TempOffset_1, dB)

TABLE 204 - RESELECTION TEMPORARY OFFSET 2
Reselection temporary offset 2 TempOffset_1 GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time parameter. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, Infinite dB 0 ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria ---
Description

Penalty time of cell reselection PenalTime_0 GPRS_PENALTY_TIME 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
168
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on PenalTime of cell reselection. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0 ~ 31
Management Object
0: 10s;
Value Range
1: 20s; 31: 320s
10s 0 ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria ---
Penalty time of cell reselection 2 (PenalTime_1, 10s)

TABLE 206 - PENALTY TIME OF CELL RESELECTION 2
Penalty time of cell reselection 2 PenalTime_1 GPRS_PENALTY_TIME 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on PenalTime of cell reselection. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell
Description
Management Object
169
0 ~ 31
0: 10s;
Value Range
1: 20s; 31: 320s
10s 0 ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria ---
Interval of reselecting the same cell (T_RESEL_0, s)

TABLE 207 - INTERVAL OF RESELECTING THE SAME CELL
Interval of reselecting the same cell T_RESEL_0 T_RESEL 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.Network prevents MS to reselect this cell within Interval of reselecting the same cell period when MS performs a cell reselection and do not releases as normal, unless there is no other cell for selection. It is not necessary to broadcast this parameter to MS through PSI3 message when the time represented by this parameter is 5 s (default value). This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120, 300 s 5 ---
Description
170
Related interfaces
--
Interval of reselecting the same cell 2 (T_RESEL_1, s)

TABLE 208 - INTERVAL OF RESELECTING THE SAME CELL 2
Interval of reselecting the same cell 2 T_RESEL_1 T_RESEL 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. Network prevents MS to reselect this cell within Interval of reselecting the same cell period when MS performs a cell reselection and do not releases as normal, unless there is no other cell for selection. It is not necessary to broadcast this parameter to MS through PSI3 message when the time represented by this parameter is 5 s (default value). This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120, 300 s 5 ----
Description

Threshold of HSC signal level HCS_THR_0 HCS_THR 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
171
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.Threshold of HSC signal level identifies the HCS signal strength threshold of the cell. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0 ~ 63
Management Object
0: -110 dBm; 1: -108 dBm;

None 0 ----
Threshold of HSC signal level 2 (HCS_THR_1)

TABLE 210 - THRESHOLD OF HSC SIGNAL LEVEL 2
Threshold of HSC signal level 2 HCS_THR_1 HCS_THR 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is informed to MS on PACCH. Threshold of HSC signal level identifies the HCS signal strength threshold of the cell. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0 ~ 63
Description
Management Object
Value Range Unit
0: -110 dBm; 1: -108 dBm;

None
172
0 ----

TABLE 211 - HCS PRIORITY
HCS Priority PrioClass_0 PRIORITY_CLASS 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. This parameter specifies the HCS priority of the cell. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0~7 None 0 ----
Description
HCS priority 2 (PrioClass_1)

TABLE 212 - HCS PRIORITY 2
HCS Priority 2 PrioClass_1 PRIORITY_CLASS 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
173
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is informed to MS on PACCH. This parameter specifies the HCS priority of the cell. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0~7 None 0 ----
C31 hysteresis (C31_HYST_0)

TABLE 213 - C31 HYSTERESIS
C31 hysteresis C31_HYST_0 C31_HYST 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS through system message by BTS, which indicates whether CellReselHys parameter functions on C31 standard. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria ---
Description
174
C31 hysteresis 2 (C31_HYST_1)

TABLE 214 - C31 HYSTERESIS 2
C31 hysteresis 2 C31_HYST_1 C31_HYST 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH and specifies whether to use the parameter CellReselHys on the C31 standard. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria ---
Description
GPRS cell reselection hysteresis (ReselHys_0, dB)

TABLE 215 - GPRS CELL RESELECTION HYSTERESIS
GPRS cell reselection hysteresis ReselHys_0 GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
175
This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. MS needs to go through location updating process after cell reselection in the case of GPRS cell reselection, if the original cell and destination cell are in different locations. C32 values obtained at the boundary for two adjacent cells are different because of fading characteristic of radio channel. It causes MS to select cell frequently. The interval between the two cell reselections of MS is not less than 15 s. However, 15 s is extremely short time in terms of location updating. This increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio resources to be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate of the system, as MS cannot respond to paging during location update. GSM specification sets a specific parameter, Cell Reselecting Hysteresis (CRH), to solve this problem. MS will activate the cell reselection according to this parameter only when the signal level of adjacent cell (whose location zone is different from that of local cell) is greater than that of local cell, and meanwhile the value difference must be greater than that required by the parameter.
Description
This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Cell 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 dB 0 ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria
176
---
GPRS cell reselection hysteresis 2 (ReselHys_1, dB)

TABLE 216 - GPRS CELL RESELECTION HYSTERESIS 2
GPRS cell reselection hysteresis 2 ReselHys_1 GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
177
This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. MS needs to go through location updating process after cell reselection in the case of GPRS cell reselection, if the original cell and destination cell are in different locations. C32 values obtained at the boundary for two adjacent cells are different because of fading characteristic of radio channel. It causes MS to select cell frequently. The interval between the two cell reselections of MS is not less than 15 s. However, 15 s is extremely short time in terms of location updating. This increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio resources to be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate of the system, as MS cannot respond to paging during location update. GSM specification sets a specific parameter, Cell Reselecting Hysteresis (CRH), to solve this problem. MS will activate the cell reselection according to this parameter only when the signal level of adjacent cell (whose location zone is different from that of local cell) is greater than that of local cell, and meanwhile the value difference must be greater than that required by the parameter.
Description
This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Cell 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 dB 0 ZGF06-01-003 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria --
178
Related interfaces
--
Routing reselection hysteresis (RaReselHys_0, dB)

TABLE 217 - ROUTING RESELECTION HYSTERESIS
Routing reselection hysteresis RaReselHys_0 RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS through system message by BTS. This parameter specifies extra hysteresis value used in selecting a cell in another routing area when MS is in IDLE or BUSY mode. It is not necessary to broadcast this parameter through the PSI3 message when the value of this parameter is the same as that of GPRS cell reselection hysteresis. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 dB 8 ----
Description
Routing reselection hysteresis 2 (RaReselHys_1, dB)

TABLE 218 - ROUTING RESELECTION HYSTERESIS 2
Routing reselection hysteresis 2 RaReselHys_1 RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
179
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH. This parameter specifies extra hysteresis value used in selecting a cell in another routing area when MS is in IDLE or BUSY mode. It is not necessary to broadcast this parameter through the PSI3 message when the value of this parameter is the same as that of GPRS cell reselection hysteresis. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 dB 8 ----
Random access attempt permitted (RadAcRetry_0)

TABLE 219 - RANDOM ACCESS ATTEMPT PERMITTED
Random access attempt permitted RadAcRetry_0 --This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS through system message by BTS, which indicates whether MS is allowed to attempt to access another cell (if it exists). If abnormal release occurs during the packet transmission, MS discards all running TBFs. If MS is allowed to access other cells, it should perform abnormal cell reselection, and establish TBF after initializing new cell. If other suitable cells exist, MS cannot reselect the original cell within T_RESEL seconds. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell Yes/No
Description

180
None No ----
Random access attempt permitted 2 (RadAcRetry_1)

TABLE 220 - RANDOM ACCESS ATTEMPT PERMITTED 2
Random access attempt permitted 2 RadAcRetry_1 --This parameter is used at MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH, which indicates whether MS is allowed to attempt to access another cell (if it exists). If abnormal release occurs during the packet transmission, MS discards all running TBFs. If MS is allowed to access other cells, it should perform abnormal cell reselection, and establish TBF after initializing new cell. If other suitable cells exist, MS cannot reselect the original cell within T_RESEL seconds. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
181
Usage of cell reselection offset (C32_QUAL_0)

TABLE 221 - USAGE OF CELL RESELECTION OFFSET
Usage of cell reselection offset C32_QUAL_0 C32_QUAL 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS through system message by BTS, which indicates whether to use the exceptional rule when adopting ReselOff. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell Yes/No None No ----
Description
Usage of cell reselection offset 2 (C32_QUAL_1)

TABLE 222 - USAGE OF CELL RESELECTION OFFSET 2
Usage of cell reselection offset 2 C32_QUAL_1 C32_QUAL 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is informed to the MS on PACCH, and it specifies whether to use the exceptional rule for ReselOff. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell Yes/No None
Description

182
No ----

GPRS access minimum signal level RxLevAsMin_0 GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. This parameter indicates the minimum receiving level while allowing MS access to this system (GPRS). To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving signal level (usually, the poor communication quality cannot guarantee normal communication process after access) and from unreasonably wasting radio resources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that the receiving level be greater than a threshold level for MS to access the network, that is, MS Minimal Level to Access. In addition, it is also one of the standards for MS to make the cell selection and the cell reselection (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32). This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0 ~ 63
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
183
None 12 ----
GPRS access minimum signal level 2 (RxLevAsMin_1)

TABLE 224 - GPRS ACCESS MINIMUM SIGNAL LEVEL 2
GPRS access minimum signal level 2 RxLevAsMin_1 GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. This parameter indicates the minimum receiving level while allowing MS access to this system (GPRS). To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving signal level (usually, the poor communication quality cannot guarantee normal communication process after access) and from unreasonably wasting radio resources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that the receiving level be greater than a threshold level for MS to access the network, that is, MS Minimal Level to Access. In addition, it is also one of the standards for MS to make the cell selection and the cell reselection (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32). This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state.
Description
Management Object
Cell 0 ~ 63
0: < -110 dBm; 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

Value Range
184
None 12 ----
Priority threshold (PRIO_THR, dB)

TABLE 225 - PRIORITY THRESHOLD
Priority threshold PRIO_THR PRIO_THR 3GPP TS44.018 V5.22.0 System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI4, SI6 and SI7 messages. This parameter relates to GPRS access minimal signal level in calculation of C4 standard. Cell 0, 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, infinite dB 6 ----
Description
HCS exist (HCS_EXIST_0)

TABLE 226 - HCS EXIST
HCS exist HCS_EXIST_0 ---
185
Description
This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) and broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.This parameter indicates whether the HCS parameters (PriorityClass and HCSTHr) exist in the cell. MS ignores HSC exist parameters of other cells if serving cell does not use HSC exist parameters (all the cells use Threshold of HSC signal level of infinity). This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH. Cell Yes/No None No ----
HCS exist 2 (HCS_EXIST_1)

TABLE 227 - HCS EXIST 2
HCS exist 2 HCS_EXIST_1 --This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) and be informed to MS on PACCH. This parameter indicates whether the HCS parameters (PriorityClass and HCSTHr) exist in the cell. MS ignores HSC exist parameters of other cells if serving cell does not use HSC exist parameters (all the cells use Threshold of HSC signal level of infinity). This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state. Cell Yes/No None No
Description
186
----
GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCch_0)

TABLE 228 - GPRS M AX INITIAL ACCESS SIGNAL LEVEL
GPRS MAX initial access signal level MsTxMaxCch_0 GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. Network controls the MS transmit power during communication with BTS. The network controls MS power using power command. MS outputs transmit power closest to the specified power value if unavailable. The power before MS receives the network power control information (the power used in random access), depends on this parameter when MS is receiving PBCCH. MS uses this parameter for cell selection and reselection involving calculation of C1 and C2 values. If this parameter is too large, the MS close to BTS will interfere with the adjacent channel; If it is too small, the MS access success rate at the edge of cell will be very low. Setting principle: in the premise of certain MS access success rate at the cell edge, decrease the access level of MS as much as possible. Generally, it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS) and 2 (for GSM1800MS). In practice, after setting this parameter, perform dialing test at the cell edge, increase or decrease the value of this parameter according to the MS access success rate and access time tested with different parameter setup. The value is same as that in appendix C. This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 31
187
None 5 --
--
GPRS MAX initial access signal level 2 (MsTxMaxCch_1)

TABLE 229 - GPRS M AX INITIAL ACCESS SIGNAL LEVEL 2
GPRS MAX initial access signal level 2 MsTxMaxCch_1 GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. Network controls the MS transmit power during communication with BTS. The network controls MS power using power command. MS outputs transmit power closest to the specified power value if unavailable. The power before MS receives the network power control information (the power used in random access), depends on this parameter when MS is receiving PBCCH. MS uses this parameter for cell selection and reselection involving calculation of C1 and C2 values. If this parameter is too large, the MS close to BTS will interfere with the adjacent channel; If it is too small, the MS access success rate at the edge of cell will be very low. Setting principle: in the premise of certain MS access success rate at the cell edge, decrease the access level of MS as much as possible. Generally, it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS) and 2 (for GSM1800MS). In practice, after setting this parameter, perform dialing test at the cell edge, increase or decrease the value of this parameter according to the MS access success rate and access time tested with different parameter setup. The value is same as that in appendix C. This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in transmission state.
Description
Management Object
Cell
188
0 ~ 31 None 5 ----
LSA ID (LSA_Id)
TABLE 230 - LSA ID
LSA Mark LSA_Id LSA ID 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0 System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI4, SI6, SI7, and PSI3 messages of serving cell. System also broadcasts through PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of adjacent cells. LSA ID specifies LSA identifier of the cell. Cell 0 ~ 16777215 None 0 ----
Description
LSA Offset (LSA_Offset)

TABLE 231 - LSA OFFSET
LSA Offset LSA_Offset LSA_OFFSET
189
3GPP reference
3GPP TS44.018 V5.22.0 System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI4, SI6 and SI7 messages. This parameter defines the offset value for LSA reselection between two cells with the same LSA priority. Cell 0, 4, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64 None 0 ----
Description
GPRS Channel Parameters

The interface of GPRS channel parameters is shown in Figure 20.
190
FIGURE 20 - GPRS CHANNEL P AR AMETERS
PAGCH reserved blocks (PagBlkRes)

TABLE 232 - P AGCH RESERVED BLOCKS
PAGCH reserved blocks PagBlkRes BS_PAG_BLKS_RES 3GPP TS45.002 V5.13.0
191
This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. This parameter indicates the number of blocks in a 52-frame multiframe that allow neither packet paging nor PBCCH. Only PAGCH, PDTCH and PACCH can appear on these blocks. Network sends the uplink assignment message with priority on these fixed blocks to speed up the establishment of the uplink TBF. After sending the channel request on PRACH channel, MS waits for the uplink assignment message on all PCCCH channels of the same timeslot as the PRACH channel. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 0 ~ 10 None 5 ----
Description
PBCCH reserved blocks (PbcchBlks)

TABLE 233 -PBCCH RESERVED BLOCKS
PBCCH reserved blocks PbcchBlks BS_PBCCH_BLKS 3GPP TS45.002 V5.13.0 This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. This parameter indicates the number of blocks assigned as PBCCH in a 52-frame multiframe (altogether 12 blocks).
Description
Packet system messages share the PBCCH blocks to send at high and low rates. A message sent at high rate has higher priority. This parameter must be configured together with the PSI1_REPEAT_PERIOD parameter in the PSI1 message to ensure that the block resources are available for the packet system messages, sent both at high and low rates. Cell
Management Object
192
0, 1, 2, 3 None 3 ----
PRACH reserved blocks (PrachBlks)

TABLE 234 - PRACH RESERVED BLOCKS
PRACH reserved blocks PrachBlks BS_PRACH_BLKS 3GPP TS45.002 V5.13.0 This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. This parameter indicates the number of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH channel in the PDCH channel that bears PCCCH. These blocks must be identified with USF = FREE. MS can use this parameter or USF = FREE to carry out the PRACH assignment.
Description
Cell 0 ~ 15 None 2 ----
Interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt)

TABLE 235 - INTERVAL R ANGE OF PACKET ACCESS ATTEMPT
Interval range of packet access attempt TxInt
193
TX_INT 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Number of slots to spread transmission belongs to PRACH control. Network broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. Whenever establishing a new connection, MS sends a channel request message to the network through PRACH channel. As PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve the success rate of MS access, the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages before it receives the packet assignment message. If MS does not get any response for the previous channel request message, it can resend a channel request message after waiting for a random period. Interval range of packet access attempt is used to determine the time length of random waiting. It is the number of delay timeslot randomly connected. Both interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt) and Interval period of packet access attempt (S) commonly determine random access time.
Description
Cell 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50 None 14 ----
Interval period of packet access attempt (S)

TABLE 236 - INTERVAL PERIOD OF PACKET ACCESS ATTEMPT
Interval period of packet access attempt S S 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0
194
This parameter is used at MS side. Number of slots to spread transmission belongs to PRACH control. Network broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. Whenever establishing a new connection, MS sends a channel request message to the network through PRACH channel. As PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve the success rate of MS access, the network allows the MS to send multiple channel request messages before receiving the packet assignment message. When the previous channel request message is not responded, MS will wait for a random period to resend the channel request message. Parameter S decides the random waiting time. It is used to calculate the minimum timeslot number between two channel requests. Both interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt) and Interval period of packet access attempt (S) commonly determine random access time. Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell 12, 15, 20, 30, 41, 55, 76, 109, 163, 217 s 55 ----
Description
MAX Times of Attempt (MaxRetrans)

T A B L E 2 3 7 - M AX T I M E S O F A T T E M P T
MAX Times of Attempt MaxRetrans MAX_RETRANS 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Number of slots to spread transmission belongs to PRACH control. Network broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. This parameter indicates maximum attempts of random access allowed on PRACH for MS with radio priorities of 1 ~ 4. This parameter is an array with 4 elements. The first array element corresponds to maximum number of attempts allowed for radio priority 1.
Description
195
Cell 1, 2, 4, 7 None 4, 4, 4, 4 ----
Access Control Level (AccCtrlClass)

TABLE 238 - ACCESS CONTROL LEVEL
Access control level AccCtrlClass ACC_CONTR_CLASS 3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0
196
It indicates MS access control level to access cell. Common MS has the class 0 ~ 9 and special MS has the class 11 ~ 15. Class 10 does not exist. System can prohibit MS with some access class to enter the cell according to this parameter. System allows access of a mobile with access class, N = 0, 1 9, 11 15. It allows emergency calls when the eleventh digit = EC. (For convenient programming, C10 is always 0) If the Nth bit of access control level is 0 (0 represents access allowed, 1 represents access not allowed), it will allow the access of MS with AccCtrlClass =N (N=0, 1, 9, 11, 15). Bit 11= EC represent that Emergency Call is available. Description This parameter consists of two bytes (16 bits). The first bit: C15, C14, C13, C12, C11, C10, C9, C8; The second bit: C7, C6, C5, C4, C3, C2, C1, C0
Parameter allows cell access when Cn is 0, which indicates that MS with access class of N is not forbidden (N =0,1,, 9, 11,, 15) Parameter forbids cell access when Cn is 1, which indicates that MS with access class of N is forbidden (N = 0, 1,, 9, 11,, 15) C10 is always 0.
Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces Cell Yes/No None [No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No] ----
Access Persist Level (PersistLev)

TABLE 239 - ACCESS PERSIST LEVEL
Access Persist Level PersistLev PERSISTENCE_LEVEL
197
3GPP reference
3GPP TS44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is used at MS side. Number of slots to spread transmission belongs to PRACH control. Network broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. The network sets a level threshold P I (I = 1, 2, 3, 4) for MS of various radio priorities.
Description
For each attempt of packet access, MS abstracts a random value R with even distribution probability from the set {0, 1 15}. System allows MS to initiate an attempt of packet access only when P I is lower than or equal to R. This parameter is an array with 4 elements. The first element corresponds to the access and persisting level of radio priority 1.
Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 None 0000 ----
Support of subscriber occupying other preference channel (HybridOccuSupp)

TABLE 240 - SUPPORT OF SUBSCRIBER OCCUPYING OTHER PREFERENCE
CHANNEL
Support of subscriber occupying other preference channel HybridOccuSupp --This parameter describes whether support subscriber occupying other preference channel. It indicates this kind of preference channel is busy, other channels are idle, to determine whether to occupy this preference channel. Cell Yes/No
Description
198
None Yes ZGF06-10-001 Flexible Priority Handling of Packet Data Channel
--
Support of PS subscriber moving out of other preference channel (AllowPsMove)

TABLE 241 - SUPPORT OF PREFERENCE CHANNEL PS SUBSCRIBER MOVING OUT OF OTHER
Support of PS subscriber moving out of other preference channel AllowPsMove --This parameter describes whether support subscriber moving out of other preference channel. It indicates whether the user that occupies other channels shall be removed. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-10-001 Flexible Priority Handling of Packet Data Channel ---
Description
Support of CS subscriber moving Access Persist Level (AllowCsMove)

TABLE 242 - SUPPORT OF CS SUBSCRIBER MOVING ACCESS PERSIST LEVEL
Support of CS subscriber moving Access Persist Level AllowCsMove
199
--This parameter describes whether support switching some CS subscriber cell to other timeslot, to leave blank for original timeslot for getting larger PS available timeslot group. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-10-001 Flexible Priority Handling of Packet Data Channel ---
Description
Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving (SfPreferBusyThs, %)

TABLE 243 - CONGENERIC SERVICE THRESHOLD FOR PS-MOVING
Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving SfPreferBusyThs --During this application, on the gained preferential channel on this side, it is better that existing QoS quota / total available QoS quota is lower than allocated result for this percentage, to calculate target evaluation target function in combination with un-congeneric occupying threshold. Cell 0 ~ 100 % 100 ZGF06-10-001 Flexible Priority Handling of Packet Data Channel --
Description
200
Related interfaces
--
Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving (OpPreferBusyThs)

TABLE 244 - UN-CONGENERIC SERVICE THRESHOLD FOR PS-MOVING
Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving OpPreferBusyThs --During this application, on the gained preferential channel on opposite side, it is better that existing QoS quota / total available QoS quota is lower than allocated result for this percentage, to calculate target evaluation target function in combination with un-congeneric occupying threshold. Cell 0 ~ 100 % 0 ZGF06-10-001 Flexible Priority Handling of Packet Data Channel ---
Description

If GPRS service supported in Basic parameters 1 is support EDGE, the sub-interface of EDGE parameters will appear. The interface of EDGE property parameters is shown in Figure 21.
201
FIGURE 21 - EDGE PROPERTY P AR AMETERS
Support DTM (DTMSupport)

TABLE 245 TABLE0-1 SUPPORT DTM
Support DTM DTMSupport --Network broadcasts this parameter to MS in GRPS CELL OPTIONS of SI13, PSI1 and PSI13. It indicates if the cell supports Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) which allows A class MS to initialize packet request flow in dedicated mode. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF05-11-002 Full dynamic channel allocation on Um interface ZGF06-06-001 Class A, B, C mobile stations ---
Description
202
Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame (GttpLapdmNum)

TABLE 246 - M AX NUMBER OF GTTP LAPDM FRAME
Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame GttpLapdmNum --This parameter indicates the maximum of GTTP Lapdm frames. Cell 0~7 None 3 ----
Support EGPRS packet channel request access program (EgprsPacketChreq)

TABLE 247 - SUPPORT EGPRS PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST ACCESS
PROGRAM
Support EGPRS packet channel request access program EgprsPacketChreq EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 Network broadcasts the parameter to MS in GPRS Cell Options of SI13, PSI1 and PSI13.It indicates if the cell supports EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST access flow. If the cell supports EGPRS and this flow, the EGPRS terminal is able to originate EGPRS packet access flow on RACH or PRACH (if PBCCH exists). Cell Yes/No
Description
203
None No ZGF06-04-004 EGPRS Packet Channel Request on CCCH -Um interface
Support uplink LA+IR quality control (IrSupportUp)

T A B L E 2 4 8 - S U P P O R T U P L I N K L A+ I R Q U A L I T Y C O N T R O L
Support uplink LA+IR quality control IrSupportUp RESEGMENT 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 It indicates if the cell supports uplink IR quality control. If it does, the network could set the RESEGMENT in PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK, PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT and PACK TIMESLOT RECONFIGURE message as FALSE to inform MS system of using IR quality control mode, and MS uplink retransmission could not be segmented. Cell Yes/No None No ZGF06-03-006 EGPRS Link Adaptation ZGF06-08-002 Incremental Redundancy in UL -Um interface
Description
Take "Preemptivetrans bit" function (PreemptiveRans)

TABLE 249 - TAKE "PREEMPTIVETRANS BIT" FUNCTION

204
Take "Preemptivetrans bit" function PreemptivetRans
PRE_EMPTIVE_TRANSMISSION 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 It indicates if the cell employs Preemptivetrans bit. If the cell supports that function, network indicates MS whether to send the RLC data of PENDING-ACK when there is no data in NACK status and no new RLC data block to be transmitted or the transmission window is full by PRE_EMPTIVE_TRANSMISSION in PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message. The values are as follows:
Description
Yes: Use preemptive transmission. MS should not send the data block in PENDING-ACK status. But for the last piece of current TBF, even if its status is PENDING ACK, it should be transmitted. No: Do not use preemptive transmission. MS should send the oldest data in PENDING-ACK status, then the second oldest data. If all data in PENDING-ACK status have been sent, repeat from the oldest one.
Cell Yes/No None No --Um interface
Average filter period for uplink BEP (BEPperiodUp)

TABLE 250 - AVERAGE FILTER PERIOD FOR UPLINK BEP
Average filter period for uplink BEP BEPperiodUp BEP_PERIOD 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0
205
Description
This parameter is internal parameter of PCU. The meaning of this parameter is the same as BEPPeriodDown, but it is to caculate the uplink measurement data inside of PCU. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 None 4 --Um interface
Average filter period for downlink BEP (BEPperiodDown)

TABLE 251 - AVERAGE FILTER PERIOD FOR DOWNLINK BEP
Average filter period for downlink BEP BEPperiodDown BEP_PERIOD 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 Network broadcasts this parameter to MS in GRPS CELL OPTIONS of SI13, PSI1 and PSI13. In EGPRS system, EGPRS MS will determine to report the MEAN_REP_AV (average error bit rate of the radio block) and CV_BEP_AV (variance coefficient of radio block error bit rate) under the whole TBF, or the measurement data per time slot MEAN_BEP_TNx (0-7). The specification defines the formula of these measurement data (refer to 05.08 10.2.3.2.1). There is an oblivion factor e, whose value is defined by average period of BEP filter.
Description
206
Cell 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 None 4 ---
Related interfaces
Um interface
EGPRS phone quality measure mode (LinkQuameaMode)

TABLE 252 - EGPRS PHONE QUALITY MEASURE MODE
EGPRS phone quality measure mode LinkQuameaMode LINK_QUALITY_MEASUREMENT_MODE 3GPP TS 44.060 V5.19.0 This parameter is sent to MS in Downlink Assignment message. It indicates the measurement report mode of EGPRS MS in the cell. EGPRS measurement could be performed based on each impulse, which is to measure by the granularity of BURST. The feature of rapid EGPRS measurement makes the network side be able to respond the change of radio environment quickly, so as to choose the most proper coding mode and perform power control. Cell 0, 1, 2, 3 None 2 --Um interface
Description
EGPRS Phone Init Coding

TABLE 253 - EGPRS PHONE INIT CODING
EGPRS Phone Init Coding ----
207
Description
It is a four-dimensional array. It represents the default coding mode corresponding to EGPRS MS with 1 16 kbps and 4 16 kbps bandwidth respectively. Cell
Management Object
116 kbps: MCS1, MCS2; 216 kbps: MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4, MCS5;
Value Range
316 kbps: MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4, MCS5, MCS6; 416 kbps: MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4, MCS5, MCS6, MCS7, MCS8, MCS9
None [MCS2, MCS5, MCS6, MCS6] ZGF06-03-005 Modulation and Coding Scheme #1~#9 ---
EGPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_1)

TABLE 254 - EGPRS PHONES INIT CODE CAN BE CHANGED
EGPRS phones init code can be changed InitAttachExch_1 --It indicates if the coding method of GPRS/EGPRS MS in cell could be changed dynamically. Cell Yes/No None Yes ZGF06-03-005 Modulation and Coding Scheme #1~#9 --
208
Related interfaces
--
209
210
Appendix
Abbreviations
211
Abbreviation M MAC MS MSC MSS MTP N NS NSE O OMC OMP OMS P PACCH PAGCH PBCCH PCH PCU PDTCH PLMN PPCH PS PTP Q QoS R RACH RLC S SACCH SAPI SCCP SDCCH T TBF
Full name
Network Service Network Service Entity
Quality of Service
212
Abbreviation TCH TDMA TFI TRX TS U UPPB UPU Um V VLR
Full name Traffic Channel Time Division Multiplex Access TDM Fiber Interface board Transmitter & Receiver Time Slot
213
214
Appendix
Figures
Figure 1 - Cell Basic Parameters 1 ........................................5 Figure 2 - Cell Basic Parameters 2 ...................................... 19 Figure 3 - Cell Basic Parameters 3 ...................................... 32 Figure 4 - Optional Parameters ........................................... 48 Figure 5 - Cell Selection Parameters .................................... 55 Figure 6 - Service Process Additional Parameters .................. 66 Figure 7 - System Parameters ............................................ 77 Figure 8 - AMR Half Method Parameters ............................... 84 Figure 9 - AMR full Method Parameters ................................ 92 Figure 10 - Cell Optional Parameters ................................... 98 Figure 11 - Other Parameters ........................................... 102 Figure 12 - GPRS Basic Property Parameters ...................... 108 Figure 13 - GPRS Property 1 Parameters............................ 113 Figure 14 - GPRS Property 2 Parameters............................ 124 Figure 15 - GPRS Property 3 Parameters............................ 136 Figure 16 - GPRS Cell Optional Parameters......................... 143 Figure 17 - GPRS NC Survey parameters ........................... 152 Figure 18 - GPRS Power Control Parameters ....................... 160 Figure 19 - GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters .................... 165 Figure 20 - GPRS Channel Parameters ............................... 191 Figure 21 - EDGE Property Parameters .............................. 202
215
216
Tables
Table 1 - Manual Summary .................................................. ii Table 2 - Typographical Conventions .................................... iii Table 3- Mouse Operation Conventions ................................. iii Table 4 - User Label............................................................5 Table 5 - BTS ID ................................................................6 Table 6 - Cell Type .............................................................7 Table 7 - Country Code .......................................................7 Table 8 - MNC ....................................................................8 Table 9 - LAC.....................................................................8 Table 10 - CI .....................................................................9 Table 11 - NCC ................................................................ 10 Table 12 - BS Color Code (BCC).......................................... 10 Table 13 - Frequency Band ................................................ 11 Table 14 - Subcell used ..................................................... 12 Table 15 - Frequency band of subCell .................................. 12 Table 16 - ARFCN list ........................................................ 13 Table 17 - GPRS service supported ..................................... 14 Table 18 - Dynamic HR Enable ........................................... 14 Table 19 - Use cell dynamic HR parameter ........................... 15 Table 20 - CBC supported .................................................. 15 Table 21 - Threshold for a single trx switched from FR to HR .. 16 Table 22 - Use cell dynamic AMR parameter ......................... 17 Table 23 - Common control channel configuration ................. 17 Table 24 Template File ................................................... 18 Table 25 - TA MAX............................................................ 20 Table 26 - TA Allowed ....................................................... 20 Table 27 - CCCH Load Indication Period ............................... 21 Table 28 - Periodical location updating timer ........................ 22 Table 29 - CCCH load indication (RACH)............................... 23
217
Table 30 - CCCH load indication (PAGCH)............................. 23 Table 31 - NCC permitted .................................................. 24 Table 32 - Support Repeated ACCH ..................................... 25 Table 33 - Start PA Power Off............................................. 25 Table 34 - Switch Flag of Ceil TRX Power Off ........................ 26 Table 35 - Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR FR Bug .. 26 Table 36 - Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR FR Bug .. 27 Table 37 - AMR Codec Adjust Mode ..................................... 28 Table 38 - AMR Codec Interval ........................................... 28 Table 39 - Support HR channel frag collected ....................... 29 Table 40 - Threshold of HR Defrag ...................................... 30 Table 41 - Percentage of HR Ts .......................................... 30 Table 42 - AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold................ 31 Table 43 - FR-HR HandOver Based On Cell Load ................... 31 Table 44 - Average bursts count surveyed by RACH............... 33 Table 45 - Overload sending period..................................... 33 Table 46 - BA Show .......................................................... 34 Table 47 - MIN received signal level to access ...................... 35 Table 48 - MAX number of re-transmitting events times......... 36 Table 49 - Control channel MAX power level ......................... 38 Table 50 - Number of multiframes of the PCH ....................... 39 Table 51 - Number of slots to spread transmission ................ 40 Table 52 - Interval of SDCCH re-sending phy info message .... 41 Table 53 - Interval of TCH re-sending PHY INFO message ...... 42 Table 54 - Number of blocks reserved for AGCH.................... 43 Table 55 - Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch channel ............ 43 Table 56 - Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel 44 Table 57 - Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel 44 Table 58 - Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel........................................................................... 45 Table 59 - Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel ..................................................................................... 46 Table 60 - Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch sapi3 channel.... 46 Table 61 - Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel........................................................................... 47 Table 62 - Support TFO ..................................................... 47 Table 63 - IMSI attach/detach allowed ................................ 48
218
Appendix B Tables
Table 64 - Cell bar access .................................................. 49 Table 65 - Call re-establishment allowed.............................. 50 Table 66 - Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed ........ 51 Table 67 - Emergency call allowed ...................................... 51 Table 68 - Cell bar qualify.................................................. 52 Table 69 - Access control................................................... 53 Table 70 - Additional reselection parameter indication ........... 55 Table 71 - Cell reselection parameter indication .................... 56 Table 72 - Reselection offset .............................................. 57 Table 73 - Temporary offset............................................... 60 Table 74 - Penalty time ..................................................... 61 Table 75 - Cell reselecting hysteresis level ........................... 62 Table 76 - Early category classmark sending control .............. 63 Table 77 - New setup cause indication ................................. 64 Table 78 - Power offset indication ....................................... 64 Table 79 - Power offset ..................................................... 65 Table 80 - Directed retry indication ..................................... 66 Table 81 - Queue allowed when assign ................................ 67 Table 82 - Queue allowed when handover ............................ 68 Table 83 - Preemption allowed when assign ......................... 68 Table 84 - Preemption allowed when handover ..................... 69 Table 85 - When assigned forced handover .......................... 69 Table 86 - When handover forced handover ......................... 70 Table 87 - NO. of candidate cells for handover...................... 71 Table 88 - Fast average indication ...................................... 71 Table 89 - Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call ...... 72 Table 90 - Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond........ 73 Table 91 - Allowed call setup on FACCH ............................... 73 Table 92 - Allowed call reestablished on FACCH .................... 74 Table 93 - BCCH switch allowed.......................................... 75 Table 94 - SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed.................. 75 Table 95 - Minimal resource threshold ................................. 76 Table 96 - Interference averaging period ............................. 77 Table 97 - Interference Band Boundary ............................... 78 Table 98 - Radio link timeout on MS side ............................. 79 Table 99 - Radio link failure criterion ................................... 79
219
Table 100 - Radio link timeout on BSS side .......................... 80 Table 101 - Receiving level threshold .................................. 81 Table 102 - Receiving quality threshold ............................... 82 Table 103 - Radio link failure checking period ....................... 83 Table 104 - AMR Half Active Codec Set ................................ 85 Table 105 - Thresholds of AMR ........................................... 85 Table 106 - Hysteresis of AMR............................................ 86 Table 107 - Initial codec mode ........................................... 87 Table 108 - startmode codec mode ..................................... 88 Table 109 - Enable noise control......................................... 89 Table 110 - Reserved rate of eMLPP .................................... 90 Table 111 - Use cell EMLPP Threshold.................................. 91 Table 112 - AMR full Active Codec Set ................................. 92 Table 113 - Thresholds of AMR ........................................... 93 Table 114 - Hysteresis of AMR............................................ 94 Table 115 - Initial codec mode ........................................... 94 Table 116 - startmode codec mode ..................................... 95 Table 117 - Enable noise control......................................... 96 Table 118 - Protection period for access attempt................... 98 Table 119 - Multiband report indication................................ 99 Table 120 - Uplink discontinuous transmission .................... 101 Table 121 - RACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst ................................................................................... 103 Table 122 - Preprocessing indication ................................. 103 Table 123 - MAX resending times for physical information .... 104 Table 124 - Low priority of channel select priority ............... 105 Table 125 - High priority of channel select priority............... 106 Table 126 - Cell Support Encryption Mode .......................... 106 Table 127 - MR report time bitmap ................................... 107 Table 128 - SGSN ID ...................................................... 108 Table 129 - NSEI............................................................ 109 Table 130 - BVCI............................................................ 110 Table 131 - RAC ............................................................. 110 Table 132 - UPU Unit ...................................................... 111 Table 133 - DSP No. ....................................................... 112 Table 134 - Additional reselection parameter indication........ 113 Table 135 - SI13 sending position..................................... 114
220 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Appendix B Tables
Table 136 - RACOLOR ..................................................... 115 Table 137 - Minimal number of idle CS channel................... 116 Table 138 - Packet access priority threshold ....................... 117 Table 139 - Packet System Information Send Speed ............ 117 Table 140 - Overload report period on PRACH..................... 118 Table 141 - Link error counter .......................................... 119 Table 142 - PRACH receive signal level threshold ................ 119 Table 143 - Average measuring bursts number on PRACH .... 120 Table 144 - Buffer threshold of paging message.................. 121 Table 145 - Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period........................................................................... 122 Table 146 - PRACH overload threshold ratio ....................... 123 Table 147 - Is Support CCN Mode ..................................... 124 Table 148 - Is cell support system message status flow ....... 125 Table 149 - Allow SOLSA MS to access .............................. 125 Table 150 - CCCH SplitPgCycle support.............................. 126 Table 151 - Extended paging supported ............................. 127 Table 152 - PSI status supported ...................................... 127 Table 153 - Is the cell support extendable uplink TBF .......... 128 Table 154 - Uplink delay time........................................... 129 Table 155 - Downlink delay time....................................... 129 Table 156 - Extend uplink TBF time................................... 130 Table 157 - Interval number of GPRS TBF downlink's RRBP... 131 Table 158 - Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlinks RRBP . 131 Table 159 - Interval number of GPRS TBF uplinks ACK ........ 132 Table 160 - Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplinks ACK ...... 132 Table 161 - Uplink measure report period .......................... 133 Table 162 - Calculating period of load on PPCH ................... 133 Table 163 - PSI1 Send Period ........................................... 134 Table 164 - Selective granularity ...................................... 135 Table 165 - Support extended uplink dynamic allocation ...... 135 Table 166 - C/I (Sc)........................................................ 137 Table 167 - ARP (Sa) ...................................................... 137 Table 168 - THP ............................................................. 138 Table 169 - Support PS Queuing ....................................... 139 Table 170 - Max PS Queue Count...................................... 140 Table 171 - Support PS Preemption................................... 141
221
Table 172 - Support 3G NACC .......................................... 141 Table 173 - Support PS Prmp CS ...................................... 142 Table 174 - T3168 .......................................................... 143 Table 175 - T3192 .......................................................... 144 Table 176 - DRX mode holding time .................................. 145 Table 177 - MAX blocks transmission in each TS ................. 145 Table 178 - Packet control acknowledgment type ................ 146 Table 179 - Access burst type .......................................... 147 Table 180 - N3102 decrease step...................................... 147 Table 181 - N3102 increase step ...................................... 148 Table 182 - N3102 MAX................................................... 149 Table 183 - GPRS phone init coding .................................. 150 Table 184 - GPRS phones init code can be changed ............. 151 Table 185 - Packet Idle mode........................................... 152 Table 186 - Packet transmission mode............................... 153 Table 187 - Extended measurement report order ................ 153 Table 188 - Network control order .................................... 154 Table 189 - NC hold time in non-drx mode ......................... 155 Table 190 - Extended measurement report order ................ 156 Table 191 - Type of extended measurement report ............. 156 Table 192 - Report period of extended measurement........... 157 Table 193 - The Size of Test Report's Slip Window .............. 158 Table 194 - Allowed report number of the same cell in Slip Window ........................................................................ 159 Table 195 - Filter period in the packet idle mode................. 160 Table 196 - Filter period in packet transmission mode.......... 161 Table 197 - PSI4 sending mark ........................................ 162 Table 198 - Power control measurement channel ................ 162 Table 199 - Power control parameter................................. 163 Table 200 - Filter constant of power control........................ 164 Table 201 - Reselection offset .......................................... 165 Table 202 - Reselection offset 2........................................ 166 Table 203 - Reselection temporary offset ........................... 167 Table 204 - Reselection temporary offset 2 ........................ 168 Table 205 - Penalty time of cell reselection ........................ 168 Table 206 - Penalty time of cell reselection 2...................... 169 Table 207 - Interval of reselecting the same cell ................. 170
222 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Appendix B Tables
Table 208 - Interval of reselecting the same cell 2 .............. 171 Table 209 - Threshold of HSC signal level .......................... 171 Table 210 - Threshold of HSC signal level 2 ........................ 172 Table 211 - HCS Priority .................................................. 173 Table 212 - HCS Priority 2 ............................................... 173 Table 213 - C31 hysteresis .............................................. 174 Table 214 - C31 hysteresis 2............................................ 175 Table 215 - GPRS cell reselection hysteresis ....................... 175 Table 216 - GPRS cell reselection hysteresis 2 .................... 177 Table 217 - Routing reselection hysteresis ......................... 179 Table 218 - Routing reselection hysteresis 2....................... 179 Table 219 - Random access attempt permitted ................... 180 Table 220 - Random access attempt permitted 2................. 181 Table 221 - Usage of cell reselection offset......................... 182 Table 222 - Usage of cell reselection offset 2 ...................... 182 Table 223 - GPRS access minimum signal level ................... 183 Table 224 - GPRS access minimum signal level 2 ................ 184 Table 225 - Priority threshold ........................................... 185 Table 226 - HCS exist ..................................................... 185 Table 227 - HCS exist 2................................................... 186 Table 228 - GPRS MAX initial access signal level ................. 187 Table 229 - GPRS MAX initial access signal level 2............... 188 Table 230 - LSA ID ......................................................... 189 Table 231 - LSA Offset .................................................... 189 Table 232 - PAGCH reserved blocks................................... 191 Table 233 -PBCCH reserved blocks.................................... 192 Table 234 - PRACH reserved blocks................................... 193 Table 235 - Interval range of packet access attempt............ 193 Table 236 - Interval period of packet access attempt ........... 194 Table 237 - MAX Times of Attempt .................................... 195 Table 238 - Access Control Level ...................................... 196 Table 239 - Access Persist Level ....................................... 197 Table 240 - Support of subscriber occupying other preference channel......................................................................... 198 Table 241 - support of PS subscriber moving out of other preference channel ......................................................... 199
223
Table 242 - Support of CS subscriber moving Access Persist Level ............................................................................ 199 Table 243 - Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving ...... 200 Table 244 - Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving.. 201 Table 245 Table0-1 Support DTM..................................... 202 Table 246 - Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame................... 203 Table 247 - Support EGPRS packet channel request access program........................................................................ 203 Table 248 - Support uplink LA+IR quality control.............. 204 Table 249 - Take "Preemptivetrans bit" function ................. 204 Table 250 - Average filter period for uplink BEP .................. 205 Table 251 - Average filter period for downlink BEP .............. 206 Table 252 - EGPRS phone quality measure mode ................ 207 Table 253 - EGPRS phone init coding................................. 207 Table 254 - EGPRS phones init code can be changed ........... 208
224
Index
Abbreviations ................... 211 AMR Half Method Parameters 84 Basic Parameters 1................5 Basic Parameters 2.............. 19 Basic Parameters 3.............. 32 Cell Optional Parameters ...... 97 cell parameters..................... ii Cell Parameters ....................5 Cell Selection Parameters ..... 55 EDGE Property Parameters . 201 GPRS Basic Parameters ...... 108 GPRS Cell Optional Parameters .................................. 142 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters................... 164 GPRS Channel Parameters . 190 GPRS NC Survey Parameters .................................. 151 GPRS Other Parameters 2 .. 123 GPRS Power Control Parameters .................................. 159 GPRS Property 1 Parameters .................................. 112 GPRS Property 3 Parameters .................................. 136 Optional Parameters............ 48 Other Parameters ............. 102 Service Process Additional Parameters .................... 66 System Parameters ............. 76
225

Radio Parameter Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Radio Parameter Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ZXG10 BSS Base Station Subsystem

Radio Parameters Manual (Volume III)

ZTE CORPORATION Values Your Comments & Suggestions!

Your evaluation of this documentation

This page is intentionally blank.

Chapter1........................................................................... 1 Cell Object Parameters .................................................... 1

Handover Control Parameters ......................................... 53

UTRAN Handover Control Parameters ............................. 121

UTRAN Cell Control Parameters ..................................... 136

Chapter 2......................................................................235 Module Parameters......................................................235

This page is intentionally blank.

About This Manual

Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge

What Is in This Manual

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

TABLE 1 - M ANUAL SUMMARY

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

About This Manual

ZXG10 BSS (V6.20) Base Station Parameters Manual (Volume II)

Typeface Italics Quotes Bold

CAPS Constant width [] {} |

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Mouse Operation Conventions

TABLE 3 - MOUSE OPERATION CONVENTIONS

Typeface Click Double-click Right-click Drag

How to Get in Touch

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Cell Object Parameters

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

FIGURE 1 - TRX P AR AMETERS

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - Cell Object Parameters

Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference

Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces

TRX Type (TrxType)

Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference

TRX Type TrxType ---

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

In common cell, TRX Type configured as Normal TRX;

Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference

Management Object Value Range Unit

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - Cell Object Parameters

Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces

ZGF05-09-009 Enhancement on Channel Allocation ---

BCCH carrier frequency (IsBcchMark)

Static power level (PwRreduction)

Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces

Power level (PowerClass)

Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference

Management Object Value Range Unit Default Relevant Functions

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - Cell Object Parameters

Relevant parameters Related interfaces

Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference

Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces

Full name Abbreviation 3GPP Name 3GPP reference

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Description Management Object

Select the frequency point of this transceiver. TRX

Frequency band is GSM900: 1~124; Frequency 975~1023

Unit Default Relevant Functions Relevant parameters Related interfaces